•'!M ity ^gias , *^ ttlKt '1 THE LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LOS ANGELES w^ :tf: "Mi sr s'iSisf" fN / 'i^mim ix>i A NEW METHOD OP LEARNING WITH FACILITY THE LATIN TONGUE, Containing the Rules of Genders, Declensions, Preterites, Syntax, Quantity, and Latin Accents, Digested in the clearest and concisest Order. Enlarged with a variety of solid Remarks, necessary not only for a perfect Knowledge of the Latin Tongue, but likewise for understanding the best Authors : extracted from the ablest Writers on this Language. — With A TREATISE ON LATIN POETRY. TRANSLATED, AND IMPROVED, FROM THE FRENCH OF THE MESSIEURS DE PORT-ROYAL, By T. NUGENT, LL. D. A NEW EDITION, carefully Revised and Cm-rected. TO WHICH ARE ADDED, AN INDEX OF WORDS and a TABLE of MATTERS. IN TWO VOLUMES. VOL. II. LONDON: PRINTED FOR F. WINGRAVE, & J. COLLINGWOOD, STRAND. 1816. 1 '•I.e. HANSARD, rrinlrr, POtrborougli-court, FIcet- Mree.l , L ondon. r BOOK V. SYNTAX. General distrihulion of the whole Syntax, CONSTRUCTION, by the Greeks called Syntax, is nothing more than a fit composition and arrangement of the parts of speech. It is divided into simple or regular, and figurative or irregular. The regular is that which follows the natural order, and resem- bles greatly the manner of speaking in vulgar languages. The irregular or figurative is that which recedes from this com- mon usage, in order to follow some particular turns and forms of speakings, which have been studied by authors, for the sake of conciseness and elegance. Construction is divided into two sorts, one of concord, and the other of government. The syntax of concord is when the parts agree among them- selves in some thing, and is of four sorts. 1. That of the substantive with the adjective ; deus sanctus. ■ 2. That of the relative with the antecedent; deus qui est, 3. That of the nominative with the verb ; ego amo. And these concords ought to be attentively considered in dis- course ; for there is no adjective that hath not its substantive, nor relative that hath not its antecedent, nor verb that hath not it* nominative, either expressed or understood. 4. To these three concords we add another, which is that of the accusative with the infinitive ; me arnare : supplicem esse victori. But in Greekish phrases, the nominative is frequently joined to the infinitive. The syntax of government is when one part of speech governs another : which is done, either according to the force of some preposition expressed or understood, or according to the property and nature of each case. 1. The genitive of itself always denotes the possessor, or that one thing is said of another, as liber Petri, Peter's book : vidnus Achillis, the wound of Achilles, whether it be taken actively for the wound which he made, or passively for that which he received. Where- fore this case is always governed by another substantive, though frequently understood ; which has occasioned a multitude of false or useless rules, as hereafter we shall make appear. We are only to Vol. II. B observe 2067107 . 2 NEW METHOD. Book V. observe tliat In Greekish plirases, this case ma)' be governed also by the preposition Ik. Plcnus vini (subaud. In) as in French we say, p/ein dc via. 2. Tlic (hitive ahvays denotes that to which the thing or action refers. For wliicli reason there is neither noun nor verb to which it may not be joined in this sense. AJfinis regi ; communis omnibus; est mild ; peto tibi, sibi snpit. Sometimes there are even two da- tives ; do tibi j}ig)iori, &c. 3. The accusative either denotes the subject into wliich the action of the verb passeth, amat patrem ; or agrees with the infi- nitive, as above, No. 4-. or is governed by some preposition ex- pressed or understood, as after the verbs of teaching, moving, in the questions of time and measure, and others. Neither is there ever an accusative which does not depend on one of these three things. 4. The al)lative, according to Sanctius, ought rather to be called the case of the preposition, because it is ahvays governed by a preposition expressed or understood, as we shall demonstrate in the questions uui, qua, and unde, in the comparatives, in the verbs passive and others, and also in the ablatives which are called absolute. 5. As to the vocative, it is never governed by any thing, but only signifies the person to whom we speak, or with whom we converse ; for which reason it agrees sometimes with the verb in the second person, as Domine, miserere mei. These fundamental rules, being short and easy, may without any difficulty be retained, and give us a general idea of the whole syntax, which may likewise serve for all languages, in which the distinction of these six cases is in some measure necessary. And. this alone is almost sufficient for an introduction to those who begin with the reading of Latin books, or with a translation, pro- vided care be taken to ground them thoroughly therein, accord- ing to the explication we propose to give in the particular rules, wherein we shall conform as much as possible to the order above- mentioned. / ouli/ beg of the reader to remember •what has been often mentioned^ that the smaller type is not intended for children ; and therefore this stpitax may be considered as very short in regard to them, since it contains ordi/ 3G rtdcs that are easy to retain : and as very copious in regard to persons of riper age, because it points out not only the things t/iemselvoKy but IJiexme the reasons on xvhich each is founded^ * V - THE RULES OF SYNTAX. Rule I. Of the Adjective and Substantive. The adjective must always be made to agree in gender, number, and case, with its substantive. Examples. 'T^HE Adjective, whether noun, pronoun, or participle, hath always its substantive expressed or understood, with which it agrees in gender, num- ber and case, as vir bonus, a good man. lile philoso- phus, that philosopher. Parva scEpe scintilla contemta magnum Lvcitat incendium, ?u small spark neglected oftentimes stirs up a great fire. Amicus certus in re incertd cernitiir, a true friend is known in adversity. Stdlce inerrhiteSj the fixed stars. ANNOTATION. Sometimes the substantive is understood. Faucis tevolo (supple verbis) I want to speak a word to you. Brevi veniet (supple tem- pore,) he'll come quickly. Triste lupus stabzilis, Virg. Eel. 3. (supple negotium, thing,) the wolf is a vexatious thing to the sheep- folds. For the word negotium was antiently taken for res. See the figure of Ellipsis at the end of the remarks after syntax. When the adjective is put with two substantives, it should natu- rally agree with that which is the principal : as Semiramis puer ere- dila est. Just. Puteoli DiccearcJiia dicti. Porous Jcemina natus. And yet the adjective frequently agrees with the latter. Gens tmiversa Veneti appellati, Liv. Non omnis error stidtitia dicenda est, Cic. B 2 .. . ^Nuni' 4 NEW METHOD. Book V Numquam a-que ac viodo paupertas mihi onus visum est et misc' rum et grave, Ter. Ludi Jucre Alegulesin a ppel/al a, l^'iv. The same substantive may admit of different adjectives; Ut ncque privalam rem maritimam, tieque puhlicnm gcrere possimuSf Cic. Ad mnlnm domeslicam dhciplinam accesscrunt etiam poctce. Id. (Se- quitur ut de una rcliquii parte hoiiestatis dicendum sit. As for the adjectives, qualis, quantus, and such like, sec the annotation to the next rule. Rule II. Of the Relative and Antecedent. The relative qui, qua% quod, generallif agrees in gender and number with the antecedent. Examples. The relative qiu, qiue, quod, ought generally to be considered as between two cases of the same substan- tive expressed or understood. And then it agrees with the antecedent in gender and number, and with the word thatfollows also in case, as with its substantive by the preceding rule. Bellum tantum, quo bello omnes premebautur, Pompeius corifecit, Cic. Pompey put aa end to this war, which was burdensome to the several nations. Ultra eum locum, quo in loco Germani conse- derant, Caesar; beyond that place where the Germans were encamped. Non dejeci te ea' loco, quern in locum prohihui ne venires, Cic. 1 did not turn you out of a place, which I hindered you from coming into. Diem instare, quo die frumentum miliiibus mctiri oporteret, Caes. that the day was drawing near, on which the corn was to be measured out to the soldiers. ANNOTATION. Cscsar seems to have particularly affected this manner of express- ing himself, because he watL fond of perspicuity ; and we ought always to imitate him when there is any danger of ambiguity. Leodamanlem Cleophili discipulum, qui Clcophilus, &c. Apul. If he had not repeated qui Cleophiius^ the qui might have referred to t,eodamas as well as to Cleophilus. The followitig case understood. Except on this account we generally leave out the following case, because it is sufficiently expressed by the relative itself, which always supplies its place and represents it, as: cognosces ex its litteris, quas libertn tuo dcdi, Cic. instead of ex litteris, quas litkrast you will know by the letters which I gave your freed- nian. Of Syntax. S man. Odi. sapientem qui sibi non sapit ; as if it were qui sapiens., &c. I hate the wise man who is not wise for himself; and a great many others. The precedhig case understood. Sometimes we understand the antecedent likewise, and this in a twofold marmer. Either by putting the substantive after the relative, and of course in the same case as this relative, according to what we have above observed, as itemini a-edo, qui dives blanditur paupcri, instead of nemini diviti, qui dives, &c. And thus we account for these elegant turns of expression ; popido nt placerent, quasfccisset Jhbulas, Ter. for ut fahula; quas fabutas Jecisset, &c. Quibus de rebus ad me scripsisti, quoniam ipse venio, co- ram videbimus, Cic. lUi scripta quibus comcedia prisca viris est, Hor. Qicas credis esse has, non sunt vercs nuptice. Ter. for hce nupfice non sunt verce ; quas has nuptias credis esse viras, says Sanctius. Qnam ille triplicem putavit esse rationem, in quin que partes distribui debere reperitur, Cic. And such like forms of speaking, which become still more clear and mOre elegant, by adding a demonstra- tive pronoun to the second member ; as Quam quisque norit artem, in hoc se exerceat, Cic. Ad Ccesarem quam misi epistolnm, ejus exem- plumjiigit me turn tihi mittere, Id. Or by putting the substantive before the relative, but in such a manner as it shall supply only the place of the following word, on which account it agrees therewith in case ; but this is seldom used except by poets, as Urbem quam statuo vestra est, Virg. for ea urhs, quam urbem statuo, &c. Eunuchum quern dcdisti nobis, quas turbas dedit, Ter. for ille eunuchus, quern eunuchum dedisti nobis, &c. Nau- createm qtiem cotivenire volui, in navi non erat, Plaut. Which has puzzled a great many commentators. And it is by this rule we are to explain a great many difficult passages, as that of the Adelphi. Si id te mordet, sumtumjilii queni Jaciunt. For id supposeth negotium, and is there for sumtus : that is, Si id negotium te mordet, nempe sumtus, quern sumtumJiUi Jaciunt. Where we see likewise that there is an apposition understood of id negotiuyn with sumtus. The preceding and the following case both wide rst cod. It oftentimes happens that there is no substantive put either be- fore or after the relative; though it must always be understood, both as antecedent and subsequent. Est qui nee spernit : sunt quos juvat collegisse, Hor. instead of saying homo est, qui homo non spernit: sunt homines, quos homines Juvat, &c. Sunt quibus in satyra videor nimis acer. Id. for sunt homines, quibus hominibus, Szc. ' — — En dextrajidesque, Quem seciim patrios aiunt portare penates, ^n. 4. that is to say, En dextrajidesque hominis, quem hominem aiunt, &c. Scribo ad vos cum habeo quijerat, &c. Cic. Qjualis e&set nattcra montis, qui cognoscerent misit, Cses. and the like. '^ "= ^ The KEW METHOD. Book V T/ie relative betwivt two nouns of difftj^ent getiders. When we said that the relative was considered as betwixt two cases of the same noun, this is to be understood in the natural con- struction, for in the figurative the contrary sometimes happeneth. Thus because when the relative is followed by a substantive dif- fering in gender or number from the antecedent, the relative may agree with either the one or the other, whctlier one of them be a proper name or not ; if it agrees with the former, it shall follow the analogy of the Latin construction, and be placed as it were between the two cases of the same noun ; as Propius a terra Jovis Stella Jhtiir, quce (Jovis stella) Pha'cthoii dicitur, Cic. and in like manner, Nacti portum qui appellatur Ntjmphccum^ Ca;s. Hercidi sac rijicium fecit in loco, quern Pyram appellmity Liv. Darius ad eum locunif qiicm Amanicas Pylas vocaiU, pervenif. Curt. Twn ctiam eloquentem constat Juisse Bcijiioiiem Nasicam, qui est Corculum appellatus, Cic. But if it agrees with the latter, which seems more elegant and more usual, it shall follow the Greek construction, and then it will not be placed between the two cases of the same noun ; as Animal frovidiim et sagax qucm vocamus hominem, Cic. Pompeius, quod im- perii Romani decus ct ornamentumj'uit, Id. Qiiamobrem, hoc qiiidem constat ut opinorj bonis inter bonos quasi necessariam benevolentiam esse, qui est amicitice fons h naturci constitutus. Id. Ad eum locum guce appellatur Pharsalia, applicuit, Caes. Globus quern in templo hoc medium vides, quce terra dicitur, Cic. Concilia ccetmque homi- num jure sociali, quce civitates appelluntur. Id. Career ille qui est ^ Dionijsio Jactus Syracusis, quce Lalumia vocantur, Id. Gladiatores, quam sibi ille maximam manum J'ore putaxnt, in potestate vestrd con- tinebuntur, Id. Which should be considered as an Hellenism, whereof we shall treat at the end of the figures. The relative agreeing with a gender or number un- derstood. Sometimes we make the relative agree with a gender or a num- ber understood, and not with the antecedent expressed. Daret ut calenis J'atcde monstrum, quce generosius perire qncerens, kc. Hor. Where the relative quce is in the feminine, because it refers to Cleopatra of whom he is speaking, and not to the gender of monstrum, which is neuter. Si tempus est ullum jure hominis necandi, quce multa sunt, Cic. where he makes the reference to tempora. Soli virtute prcediti, quod est proprium divitiarum, contenti sunt, Cic. And sometimes it agrees even with the substantive derived from the sense of the preceding period, Inter alia prodigia etiam came ptuit, quern imbrem, &c. Liv. See the figure Syllepsis in the re- marks. Of O F S Y N T A X. 7 Of those Nouns which are called relatives of quantity or quality. Tantus, quantus ; talis, qualis ; tot, guot, have only a relation in the sense, the same as patei- and Jilius ; and therefore are mere adjectives, which belong rather to the preceding rule than to this. Yet these nouns sometimes follow the nature of the relative, and therefore conform likewise to the construction thereof. As, In hoc autem rnaximo criidelisumoque bello, quale bellum nulla un- quam barbaria cum sua genie gessit, quo hi bello lex Itcec Juit a Len- tulo constituta, Cic. Catil. 3. where quale bellum is the same as if he had said quod tale bellum; and is the same construction as if he had afterwards said quo in bello, repeating the antecedent in both places, according to what hath been already observed. Except in this case, these nouns follow simply the nature of the other adjectives, agreeing with their substantive, which is generally that which followeth, as Dixi de te quce fotui tantd contentione, .quantum est Jorum, tanto clamore consensuque jwpuli ut. Sec. Though Horace sometimes, in imitation of the Greeks, makes it agree with the antecedent : Sed incitat me pectus, et mammce putrcs Equina quales ubeia, Epod. Od. 8. Instead of qualia sunt ubera equina. And there is no doubt, adds yossius, but he might have also said with propriety, Mamma: quanta ubera equina. However this is not to be imitated. Rule III. Of the Case which the Verb requires before it. 1. Every va^h hath a nominative case before it, 2. Except it he of the infinitive mood, and then it is preceded by an accusative. Examples. 1. Every verb of a finite mood, requireth before it a nominative of the same number as itself, either ex- pressed or understood. Petrus fiet, Peter weepeth. Tu doces, nos discimus, thou teachest, we learn. Ob- sequium amicos, Veritas odium parit, Ter. compliance begets friends, and truth enemies. Non te hoc pudet? are not you ashamed of this ? and in all these examples the nominative is expressed. But when we say : legit, he reads : audimus, we liear ; aiunt^ ferunt, it is said, or they say : pluit, it rains : 8 NEW METHOD. Book V. rains : the nominative is understood ; namely, illc, nos, homines^ and pliivia, or ccelian, or Dens. Oftentimes an infinitive or a whole period sup- pHeth the place of the nominative. Scire tuum mliil est, your knowledge is nothing'. I)igenuas didicisse arles emollit mores, Ovid, to learn the liberal arts, polishes the manners. Deprchendi miseruni est, it is a sad thing* to be caught, Docto et erudtto huniini vivere est cogitdre, Cic. to think is the life of a man of learning. ANNOTATION. In the first and second person they do not generally express the nominative, except it be to denote some dift'erence of action or aft'ection. Tii ludis, ego siiideo. Tu viihim servas, ego Inudo ruris amceni rivos, Hor. Or to signify some emphasis or particular force. Tu audes ista loqui? Cantaudo tu illmn? supple, vicisti, Virg. Because it is always easy to understand it, as there can be no other than ego and tu. Of the Infinitive. 2. The infinitive requirethbefore it an accusative, which is resolved by (/iwd, ut, ne, or qidn, and generally rendered by the particle that. Sc'io Petrurnjlerc, id est, quod Fetrus flet, I know that Peter weeps. Volo vos bene sperdre et confidere, i.e. ut bene spcretis and coiijl- ddlis, 1 am willing that you should hope and confide. Proliibuerunt eum e.vire, i. e. ne ediret, they hindered him from going out. A'Ofi duhitat Cln^istum id diAsse^ i. e. quin diserit : he does not doubt that (Jhrist said this. ANNOTATION. 1. When a verb is in the infinitive after another verb, it is gene- rally the same construction as this here, because \vc must under- stand its accusative, and particularly one or other of these pronouns, one, se, iltitm : stniui pr<)ficisci, for me proficisci : vegat velte, for se velle : which appears plainly from the antients having often used it thus. Hic vocem loquentis me audit e visus stun, Plant. Qiue sese optavit par ere hic divitias, Ter. Omnes Iiomincs qui sese j^rcestarc student cateris animantibus, Sal. 2. In Greek the infinitive may agree with the nominative, which the Latins have sometimes imitated, as Ovid, Heu pius Apneas erijmisse J'enint, for ^;j«h? JEneam. And the lik'C. 3. There are some who "ntirely reject the quM by which we resolve the accusative befoie the infinitive, insisting that it ought never Of Syntax. q never to be put for the Greek on. But we shall take farther notice of this, in the remarks, and in the chapter of adverbs. 4. The particle ut is used only after verbs of asking, fearing, commanding, or those which express desire and alfection : as jiibeOi volo, euro, laboro ; or which signify some event, aSj/iV, cvenity contingitf &c. .< pBSERVATION,S IN REGARD TO THE NEXT RuLE. We see naturally enough that two singulars are equivalent to a plural, and therefore that two substan- tives in the singular require the adjective, or the noun which is joined to them by apposition, in the plural ; as Julius (5' Octdvius imperatores fortissimi, Julius and Octavius, most valiant emperors. Remus et Romulus fratres, Remus and Ronmlus, brothers. Hence the verb must be put in the plural after two nominatives singular. KcclesicE duo sy'dera Augustinus S^ Hierony- mus hcE'reses debelldrunt, St. Austin and St. Jerome, two stars of the Church, overthrew heresies. But if the two singulars are of different genders, or of different person, then you are to observe the fol- lowing rule. Rule IV. Of the difference of Genders and Persons. 1. When substantives of different genders or persons are joined^ the noblest is to be pre- ferred to that which is least so. 2. But the reference is often made to the latter substantive ; or things without life have the adjective in the neuter. Examples. 1. When two substantives of different genders or different persons meet, then the adjective or the re- lative being in the plural, agrees with the noblest gender, and the verb (being also in the, plural) agrees with the noblest person. The first person is more noble than the second, and the second than the third. Ego tuque sumus Chris- tiani, you and I are Christians. Tu paterque vullis, you and your father are willing. The 10 NEW METHOD. Book V. The masculine is more noble than the other two genders. Tu, sorbrqut honi estis, (speaking of a boy) you and your sister are good. Pater ^ mater mortui^ Tcr. my Father and motlier are dead. Decern ingenui decemque I'/rg'uies ad id sacrijicium adhibiti ; Liv. they pitched upon ten free-born youths, and on ten young maids to perform this sacrifice. But if there happens to be'ti difference in tlie sub- stantives, in regard to the number, still the adjective must be made to agree with the noblest gender, put- ting it always in the plural ; as Siiscepisti omis grave Atlienarum 8^ Cratippij ad quos cum projectus sis-, &c. Cic. you undertook great matters in gomg to Athens, and under the care of the philosopher Cratippus. 2. Oftentimes the reference is made to the latter substantive, either in regard to the verb, or to the ad- jective, or to the gender, or to the number, or even to the person; as Ego ^' Cicero meusjhgitabit, Cic. my son Cicero and 1 will ask. SenatusS^et C. Fabricius perfugam Pyrrho dedit, Cic. The senate and Fabri- cius delivered up the traitor into the hands of Pyr- rhus. Utrum vos an Cartliaginhises principes orbis ter~ varum videantur, Liv. whether you or the Carthagi- nians appear masters of the world. Legates, wrtesque e.vpectandas, Liv. that it was proper to wait for the return of the ambassadors, and the answer of the oracle. Toti sit prov'incia' cognitum, tibi omnium quibus pncsis, saliitem^ liberos,J'amam,Jortimas esse cliarissimaSy Cic. let it be known over the whole province that the liveS; the children, the honour, and property of those over whom you preside, are most dear to you. Suciis g. j,^gQ rccepto, Virg. having recovered our comrades and our king. When the substantives are things without life, the adjective is frequently put in the neuter, unless we chuse to make it agree with the latter, in the manner as above ; as Divitice, dec us, ^^ gloria in oculis sit a sunt ; Sal. riches, honour, and glory, are things ex- posed to public view. Sometimes, however, inanimate things conform to the O F S Y N T A X. ] 1 the general rule, of referring to the noblest gender. Agros villasque intactos sinebat, Tac. he spared the lands and houses. ANNOTATION. JVIietherthefennnine ought to be prefer red to the neuter. Here a question arises, whether the feminine, supposing it be not the last, ought to be preferred to the neuter gender, just as the mascuUne is generally preferred to the other two. Grammarians are divided upon this point. Linacer and Alvarez say not, and that we ought to prefer the neater to the feminine. Vossius is of the same way of thinking in his lesser grammar, though he has established the contrary in his larger work de Arte Grammatical when he treats of construction. The surest way of proceeding in this matter, is to distinguish betwixt things animate and inanimate. For in things animate, one would think that we ought rather to follow the feminine, and to say for instance. Uxor 3f mancipium salvcB : anciUa et jumenta rejjertcB, according to the opinion of Vossius. Though as Linacer and Alvarez observe, it is oftentimes more proper to make use of a periphrasis, and to say for example, Lucretia castissima Jicit, qua virtute ejus etiam mancipium fioruit, and not Lucretia 8^- ejus iuaiici- piumjiierunt castce. In regard to things inanimate, generally speaking, the adjective ought either to agree with the latter substantive, or to be put in the neuter gender. Yet it would not be an error to do other- wise, and to prefer the feminine to the neuter, since in Lucretius we find, Leges et plebis-scita coactcc, as Priscian himself acknow- ledges. Cicero likewise at the end of his 2d book de Nat. Quid de vitibus olivetisque dicam, quarum uberrimifructus, &c. Of the reason of these governments, with some particular remarks o)i the construction of inanimate things. The reason of these governments depends on the knowledge of the figures, of which we shall treat hereafter. When the verb or the adjective is put in the plural, it is com- monly a Syllepsis, where the construction is regulated by the sen^e, and not by the words. If we refer to the latter only, it is a Zeugma. But if we put it in the neuter, it is an Ellipsis, because we understand Negotia, things. Thus, Deciis S; gloria in ocidis sita sunt, Sal. that is, sunt tiegotia sita, are things exposed to pub- lic view. And this figure may also take place, when only one of the things is inanimate. Deledabatur cereo Junali ^' tibicine, quce frivatus sibi sumpserat, Cic. Though we, may express it otherwise, by re- ferring it to the noblest gender. As Jane-tfac ccternos phcem., pacisque miyiistros. Propter summam <^- doctoris autoritatem 4' urbis, quorum alter tc jscientia augere potest, altera ejccjnjjlis. Cic. But they used this construction also, in speaking of the passions ^nd movements of the soul ; as Labor et voluptas dissimiliima, Liv. X 12 N E W M E T II O D. Book V. I)-a et avar'Uia imperlo potcntiora, Id. Huic ah adolescenlia bclla in- testinUf cccdes, rapiiice, discordiu civilis, grata fuere., Sal. in Catil. And sometimes in the construction of animate things, as in So- linus, Puli/pus 4' chamcclcon glabra sunt. In Lucrct. book 3. Sic anima at que animus, qiiamvis Integra, recens in corpus cunt. And in Livy, Gens cui natura corpora animosque magis magna quhn Jirma dedil. And sometimes even in referring to a thing that includes a masculine and a neuter, they are made to agree with the neuter, as Ibi capta armatorum duo miUia quadringenti, Liv. And what is most extraordinary, is their doing it even when the masculine is nearest, as Tria millia quadringenti casa, Liv. IVhether we ought alzvays to name oursekes the first in Latin, and in zvhat manner we ought to do it in French. In Latin we ought always to follow the order and dignity of the persons in speaking, so that we should say ego et iu, and not tu S)' ego. Yet there are examples of the contrary, for Livy hath, pater 8^ ego fr aire sque r)iei, pro vobis arma tidimus, lib. 7. Dec. 4. vVhich shews that Nebrissensis had not such mighty reason for finding fault with this phrase of Scripture, Pater tints 4" ^go dolentes qucerebamus le, Luc. 2. But in French it would be uncivil to do so, or to say moi Sf vons, I and you; for we ought always to say voics S^ moi, ou and I ; lui S^- moi, he and I ; the natural modesty of this anguage not permitting the French to name themselves the first, Hence nobody will do it even in Latin, or say for instance, ego tuque, for fear of appearing uncivil. And it is true that in prudence we ought to avoid it, if we foresee that persons de- serving of respect are likely to be offended at it, though there is no reason. This should be extended even to the titles and superscriptions of letters, where the custom of the Romans was, that he who spoke, always placed himself the first, though he was equal or even infe- rior in station. Curius Ciceroni, S. D. Cicero Cwsari iwperatori, S. D. &c. Which Budeus, Erasmus, and other literati ot the last .century were not afraid to imitate, in writing even to princes, sovereigns, and crowned heads. Rule V. Of Verbs that have the same case after as before them. 1. Everij verb that denotes the union or con- nexion of words., hath the same case before as after it, as Deus est asternus. 2. Scit nos esse nialos. 3. Licet esse bonis, licet esse bonos. E X A M P L E S. Verbs that denote only the union and connexion of words, i Of Syntax. 13 words, or the relation of terms to each other, make no alteration in the government; for which reason they require the same case after as before them, as in the.preceding rules. De.us est (zUrnuSy God is eternal. Amantium irce amor'is redintegrat'io est. The faUingout of lovers is the renewal of love. O'bviiisjit ei Clodius, Clodius went out to meet him. Septem dicuniur fiiisse uno thnpor^e. qui sapientes &; haherentiir 8^ mcarentur, Cic. it is said that there were seven men at one time, who were entitled and esteemed as wise men. Ut hoc latrocinium potius quam bellum iiominaretur, Cic. that it should be called rather a pyratical depredation than a war. Cur ergo poHa salutor ? Hor. why then am I called a poet ? Verbs neuter have sometimes the same force : Terra manet immobilis, the earth remains immoveable. Pe~ trus rediit h-'atus, Peter returned in a passion. Vhiio in SenatumfrequenSj 1 go often to the senate house. And the like. If after these verbs there comes a genitive, still there is the same case after as before them, but the same noun is also understood. Hie liber est Petri, this is Peter's book ; that is, Hie liber, est liber Petri, ^, The infinitives of all these verbs require likewise an accusative after them, when there is one before them. Deus scit nos esse malos, God knows that we are wicked, because fnalos refers to nos. Cupio me esse dementem, I desire to be merciful. But in this there is no manner of difficulty. 3. The difficulty is, when these infinitives, such as, esse, dici, haberi,fieri, and the like, have not their na- tural accusative before them. Because if, for ex- ample, there is a dative before, either expressed or understood, we may put one also after. Licet esse bonis, or licet nobis esse bonis, it is lawful for us to be good. And if we understand an accusative before, as the analogy of the Latin tongue requireth, we may say likewise, licet esse bonos, that is, nos esse bonos ; just as Cicero said, Quibus abunddntem licet esse mistrrimum^ amidst the plenty of which one may be very miserable. Medios esse jam non licebit, it will be no longer allowed us to remain neuter. But U NEW METHOD. Book V. J3ut if you say, licet nobis esse honos ; the strength of tlie phrase will be still, licet nobis nos esse bo)ius. In like manner, Cf'.pio did doctum, that is, me did doctum. And Ciipio did doclus, that is, ego doctiis; I am desirous of being called a learned man. ANNOTATION. Hence we may here take notice of three very different forms of speaking: Licet esse bonis, licet esse bonos, (or else licet nobis esse Svfiis, ami licet nos esse bonos, which are the same as the foregoing) and licet nobis esse bonos. In like manner Cupio did doctus, and C7<- pio did doctum, where we see that in the former government the noun following the infinitive refers to the case of the first verb, and agrees with it, as here, doctus with ego. Non tibi vacat esse guieto : quieto with tibi, &c. which ii quite a Greek plirase, be- cause the Greek language hath this in particular, that having made a case go before, it generally draws what follows after it : hence in Horace we find, Patiens vocari Cccsaris tdtor, instead of pattens te vocari ultorem, and in another place, Uxor invicti Joris esse nescis, instead oi te esse uxorem ; and Lucan, Tutumque putaxit jam bonus esse Socer. And Ovid, Acceptum rcfcro xersibus esse no- cens ; and Vi/gil, even \vithout expressing the infinitive, seyisit me- dios dclapsiis in ]io.;tes, instead of se esse delapsnm. Whereas in these other phrases, in which an accusative is made to follow ; Licet esse beatos. Expedit vobis esse bonos. Utor amico citpienti Jieii j)roburd. Si civi Romano licet esse Gaditanum, Cic. Quibiis liccl esse fortunatissiynos, Cacs. ; this accusative refers to the infinitive, and to the accusative which is understood before it (though it is not always neccssar}'^ to express it, as Valla pretends) and not to the other verb. And this last expression would be more natural to the Latin tongue, if custom had not introduced the other, perliaps to avoid obscurity, as when I say, Cnpio fieri doctus, there can be no ambiguity; but when I say Cujno fieri doctum, it is dubious whether I mean me or nliam ; unless 1 expressly mark the accusative before, as Me fieri doctum, and then this whole phrase me fieri ductum, supplies the case or the government of the pre- ceding verb : Cupio hoc, ncmpe me fieri doctum. And as often as there are two different meanings in u sentence, that is, two diffe- rent members, the second of which is put by one of these infini- tives, there can never be more than one accusative along with it. Fuit magni animi, non esse supplicem victori, Cic. Quo libi Tulle, fieri tribunum, Hor. Mild vidctur, ad beate vivendmn satis posse virtutem. Which ought always to be resolved by the article /loc, as Scaliger observeth ; Hoc f ncmpe, non esse supplicem victori J Jicit viagni animi. And in like manner the rest. Rule VI. Of Two Substantives of the same or of different sense. 1 . When trio substantives arc joined, and signify ihe O F S YN TA X. 15 the same things they are put in the same case, as urbs Roma. 2. But if they have a different meaning, as amor virtutis, then the second is put in the genitive. Examples. When there are two substantives that refer to the same thing, they are put in the same case, u?'bs Roma, the city of" Rome ; as much as to say Rome the city, and this is what they call apposition. Sometimes the gender and number are different, though the case be ahke. Tidliola delicice nostrce, TulHola my whole delight. Urhs AthencE, the city of Athens. Q. Hortensius, lumen &; ornamentum reipuhlicce.^ Cic. Hortensius, the glory and ornament of the re- public. ANNOTATION. if in the apposition, the substantive, which is the first and chief in the order of nature, signifies an animate thing, the adjective or verb will agree with it. Cum duojidmina nostri imperii Cn.Sf Pub. Scipiunes extincti occidissent, Cic. Tidlia delicice nostra timm munus- culu77ijlagitat, Cic. Passer delicicc mecc piiellcc, qincum ludere^ quern siiiu tenere solet, Catul. Primum sio-num aries Marti assitantivc, govern also the case of their verb, as we shall shew in the remarks. Rule VII. Of some Particles that require a genitive. Tunc, ubi, sat, instar, ec^, postridic, ergo, and pridie, require a genitive. Examples. Several adverbs govern a genitive. Those of time. Tunc temporis, at that time, Posti^idie absolutionis, the day after absolution. Pridie hujus diei, the day before. But observe that we say also pridie nonas, the day before the nones : and such like, where the accusative is governed by anle, un- derstood, Tiiose of place. Ubi terr arum, in what part of the earth. Unde gentium, from what nation. Nusquani gentium, no where. Longe gentium, far from hence, Ed co?isuetudinis adducia res esty the thing becan.e so customary. Hue malbrum centum est, they came to such a pitch of misery. Those of quantity. Satfautorum, partisans enough. A'ffatim materice, plenty of matter. A'mpliiis liber b- rum, more children. We say also Instar moniis, like a mountain. I'Uius ergo, for his sake. And such like. ANNOTATION. The reason why the genitive is put after these particles, is because they are taken as nouns substantive : for instar is a noun which signifies resemblance ; as exemplar* Quautum instar in illo est, Virg. Farvunt & OfSyntax. 19 Parvum instar, Liv. See the HeterocHtes, p. 167. Ergo comes from the Greek ablative i^y(a. Pridie and pustridie come from the ablative die : and the others are also taken as substantives. Tunc temporis : just as in French we should say, tors du siege de la Rochelle, And the like. In regard to adverbs of quantity, It may be said that if they come from a noun adjective, they always retain its nature, and suppose negotium for ther substantive, multum cibi, that is, midtum 7iegotium cibi. And then negotium cibi will be put only for cibus : just as Phaedrus has made use of res cibi, merely to signify yboc?. Otherwise it will be an imitation of the Greeks, by understanding their preposition, jMrum vini, that is, Ik vini, as in French we say, un peu de vin. But we shall examine this more particularly in the remarks, where we treat of the Adverbs. Rule VIII. Of Nouns of Property, Blame, or Praise. Noims signifying property, blame, or praise, are put either in the ablative or in the genitive^ Examples. The noun implying property, blame or shame, as well as praise, is put in the genitive or in the ablative. Puer ingeiiui vultus, a boy of a comely countenance. Vir nidximi duimi, a man of very great courage. Homo prcestdnti prude ntid, a man of excellent wisdom. Eu- nuchus tiomine Photinus, Hir. an eunuch named Pho- tinus. Mulier atate mtegrd, Ter. a woman in the flower of life. ANNOTATION. When there is a genitive, it is no more than the construction of two substantives : for Vir maximi aninii, is vir governing animu When there is an ablative, it is governed by a preposition under- stood : for Mulier cetate infdgra, implies in estate integrd. Photinus nomine, implies ex nomine. For which reason the ancients made . use of the preposition also ; for as in Terence we read, Homo anti' qua virtiite acjide : so in Plautus we find, AmicusJiduSy and cum an' tiqua fide : and in another place, Microtrogus nomine ex vero vocor. And in almost all the modern languages the preposition is added; thus in French, Un homme de grande sagesse, a man of great wisdom^ as much as to say, De prcestanti prude ntid : where it is observable that the French prepositions inform us almost in every govern- ment where they are to be understood in Latin. Cicero has sometimes joined these two governments of the geni- tive and the ablative. Lentulum eximid spe, summcB virtutis adoles- centem. And we shall hereafter see, that whatever governs one of these cases, generally speaking governs also the other. c 2 Rule ^20 NEW M E T H O D. Book V. Rule IX. Of Nouns Adjectives derived from Verbs. 1. The adjectives called verbal, govern a geni- tive, as tenax ira;. 2. To which we must join those iMch signify an affection of the mind, as conscius sceleris : 3. And some others which govern a genitive in imitation of the Greek. Examples. A great many adjectives require a genitive after them. 1. Those derived from verbs, as tejia.v ircc, whose anger is lasting. Amans virtutis, a lover of virtue. Fuga.v vitii, who shuns vice. P aliens laboris, who endures labour. A'vidus novitatis, greed}^ of novel- ty. • A'ppetens aluni, covetous of what belongs to others. Religidmim cokntes^ who have a regard for religion. 2. Those which denote some care, affection, desire, knowledge, ignorance, guilt, or such like tilings which relate to the mind or to consciousness : as Conscius ^ceteris, Cic. conscious of guilt. A'mvius gloria', Liv. anxious after glory. Stcurus damni, who fears no hurt. Timidus procellct, afraid of a storm. Peritiis luusiccBy skilled in music. Alusicoruni pcrstudiosus, Cic. who is very fond of music. Rudis omnium rcrum^ Cic. igno- rant in every thing. Mihi verb fatigalibnis hesterncs etimnnuncsauciodaveniam, Apul. excuse a person who is still fatigued after yesterday's labour. Tnsolens in- f amice, Cic. unaccustomed to receive affronts. 3. There are many others which in imitation of the Greek govern a genitive, especially in poetry. Lassus viarum, tired of the journey. Felix ac libera leguniy Luc. happy and exempt from laws. Vini somnique benignus, who has drunk heartily and slept soundly. Miror te purgatum illius morbi, Hor. I am surprised at 3'our being cured of that distemper. Pauper argentic Hor. poor in cash, and the like, which must be learnt by the use of authors. But you should take care not to employ any of these phrases, till you have seen them in pure authors. For there are a multitude of Of Syntax. gl them not only in Tacitus (without mentioning the poets), but hkewise in Sallust and Livy, which ought not to be imitated. ANNOTATION. , Difference hetxveen the participle and the rerbal noun. The participle always denotes some time ; but the noun verbal denotes no time. Thus Amans virtutem, a man who actually loves virtue ; and amans virtutis, he who is a lover of virtue ; that is who habitually loves it, so that amans is then the same as amator. Thus the participle generally becomes a noun by taking the genitive, when the verb hath no supine from whence may be formed another noun in OR, as indigens jjecunicF, and the like, though it may also become a noun without that, and even in the preter tense, as in Sallust, Alieni appetens, prqfusus sui, for prqfusory &c. Hence we frequently say studentes for studiosi or scholastici : medeiites for medici : Nihil artes posse medentum. And the like. Cause of the goxernment of these verbal nouns. And hereby the cause of this government is obvious, since it is nothing more than the government of two substantives, for Amans virtutis^ is put instead of Amator virtutis : which happens also to other adjectives ; Amicus 2^o-tris. Veritatis amicissimus. Cic. Affinis regis. Domini similis es, Ter. Catilince similes, Cic. JEqualis, par, ajffinis, cognatuSf propinquus ejus, just as we say Frater ejus. As to the others which we have here hinted at, they take the genitive rather in imitation of the Greeks, who in putting this case here understand Itc, of: inax, causa, or xiqiy, gratia; for timidus procellcB, is as much as to say, causa procellce j and the rest in the like manner. Of the active verbals in Bundus. The verbal nouns in Bundus govern an accusative, as well as the verb from which they are derived; hence we say, Populahun- dus agros, vitabundus castra ; just as we say populari agros, vitare castra, and the rest in the same manner. For which reason Scioppius will have it that they are participles, though with very little foun- dation, since they do not follow the analogy of the others : and the reason of participles bearing that name, is not because they govern the case of the verb, for this is common also to the verbal substantives; but because being nouns, they include sometime in their signification, as the verb does. Rule X. Of affective Verbs. 1. Affective verbs require a genitive after them, as miserere fratris ; hie dnimi pendet. 2. But £2 NEW METHOD. Book V. 2. But miscror takes an accusative, 3. And some others have moreover an ablative. Examples. "We place this rule here, because of the relation which these verbs have to the nouns of the preceding rule. 1. The pathetic or affective verbs, that is, which express souie passion or affection of the soul, some care or disposition of the mind, or some such thing, re- quire after them a genitive. Miserere J'ratris, have pity on m}^ brother. Hie ('mimi pemkt, this man is in doubt, or suspense. Salage rerum iuarum, mind your own aff^'airs. Vereri alicujus, Ter. to stand in awe of some person. Lcetari' malurum^ Virg. to rejoice at misfortunes. 2. Nevertheless miseror, aris, governs an accusa- tive. Miserarifortunaju alicujus, to pity a person's misery. 3. There are also some more verbs of this sort, which take after them not only a genitive, but like- wise an ablative. Tiiscrucior animi or animo, I am trou- bled in mind. Animi se angebat, Ter. he tormented himself inwardly, /higor animo, I am troubled in mind, Cic. A'nimi pendeo, Cic. A'nimis pcndemus, Id. we are in doubt. Desipcre mentis, Plant. Desipere animo, (more usual) to doat. Fall\ animi, Lucr. Falli animo, (more usual) to be mistaken, to be deceived. Heretofore they used also to say Fastidire alicujus, Plant, to slight a person ; but now it more frequently governs an accusative. ANNOTATION. Hereto we may refer the verbs of desire, of admiration, of re- pelling, taking care, neglecting, ceasing, delivering, partaking, and others which we meet with in the genitive, from an imitation of the (ireeks, who use this government on a thousand occasions, because of their prepositions which govern this case, and which they frequently suppose without expressing them. But since we have no such prepositions in Latin, to account for this government : if there he a genitive, wc may understand ano- ther general noun that governs it. Discrucior animi, supple, do- lorc. Of Syntax. - 23 lore^ cura, or cogitatione, mente, &c. as Plautus has expressed it, Nullum mentem animihaheo. If there be an ablative, we understand in, de, ah : as much as to say, Discrucior in animo j pendemiis ab animis, &c. As to the others, Miserere fratris, we may understand yycfm causa : have pity and compassion for my brother. Rule XI. O^ sum, refert, and interest. 1. Sum, refert, and interest, signifying posses- sio?i, property, or duty, require a genitive. 2. l^ut retert ^?irf interest, instead of the geni- tive of the pronoun possessive, have mea, tua, sua, cuja, nostra, vestra. S. On the contrary EST takes the nominative jieuter of those very pronouns, as meum est, tuum est, &c. Examples. 1. The verb sum, with these two refe)^t a.ndinfe7^esf , signifying duty, possession, or property, require a ge- nitive, Su7?i ejus opiiiiSnis, 1 am of that opinion. Nul- lius sum consilii, Ter. I am at a loss what to determine. Tu non es Christi, you are not a disciple of Christ. Est *vei^i Christidni coniempsisse divitias, it is^the duty of a true Christian to despise riches. Tantce molis erat Ro- manam condere gentem, Virg. of such importance was it to lay the foundation of the Roman nation. O'mnium refert, it is every body's concern. Tnterest reipubliccSf it concerns the commonwealth. 2. Refert and mtei^est, besides the genitive of the pronouns possessive, take these cases. Nostra refert, it behoves us. Et tud ^ med maxlme interest te recle 'vaUre, Cic. your health is of great consequence both _ to yourself and to me. Hoc illorum magis quamsudre- tulisse mdttur, Sal. this seems to have concerned them more than him. Cujd interest, Cic. who is chiefly concerned in it. 3. Est on the contrary, instead of the genitive, takes the nominative neuter of those very pronouns. Meum est hocfacere: it is my business to do this. Nostrum est pati, it belongs to us to suffer. Si membria forte defe- 24 N E W M E T H O D. Book V. dcfccerif, iuum est ut snggcras, if my mcniory slioulrl fail me, it is your business to put me in mind. Cujum peciis (sup. est) an JMtlibcti? Virg. whose flock is this ? is it Mcithaiis's? ANNOTATION. The two goveroraents of the genitive and the pronoun are sometimes elegantly used, in nouns of price. lUiid mca mogni interest. And in proper names, non meri Cccsaris interest. But in regard to the rest, though we may say likewise, Interest tua orato- ris, refert mca inilitis ; yet it is better to make use of the relative, as in Terence, Id meA minima refert qui snm naiu maxivius. See above, p. 17. Now when we put a genitive here, , another noun is always un- derstood. Sum ejus oplnionis, sup. vir, philosop/nts, doctor. Non est regis, sup. ofjlcium : and the like. As to rejert and interest, Sanctius and Scioppius, after Scaliger and Donatus, will Iiave it that these cases, mea., Inn, sua, are neu- ter accusatives, and therefore that men inter est, ha?, much, as to say, est inter men negotia. And in regard to Refeut, they pretend that to say mea refert, is much the same as when we say, hoc rem twnn minimt' rejert, where it intirely retains the force of the verb active. On the contrary Vossius, after L. Valla, Saturnius, and Priscian, says that these are feminine ablatives, which Priscian resolves by in ; interest or refert mea for in re mea : just as we say in re mi a est in the same sense ; that concerns me. For Sanctius's assertion, that it is not good Latin to say, hoc est in re mea, has more boldness than truth, since beside the passage of Plautus, Ufrumre veniat, nee ne, nihil in re est mca, Terence has, Si in re est utrique ut Jiant, arcessi jube, in Andr. Act 3. Sc. 3. It is true others read in rem : but thus it is quoted by Linacer, and marked in the manuscripts which Rivius and Vossius made use of. But one would think that this question may be solved by these words, which we find in tlie ablative in the following verses: J\js me iiidotatis modo Putr()cinarifi)rtnssc arbitramini : Etiam dotatis saleo. C. Quid nostra? Ph. Nihil. Tcr. in Phor. where the verse would be good for nothing, unless nostra was in the ablative. Which is further illustrated l)y this verse of Plautus, who wilh mea understands vrafia. Alea isiuc nihil rejert, tua refert gratia. And therefore vwa refert, mea interest, is, properly speaking, mea causa, or mca gratia, lor mea dc causa, mea de gratia. Prom whence It is easy to collect the reason of the government of the genitive : for when we say, Refert ■naturcc hominum, &c. Interest Ciceronis, civium, reip. &c. we have only to understand causa or gratia; just as the Greeks frequently understand %apiy or tKKx. And then it will be the same as, Interest Ciceronis grcUi(% He/ert civium. causa ; and in like manner the rest. IF As Of Syntax. 25 As for meum, tutim, suum, and the others, it is obvious that these are adjectives, to which we must suppose a substantive, as qfficiumf negotium, &c. Rule XII. Natural signification of the Dative. 1. The dative always signifies acqtdsitioji, or ref- lation. Hence it is put after the following verbs, 2. Sum, 3. and its compounds : 4. Medeor, occurro, f4veo, studeo, gratulor, 5. Also after verbs of excelling ; 6. Of assisting, except iuvo, 7. And of commanding, except jiiheo. Examples. 1. The dative, as the very name sheweth, which comes from dare to give, always signifies something acquired or attributed, either to advantage or disad- vantage ; or else it implies some relation, either in the objects, or in the intention, being the end as it were to which a thing is referred. Hence there is scarce a passage in which it does not bear this sense, as well after nouns as after verbs, to express not only the person, but likewise the thing to which this relation or attribution is made. After nouns. Tu illi amicus, you are his friend. Affinis regi, related to the king. Conterminus GalUcE, bordering \ipon France. Par "virtuti or alio, Cic. a speech equal to virtue. Similia prodigiis, Virg. like to prodigies. Alitor consUiis, one who gives the first counsel, Conscius facinori, Cic. an accomplice. Su- perstes dignitdti, who survived his dignity. And the rest in the same manner, especially those which signify conveniency, inconveniency, favour, pleasure, trust, and the like. After verbs : Tibi soli amas, you love for yourself only. Hoc mihi non sapit, this does not please me. libi peto, I ask for you. Non omnibus dormio, I do not sleep for all, or in regard for all. Metuo exeixitui, I am afraid for the army. Assuescere labori, to be in- ured to toil. Mihi ptccat, si quid peccat, Ter. if he commits any faults, it is for me he commits them. Neque istic, neque alibi tibi usquam erit in me mora, Ter. 2(5 NEW METHOD. Book V. you will always find me ready to obey you, both in this, and in every thing else. Huk cervLvque coma! que trahiintiir per terrain, W\^. his neck and hair drag along the ground. Pennaspavoni quce dtciderant sus- iidit. Pha^dr. took up tlie feathers which fell from the peacock. The same with verbs of Obeying. Obcdire, par ere, morem gerere alicui, to obey a person. AuscuUare parenti, to listen to the commands of his father. Non paribo dolori meo, noii iracund'i(E serviam, Cic. 1 will not indulge my grief, I will not be a slave to my passion. Resisting. OOslat, rcpiignat voluptas sanitati: plea- sure is prejudicial to health. Profiting. Providere rebus suis, to take care of his affairs. Cunsulite vobis, prospicite patri(€, Cic. take care of yourselves, consider your country. Hurting. Nocet mihi cibus, food disagrees wfth me. Metitis quasi luminibus ofjicit altitudo JortimcB, Cic. ex- cess of good fortune darkens the understanding. In- *videre alicui, Cic. to envy a person. It is the same in regard to impersonals. MihiUbet^ placet, it pleases me. Tibi licet, it is lawful for you. Nobis decet, Ter. it becomes us. Qiuid refert intra naturae fines I'ivenfi, Hor. what does it signify to a person that lives within the bounds prescribed by na- ture ; and in like manner the rest. But all this is easily understood. There are some other verbs which might occasion greaterdilhculty to beginners, for which reason I have made particular mention of them, though they might be comprehended in the general rule. 2. Sum. Est mihi liber, 1 have a book ; as much as to say, a book belongs to me. Est niihi iter in Lemnum. I am going to Lemnos. Causa J uit pater his, Hor. my father was the cause of all this. To this may be referred such expressions as these. Madix xescendo est dccucta. Pi in. this root is good to eat, when it is boiled. Qme restuiguendo igm Jorent, Liv. which might serve for extinguishing the fire. But then the dative seems to be governed by some adjective understood, as aptus, idbneus, par, or such like, since they are often expressed. O F S Y N T A X. 27 3. The compounds of Sum. Adesse patri, to assist liis father. Adesse sacro, to\\e2C[ m^iss. Dee sse officio ^ to be deficient in his duty. Frceisse e.verciiui, to command an army. 4. Some particular verbs. Medetur ammo virtus, virtue cures the mind. Occurrere alicui, to go to meet a person. Favere nohilitati, to favour the nobility. Velle aut cupere alicui, Cic. to wish well to a person, to have his interest at heart. Studere kctioni, to study his lesson. Studere eloquentice, to study eloquence. Though we say likewise, Studere aliquid, meaning to desire, Ter. Cic. Hor. Gratulor iibi, I congratulate you, I rejoice at your success. 5. Verbs of excelling, Prcestat, exceUit virtus divitiis, virtue is preferable to riches. Antejerre paceni bello, to prefer peace to war. Antecellit sensibus gloria cce- lestis, the glory of heaven is beyond all perception of the senses. PrcEsidere populis, to preside over the people. 6. Those of helping. Opitulari, aiLviliari, subve- nh^e alicui, to help or to assist a person. Succurrere miseris, to relieve the miserable. Except Juvo, which takes an accusative by the general rule. Juxare aligueni, to help a person. 7. Those of commanding. Prcecipio, ij?2pe?'o, prcz- scribo tibi, I command you. But JuBEO is never put with a dative in Cicero, nor in any other author of pure latinity. The natural and usual construction of this verb, is to join it with an infinitive, either single, or preceded by its accusa- tive. LitercE tu(E recte sperarejubent, Cic. your letters command us to have good hopes. Jubeo te bejie spe- rare, Cic. I desire you to have good hopes. As for juvat, see rule 15th. ANNOTATION. We must therefore take notice that it would by no means be good Latin to say, Jubeo te ut bene spcres, or ut hocfaciaa. For if jubeo occurs sometimes with the acusative of the person only, this accusative is constantly governed by an infinitive understood as ia Cic. Kt herde, ut me jubet Acastus, conjido te jam ut volumus valerCy where we are to understand ut me jubet Jacere. Litcrce nan quce te aliquidjubereiit, Cic. swp. Jacere. Excepere patres ne postea eosdent tribunosjuberent, Liv. sup. esse. Jubeo Chremetem, Tev. sup. salver-e. But 28 NEW METHOD. Book V. But though jwiro docs not take the accusative of the person, )'c*; it receives some particular accusatives of" the thing, as quid, hoc, illud, id, a/i(juid, nihi/, pai/ca, mulln, uinnn, dun, taiitum, quantuvt ; and the hkc. Lexjubel en qua; facicnda sunt, Cic. Rcniiis in quod jiihcl alter, Ilor. We are also to observe that authors of less purity have put this verb with the dative. Vbi Britannicojussit exurgerc, Tacit. His- panis Gal/isquejubet, Claud. Some eMraordinary constructions zvitlt the dative. To this rule we must refer a multitude of nouns, whicli of their own nature should seem rather to require a genitive, as in Plautus, Vino modo aipidcc estis ; in Ovid, participem sludiis : or an ablative with the preposition ; as in Cic. a/iejiufs causcc ; in Quiiitil. diverstcs hide ; though we say rather, alienus a causa, diverms ah tioc. Sic. It is likewise by this rule that par and similis govern a dative, not only when they make a comparison between persons, as when Horace says, Ti/didem superis parem ; or between things, one of which may be referred to the other, as par virttdi nratio, Cic. : but likewise between a thing and a person, or another thing to which it cannot be referred, as in the civil law, in pari causa cccte- ris servis habendus est. And Horace hath likewise, Qutitn magnis parva niineris -ifalce recisurum simili ie, lib. 1. Stat. 3. since you threaten to punish small faults with the same punishment as great ones ; that is, with a punishment like that which great faults de- serve. And this is very usual in Greek : Oi) yiq ix(\uj(ts Ta; "aas TiX-nyais lixoi. Aristoph. Non enim participasti pares jilagas mihi. To this we must refer a great many verbs, which seem rather to require an accusative ; as ccctera quce huic vita; comitantur, Cic. Fergiti' j)recari pessimo, Plaut. Curare rebus alienis. Id. Volitptati mceror sequitnr, Plaut. Homini servos suos Domitos oportet ha- bere ocidos, Plaut. for hominem servum habere oportet, &c. Si Iioc J'ratri cedefur, Plaut. Ut messem hanc nobis adjuvent, Id. There are likewise a great many which usually require rather an accubative or an ablative with the preposition, that occur also with a dative ; as in Livy, incidere poriis, for in portas. Kt mngno bel- lare parenti, Stat, for cum mngno parente. Longe w?e« discrcpat istisy ' et vox et ratio, Hor. for ahistis discrepnt. Nee sic cnitar Iragico tiSfferre colori. Id. And an infinite number of others which are rwre common in Greek than in Latin. It is by the same rule that we put this case likewise after verbs passive, Neque cernitur nlli, Virg. for ab idlo. Cui non dictus llylas puer? Id. By whom has not he been praised ? Ego audita tibiputa- bam, Cic. Honesln bonis viris, non occulta quccruntur, Cic. Nun- quam enim prccstantibus in Rep. gubernandci viris laudata est in una senteniia pcrpetua permansio, Cic. and such like. See the annota- tion to the 30th rule. To this likewise we must refer the prayer of the liturgy, miserere nobis. But in order to know whether in the purest language, mi- seroTy or miseresco, have been joined with a dative, as well asjhciof allatrO) O F S Y N T A X. 29 allatroy interest, and some others ; see lower down the list of difFe- rent governments. We must likewise take notice, that Non esse sohendo, is a dative in which ceri alieno is understood ; hence according to Budeus, it is a mistake of the transcriber in Livy to say, Nee sulvendo cere alieno Resp. erat, where we should read ceri alieno, just as this author says in another place, Q.ui onerijerendo essent : and the like. Rule XIII. Of Verbs which take Two Datives. You must join two datives to sum, habeo, do, verto, and some others. Examples. There are some verbs, which require two datives, one of the person to whom the thing happens ; and the other of the end, or the intention to which the thing refers. Such are sum, habeo, do, verto, tribuo^ duco, relinquo, puto, and some others. jE*^ illi lucre, voluptati, ho7i6ri, inf amice, &c. This is a pleasure, an advantage, an honour, a disgrace to him, and the like. Do, relinquo tibi pignori, I give, or I leave this in pledge with you. Utrum studio id sibi habet, an laudi putat, Ter. does he take a pleasure in this, or does he think it an honour that, &c. Jam sibi tum curvis male temper at unda car mis, Virg. The sea begins to rage against the ships. ANNOTATION. We frequently omit the dative of the person after those verbs, and there remains only the dative of the thing. Exemplo est Regtdus, Cic. Ea res questioni diu fuit, Cic. To this we may likewise refer the following examples. Est mihi nomen Petro. Cui nunc cognomen lido. Though we say also by ap- position, cui cognomen liUus ; or with the genitive, cognomen Ivlif zsjlumcn Rhetii. And according to sojue, cognomen lilluni, taking it as an adjective, otherwise it would be a mistake to say for ex- ample, est mihi nomen Petriim. Rule XIV. Of the Accusative which the Verb governs after it. 1. Verbs active always govern an accusative of the thing after them. 2. And sometimes verbs neuter govern this ac- cusative likewise. Exam- so NEW METHOD. Book V. Examples. 1. Verbs active, and such as are of an active signifi- cation, always have after tliem, eitlier expressed or un- derstood, an accusative of the thing, or more properly speaking, of the subject to which their action passeth. Virtus sibi glu7'iamparit, virtue begets glory. Venerari dliqucm Hi Deian, to worship a person as a God.^ -£V 7?ie destinat arcc, Virg. he designs to sacrifice me upon the altar. 2. Verbsneuter have oftentimes this accusative. For in the first place they may always govern the accusa- tive of the name of their original, as Vivere 'vitam, gaudere gaudium, Ter. to live, to rejoice. Ludere lu- dum, to play. Servire servitiUem, Cic. to be reduced to slavery. E'adem peccare sempa\ sup. pcccata, al- ways to commit the same faults. Secondly, they may govern the accusative of nouns, whose signification borders upon their own. Ire "ciam, to walk. Sitire humanum sdngtnnan, to thirst after human blood. Olet imguenta^ Ter. he smells of per- fumes. Sonat horrendiim, Virg. he makes a terrible noise. Mult a cavere alicui, sup. 7?ia/(i, to preserve a person from a great many misfortunes. Thirdly, they may govern all sorts of accusatives^ when they are taken in a metaphorical sense. Ambu- tare maria, c^- terras navigare, Cic. to walk upon the sea, and to sail upon land. Ardebat Alexin, he was passionately fond of Alexis. Viuetacrepatmera, Hor. he talks of nothing but vineyards. ANNOTATION. The reason why these verbs, called neuter, govern thus the ac- cusative, is because properly speaking they are then verbs active. Now this case of" the accusative is almost the only government that belongs to the verb itself, all the rest cTepend on something understood : hence it ought to be generally supposed after all verbs, though it be not expressed, as it particularly happens to those whose action is confined uitliin themselves; as terra movit. Turn prura avertit^ Virg. Nox calo prcccipitat : vohieniibns amiis, where we are to understand se, which is suppressed merely because the sense is sufficiently determined by the verb onl}'. The lil osculum noctis ; and the like, or even with an ablative, Siculo ab usque Pachino, Virg. Usque /i puerititi, Ter. Usque ab avo, atquc atavu progeniem vestram rejerens, Ter. Ex JEthiopia est usque ha-c, Id. Hence, as Silvius observeth, all these phrases include the same sij^nification, usque palutium, ad palulium, usque ad palatium, ad pnlatium usque, ad usque pa!atiu7n ; and all the lollowing include another, a palatio, usque a palatio, ab usque pal alio. Now usque, when by itself, properly signifieth no more than still, or till now. Usque laborat, she is still in labour. Usquene valuisti? Animus usque antehac attentus, Ter, and such like. Veusus or Versum are no more than adverbs, which plainly appears even from adversus and adversum : and though we find in Cicero Brundusium versus, we find also Ad Alpes versus, injbrum versus ; sursum versus, and the like. Sanctius rejects secus also, and says that this phrase of Scripture, Secus decursus aquartim, is not Latin: and Charisias, lib. 1. title of analogy, having mentioned that secus is an adverb which signifies aliter, from whence comes secius a.'KXotole^us, he adds, Cccterum id gicod vulgus usurpat ; secus ilium sedijiocest secundum ilium ; S^ novum Sf sordidum est. Nevertheless Vossius acknowledges this preposi- tion, and says that secundum and secus seem even to be derived from the same root, namely sccundus ; shewing that it has been not only adopted by Pliny and Quintilian, whom we have quoted, but likewise by Sempronius Asellio in his history, Non possent stationcs foccre secus hoc. But he grants that those who study the purity of the language, do not make use of it. For which reason Scioppius censures Maffei for using it so frequently in his history of the In- dies, as he observes some other mistakes in this agreeable author, contrary to the purity of the language. From whence appearcth, continues the same Scioppius, the error of those, who having been accustomed to authors of the latter ages, undertake to write iri Latin, without taking sufficient care to acquire an exact know- ledge of the laws of grammar. Rule XX. Of Prepositions which govern the Ablative. These prepositions^ coram, a, ab, abs, cum, abs- que, de, ex, e, pro, pra3, clam, palam, tenus, sine, govern the ablative. Examples. The prepositions governing the ablative are reduced to twelve. 1. A, Ab, Abs (which are the same), since, after, by, because of, in the behalf. A J route, before. Apue- ritid, from one's childhood. A morte Ca'saris, since the death of Ca^saf. A civibus, in the behalf of the citizens. A Jr'igore, because of the cold, against the fcold. Ah aUguo pei'ire, to be killed by some body. t "2. Abs- Of Syntax. 59 2. Absque ; without. Absque te, without thee. 3. Clam Prceceptore, unknown to tlie master. For- merly it governed the accusative. Clam patrem, Ter. unknown to my father. And in the same manner clanculum. 4. CouAM ipso^ before him, in his presence. 5. Cum cup'iditate, with desire, with passion. 6. De, of, for, because of, concerning. De ho- minibus, of men. De quorum mhiwro, of whose num- ber. Multis de causis, for many reasons. De raudus- culo Numeridno, multum te amo, Cic. 1 am very much obHged to you for that httle money. A'dii te her) de filid, Ter. I called on you yesterday to talk about your daughter. De lanificio, neminem t'wieo, as to the spin- ning, I am afraid of nobody. Nan est bonum somnus de prdndio, Plaut. it is not good to sleep after dinner. 7. E or Ex, out of, from. EJiammd, out of the fire. E.v Deo, from God, according to God. 8. Palam omnibus, before all the world. 9. PRiE^ in comparison, because of, before. Prce nobis, in comparison to us. Ptce multitudine, because of the multitude. Pr(i^ oculis, before his eyes. 10. Pro, for, according, instead of, by, because of, in consideration, for the sake. Pro cdpite, for his life. Pro mirito, according to his merit. Pro illo, instead of him, in his place. ProfSribus, before the door. Pro nostra amicitid te rogo, I beseech you for friendship sake, out of regard or consideration to our friendship. 11. Sine pondere, without weight. Sine amorCy without affection. 12. Ten us, as far as, up to. Cdpulo ienus, up to the hilt. This preposition is always put after the case it go- verns. And if the noun be in the plural, it is gene- rally put in the genitive. Lumborum Ienus, Cic. up to the loins. Cumarum tenus illi rumores caluerunt. Ccel. ad Cic. these reports were spread as far as Cuma. Au- rium tenus, Quintil. up to the ears. Though Ovid hath also in the ablative, pectoribus tenus, up to the stomach, anno- 40 NEW METHOD. Book V. ANNOTATION. Between these three prepositions a, nb, or aba, there is only tliis difference, that a is put belore words beginning witli a consonant, A Pompeio, d milile : and ab or abs before a vowel, or before a consonant difiicult to pronounce, n?. ab an cilia ; ab rege ; ab Jove ; ab lege ; ab Si/lla ; abs TulUo ; ubs quohbct. Absque, in conuc poets, is taken for .s;»e. Absque eojnret. Ter. But in prose vve do not find it in that signification. Hence it is better Latin to say &ine dubio, without doubt, than Absque dubio. Rule XXI. Of Prepositions which govern the Accusative and the Ablative. Sub, super, in, subtcr, govern two cases, but with different signijications. Examples. The above four prepositions generally require 1. The ablative, when there is no motion signified from one place to another. 2. The accusative, when a motion is signified. 3. They also govern very fre- quently the case of the preposition for which they are put, and into which they may be resolved. Sub. 1. Siih jwmijic pacis belhim hUef, under tlie name of peace, war is concealed. Quo deiude sub ipso, ecce vo* lat calcemque tcrit, Virg. upon which he runs, and treads close to his heels. Where sub governs the ab- lative, because this motion does not signify a change from one place to another. 2. Postcsque sub ipsos nituntur gradibus, Virg. they mount by steps up to the door. Where sub governs the accusative, because it signifies a change from one place to another. 3. Sub horam pugnce, instead of circa, about the hour of battle. Sub ncctemcura recurrit, Virg. anxiety returns towards niffht. o Super. 1. Super fronde viridi, upon the green leaf 2. Super GcuYwiantas c^' Indos, proferet imperiuiu, Virg. he will extend his empire beyond theinhabrtants of the interior Libya and the Indians. 3. Super hac re, instead of de, concerning this mat- ter. Super ripasfliminis effYisus^ Liv. instead ofsecun- durrij Of Syntax. 41 ff«W2, stretched along the banks of the river. Super ccenam occisus, instead of inter, killed while he was at supper. In. 1. Deambulareinforo, to vv^alk in the market. Fando *volvuntur in imo, they go to the bottom. With the ablative, because the motion is not made from one place to another, but in the same place. S. Evolvere posset — In mare se Xanthus, Virg. might discharge itself into the sea. Where the accu- sative is put, because it signifies a change of place. 3. Eusiiithius in Homerum, instead of super, Eusta- thius in his comment upon Homer. In hanc sententiam multa dixit, he said many things to this purpose. In horam, instead of ad, for an hour. Amor iji patriam, instead of eroY/, the love of one's country. Inpraesens ^ in futurum, Liv. for ad or quoad, for the present and the future. SUBTER. 1. Ferre libet subter densd testudine casus, Virg. they are pleased to withstand all the efforts of the enemy under a thick penthouse. Campi qui subter mot'nia,SiSit. the fields under the ramparts. 2. Augusti subter fastigia tecti, jEnea??i du.vit, Virg. she conducted iEneas into a magnificent palace. ANNOTATION. We find likewise that IN hath an accusative where there is no motion, as Manutius, Sanctius, and Vossius, have observed after Gellius, Priscian, and others : numero mihi in mentem Jiiit, Plaut. Esse in magnum hunorem, Ter. to be greatly honoured. Esse in ami- citiam ditioiiemque populi Romani, Cic. Cum vestros partus in prce- donumj'uisse potestatem sciatis, Cic. Res esse in vadimonium ccepit, Id. Jn potestatem habere, Caes. and Sal. In tabulas perscribere, Cic. Lignece solecB in pedes indutce. Id. It is also found with an ablative, where motion is signified, Venit in senatii, Cic. Cum divertissem a Cumis in Vestiano, Cic. In con- spectu ineo audet venire, Phaedr. Venit in regione, Manil. apud Scalig. Qua in Ccelio monte itur, Varro. And hence it is w ithout doubt that we find several verbs which govern both the accusative and the ablative with ^?^ ; incidere in rtissimus ex numero animalium. Thus Ci- cero has expressed himself, Iridus qui est Jluviorum maximus. And Pliny, Boves animalium soli et retro ambulaides pascuntur : and in another place, Hordeumfirugum omnium mollissimum est. See what 16 said lower down about syllepsis, when we treat of figures. Of the Superlative in general. The superlative, as Sanctius sheweth extremely well, does not properly form a comparison, this being proper only to the com- parative : (70. NEW METHOD. Book V. parative: and therefore since they resolved to distinguish tlirce degrees in the nouns, it would liave been much better to call them degrees of signification than of comparison. As when I say, Grata: viilii Jucriint litterce iiuc, and Grutissimce mihi Juerunt, there is no more comparison in one than the other, but only an increase of signification in the latter : which does not hinder us from putting the superlative indifferently in the first place, when the subject deserves it. As, for instance, speaking of the mouths of the Nile, it may be very well to say, Primum ostium magnum, or 1 may say, 'primum maximum, secundum majus, tertiu7n ndliuc ma jus, &c. \\'liere it is obvious that the comparative sometimes signifies more than the superlative, because it establishes a comparison with the super- lative itself. In this manner Cicero has expressed himself, Ego auiem hoc sum miserior quam tu qua: es miserrima, ad Terent. And in another place, Persuade lihi te mihi esse charissimtnn , sed multo fore chariorem, si, &c. So that though we may say that the superlative signifies the same thing as increase or excess, yet it is a mistake to think that it always expresseth the supreme degree. Thus when Virgil saith : JDanaum fortissime gentis Tijdide ; he did not mean that Diomedes was more brave than Achilles, or the bravest of his countrymen, but only very brave amongst his countrymen. This is extremely well expressed by the French particle tres which comes from trois, and has the same effect as if one was to sa}' ter fortis, just as Virgil says, O terque quaterque beati. And the Greeks t^ktoxQios for oxSiulaclos, very happy. And if we put le plus, the most, le plus genereux dcs Grecs, the most brave of all the Greeks ; le plus savant des Romains, the most learned of the Romans, though this may seem to import some sort of comparison, yet it is rather a partition than a real comparison. Difficulties in regard to the Superlative. Hereby it appears that nothing hinders the superlative from being very properly joined with a noun universal (though some grammarians affirm the contrary) either out of partition, as Omni gradu amplissimo dignissimus, or even in partition, as Dii isti Segu- lio male jfaciant homini nequissimo omnium qui sunt, qui Juerunt ^ qui J'nturi sunt, Cic. And in Catullus speaking of Cicero : Discrtissime Romuli ncpotum Quot sunt quotque J'uere, Marce Tulli, &c. The superlative may be likewise put with the exclusive particles, which seem to require a comparative ; JEgyptus aliarum regionum calidissima est, Macrob. Ca:tcrorum fougacissimi, Tac. It is put with omnis : as Omnes tenuissimas particidas atque omnia minima^ Cic. Homini nequissimo omnium, Cic. It is also joined with other particles, which likewise augment their signification, as we have already shewn in regard to per^ peroptimus. Sec. It is even joined with perqiiam ; Perquam maxiino excrcitu, Curt. We say also, Dolorcm tarn maximum, Cic. Rei turn maxime Of Syntax. ' 61 anaxime necessaria tanta injuria. Id. Longe improbissimus, Id. Multo mihi jucundissimus. Id. Oratio satis pidcherrima quce inscribiturpro Q. Ligario, Pompon. J. C. Id apprime rectissime dicitnr, Cic. de Fin. as Saturnius reads it, as well as Robert Stephen in his Thesaurus, Malaspina, and Gruterus's edition : though others read rede in- stead 0^ rectissime. Maxime pessiina, Colum. Maxime humanissimi, A. Gel. Ante alios pidcherrimuSy Virg. Sive hanc aberrationem k dolore delegerim quce maxime liberatissima^doctoquehominedignissima, Cic. and the like. , It is used in comparisons or partitions of opposite things, as Homo nan bipedum modb, sed quadrupedum impunssimus, Cic. VVhicli shews with how little reason L. Valla has censured Macrobius for saying, Age, Servi, non solum adolescentum qui tibi cequcBvi sunt, sed senum quoque dociissime. I It is also made use of in speaking of two things only, Nii- mitori qui erat stirpemaximus regnum legal, says Livy, though there were only two sons, he and Amulius. Utri potissimhn considen- dum, Cic. and others of the like sort. In short we shall find that most of Valla's and Despauter's ob- servations on tliis subject are false, and owing only to their not having sufficiently considered the nature of things, nor dived into the real causes of the Latin tongue. Rule XXVIII. Of the Verbs and Nouns which govern an Ablative, or a Genitive, the Ablative being understood. 1. Verbs of accusing, absolving, and condemning, require an ablative or a genitive. 2. Verbs or nouns that signify plenty or want, govern these same cases : 3. As do also several adjectives. Examples. All these nouns and verbs take an ablative of the most general words ; as Re, actiSne, poena, causa, cul- pa, crimine, and the like, which is always governed by a preposition understood: or supposing some of the ablativ^es, they take another noun in the geni- tive, which is governed thereby. 1. Those of accusing : Accusari cnminibus, to bp accused of crimes. Arcessere majestatis, to impeach of high treason. Those of absolvingor acquitting: Absolvere crimine, to acquit of a crime. Absolvere improbitdtis, to acquit of dishonesty. Liberal us culpa, discharged from a fault. Those 62 NEW METHOD. Book V. Those of condemning: Condemnat capitis, he con- demns him to death. Damnari eodem crimine, to be condemned for tiie same crime. Teneri repetunddncm, sup. pccu/zidruni, to be convicted of extortion. Dam- iidri am'icuui scekris, sup. 7-e, or actione, to cliarge a friend with a crime. And the rest in the same manner. ANNOTATION. Sometimes the preposition may be expressed ; as Damnntne,prcE dolore,pr(£ gaudioy qua de causa, and the like. Rule XXXIII. Of particular Verbs that govern the Ablative, some of which have likewise the Accusative. 1. Pollco, aftlcior, dono, sterno, dignor, go- vern an ablative. 2. Vcscor, fungor, fiuor, utor, and potior, Of Syntax. 71 govern also an ablative, and sometimes an accusative. Examples. 1. This rule is only an appendix to the foregoing, where we have seen that several verbs govern an, ablative, which might be included in the cause or the manner : Follere opibus, to have great credit, power, or wealth. J' ffici gauclio, to rejoice. Donare civitatey to grant the freedom of the city. Slerntre fiorihus^ to strew with flowers. Dignari al'iquem amore, to esteem a person worthy of his affection. Qui apud 710S hoc nomine dignantur, Cic. who amongst us are honoured with this name. Cultu S^ honore dignari, Cic. in a passive sense ; to be esteemed worthy of honour and respect. 2. The following govern also the ablative, and sometimes the accusative, being considered as verbs active : Vesci came, and carnes, to eat flesh. Fungi dlicjuo munere, Cass, to discharge an office. Functus officio, and officium, Ter. who has done his duty. Fungi vice, Hor. vicem^ Li v. to do his duty. Vi?' bonus utitur mundo, nonfruitur, a good man makes use of the things of this world, but does not set his heart upon them. Ad agrum fruendum allectat senectus, old age invites us to enjoy the pleasure of the country. Uti dliquo fami- lidriter, Cic. to be very intimate with a person. U'tere ut "Coles Speram meam, Plant, make what use of me you please. Mea bona utdntur sine, Ter. let them en- joy my estate. And in like manner abutor. Operam abutitur, Ttr. he loses his labour. Potiri imperio, to enjoy the supreme command, Fotiri gaudio, Ter. to be extremely merry. Urbem potiturus, Cic. about to become master of the city. P atria potitur commoda, he enjoys all paternal advantages. A N N.O T A T I O N. 1. We say also potiri rerum^ voluptatum, urbis, regni, Cic. and other genitives, which are always governed by an ablative under- stood, asjacultate, potentta, and the like. ■ 2. There are a great many more verbs which govern the abla- tive, as Lector, gaudeo, gestio novis rebus. Delector, oblecto, and ebiectorj tristor, nitor, Jraudo, fraiidam ie victti ; vivere lactuds, «[ victitare 72 NE^y METHOD. Book V. viclilare tcguminilius ; parietem cruore Unire ; gloriari victoria, Cass, and an infinite number of others. Rut we may refer them to the precedent rule of tlie maimer and the cause, or we may say in ge- neral that there is a preposition under-itood ; as appears by Cicero's expressing it, In hoc ddcctor ; de hicm xivcrc ; gloriari de divitiis ; In luiJHS vita uitilnr scihis civitatis ; and the like. Thus when Lu- cilius, Tcr. Appul. Plaut. say. Quid me fief? And Cic. Qxdd TuU lia mea sit factum? cTcn according to (iruterus's edition, we are to understand de, as he expresses it in another place, Q.uid de P, Clodiofiat ? And Ter. Scd de fratrc meo quidfiel ? &c. Rule XXXIV. Of the Ablative Absolute. The ablative absolute is put every where by itself ^ as me consule feci, regina vcntura. Examples. We give the name of ablative absolute to that which standsalone, and as it were independent in a sentence. i\nd this ablativ^e is put every where, whether in speak- ing of two different things or persons, or whether in speaking of one only ; as Me consule id feci, I did that when 1 was consul, liegind Tenturd, magnum erat in urbe gaudiuniy the queen being expected, there was great joy in the city. Mc ducc adhuncxotifinem veni, Ovid, 1 compassed this design myself, by my own conduct. Brevitatem seciUus sum te magistrOj Cic. I liave been more concise after your example. ANNOTATION. This same ablative which they call absolute, and scorns indcpen» dent, is governed nevertheless by a preposition understood, for me constde, implies sub me consule. Regina ventura, means, de rcgina Ventura, and the rest in the same manner, just as Horace says. Sub duce quiiemplis Farthoriwi signa rrfixit : Pyrrhus in Cic. Do volcn- tibus, cum magnis diis, OfKc. 1 . and T. Liv. Ctim diis bene juvanti- bus : which v/e should express by this ablative absolute. Sometimes the preposition in is understood, as in Martial. 2'emporibus(juc malis, nusus es esse bcnus. That is, in temporihus. And in Cicero, Quod mc in forum vncaSf eo vocas nude ctiam bonis meis rebus fugiebam, ad Att. that is, in bonis rebus. Ovid has even expressed it, JSIcns antiqna tumcnfracta quoqiie mnnsit in itrna. V>\xt to denote what has haj)pcned in the course of time, we ought rather to understand a or ab, with this ablative, Oppressa libertalc patricBy nihil est qttnd speremm- amplius, Cic. that is, ab op- pressd iiberinte, in the same sense as we say accvna, h prandio, after supper, after dinner, and the like ; just as Cicero has expressed himself writing to Dolabeila, Non licet tibi jam a laniis rebus gestis, von lui similcm esse, after such great exploits. O F S Y X T A X. 73 Hereby it appears tl:at it is not true, absolutely speaking, that this ablative cannot be used in a sentence, except when there are two thino-s or two different persons. For if this depends intirely on the preposition, this difference of person has nothing to do with the subject, at least in regard to grammar. Hence it is right to say ; Me duce ad hunc votifinem, me miiite veni, Ovid. Et Icetosfecit se consuiefactns, Luc. And Cicero abounds in such ex- ,amples. Non potes effngere hvjus culpce pcenam tepatt ono. Teneham \nenioria, nobis considihus. Mcmineram nobis frrivatis ccstcra. Ojice ornamenta in Sexto Claudio esse voluisti te consuls. MUii quidem neque pueris nobis M. Scaunis C. Mario cedere videbatur. And Caesar speaks thus of himself; Didatore habente comiiia Ccesare, consides creanttir J. Ccesar S,- P. Serviliics. But this way of speaking is common enough, when this abla- tive denotes a diversity of time and condition, though in the same person. Hereof we shall give more particular examples. Te vi- dente vides, Plaut. Qui se vidente anncnm pntiaUir suam, &c. Ter. Hibericas herbns se solo neqidcqunm inteUigente dicebat, Quin. lib. 8. Te volente misisti, Idem decJam. 4. Quibus occidtatis (Tyriis) Si- dona devecti sunt, Curt. lib. 4. c. 4. Iterum censente in Trebianis le- gatam pecimiam transferre concederetur, obtinere non potuit, Suet, in Tiber. Absjimiqne etiam se inspcctante patitur, Plin. Prodente se antor est M. Varro, Id. Horum supra centum viginti mUliafidsse, se prodente Ctesias scribit. Id. Se audieyite locuples audor scribit Thucij- didcs, Cic. Nobis vigilantibiis, S)- multum iii posterum provident ibus^ Pop. Romano co?isentiente, eriymis prnfedo liberi, brevi tempore. Id. Moderante Tiberio ne plures quam qualuor candidatos commcndaret, Tac. Tiberius directing affairs in such a manner, that he pro- mised not to name more than four candidates. And others of the like sort, which may be seen in Sanctius and elsewhere. This shews that Despauter had no great reason to find fliult with this phrase, which Priscian maintains to be good Latin, Me legente projicio ; and as he believed that no Latin author ever expressed himself in that manner, it proves that he was less versed in the writings of the ancients, than those who came after him. Rule XXXV. Of some Particles which govern different cases. Ecce, and en, govern a nominative or an accu- sative. O, heu, proh, govern a nominative, accusative^ or vocative. Hei, and vae, Jiave only a dative. Examples. These two adverbs ecce, en, govern either a nomi- native, or an accusative ; as En Friamiis, Virg. be- hold Priamus. En tectum^ m tegulas, Plaut, behold the roof, behold the tiles. Ecce 74 NEW METHOD. Book V. Ecce ilia tempestas, behold that storm. Ecce rniserum hSmiucm, behold that wretclied man. Tlic interjections, O! heu! proli! govern either the nominative, accusative, or vocative. O qualis domiis ! O what a house ! O me ptrditum! wretched me ! O Dave, itane conltmnor abs te ? O Davus, (lost thou despise me tlius ? • Heu nimiumjeliv I O too happy! Heu p'letas, hen prisca Jides ! alas, where is the rehgion and iidehty of former days! Heu slirpem invisam ! Virg. O unhappy race ! Proh dolor ! O lamentable! Pro dethn, atque hbrni- 7iumjidem! Ter. Cic. ye gods! ye men ! Fi^u sanctc Jupiter ! Cic. O sacred Jupiter ! Hei! and vce! are always joined to a dative; Hei mihi ! ah me! Vcc tibi! wo to you! ANNOTATION. Ecce, and en, more usually govern an accusative, when they de- note any kind of reproach. En aniwuvi &^ mentevi, there's a bright genius i'ojr you. In sudden things, Cicero irequently useth the da- tive with ecce. Epistolam cum a te avide expectnrem, ecce ii/n )iu?t- cius venit. But considering it strictly, this tibi is only a relative dative, and the meaning is:, behold a mcsioiger H'/io is come to tell me this of you, or conceniing you. Therefore it is observable, that properly speaking, these ad- verbs and interjections govern no case. For which reason we have placed tliis rule after the rest, as a thing that may be omitted, since the following noun constantly depends on the verb which is understood. Thus when Cicero says, En crimen, en causa, that is, e}i est crimen, en est causa. When we say, Ecce ilhan, we under- stand vide or rcspice, and the like. Just as in Greek, 't%, JSi, though taken adverbially for en and ecce, arc real imperatives of the 2. aor. of i'vJw, and ii^oi/.xi, to see, to know. It is the same in regard to 0, when we say, prccclarum cusfo- dem ! we understand habemus. O mc miserum ! sup. sentio. For that the particle O does not govern th.is case, appears from its being frequently omitted. Me miserum, Ter. as likewise from several passages, where it cannot be even understood, as Jlccccine flagitia ! jocidarem dudaciam ! Ter. w here according to Donatus, we must understand only audio, or dicis. In regard to the interjections hei and vcc, so far are they from being capable of governing any cases, that they are. not so much as significative words, but serve only to express the emotions of the mind, Hei mihi ! vcc tibi ! where we always understand est, as if tvr:' were a noun. .Just as in the Vulgate we read, Vcc unum mbiit : vctnunt duo va' post hccc, &c. Rule OfSyntax, 75 Rule XXXVI. Of the reciprocal Pronouns sui and stius. To avoid ambiguity, let the reciprocal pronoun refer to the principal iioiui only. Examples. We have placed this rule the last, because it ap- pears somewhat more diflficult, and supposeth aknow- Jedge of the others. But there is nothing more na- tural, when once it is rightly considered. These two pronouns relative sui & suns, are called reciprocals, because they refer the third person back to itself As when I say, Cato se interjecit, Cato has killed himself; this pronoun ^t', refers Cato to Cato himself. And in Hke manner, Ipse ae diliglt, he loves himself. Loquitur secum, he talks to himself. Sui semper shnilis, always like hiniself, &c. Therefore if we want to refer to the case immedi- atel}' preceding the verb in the natural order, we make use of the reciprocal to avoid ambiguity ; Ccesar ririo- 'Visfo dint, non sese Gallis, seel G alios sibi btllum intu- lisse, Caesar told Ariovistus, that it was not he who had declared war against th.e Gauls, but the Gauls against him : where it appears that sese and sibi refer to Cffisar, as to the nominative, which immediately precedes the verb in the natural order of construction. But if there is no danger of ambiguity, we may put indifferently, either a reciprocal, or one of these rela- tives, ille, ipse, hie, is, in the same place, and in the same sense ; as Est 'verdfortunatus ille, cujus e.v salute non minor pene adomnes, quam ad ilium 'Centura sit. Ice- titia perventrit, Cic. Marcellus is happy to find that his preservation is as dear to the whole community, as to himself: where it is obvious that he might have said ad se. And in like manner, Omnes boni, quantum in ipsisfuit, Ca^'sareminterjecerunt ; all the honest par- ty, as much as in them lay, had a share in Cesar's death : where he might have said, quaatum in sefuit. On the contrary, authors put the reciprocal also, where they might have used the relative, Medeamprce'- dieant injugd, fratris sui membra in iis locis qua sepaixns persequeretur dissipavissCf Cic. Medea in her flight is 76 NEW METHOD. Book V. said to have scattered her brother's limbs wherever her father was in pursuit of her : wliere he might liave said, f/ud cam pcrscijuci^etur. Orare jussit, ai se ames, hcra, jam \U ad sese venias, Ter. slie bid mc tell you, that slie begs, if you have any love for her, you will come and see her : where he might have said, Si earn amcs, ut ad earn venias. Hwc propterca de me d'ii% tit mihi Tiibero, cum de se eadem dicerem, igrmccrefy Cic. I have said this coucernins; mvself to the end that Tubcro might excuse nie, if I said the same of him : Ciim de ipso eadem dicerem, would have done as well. ANNOTATION. It is therefore evident that all the rule we have to observe on tills occasion, is to avoid obscurity. Now in the first and second person there can never be any am- biguity, and therefore we may say in the above-mentioned exam- ple : Ut mihi 2ubero, cum de se, or ciim de illo, eadem dicerem, ignosceret. We may say, Cepi culumbam in nido suo, or in nido ejus, or in nido ipsius. Just as Terence hath. Timet nc desercts sc for earn, in Andr. she is afraid lest you forsake her; and further on, Moiiam esse tit memor esses sin for ejus. And Cicero, Alihi gratias agunt guod se reges men sententid appellaverim, Siiis enm certis j)ropriisque criminibus acai&abo. Non emit a tc enim, sed priusguam tu swim sibi vender es, ipse possedit. And the like. It is the same upon pthcr occasions, where the only rule is to avoid ambiguity. Vix tamen sibi de mea voluntatc concessum est, Cic. AVhere sibi stands expressly for lUi, as Manutius observeth. Thus we may say, SiippUcium sumpsit dc J'amoso J'ure cum sociis suis, or sociis ejus, because the sense is clear : but with the copulative con- junction we should not say, Sumpsit suppiicium de J'ure ct sociis suis, but only ejus ; because as suis then refers to the nominative of the verb, it would look as if this were said of the companions of the person that punishes. Just as when Cicero saith, Cerercm esse sub- latnm a Verre ex templis suis ; suis refers to Cereremy as to the case which immediately precedes the verb esse. Which might be ex- plained otherwise, Quod Cere:i a Vcrrc sublata sit ex templis suis i because suis would always refer to Ceres, the nonnnative of the verb. But we should not say, Verres .tustulit Cererem ex templis suis ; because suis wculd then refer to Verres, as now the nonnna- tive of the verb, so that to remove all ambiguity, we should say, ex templis ejus. And so true is this rule, that except in this case we frequently find both the relative and the reciprocal referring to the same per- son. Abisari Alexander nuntinre jussit, si gravaretur ad se venire, ipsnm ad eum esse venturum, Curt, where se and ipsum both refer to Alexander, In provincin pncalissimd ita se gessit, ut ci paccm esse expedirei, Cic. where se and ci both refer to Ligarius, in favour of whom he is sneaking. What O F S Y N T A X. 77 What wonder then is it, if they put the reciprocal, though with- out any relation to the nominative of. the verb, when it can occa- sion no ambiguity, as Virgil speaking of Dido's nurse, Nnmque suam patria antiqua cinis ater kabebat, where suam refers to Dido, though cinis be the nominative of the verb. Valerius Maximus speaking of Metellus, Tectum continiw in statuni suum resiituitf where suum refers to tectum, and not to Metellus. Cicero in his second book of Offices says of Dionysius the tyrant, Candente cnrhone sibi adurebat capilium, where sibi refers to Diony- sius, because it is the nominative of the verb adurebat. And in the fifth book of his Tusculan Questions, mentioning the same subject, he says, Dionysius Jilias suas tondere docuit, institiutque ut candentibus juglandium putaminibus barbam sibi et capillum adure- rent ; wdiere sibi is no longer referred to the nominative of the verb adurerent, which are his daughters, but to Dionysius himself, because the sense sheweth there can be no ambiguity, since his daughters have no beard. But if it was only, Dionysius instifuit ut Jilice Slice caniUum sibi adurerent, this might be understood of his daughters' hair, because he has expressed them by the reciprocal siue ; and to remove all ambiguity we should sa}^, Ut capillum ipsi (Dionysio) adurerent. But take notice that the ambiguity arises chiefly on these occa- sions, where there are two third persons, and especially where there happen to be two different verbs, as Pater jussit jilio id iret in cubi- culum suum. Verres rogat Doiabellam ut de sua provincia decedat. For then we must distinguish by the sense, and consider which is the principal person in the sentence, in order generally to refer the reciprocal to its nominative. Thus when Cicero saith. Turn Py- thius piscatores ad se vocavit, et ab his peiivit ut ante suos Jiortos poster a die jnscarentur, OtEc. 1. He ought not to have expressed himself otherwise, because the verb petivit has Pythius before it for its nominative, to whom these gardens belong, and who is the principal nominative. But if he had meant the fishermen's gardens, he should have said hortos ipsorum, to prevent ambiguity : as he said of ISIilo, Obviam Jit Clodio ante fundum ejus, nempe Clodii. Irf the same manner we say, Regis est gubernarc suos. Himc sui cives ejecerunt, because though one would think that this reciprocal does not refer to the nominative of the verb, yet it certainly amounts to this sense, as appears by altering it thus; Regis officium est ut gubernet cives suos. Hie ejectus est a suis civibus. For the same reason we say, Trahit sua quemqne vohcptas, Virg. Justitia reddit suum cuique. Siio gladio hunc jugulo. Negligere quid de se quisque sentiat est disso/uti, Cic. Because the meaning is, Dissolutus neg- ligit quid de se a quoqne dicatur. Suo gladio hicjugulatur. Quisque a voUptate sua trahitur. Quisque a justitia accipit suum. Therefore whenever there is a periphrasis, or a perplexed meaning with the reciprocal, it ought always to be reduced to its natural order, to see which is the nominative of the verb that it refers to, as in Cicero's Offices, Ex qu.o, quia suum cujusque Jit quod cuique oh- tigity id quisque teneat. We must reduce this, and say, Quia ex eotem- porepr(xdium cujiisquejit ^immpr^dipujid qidsqw teneat, Sec. Where 78 N E W M E T H O D. Book V. we see, that simm constantly refers to the nominative of the verb, which is teneat. And the rest in the same manner. Tlie reciprocal <:ener;illy goes before quixquc : as may be seen in the preceding examples, and in this : Num ista sncirlas talis est, ut 7tikil sunm cujtt.squc. sit, Cic. Though Virgil lias expressed it Otherwise : Quisgue suo- patimnr manes. Which is rare. With inter we t>ay ; Contenduni docti inter se, and coyiteidio est doctorum inter se, or inter ipsos. Dmnoiiem S^ i'ljtliiuDi fcruut hoc anivio inter se fuisse. Inter se omnes partes corporis quodam Icpore consentiunt. Una spes est salutis, istorum inter istos disicnsiu, Cic. and the like. ( 79 ) BOOK VI. PARTICULAR REMARKS on all the Parts of Speech. AFTER having exhibited a general idea of construction in the introduction to the syntax, and shewn the appHca- tion thereof in the particular rules, - I propose giving some other remarks on the several words of which speech is composed ; and I flatter myself that even such as have made some progress in the Latin tongue, will meet here with a variety of agreeable and useful observations, as well for discovering the real foundation of the language, as for understanding the different authors, and Avrit- ing with elegance and purity. I shall only advise those who are desirous of attaining the real principles of language in a higher degree of perfection, to see what has been said on this subject in the general and rational grammar,* where, if I am not mistaken, even the most curious will find abundant matter of entertainment. Section I. REMARKS ON THE NOUNS. , Chapter I. Of Nouns Common, Doubtful, and Epicene. 1, Of Common Nouns. THERE are a great many nouns, whose signification agreeth with both sexes, though they never occur in con- struction with an adjective feminine. Such is homo ; for we should not say, hominem malam, as Charisius observes ; and it is a mis- take, according to Vossius, in the transcriber of Plautus, to read Hominis misercs misereri, where the best manuscripts have Hominis miser e miseri. r« * This work was translated a few years ago by the same hand as the rest of the grammatical pieces of Messieurs de Port Royal, and printed for J. Noursb (ngw F, Wincrave) in the Strand. And 80 Section I. Chap. I. Eook VI. And if Sulpicius in his letter to Cicero, says of his daughter Tullia, Homo nata est, this does not prove tliat it is of the femi- nine gender, since in Terence a woman says, Virion me natam vel' Icm : and it is in tlie same signification that Plautus likewise says, Fures estis amhcr, that is, vos umbce Jemince Jures estis. Yov J'ur of itself is never joined with an adjective feminine. But we sIkiII divide these nouns into two classes, first those which Vossias believes to be common in their signification only, and next those which are common likewise in their construction. II. Nmiiis common in their signification only. Advena always roafeculine in construe- because this noiin is become in some tion. And in like manna-, munsiire an adjective, and frequently Transvkna and Contena (frnm taken for «7///«i, as in Cicero,Fncjof /(/i «r whence cometh ConWTKr, the iniia- omnium homnvHi ntnincm. Tlie differ- bitants of Con>ir>g:es in Gasconj') for ence is, that rii'mo is properly said only as the iUolios tertninated in A, the of men, whereas nultus in said of every masculines of the fir^t declension in thin;^. "Where we are to observe iie- »a, as Iv^ioita ZeI? for Iu^u5r>;;, the vertheloss, that not only Virgil has Latins, ever fond of im'rtattnj: them, Raid, Divum nemn, but even Cicero have frequently giren the same gender to this same tcrtnination ; and hence it is that we have sucU a number of nouns masculine in A. AcfeicoLA, likewise C.tLicoLA and Ro- ll rcoi.A. AnENiGENA, in the same manner Isdi- GENA, and such like. AssECLA, a follower, or atlendant ; and in like manner several nouns which of their nature are adjectives. AuilIGA. Camtlds; though the Greeks say h iNtn^elf, Ariau n'C homo, ntc Deus. Ixi>£K, though its si^iiiljcation is femi- niine, Orationis indicrm tuccrn, Cic. JuvENis indeed is common in its sig- nification, Cornelia juvcnis est, ft" nd- hiic iiari'.re potest, Plin. but it is al- WTij-s masc. in its construtn.ion. Tiiercfore in this verse of Catullus we should read betwixt two com- mas Cernilis, innupla:, jiivcncs, that is, vos inmiptiv, ccniit's juvenes, as Vossius observes, contrary to the opinion of Alvarez. iii.fjLn>.o;, whicii has led several into a Hospes, common in its signification. mistake. Seethe genders, vol.i. i>. 57. Cliens, masc. we say Clienta in the femininej Jam. clienlas reperi, Plaut. HcnesltP purpuras clienta, Hor. Coci.es, Eques. Exur. ; therefore we sh(>uld not saj- vuga exul, but ■uafia 6f exul; nor Jlospile cymbd, Stat, but masc. in construction. In the feminine we say kospila. ScrviHa Dicnis fmspita, Cic. Interpres. Jnlcrjirete linguii, Hor. I.4NISTA. LiXA. Latro. Obses. Henlcvliam vbsidcm perpetue in Hemp. Voliin talis, Cic. ejeclftm eoBul&m reduoere, hut ejeotam Opi*bx. ^Apes oit\fices,\vfxo. in exdium reftucere. Fur. See the beginning of this chap. HoMiciDA, and th- like. PAnniciDA, and the like. Homo. See the beglnnini; of this chap , -But nemo is sometimes feminine, Vicinnm nemiium amo mvo terminations, IS and E for the positive degree : OR and US for the comparative. But anciently the ter- mination Oil served in this degree for the three genders. BeUurn Punicum poster iir, Piaut. Wc find likewise pntis and pote, in all genders. Qui potis at ? iiiquis : quod nmantcm injuria talis Coiiit amare rnagis, scd dene vellc minus, Catul. Where it is" obvious that he \)ut potis for pote, ^vxxliv: as on the contrary he has put pote for potis in this other verse: . ^ Quantum qui pote phirimuni perire. And for want of knowing this remark, a great many passages of the ancients have been corrupted ; though we do not deny but pote is more usual in the neuter. See the 3d chapter of Irregular Verbs, and the first chapter of Adveibs, which are to follow. There are likewise some that have two different terminations; as Hie acer, hccc ncris, hoc acre ; or else hie et licec acris, et hoc acre ; and the same you may say of saluber, alacer, and others : alacris, says Asconius, sivc alacer, ntrumque enim dicimus. From thence comes pauper, in the feminine in Terence, as Donatus reads it. Potius qunm in pntria honeste pauper vivere, in Andr. Thoujih in Flautus we find, pauprra ticrc res est. Celer hath for the feminine ceteris, in Ovid, and for the neuter celere, in Ter. hi i'horm. But ceteris is also masc. in Cato. Hence as from celer comes ceterrimus, in the superlative, so from ceteris came cclerissimus, in Ennius. Under the adjectives of a single termination we ought likewise to comprcliend Dives, hebes, sospes, teres, memor, iiber, and some others, though they are not so usual in the neuter. But in Ovid we find, divitis ingenii; in Virgil, feres Jtageltum, mcmoris avi, pauperis ingenii, and the like. The names of countries in AS heretofore were terminated in is, so Remarks on the Comparison of Nouns. 87 80 that they said, according to Priscian, Hie et hcec Arpiimtis, et hoc Arpinate. But because they have changed their termination, they have Hkewise changed their gender: the termination AS being as well for the neuter as for the other two. Ad iter Arpinas ^flexas, Cic. Bellum Privernas, Liv. Bellum Capenas, Id. and it would be a mistake, if we believe Vossius, to say, bellum CapC' note; though Priscian was of opinion that they said, Hie et hcec Arpinas et hoc Arpinate ; and though Donatus laid it down as a rule that we should say, Cujate, tiostrate, vesirate maneipium, in- stead of cujas, nostras, &c. Substantives sometimes become adjectives, and then they re- ceive the variation of the adjectives, as in Virg. Arcadium ma' gistrum, Laticemque Lyceum, for Arcadicum, Lijceium : populum late regent, for regnantem, and the like. It is false reasoning, to con- clude with Sanctius that it is as impossible a substantive should become an adjective, or an adjective become a substantive, as that a substance should be changed into accident. As if we did not see examples to the contrary in all languages, in French, for in- stance, chagrin, colere ; the names of colours, hlanc, rouge, and others, which are sonietimes adjectives, and sometimes substan- tives : and as if it were not a thing merely accidental and in- different to all sorts of nouns, their being taken to express an ac- cident or a substance. Even the substantives continuing substantives, have sometimes their variation, as rex, regina ; tibicen,tibicina; coluber j colubr a, &c. II. Of the Comparison of Nouns. We have already spoken of the comparatives in the abridg- ment of this new method, and in the Syntax, rule 27, p. 55, and following. As the comparative particularly expresseth the quality of the thing, it is plain it cannot agree with nouns substantive. But if we say, Neronior, then it is to denote cruelty, and it is an ad- jective; just as Plautus saith, Pcenior, to signify great subtlety and cunning. Therefore when we read in the aforesaid Plautus, Meritissimo ejus quce volet Jhciemus ; and in Varro, Villce pessimo publico cedifi' catce : and in Livy, pessimo publico aliquid Jacere, these are only adjectives, which suppose their substantive by an ellipsis, two or more adjectives agreeing extremely well with the same substan- tive, as we have shown in the Syntax, rule 1. It does not agree even with every adjective that expresseth quality, and therefore much less does it agree with others which express none. Thus we see that Opimus, claudus, canorus, egerncs, balbus, almus^ and others, have no degrees of comparison, because custom has settled it otherwise. To the superlatives in Limus, by us mentioned, some add, agillimus, gracillimus ; and Valla joins also, docillimus. But Vossius rejects it, as not founded on authority. Charisius on the contrary, in the chapter of adverbs, says, that of agilis and docilis, are formed agilissimus and docilissimiiSf from whence come agilissime and docilissime. As 88 Section- I. CiiAr. IV. Book VI. As to imhccUlimus, it is true we find it in Seneca, not in the book of coni^olation to Marcia, where the best copies have corpus imlncilttun, but in the 85th letter. QitanluUun aiilnn sapienti damns si imbcciUunusJortior est i' But imbeciUissimns occurs also in Celsus, who is a very pure author. 111. OJ' Dcjtcthes, or those xvh'ich are deprived of some degree of comparison. Of adjectives, some are Without the positive, as prior andi primus. To these arc added, deterior (/elerrimus, and potior potissimus. But one cometh from deter, and tlie other from potis. Ulterior and utlimus, may come from idler. Ocior and ucissimiis, come from the Greek, ixv?, winch makes ix/fc-v, in the comparative : and hence it appeareth that ticior oujijht to be written with an i, and not with a y. Without the comparative, nupcr and nuperrimus ; noviis, novissi- mus ; the last. ISaccr and saccrruvns ; invitits and iuvitissimus. And in like manner, Diversus,Jalsus,Jidus, persuasns, invisus, coiuultus, ■vieritus, apricus, bellus, iitviclus, iiiclijlusy and some others perhaps^ though not so many as people imagine. Without the superlative, adolesccns, adolescent ior ; J uvenis, ior ; senex, ior. Likewise, higens, faiur, dexter, sinister. For dextimus and sinistimus arc no more than simple positives. Supinus forms also supinior, in Mart. We meet with i/ijinitior and divitior, in Cicero, Plautus, and Ovid. Anterior, hath neither positive nor superlative, no more than licentior. But habitior, which we read in Terence hath both ; Eqnum strigosnm et male habitum ; sed equitcm ejus ubenimum et habitissinmm vidernnt. Cell. IV. Superlatives that are compared. From the superlative are likewise formed other degrees of com- parison ; Cnm adolescentulis postreviissivii^, Apul. Pt-oximus for vicinus, forms proximior, Seneca ; and some others in the same manner. V. Adjectives that are not compared. Those of countries, as liomanus, Spartiata. Possessive?, Pa- trius, Evntidriits. Numerals, ?;;7»^^^?, dccimits. Those of matter, aureus. Of time, hesternus. Those in DU8, amandus, errabundus. In PLEX, duplex; except simplex, and vndtiplex. In IMUS, legiliinus : IYtlS,fugilivus. Those from gero and Jero, armigevy Jrvgifer. Likewise alvms, balbus, canorus, cnnus, cicur, claudus, degener, dispar, egenus, magnanimus, mediocris, memor, mirus, veitc- lus, unions, and perhaps a few others. Ikit crispus, ojnmus, and Silvester, which Vossius ranks in this number, have their compara- tive. The first we find more than once in Pliny ; Crispiores jubce leonwv, lib. 8. c. 16. Crispioris elegaulicc maleries, 1. 13. c. 9. The second is in Gellius, Membra apimiora, fatter, 1. 5. c. 14. And the third also in Pliny, Si/lvestriura ojnnia, lib. 16. c. 27. But in regard to those that have none, we make use of magis, to supply the comparative, and of maxima for the superlative. Remarks on the Diminutives. 89 To these the grammarians add all the nouns in US, that have a vowel before US : and indeed it happens that they form neither comparative nor superlative, lest they should occasion too »reat a concurrence of vowels : yet there are several that are compared, of which we take the following list. List of Nouns that are compared, though they have a "vowel bijoix \JS. Arduius and arduissimus, Calo, Marcion. This author has vs'd the Assidnioves. Van. Assiduissimus, Cic. some fxpre^s'i 'ti in othe> places. Saint Egregiis^imiis, Pacuv. Ambrose ai/d others hav als'^ s "ike thus. Egregius, is even ]iut for egvegiius in ^nd in the Vn'gafe, Qi'ae vulentur Juvenal, as Priician observes, membra corpo^ s inSrmiora esse Egregius coDnrt, melm^que miserri- nere-sariira sunt, *'. P«'//.' 1 C^r. 12. mus liorum. Piis^iinus, is in S'-neco, 3, Curl 3uin- Exiguiiis, U/pian. tiliun, Livy, Flmy, Jpuleins, St. Je- Exiguissimus, Ovid, Plin. rome, an:/ others; thnugh Cice/o con- Idone'ius, is in Tertull, Id neior, in d^mns it ii his 13. Phil. Tu »er6 Petrus Damianus, and in, all the says he, np pios qnidem, sed piissi- writers of the latliT ages. mos quae' is j & quod verbuta om- Industrior, P'autns. nino iiuilum in Iingui Latiii.i est, Injurius, Plautus. Nihil amore inju- id pr'-pter tuain diviiiam pietatem rius est, as Do>/za reads it, that is, novum inducis. itijuriius, or injuriosius. Perpetui'or and perpetuissimus, j*risc. Innoxius, or innoxiius, Calo. ex Cat"»e. Necessarius, is also a comparaliv in the Strenuior, Plant. Lncil. writers of the taller a^es. Quibus Strpnui«simiis, Sallust. utique necessarius qua Deus, & qui- Ti-nnior, Cic. dem melior, quo necessarior, latere Teuuisjimus, Id. non debuit, Te-tull. lib. 1. contra Vacuissimus, Ovid. We might mention others in Plautus, but it is to be observed that this autlior hath frequently affected to coin a number of these words according to his tancy, which by no means are to be ad- mitted, as verberahiUssimiis, to signify one that very richly de- serves to be beaten: Farissinius, very equal: spissigradissimust ex- clusissimiis, &c. He dots the same with the comparatives. Co)ifessior, tncithis : with the pronouns, 2p5«smH5 : with the substantives, mentissimu^it for maximuyn meritum, and the like. Which is not to be imitated but with great care and judgment. Chapter V. Of Diminutives. AFTER having treated of nouns which augment the sig- nification, we must mention a word or two about those which diminish it, and are therefore called diminutives. Diminutives are generally terminated in lus, la, lum ; as ^Holies, adolescentulus, page/la, osciUum, a little mouth, or little image which the ancients hung up in honour of Saturn for their sins, or a kind of play amongst them. Sigillum, pullus, jlosculusy homimculus, &c. There ^0 Section II. Chat. I. Book VI. There arc moreover some that terminate in lo, as senex, senccio ; pusiis, pusio. Others in els ; rijuus, eqaulus, ecjntdcus. Greek nouns are also terminated in iscus, Sj/rus, Syriscus ;*niaSf mariscus, &c. ASTER. This termination is hkewise diminutive according to Scaliger. Sanctius on the contrary maintains that it augments the signiftcation, but in derision ; iheologaster, a great theologian, a great doctor, said ironically. And if we find in Terence, para- sitaster parvulus, in Adelph. : he says that parvulus only denotes the age, and makes nothing against his assertion. Vossius says, that of these nouns some mark diminution, as siirdaster, recalv/ister, and in like manner philosophastery poetaster, &c. Others denote imitation, as Antoninster ; and others signify neither, as apiaster^ or apiastrum, taken from apes, a kind of herb of which bees are fonu. The diminutives form also other diminutives of themselves ; as piter, puerulus, or puelhis, and from thence puellulns. Cistula, a little basket, cistella, and from thence cistdlida, in Plautus. Hence it appears Iiow greatly Valla was mistaken in asserting that no diminution could be added to diminutives, as if we dia not find in Terence, ^;wcicM/y5 miniitos ; in Cicero, minutis interro- gatiiinculis; and in another place, ^;wczc?(/i^«m; in Caesar, wat/- culani parvam ; in Valerius Maximus, cum parvulis Jiliolis, and others of the same sort. Section II. REMARKS ON THE PRONOUNS. Chapter I. Of the Number of Pronouns, and the Signification and Declension of some in particular. I. The nature of a Pronoun. 'HE Pronouns are no more than real nouns, says Sanctius, T that have nothing in particular but their manner of de- clining. For to say that they are substituted in the room of the nouns, there is nothing particular in that, since even one noun may be taken for another. Be that as it may, grammarians are very much divided about the number of pronouns. Some reckon titer, quatis, quantus, &c. others, alius, omnis, totus, and the like, and others also include arnbo, duo; and others add some more. For the sake of ease and brevity, I thought it sufficient to mark eight with the relative, iu the abridgment of this new method. II. Difference in the signification of Pronowis, We have already taken notice of some difference between Illb and IsTE in the abridgment of this book. Cornelius Fronto also teacheth. Remarks on the Pronouns. 91 teacheth, that Hic and Iste, are said of a person who is near us ; Ille of one who is at a distance, but not out of sight ; and Is of one who is absent. And it amounts almost to the same, when Sa- turnius asserts that hie is for the first person, islic for the second, and illic for the third. We have thought proper to mention these differences, though they have not been ahvays observed by authors. Hic and Ille differ also in general, inasmuch as hic refers to the nearest, and iUe to the remotest ; which ought always to be observed, wiien there is any danger of ambiguity. But except on such occasion, authors have slighted tliis difference. Qnocuiu/ue aspicio, nihil est niid pontus et (sther^ Ftuctibus hic tumidus, nuhibus Ule niinax, Ovid. And Cicero, Quid est quo I negligenter scribamus adversaria? quid est quod ddigenter scribamus tabutnn? qua de causa'? Quia hcec sunt menstrua, ilia ceternce ; hcec dtlentur siatim, illce servaniur sancte; hcec parvi temporis memorinm, illce perpetuce exiitimationis Jideni et religionem amplectuntur ; hcec sunt dejecta, illce in ordinem conjectce. Tiie difference they make between Qui and Quis, is of no ser- vice. For Pierius observeth that in ancient copies we find indiffe- rently, Nee quis sim quceris Alexi, or }iec qui sim, Virg. Eclog. 2. That which they make betwixt Omnis or QuisauE and Uterque, is not always true, no more than that which they suppose between Alter and Alius. For omnis and quisque are said likewise of two. Ecce autem similia omnia, omnes congruunt ; Unum cognoris, omnes noris, Ter. in Phorm. where he is speaking of Antipho and Phaedria. And Quintilian, An ciirn duo fures pecuniam abstulcrunt, separatim quadruplum quisque in duplum debeat. We meet also with Alius, where mention is made only of two : Duas leges promidgavit ; unam quce mercedes habitationum annuas conductoribus donavit ; alinm tabularum novarum, Caes. 3. bel. civil. And on the contrary we find Alter, for alms, in Phaedrus and others. What they say likewise of Uter and Quis, that the former is applicable to two only, and the latter to many, and therefore that one is joined to the comparative, and the other to the superlative; is not general. Quanquam prcestat hnnestas incolumitati ; tamen Utri potissimum consulendum sit deliberelur, Cic. He does not say utri potiiis, but ntri potissimum. Quis may also be used, when speaking of two only. Duo celeberrimi duces, quis eorum prior vi- cisset, Liv. Uter is never said but of two ; but its adverb Utrum is used interrogatively in regard to divers things : Utriim impudentius d sociis abstulit, an turpiiis meretrici dedit, an improbms populo Rom, ademit, an audncius tabulas publicas commutavit? Cic. in Verr. Aliquis and Quidam are frequently put for one another; though speaking with propriety, quiddam implies a determinate thing, whereas diquid \& said iadeterminately, as much as to say atiud quid. III. Co«. 9^ Section II. Chap. I. Book VI. III. Co7iccrmngtheCases,andthcDedensionofPro7io2ins. Pronouns, as we have shewn in the abridgment of tliis gram- mar, have their vocative. But since the contrary is maintained by many, we must produce on this occasion some ekamples. Esto nunc sol testis, S)- H7t:c rdUii terra, prccanti, Virg. Ipse aieas ccther, accipe sumnie preces, Ovid. nox Illa, qncc penc ceternns hide urbi tcncbras attulisli, Cic. There is only Ec.o that has none, because as this case particularly expresses the person to whom wc speak, the first person cannot speak to himself: and Sui, by reason it hath no nominative, on which the vocative always dependeth. Mis and tis are ancient genitives for mei and tni, though Alvarez would fain have it that they are datives plural. Proofs thereof may be seen in Voss. lib. 4. de Anal. cap. 4. Illf. Anciently they said ollus or olle, for illc, whence also cometh olli for iUi in Virgil and others. Ipse. They used likewise to say ipsus for ipse, though the neu- ter ipsud is condemned as a barbarous term by Diomedes. H^ was heretofore said in the neuter as well as in the feminine, just as qncc is used for both genders in the plural. But of Iicc they made nacce, just as we say hicce in the singular ; and afterwards by apo- cope they said h(Tc, which we find even in the feminine, Periere hcec oppido cedes, Plant. Hccc ilia;' erant itiones, Ter. in Phorra. as quoted by Donatus, or haccine, according as Heinsius reads it. IS formerly made im in the accusative (as Charisius has ob- served) like sitis, sitim. Boni im miserantur ; illiinc irrident mali. Plant. They used also ibus instead of iis in the dative and ablative plural. Ibiis dinumerem stipcndium, Plaut. Ea made ece in the genitive for ejus : and cabiis in the dative and ablative plural for iis. IV. Of the nature of the Relative. The pronoun relative, qui, qua:, quod, has this in common with all the rest, that it is put in the place of a noun. But it hath this in particular to itself, that it should always be considered as be- twixt two cases of the noun substantive which it represents, as we have shewn in the Syntax, rule 2. And that it serves as a con- nexion to make an incidental proposition form part of another which may be called the principal. In regard to which we refer the reader to what hath been said in the General and Rational Grammar, part 2. c. 9. V. 0/QuiorQuis. Qui we find in Plautus, even in an interrogative sense. Qui ccena poscit ? Ecqui poscit prandio ^ qui me alter est audacior homo? In Amphit. Qua is acknowledged in the fem. even by Donatus; and Scioppius proves it from Propertius, Forlunata mco si qua est celeb) ata libello, though it seems to be put for aliqua, and therefore it is rejected by Vossiue. But qua in its natural -signification, may likewise II EM ARKS ON QtU AND QuiS. f)3 iikewise bear this meaning; si qua est, if there is any, &c. The jieuter quid OGours in Plautus, quid tibi nomen est ? In Ainph. Quis was heretofore of all genders : Quis il/ccc est miditr quce ipsa se misereatur, Plaut. Quisquam illarum, nostrarum quisqnayn, PJaut. Scortum exoletum ne quis in proscccnio sedeat, Id. And it is the same as poiis, magis, satis, nimis, which of tlieir nature are ad- jectives and of all genders, though custom has made them pass for adverbs. The ancients declined qui and quis without changing the q, either in the genitive or the dative. Hence in order to distinguish them the more easily, they said quoius and quoi, because qui would have been the same as the nominative : and we find a great many more examples of it in the ancient copies of Virgil and Cicero: Quoi 7ion dictus Hilaspuer? 3. Georg. as Pierius observes : Quoi tu (video enim quid sentias) me comi- tern putas debere esse., ad Att. lib. 8. ep. 8. Quoi tali in re libenter tne ad pedes abjecissem, ep. 9. Hence it cometh that dropping the i, as we have already ob- served in the second chap, of the Remarks on the Nouns, they said quo in the dative as well as in the ablative, according to Scioppius, SI quo usui esse exercitui possit , Liv. Ut idagam quo missus hicsum^ Plaut. for quoi negotio. Est certus locus, certa lex, certum tribunal, quo hce reserventur, Cic. Quo mihijbrttmas, si 7ion conceditur uti? Hor. for cui usui. And the like. The accusative was quern, quoin, or quum, of which at length they made cum, taking the C for Q. as well as in the genitive and dative. Which is for all genders, as coming from quis, of all gen- ders. And this has produced those elegant phrases, wherein Tully useth this cum as a connexion, after all nouns and words expressive of time. Ex eo tempore cum me pro vestra incolumitate devovi, for ad quom, or cum tempus, instead of ad quod tempus. In like manner tempus cum ; hie dies sextus cum ; jam multos annos est cum ; jam ab illo tempore cum ; paucis j)ost diebus cum; mult i anni sunt cum ; nunc tempus est cum ; dies nondum decern intercesseraut cum ; ilia tempera cum ; nuper cum ; friginta dies erant ipsi cum, Sac.Juit tempus cum, or J^uit cum ; prope adest cum ; nunc illud est cum ; nondum cum ; tantum veneram cum, &c. Qui in the ablative is of all genders, and comes fx-om their having heretofore been used to say in the dative qui (or quoi J for cui. Patera qut rex putitare solitus, Plaut. for in qua. Restem volo emere qui mejaciam pensilem, Id. Qui cum partiri euros, &c. Abs quivis homine, cum est opus, beneficium accipere gaudeas, Terence. And in another place Nam in prologis scribundis operam abutitur : Non qui argumentum narret, sed qui malevoli Veteris poetce jnaledictis respondeat. For qui is not a nominative in this passage, since Donatus thought it stood for ut : but it would have been better to say it stood for quo or quo negotio, and that it is an ablative signifying the manner. Just as Terence has again expressed himself in another place : Hanc 94 Section IL Chap. I. Book VI. Hancfidem sihi me obsecrnvit, qui se scirct non desertiirum , ut darem^ Id. Where qid stands for quo modo. She begged I would give her my word, whereby j>he might be sure thut I would not forsake her. It is hkewise by tliis principle that we so frequently repeat, qiii igitur conveuit, Cic. Qui fieri potest for quomodo. Sec. This qui occurs even in the ablative plural, ut anales, nut oiuniices dmilur qui cum lusilent, Plaut. Cap. A. 5. so. 4. And Duza believes it is a barbarism to say qiiihusaim, though we meet with it frequently in Cicero, and in other writers. Quibus ortus sis, non quibuscum vivas considera, Philip. 2. Ad eoruvi approbationem quibuscum vivimus. Oft: 1. The plural of quis was heretofore Ques, according to Festus and Charis. from whence also cometh the dative and ablative quibus, just as puppes makes puppibus, whereas of qui is formed queis or quis, as from illi cometh il/is. The accusative plural neuter was not only qua, but likewise qua and quo. Qua has still continued in quapropter, that is, propter qua, or qu{B, sup. tempora vel fiegolia. Quo was therefore an accusative plural, the same as atnbo and duo, of Wr'hich mention has been m:ide in the chapter of numeral nouns; and it has continued still in quocirca, quousquc, &c. that is, circa quo, or usque quo. for ad quo, or ad quce, sup. tempora vel ne- fotia, or the like. Prope arcam facinnda umbraada, quo succedant omiues in cestu, tempore meridiauo, Varr. for ad quce. Dolia quo vinaceas condat decent, Cato, for in quce. They used also to say eo in the accusative plural. Eo redactus sum, that is, ad eo (for eaj negotia. Ad eo res rediit, Ter. for ad ea /oca, the affair is brought to that pitch. Ido was likewise used in the same sense ; Nam ubi illo adveni, Plaut. that is, ad illo, for ad ilia loca. But quo was put for all genders, just as we have above observed of duo-^Dignissimi quo cruciatus conjluant, Plaut. for ad quos. Sidcant Jbssas quo aqua pluvia dclabaiur, Varr. for per quas. It even seemeth that as the ablative qui served for all genders and numbers, so quo has been used for the singular and the plural : Providendum quo se recipiant, nejrigidus locus sit, Varr. for ad quern locum. Me ad eam partem esse venturum, quo te maxinie vdle arbi- trabar, Cic. for i7i qvam. Nosti hunc Jundum, quo id venimus, Cic. Nullum portum, quo classes decurrerent, Hirt. Hnminem beatum, quo illee perveniant divitice, Pompon. Unless we choose lo say with Scioppius, that it cometh then from the dative, quoij for cwi, in- stead of ad quern ; as Jt clamor ccelo, for ad ccelum. VI. Of Mens and Suus. The vocative sint^ular, mi, is an apocope for viie (the sani6 as Virgin for Virgilie ; see the Declensions, vdI, I. p. 65.) which came from the old nominative wius, according to Caper and Diomedes. The writers of the latter apes have used mcus also in the vocative, not only as an H^Hericm. when the nominative is taken for the vocative, Remarks on Mens and Suus. 95 ▼ocative, according to what we have already mentioned, chap. 2, as Deus mens, ut quid dereliquisti me ? but moreover by joining it with a real vocative distinct from the nominative, as in Sidonius, Salvianus, Victor Uticensis, and others, domine mens, and the like : which is not to be imitated. For it is true we find that the nomi- native may be put for the vocative, as Livy has said in the voca- tive Populus Albanus ; Horace, PopUius sanguis ; Persius, Patricius sanguis ; and Virgil also, Projice tela manUf sanguis mens, Mn. 6. But it will not be an easy matter to find, that when the adjective and the substantive have each its particular terminations for these two cases, they ever took, while the purity of the language sub- sisted, the termination peculiar to one case, to join it with the proper and specific termination of the other. Otherwise, how came they to invent different terminations ? Thus Plautus says in the vocative in the very same verse, mens ocellus, and anime mi. Da mens ocellus, da mea rosa, da a^iime mi, Asin. act. 3. sc. 3. But he no where says mi ocellus, nor anime mens. And it is thus likewise that Augustus writing to his nephew, as quoted by Gel- lius, says, Ave mi Cat, yneus ocellus jucundissimus. ^Vhere we find that in the second member he did not choose to say mi ocellus, but vieus ocellus, like Plautus. And when we find in Pliny, Salve pri' mus Imiream merite ; and in Virgil, Nate mea magna potenfia solus, it is because pritnus and solus have no other vocative than that ia US. , Mi was frequent in all genders. Mi sidus, Apul. Mi conjux, Id. And S. Jerome, Testor, mi Paulla, Jesum. Ml is sometimes also a vocative plural formed by contraction for tnei. Mi homines, Plant. 6 mi hospites, Petron. This contraction is likewise usual in Suus, as sis for seis, sos for suos, sas for suas, &c. In regard to which we are however to ob- serve that the ancient passages are sometimes corrupted, and that we should understand sam for earn, and sos for eos. And this mis- take has proceeded from their having taken F for E in the capital letters, and afterwards s fory in the small ones. VII. Pronouns in C, or those compounded of En and Ecce. The pronouns ending in C are not declined but in those cases where they keep the C : as istic, istcec, or istuc. Istunc, istanc, &c. Those that are compounded of eii or ecce, are very usual in the accusative. Eccum, eccam, eccos, eccas ; elliim, eUam, ellos, ellas. And in like manner, eccillum, eccistam, which we find in Plautus. Their nominative also occurs sometimes, though more rarelyi " '■' Hercle ab se ecca exit, Plautus. Chap- w 96 Section II. Chap. II. Book VI. Chapter II. Remarks on the Construction of Pronouns. I. Of llie Cofist ruction of Ipse. E liavc already spoken of the construction of reciprocals in the Syntax, rule 36, for which reason we shall only touch on vvliat is most remarkable in regard to the rest. The pronoun ipse, ipsa, ipsum, is of all persons, and generally joined with the primitives, Ego ipse, tu ipse, itle ipse. But whereas the Latin writers of modern date generally put both these pronouns in the same case, saying, for example, Mihi ipsi placeu ; te ipstim laudas ; sibi ipsi nocuit ; on the contrary, in the purity of the language, ipse is always the nominative of the verb. Jet the other pronoun be in whatever case it will ; Milii ipse placeo ; te ipse laudas ; sibi ipse nocuit ; me ipse consoler, Cic. Resp, per eos regebatur quihus se ipsa commiserat. Id. True it is that in the 1st ep. of the 7th book we find in almost all the printed editions, Reliquas partes diei tu consumebas lis delecta- tionibns, quas tibi ipsi ad arbitrium tuum comparciras. Which Ma- nutius does not altogether condemn. But in this very passage Lambinus and Gruterus read tibi ipse, and this last reading, as Manutius confesseth, is confirmed by the MSS. Ipse by another peculiar elegance expresseth likewise the pre- cise thing or time. I'riginta dies erant ipsi, cum dabam has litteras, Cic. Ciim ibi decern ipsosdiesjidssem. Id. Quin nunc ipsum nondti- bilo rem tantam abjicere, Id. Nunc ipsum ca lego, en scribo, ut ii qui mecum sunt, difficiliiis otium ferant, qucim ego laborem. Id. And hence it is that Plautus was not afraid to make a superlative of it. Ergo ne ipsus ne es ? Jpsissimus, abi Idnc ab oculis, in Trinum. II. Of the Construction of luEU. Vossius and Tursellin before him, have observed that this phrase. Idem cum illo, is not Latin, though Erasmus, Joseph Sca- liger, and some other able writers have made use of it. The ancients used to say, Idem qui, idem ac, alque, et, ut. Peri' patetici iidem erant qui Academici. Cic. Animus erga te idem acjidt, Ter. XJnum &; idem videtur esse atque id quod, &c. Cic. Eadem sit utilitas uniiisciij usque tV univernoruniy Id. In cadem sunt iiijustitid, ut si in suani rem aliena convertniit. It is true that Gellius hath, Ejusdem cum eo musce vir ; of the same profession as himself; but in this he is singular, and should not be imitated ; besides we may say that he speaks of two different persons. So that even if it was right to say, Virgilius e.st ejusdem muscc cum Homero, this would be no proof, continues Vossius, that we might say. Fates A7idinns (Andes was the village where Virgil was born) idem cum Virgilio. Idem, in imitation of the Greeks, is put likewise with the dative. Invilum qui servat, idetn tacit uccidenti. Hor. III. Remarks on- the Constr. of the Prox. 97 III. Of theC(mstruction of the Possessives meus, tuus, &c. and of the Genitives mei, tui, &c. The possessive, generally speaking, signifies the same thing as the genitive of the noun from whence it is formed ; thus domus paterna is the same as domus patris. On some occasions the genitive is more usual than the adjective, Hominum moresy rather than hiimani; Hominum genus, rather than liumaniim, &c. Now the genitive in itself may be taken either actively or pas- sively, pursuant to what we have already observed, p. 16. and consequently so may the possessive : therefore metis, tuus, suus, noster, vester, shall of their own nature have the same sense and force as the genitives mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, of which they are formed. But one thing we are to observe, that those genitives are never put with other substantives, not even understood, whea there is the least danger of ambiguity : so that if you say. Est jiiei prceceptoris, then mei is an adjective coming from meus, and not from ego ; genit. mei. It belongs to my master, and not to me who am a master. This does not hinder however but these genitives may be takea both actively and passively, contrary to the general rule laid dowa by grammarians, who pretend that jnei, tui, &c. are always, taken in the passive sense ; and the possessives, meus, tuus, always in the active sense; for instance, they say thnt amor meus, is always taken actively, that is, for the love which I bear towards another person ; and mnor mei passively, for the love which another bears towards me, and whereby 1 am beloved. But not to mention that these terms active and passive are insuffi- cient to determine these expressions, since there are several of them, in which we can hardly conceive either action or passion, as we shall see in the following examples ; it is beyond all doubt that Latin authors have frequently made use of these genitives or these adjectives, indifferently one for the other ; as we find even in Cicero, who has put the genitive where he might have used the adjective, when he says, Utergue pro sui dignitate et pro reriim magnitudine. Ut sui et Metrudori memoria colatur, nihil malo quam me mei similem esse, illos sui. Quis non inteUigat tud salute contineri suam, et ex unins tui vitam pendere omnium ? Ita se ipse consumptione et senio altevat sui. Imitantes effecturem et genitorem sui. Qidntus misit Jiliicm non solum sui drprecatorem , sed etiam accu- satorem mei. And Terence, Tctigine tid quicquam ? oLc. On the contrary we find that authors have put the possessive Tneus, tuus, suus, where they might have used the genitive mei, tui, sui, as Ego quce tun causa feci, Cic. where he might have said, tui causa. Fro araicitia tua jure doleo, Phil. 10. For the friendship I have for you. lavidia; mecc levandce causa, Cic. The envy which others bear towards me. Utilitatibus tids possum carere : te valere tud causa primum volo, turn mea mi Tiro : where he might have put, Tid causa et mei causa. Nam neque negligentid tud, neque odio idjecit tuo, Ter. He did not do it either out of any slight, or hatred towards you ; where tud and tup are in the active senSe. Vql. II. H And 98 Section III. Chap. I. Book VI. And therefore the true reason why we arc not allowed to sa)', Hie liber est viei, or met interest, but liher est mens, and mcii interesty (sup. causa) is not because one is more passive than the other, but to avoid ambiguity, for we could not tell whether it is viei patris, or ^filii, or another, or whether it be mei ipsiur. Which rock has been always avoided, by making it a rule never to put the primi- tive genitives, where we must understand a substantive that may occasion the least ambiguity. But when there is no such danger, it may be used indifferently. Therefore since there is another noun, there is no longer any danger of being mistaken, Hie liber est mei solius. Tui luiitis, or tua unius interest. Ex tuo ipsius nnimo conjectiiram Jeceris de meo, Cic. Inopis te jiunc miserescat mei, Ter. Miserere mei peccatoris, &c. In regard to which we refer to what has been further said in the Annotation to the 11th rule, p. 24. Section III. REMARKS ON THE VERBS. Chap. I. Of the nature and signification of Verbs. SCALIGER dividing all things in general, in permanentes et fliientes, into that which is permanent, and that which is tran- sient ; and affirming that the nature of the noun is to signify that which is permanent, and the nature of the verb to denote that which is transient, he allows but of two sorts of verbs, active and passive, which are both reduced to the verb substantive, Sum, es, jest; quod est, says he, utriusqiie radix et J'lindamentum. Sanctius maintains the same thing, which he proves by this argument, that between action and passion there can be no medium. Omnis motus cut actio aut passio est, say the philosophers. The reasoning of these authors, as we have made appear in the general and rational grammar, c. 12. proceeds from their not having sufficiently comprehended the true nature of the verb, which consists in denoting an affirmation. For there are words that are not verbs, which denote actions and passions, and even things that are transient, as curs7ts,Jtuens : and there are verbs that signify neither actions nor passions, nor things that are transient, as exisiit, quiescit,J'riget, albet, clarcl, &:c. Therefore, pursuing a more natural and easier method, we may divide the verbs into substantives and adjectives. Verbs substan- tive are those which barely denote the affirmation, as sum, Jlo. Verbs adjective are those which besides the affirmation common to all verbs include also a peculiar signification of their own ; as a?wo, which is tlic same as sum amans ; curro, sum currens, &c. Verbs adjective are, either active, or passive, or neuter ; con- cerning which we refer the reader to the general and rational grammar, Remarks on the Verbs Active. 99 grammar, c. 17. But one thing we are particularly to observe, that there are two sorts of verbs neuter : one which signify no sort of action, as albet, seclet, viret, ndest, quiescit, &c. And the others which signify actions, but such as, generally speaking, do not pass from the agent to any other thing, as prandere, ccenare, amimldre : for which reason the grammarians call them intransitive. Yet the latter sometimes become transitive, and then they are not distin- guished from actives, and they govern the subject or object to which their action passeth in the accusative, as we have observed in the Hth rule. And of these we shall give several examples in the following list : I. List of Verbs Absolute mid Active. or Intransitive, and Transitive. aboleverat, Abolere nomina, S^iet. to efface ihcm. Memoria cladis nondum Uiv, xoai nut yet effaced. Abstiiiere maledictis, Cic. Abhorrere ab re aliqua, Cic, Assuescere labori, Cic. Cachinnare risu tremulo, Lucr, Celerare, alisolutely, Cic. Likewise Accelerare, Cic. Clamaie ccepit, Cic. Ut si inclamaro, advoles, Cic. Coire in unum, Virg. Copcionari de re aliqua, Cic, Constitit Romne, Cic. Delirare, ahsolutely, Cic. Desperare ab aliquo, Cic. Desinas, Tcr. Differre nominibus, Cic. Disputare de re aliqua, Cic. Dubitare de fide, Cic. Durare in asdibus, Plaut. Ejulo, absolvtely, Cic. Emergere regno, Cic, Eructare, simply, Colum. Erumpebat vis, Cic. Exire domo, Cic. Exhalant vapore altaria, Lucr. Festina lent4, Adagium. Flere de morte alicujus, Ovid. Garrire alicui in aurem, Mart, Genoit turtur, Virg. Hyemat mare, Hor. rages. Illucescet ilia dies, Cic Incipit ver, Cic. Inolescit arbor, Virg. Insanire et furere, Cic. Instant operi, Virg. Insuescere alicui rei, Tac. Jurare in verba, Cic, Cas. Laetaris et triumphas, Cic. Latrare et mordere possunt, Cic, Luna luce lucet aliena, Cic. Manere in officio, Cic, Abstinere manus, Id. Abhorrere aliquem, Id, Assuescere bella aniaiis, Virg. Cachinnat exltium meum, Appul, Celerare fiigam, gradum, Virg. Accelerare iter, Cmsar. Morientem nomine clamat, Virg: - Comitem suum inclamare, Cic, Coire societatem, Cic. Concionari aliquid, Liv. Consistere vitam, Luc. for constituere. Quicquid delirant reges, Hor. Desperare vitam, salutem, Cic, Desinere artem, Cic. DifFerre tern pus, Cic, Hot: Disputare aliquid, Id. Dubitare aliquid, Cic, Virg. Durare imperiosius aequor, Hor. Ejulabam fortunas meas, Appul. Serpens se emergit, Cic, Eructare caedem bonorum, Cic. Erumpere stomachum in aliquem, Cii. Exire tela, vim, Virg. for vilare. Exhalare crapulam, Cic Feslinare iras, Hor. Fugam, Virg, Funera alicujus flere, Ovid. Garrire libellos, Hor. Gemere plagam acceptam, Cic. Hyemare aquas, Plin, to cool them. Dii illuxere diem. Plant. Incipere facinus, Plaut. Natura inolevit nobis amorem nostri, Gell. Insanire errorem, //or. Insaniam, P/aw^. Instare currum, Plaut, Insuevit pater optimus hoc me, Jurare morbum, Jovem, Cic. Hot, Maria, Virg. Utrumque lastor, Cic. Latrare aliquem, Hot. Lucere facem alicui, Plaut,. ' Manere aliquem, Hor. Virg, io wait for Him. H "2 Morari 100 Section III. Chap. I. Book VI. Morari sub dio, fJor. Mussit.ire, absolulelij, I.h. Nocet enita dolore voluptas, Ilor. Offcn^lcre in arro^antiam, Cic. I'ascontes agni, V'trg. Penetrat ad auips, (Jvid. Porgere, simvly, Cic. Ter. Pcrseverare in errore, Cic, Plauilere sibi, Hor. Cic. Pcrgere et propcrare, Cic. y Qiierebatur cum Deo qubd parum longi viveret, Cic. Remisit pestilentia, Lit. Requiescere in sella, Cic. Resultant colics, Virg. Ridere intempestiv^. Quint. Ruit urbs, nox, dies, Virg. Rutilant arma, l^irg. do shine. Sapit ei palatus, Cic. Spirant aura;, Virg. Sistere, simjly, Cic. Jn the same manner Subsistere, Sonat graviter, Virs. Sufficit animus malls, Ovid, Superabat pecunia, Cic. Supersedeas hoc labore, Cic. Suppeditaut ad victum, Cic. Transmittere, in an absolute sense. Suet. Tardare et commorari, Cic. Tinniunt aures sonitu, Calul. Trepidat corde, Cic. "Variat fortuna, Liv. Nihil purpuiam moror. Plant. Mussit c s'xmal gestanti, imports, Being carried in the fame iiUer, Habeo. Remarks on the Verbs Active. 101 Habeo. Quis hie habet ? Plant, for se habet, or habitat. Video jam quo itividia trauseat, ubi sit habi- tura, Cic. Where it will fix its resi- dence, Man. Ingemino. Ingeminant curae : clamor ingemiiiat. Vug. Iksin'uo. Insinuat pavor, Virg. Pru- dentia est ut penitus in^inutt in cau- sam, ut sit cura et cogitaiione iaten- tus, Cic. Lavo. Lavanti regi nunciatum est, Liv, Lavamus et tosidemus ex con- suetudine, SuintU. Lenio. Dum hae consilescunt turbae, atque irae leniunt, Ter. lHovEO. Terra movit, Suet. And in like manner Promoveo, Macrob. MuTO. Mortis metu mutabunt, Sal, for mutabuatur. Which has puzzled several, ^ho not understanding this passage, would fain alter the reading. But Tacitus has expressed himself in the same sense, Vannius diuturnitate in superbiam mutans. And Tertul- lian frequently useth the word in the same signification. It is the same in regard to Demuto. Aqua paululum demutavit liber, Appul. Pasco. We say, Juventa pascit, S^ pascitur, in the same meaning, says Conseniius, Prscipito. Fibrenus statim praeci- pitat in Lirim. Cic. QuAsso. Laetum siliqua quassante le- gumen, Virg. Vox activa ac signifi- catio pa-siva est, says Ramus. Sub- ducunt lembum capitibus quassaiiti- bus, Plant. RuGO. Vide palliolum ut nigat, Plant. Sedo. Pi.tquam tempestas sedavit, Cn. Velleius, cpud Gell. ToNDEO. Candidior postquam tondenti barba cadebat, Virg. Incanaque menta Cinyphii tondent hirci, Virg. i. e. tondentur. Turbo. Et septemgeajini turbant Ire- pida ostia Nili, Firg. Vario. Variant undtC, Prop, for va- riantur. Veho. Adolescentia per medias landes quasi quadrigis vehens, Cic. Triton uatantibus inrehens beiluis ; Cic. i. e. qui invehitur. Verto. Libertatem aliorum in suam vertisse ser^•itutem conquerebantur, Liv. Vertens annus, Cic. in somnio, for conversus. 2und turn in morem. verteral. Tacit. Which was become an established custom. And in like manner Averto. Turn prora avertit et undis dat latus, Virg. Converto. Regium imperium in superbiam, dominationemque coa- vertit, Sail, in Cutil. Vestio. Sic et in proximo sorer ciri- tas vestiebat, Terlull. dressed herself in the same manner. Parcius pasco, levius vestio, App. Volvo. Olim volventibus annis, Virg. VoLUTO. Genibu?que volutans, Id. What evinceth that we ought to understand the accusative me^ se, or such hke after these verbs, is their being sometimes ex- pressed. Callidus assentator ne se insinuet cavendum est, Cic. And if any one should insist that they are then intirely passive, I desire to know of him, says Vossius, hove those verbs can be called pas- sive, which cannot admit of a passive construction, since we are not permittedtosay, atleast in a passive sense, Ingeminat ab lis clamor. Terra a ventis movet, &c. Now tliis remark, as well as most of those here touched upon, is as necessary for understanding Greek as Latin, which we have sufficiently shewn in the New Method of learning the Greek tongue. III. List of Verbs Passive taken actively. There are likewise a great many verbs passive, which are some- times taken in an active sense, being invested with the nature of verbs common, or deponent. AFFECTOR,/or Affecto. Affectatus est regnum, Var. Avertor, for Averto. Quam surda miseros avertitur aure, Boiet. Bellor, fur Beli-o. Pictis beljantur Amazones armis, Virg. Censeor, for Censeo. Martia censa est banc inter comites suas, Ovid. Voluisti macrnum agri modum cen- seri, Cic. pro Flacc. Census est man- cjpia Amynts, Ibid, Com- 102 Section III. Chap. I, Book VI. CoMML'NicoR, for CoMMUNico. Cum quibus spcin integrum communicati noil sint, Liv. CoMHERIOIlj/or COMPERIO, Hal. CoNsiLioR, for CoNSiLio, as. Consi- lietur atnicis, //or. Lei him adiise his friends. CoPULOR, for Coi'ULO, according to Prls- cinn and \oni:js. Adeunt, consistunt, copulantur dextras, Pla'tt. Erumpi R, for Erump >. Cum vis Exa- gitata forjis erumpilur, Lucr. And in like munntr Perrumi'or. Fabiucor, fur Fabrico. Capitolii fas- tigiiim necessitas fabricata est, Cic. TLVCTVOR.fvr Fll'ctuo. Utrius populi victoriam mallet, iluctuatus animo fuerat, LiV' JURATUS SUM,/0'- JUKAVI, CtC, MvnoR, fur Multo. Rebellaiites mul- tatus est pcEua. Suel. MuNEROR, for MuNERo. Alcxjo me opiparfe imuicratus est, Cic. See Gellius and Dvim. In like manner, Remuneror, for Re- MUNERO. MURMUROR,/(.r MURMURO, Appul. . NUTRICOR, for NUTRICO, or NUTRIO. Munilus omnia nutricatur etcontinet, Cic. pERAGRon, for Peracro. Peragratus est regionem, Vel'eius. Peru NOR, /or Per lino. Ab imis nngui- bus sese totam ad usque summus capilios perlila, Appul. PiGNEROR,/or PicNERO, Ceil. Non. Pn.EVERTOR, for Pr.bverto, Plant. Liv. Cur. Tac. But in the preterite we say only Pr.TiVerti. PuNioR, for PuNio, Cic. Punilus es inimicum, pro Mil. QuiRiTOR, /or QuiRiTO, Varr. RuMisoR,/yr RuMiNO, Varr. Sacrificor, for Sacrifico, Gell. Varr, Nun. Saturor, for Saturo. Nee dum anti- quum saturata dolorem, Virg. for cum nondum saturavisset. SpEcroR, for Specto. Spectatus est suem, Varr. SuppEDiTOR, /or SuppEDiTO. Qnod mihi suppeditatus es, gratissimum est, Cic. UsL'RPOR,/or UsuRPO. Mulier usurpata duplex cubile, Cic. The reader may see several others in Vossius, and still more in Nonius, but which are very little, if at all in use. IV. List of Deponents, which are taken passively. On tlie other hand there are a great many deponents, which are taken passively, and then if they occur in a passive sense in Cicero, or in some considerable autlior, they may be called com- mon, since they have both significations. But if they are not to be found except in very ancient authors, they ought rather to bear the name of deponents, since in the most frequent use they have lost one of their significations. AsoMrNOR. Ante omnia abominari semimares, Liv. speaking of monsters. Sa;viti;'ique eorum abomiuaretur ab omnibus. Verrius hlaccus apud Prise. Adipiscor. Amitti magis quani adi- pisci, h'ab. Max. Non ajtate, veriim ingeiilo adipiscitur sapientia, Plant. Admiror. Turpe est piopter venusta- tem vestimeutorum admirari, Canu- tius ad Prise. AnoRioR. Ab his Gallos adortos, Aurel. apud Prise. Adulor. Adujati erant ab amicis, et adhortati, Cass, apud Prise. Ne adulari nos sinamus, Cie. Bulxee say also adulo. See the next List, Agcredior. Ut a te fictis aggrederer donis, Cic. Aggressus labor, Terent. Maur. Amplector. Ego me non sinam am- plectier, Lucil. Animam nostro amplexam in pectore, Petron. Antestor. Impubes non potest ante- stari, Liv. teste Prisciano. ARBns;OR. Arbitrata quaestio, Gell. Ex scriptis eorum qui veri arbitran- tur, Ceelius apud Prise. AsPERNOR. Qui est pauper, aspernatur, Cic. ad Nepot. AssEcroR. Asjicctari se omnes cupiunt, ASSCQV^K. Remarks on the Verbs Deponent. 103 AssEQUOR. Nihil horutn investigari, nihil assequi poterit, Cic. AucuROR. Certaque res augurantur, L. Ctzs. Tlrgil has liJceivise made use of the active. Si quid veri mens avigurat. Blandior. Branditus labor, Verrius. Cavillor. Lepido sermone cavillatus, passively, Appul. CoiiORTOR. See HOUTOR. CoMiTOR. Uiio comitatus Achate, Vng. Jam salutantur, jam comitan- tur, Just, CoMPLECTOR. Quo uno maledicto scelera omnia complexa esse videantur, Cic. Cupio eum tarn invidiosi fortuna compleoti, Cic. for comprehendi. ac^ cording to Priscian. CoNSEQUoR and Consector. Quae vix ab omnibus consequi possunt, Orbii. a'jtid Priic, A populo lapidibus consectarl, haver. apud eundem. See sector, lower down. Consolor, Cum animum vestrum erga me video, vehemeuter consolor, 2. Metell. apud Gell. Consolabar ob ea quas timui, ./Isin. Pol', apud Prise. CoNSPicoR. Paupertas base non ita nutricata ut nunc conspicatur, Varr. apud Prise. Patrem non vult prius conspicari, Plnut. Criminor. Criminor defendere res Syllauas, Cic. They charge me with. Criminatus Asinus, Appul. Demolior and Immolior. Nusquam demolitur, iiusquara exoueratur pe- cunia, Cur. apud Prise. Immolitum & inaedificatum est in loca publica, Liv. Detestor. Bellaque matribus detes- tata, Hor. In honestissimo ccetu detestari, .^pp. DiGNOR, Cuitu quodam & honore dig- nari, Cic, Virg, to be thought voorihy of. BoMiNOR. O domus antiqua ! Heu quara dispari dominare domino ! Cic-. 1. Offic. But it bears an active sense in this passage of Virgil. Urbs anti- qua ruit multos dominata per annos, as Vossius observelh, though R. Stephen and Alvarez were of a contrary opi- nion. Enitor. Enixus piier, Sev. Sulp. just born. Experior. Virtus experta atque per- specta, Cic. Experienda ratio, P. Nigid. Pari. Fasti dies sunt in quibus jus fatur, i. e, dicitur, Suet. Fateor. Hunc excipere qui publicus esse fnteatur, Cic. Frustror. Frustratus a spe & devic- tus, Fenest. Frustramur, irridemur, Laver. apud Prise. Gi-ORiOR. Beata vita glorianda & praedicanda est, Cic. HoRTOR. Hortatus est in convivio i scorto, Cic. -.chere others read exora- tus. But in Ausonius tve find, Ex- hortatoque somno, ut eum mitteret soporem, iSfc. And Gellius informs us that they said, hortor te, & hortor abs te, lib. 15. cap. 13. Consulem indicunt uententiam expromere, qui hortaretur Clodius despondere Domi- tio, Tacit. Imitor. Si natura non feret ut quae- dam imitari possint, Cic. Imitata & efficta simulacra, Cic. Immolior. See Molior. iNsmioR. In legatis insidiandis, vel in servis soUicitandis, Cic. Interpretok. In testanientis vo- luntates testantium interpretantur, Paul, Jurisc. S. Austin and S. Je^ rome often take it in this sense. Ita illud somnium interpretatum est, Cic. for which reason Gell. lib. \5, c. 13. looks upon it as common. Machinor. Machinata fames, Sail, apud Prise. Meditor. Meditata sunt mihi omnia incommoda, Ter. Et quae meuitata & prasparata infe- runtur, Cic. Tractantur lenocinia, adulteria me- ditantur, Minut. Felix. Metior. Orbe si sol amplior, an pe- dis unius latitudine metiatur, Arnob. Moderor. Omnes virtutes mediocri- tate esse moderatas, Cic. MoDULOR. Lingua modesta & modu- lata, Gell. MoLioR. Pompa moliebatur. App. Immolitum & inaedificatum est in loca publica, Liv. Nan'ciscor. Nacta libertate, App. Obliviscor. Nunc oblita mihi tot car- mina, Virg. Consuetudo scribendi quae oblivisci non potest, Schol. Juven. in Sat, T. Ordiob. Ordita lectio, Diom. Cum fuerint orsa fundamenta, Colum. Bo- nae res a raro initio exorsae, Vxsel. apud Prise. But OscuLOR. Which most grammariant give as an example of the verb com- mon, is not perhaps to be found in good authors, except in the active sense, as, Vossius obseivtifl. Thost who use it , ClhtT' 10-i Section III. Chap. I. Book VI. olhe'tKise, may hnwevr defend ihem- selves by the testimony <,J Viclorinin, Prisiiifi, Cle.lonnis, atid other ancient granituar^ans, wkn tcuul'l liu'dly have ranked itin th'n number, unlea llicii had found ^ome aiii/i(iritt/ JVr it, tliongh as they have not jiruduccd any, the l>est -jcay is to a'<.oid it. Yet they used to say ancienliy, oscul'>, as we skill see m the nert I si, f'Om wk nee mi^hl cme the pu^si:e (.sculor. PACitcon. Filia pacta alicui, Tac, Plin. Liv, promised in marriage. Percontor. Percaiitatucn pretium, Appul. !Pericmtor. Periclltari omnium juia, si siniilitudiiiL-s accipiuntur, Cic.toere in danger. N'ln est saepiiis in iino homine salus pei'iclitanda Reip. In Culil. Por-ncEOR. Ut aliis statute pollicean- tur, M'-tell. Sumid. PopuLOR. Qui nunc populati atque vexati, Cic. But ne sny likewise po- pulo. See the next ii>t. Potior. Ne potiretur mall, Tir. in Pii-R. Accvrdin^ to Priscian is taken i'l an active and passive signiji- caiiun, and is even jolnedin both senses tcith an adjective fioverned by the pre- position, for Stipulur a tc, is taken for intfiTogo te, and inteirogor a te : just as u-e say, Quxro a te in an activs sense ; I ask you. Minae quas a le est stipulatus Pseudolus, Plaul. in an active sense. Ni dolo stipulatus sis. Plant, in a passive sense, Cicero hat/i likevi ise, stipulata pecunia, in a passive sense, Testor. Ha;c quae testata sunt &. il- Instria, Cic, Tueor. Quod a rusticis Romani alcv bantur &i tuebantur, Vurro. Tlor. Tutus ab hostibus, Cic. Tutus a calure & frigore, Cic. Tuendam babere sedem, Cic. Veneror. Cursusque dabit venerata secundos, Virg. Vereor. This is among the verbs com- monin Getlius, lib, 15. c. 13. where he says that both vereor te, and ve- reor abs te are used, Ulciscor. Quidquid ulcisci nequitur. Sail, Utor. Supellex qua; non utitur, Gell. Ilia aslas magis ad baec utenda est idonea, Ter. In like manner, Abutor. Abusia jam omnibus locii, 3. Hurt, Several other verbs of the like nature may be seen in Priscian and Vi)S?-ius, whereby it appeareth, says he, that there are more verbs common than one would imagine ; though we ought not to make a separate class of the\n distinct from the deponents, because in common practice most of them have dropped one of their signi* fications ; and even among the deponents themselves we do not make two different classes, one for those that have an active signi- fication, as pr^cor, I pray,y«/eor, I confess ; the other for those which are pa-sive, as pascor, I am fed, nascor, I am born. But what \h most remarkable in these verbs deponent or com- mon, is thi'ir |)articiple of the preterite tense, which generally occurs in both significations, whereas the tenses of the verb are less ustial. Examples hereof may be seen in this very chapter, and we shall give some more in the remarks on the participles. V. List of Delwyients that are terminated in O and in OR. There are likewise a great many deponents, which in the same signification, are terminated in O. But most of them -}• occur Remarks on the Verbs Deponent. 105 occur only in very ancient authors. There are some few indeed that have been adopted b}"^ other writers, as the following list will shew. Adulo, Cii. Ex veleri poeld, VaL Max. Adulor, Ck. b\ alii, more u<:nal. Alterco, for Alter COR. Scio cum patre altercasti dudum, Ter. AssESTio, and Assentior, 'xere in use, according to Gellius, Nonius, and Diomedrs. The former occurs the of/enest in MSS. and the latter in printed editions, saijs Vossius. Amplecto, for Amflector. Like- wise Amplexo, and Amplexor, ac- cording to Pr/scian. ylnd in Cic. Au- toritatem censorum amplexato. Pro Clu. Aucupo, for Accupor. Aucupare ex insidlis quid agatur. Plant. Aucu- pans, is in Cic, AuGURO, for AuGUROR. Praescntit ani- mus & augurat, Cic. Auspico, for AuspicoR, Prise. Non. Fest, Cachinno, Lucr. for Cachinnou, Cic. CoMiTo, for CoMiTOR. Stygias comi- tavit ad undas, Ovid, CUNCTO, Plaut. CUNCTOR, Cic. Depasco. Si hodie roscidas herbas de- paverint, PUn. Depascor. Belluaj depascuntur sata. Id. Febris depascitur artus, Virg, Frondes depastus amaras, Claud. DicNO, /:>»■ DiGNOR, Prise. Uiom. EjVLO,for Ejulor, Piisc. Elucubro, and Ei.ucubror. Epistola quam eram elucubratus, Cic. Quic- quid istud est quod elucubravimus, Colum. ExPERGisco, for Expurgiscor. Phi- loxeniis, Hyginus, Dodtlieus, Isaac Vossius. Fabrico, oKri Fabricor, Cic. FnusTRo, /or Frustror. Nod frustrabo vos milites, Cffi. Frutico, Colum. Plin. for Fruticor, which Ciceio makes use of. Imito, /or Imitor, Varr. apudNon. Impertio, and Impertior, Cic. Insidio, fm- Insidior, in the Civil Law. JuRGO, /or JoRGOR, Cic. apud Non. ex xii. Ta/ml. Lacrvmo, Ter. Ovid, for Lacrymor, Cic. hx.TO,for LiETOR, Piisc. Larcio, far Largiob, Prise, ex Sal, Non. EuDiFico^/or LuDiFicoR, Plaut. LuxuRio, Non. ex Virg. LuxoRios, Colum. Plin. Medico. Medicare semiiia, F/r^. But Medicor is taken Ixrth actively and passively: medicatoe fruges, P'irg. Mereo, /or Mereor, Cic. Quid enim mereas, Cic. Merui, Virg. Cic, Meto, as, Virg. in. Culice. Metor, aris, more usual. Metari castra, Liv. Sallvsl. to set out a camp, to encamp. But we find also, castra melata, Liv. in a passive sense. Misero, and Miseror. And in the same manner Misereo, and Mise- REOR, /ro>« whence Cometh, Miseret, and Miseretur, mth Mi- SEREsco, and Commiseresco, Mise- rescimus ultro, Virg. Per fidem Myrmidonum, commise- rescite, Non. ex Enn. MoDERO, for MoDEROR, Non. Docet moderare animo, Plaut. MoLio, for MoLiOR, Piisc. mid in the same manner Demolio, Demolivit tectum, Varr. MuNERO, /or MuNEROR, Non. Opino, for Opinor, Prise, and Non, ex Plaut. £^ deed, Opitulo, /or Opitulor, Non. OscuLO, for OscuLDR. Laudor quod oscuiavi privignas caput, Titin. apud Non. Palfo, /or Palpor, Juv, Partio, for Partior, Non. ex Plaui. £f aliis. Patio, /or Patior, Nrev, PoLLicEO, for PoLLiCEOR. Ne dares, ne polliceres, Varr. apud Non. PopuLO, for PoPULOR. Forruicas farris acervum cum po|)u!ant, l^i g. PR«r,io,/or Pn.T.i.ion, Enn. Reciproco, Lit". Reciprocor, Cic. Reminisco, for Reminiscor, S. Ansl, Reverto, for Revertor, Si Romam rerertisset, Cic. who uses it ordy in the tenses of the preterite. Rixo, /or RixoR, Varr. RuMiNO. Kuminat berbas, Ttrg^. RuMiNOR, Colum. Stipijlo is not to be found in ancient writers; bid only Stipulor, Voss. See the preceding list. Vago, fur Vagor. Lib. vagat per auras, Pntd, VfitlFICO, lOG Section III. Chap. II. Book VI. Vkmfico, Plin. Hence cometh, vcli- Vocirnno. Si hoc vociferare vrlini ficatus Athos ; hut Cicero always puis quam dignum sit, &,c. Cic. in V'err. . \eli(icor in Ihe active sense, Vociferor. Quid vociferabare (Jo- tin ISO, and on, Plin. lo dive. cem millia taleiita babinio es^e pro- VENEno, /6>; Veneror, Plant. Ut ve- missa ? Cic, nerem Luciiiam. We might collect some more from the ancient grammarians ; but in regard to practice, care must be taken to imitate the best authors. Chapter 11. Of the difference of Tenses and Moods. I. Of Tenses. IT will be of use to observe the different force, and natural sfg" nification of each tense. For besides that considerable difti" culties may sometimes arise in regard to this article, and that even the most learned among the Romans, as Gellius calls them, were heretofore divided in opinion whether surreptum crit, was to be understood of the time past or to come, since we find in the same author, that one of the questions proposed, was whether scrinserm^ legerim, venerim, were of the preterite or future tense, or ot both ; it is beyond all doubt that on many occasions, we do not sufficient- ly understand the force of the expression, nor can we tell why we rise particular modes of speaking, nor the method of explaining them, miless we are thoroughly acquainted with the nature of these things. But in order to do this with perspicuity, we cannot, I think, follow a more natural division of the tenses of verbs, than that which we have given in the rudiments. For in the nature of things there are only three tenses, the present, the jiast, and the J'nture ; but the inflexion of a verb may, either simply express one of these three tenses, or mark two of tliem together in regard to two diffe- rent things; and thus the tenses of the verbs may be called, either Simple or CoMrouxDED in the sense : concerning which the reader may see the general and rational grammar, ch. 14. We are further to observe for the Latin termination, that here- tofore the futures of the two last conjugations were terminated also in BO ; as cxpcclibo, in Plautus, Aperibo, dormibo^ repelibitur : red-r dibitiir, for rcddctur, and others. But Scioppius maintains that the third terminated in ebo, and not in ibo, like the fourth, and that we ought to read, reddebo, reddebiiicr, asjtigcbo for Jhgiani, Jidebo for fidam, &c. II. Of Moods. In the rudiments I reduced the moods to four, for the reasons* expressed in that place, and in the advertisement to the reader ; in regard to which you may see the General and Rational Grammar, ch. 15. and 16. I shall only add that this ghould not be esteemed a no- Remarks on the Tenses and INIoods. 107 a novelty, since Palemon, a more ancient writer than Quintilian, admits of no more. Sanctius and after him Scioppius, go a great deal further ; for they cut them off' intirely, as well as Ramus, and allow of no other moods or manners of the verb than those which are derived from adverbs, whose chief office is to determine the signification of the verb, as bene, male, midtum,fortiter, parum, &c. This is what induced them to make another distinction of the tenses, dividing every one of them into j^rima Sf sectinda, and say- ing for example, Pr^sens primum Amo; Prcesens secundum Amem: Imperfectum primum Amabam : Imperfectum secundum Amarem,&c. And as for the future they put three, making the imperative pass for the third. This is not without foundation, because, as we shall see hereafter, the tenses of the subjunctive and of the indicative are oftentimes indiscriminately taken for one another. Yet as this disposition does not make the matter at all shorter, and one way or other, we must still be acquainted with so many different tenses, I have thought proper to conform as much as possible to the ordinary method, because in regard to matters once established, we should make no alteration without great reason and necessity. III. Of the 'Subjunctive. The subjunctive always expresseth a signification dependent on and as it were connected with something; hence in every tense it partaketh in some measure of the future. In the present ; as Si ceqiie in posterum me ames. De qua utinam aViqunndo tecum loquar, Cic. And Quintilian has taken notice, that when Virgil saith, Hoc Ithacus velit, this velit denoted the time future. Hence it is frequently the same thing to say, Si amemy ■ or si amabo ; si legas, or si leges. And perhaps it is in consequence hereof tJhat some ecclesiastic authors have now and then put one for the other, taceam for tacebo ; indnlgeam for indulgebo. Sidon. Adihipleam for adimplebo ; mandem for mandabo, Greg. Tur. unless we have a mind to say that then the futures of the two first conju- gations have made an exchange, and form their termination in am, as the others in bo ; but we meet with no examples hereof among the ancients. But the imperfect of this mood, over and above its proper sig- nification, sometimes denotes also the present and future, and therefore it hath three different significations. That of the time present. Ctim Titius studia midtum amaret, since he loved. That of the time past, Cum studia 7uagis amaret qiu)m nuncjacit. That of the future, Op)eram dedisses quam debebas, rnagis te ama)-em posthac. The perfect in RIM is also taken for the future. Ne mora sit si inniierim quin pugnus continuo in mala, hccreat, Ter. Jv^su tuo, im- peratory extra ordinem nunquam pugnaverim, non si certam victoriam videam, Liv. Aiifugerim potius qumn redeam, Ter. Videor sperare posse si te viderim, 8^ ea quce pretnant S)- ea quce impendeant me facile transiturum, Cic. if I can see you, or when I shall be able to see you, the same as si te videro. And therefore we may say, Romcc «i crasjiierim, forjicero, tlie same as Romce si heri/uerim. But the future, 108 Section III. Chap. II. Book VI, future in RO is ahvays compounded (as we have already observed) of the past and the future ; so that we cannot say, Romcr si hcrifuero. To these Sanctius further addeth the plu-perfcct, pretending that it partaketh likewise of the future : as NonuuUi etinm Cti'saH otuntiabant, qinim castru viuveri, aut sig/ui Jbti jussisscl , itoii Jure dido audientesj 1. 15. Gail. Juravit se ilium st atim interject urum,ni!>ijus- Juraitdum sibi dedisset sc pat rem misstim esse Jhctur urn, Cic. Vcrum (iHccps fuerat belli fortiuia ; fuisset^ ^^^t^- Besides the usual terminations, the subjunctive had hereto- fore another in IM. Aiisini, Jaxim^ as we likewise meet with Duiiv, ^;crf/»2»i, crcdutm, in comic writers. Others add more- over the termination in XO, as Ja.co, nxo, and the like. But of these we shall take proper notice hereafter in the chapter of Defec- tive Verbs. IV. That zve may oftentimes put the Indicative or the Subjunctive indifferently one for the other. The best authors have very indifferently made use of the indi- cative o the subjunctive, one for the other. We shall give here the following examples taken mostly from Budeus and Scioppius, •who can supply the reader with a great many more. Chrysalus tnilii nee recte loquitnr quia tibi aurum reddidi, & quia te non defraudaverim, Id, Me habere honorem ejus ingenio dicet, <'uin me adiit. Id. fur adierit. Tu humaiiissiiDe ftcisti, qui me certio- rem fecens, Cx. Stult^ fe<;i. qui huncamisi, Plant. Abi, atque ilia si jam laverit, mihi re- iiuntia, Ter. for iavit. Non potest dici, qiiim indignum faci- niis fecisti, Plant. J'nr feceris. Quern eiiiin rectptum in gratiam sum- mo studio defondetim, hunc afflictum violare non dcbi n, Cic.for defendi. I'or the iilii-pfrftct. F-xportationcm uon parvam attuleras cum scrip-eras, /o> scripsisses, /(/. Castera qua; ad le Vibullius scripsisset, erant in his litteris quas tu ad Lentu- !uni misisses, O'c. /or miseras.' Qui fui>set e°rentissimus in re sui, erat ul 111 insolens in alien^, Cic. fnr fue- rat. Verinn anceps pugnec fuerat fortuna; fuisspt. Vug. perhaps it uM be said that ilf issve of Ihf engogrment had bern douhlftilf bf it so. Where furrnt implies the same as fuisset which followeth. For llie future. Venerem veneremur, ut nos adjuverit hodie, Plant, for adjuvct. llluc sursum ascendero, inde optimfe dispellam virum, Id. for ascen- daiu. Ne For the present. Quin ta agis ut velis ? Plant, for ut vis. Loquere quid tibi est ? & quid nostram velis operam ? Id. Nunc dicam cujus jussu venio, & quam- cbrem venerim, Id. he might have said, et qu.itnobrem veni, or cujus ju-su veniam, ^l'f. Pebetis velle qua; velimus, Plaul. for volumu-s. Quid est quod tu sris ? Id. j4nd in another place, quid est id quod sciiis ? Video quam rem agis, Id, Seio quam rem a^at, Id. Quid est nejiotii tjuod tu tam subit6 ah' as ? for abi', Id. Si est helium civile, quid nobis facien- dum sit igtioro, Cic. for si sit. lor I he 'mpetffct, Non dici pote-i qniiui cupida eram hue redeundi, Ter fi'i essem. Autoritas tanta pian& me movebat, nisi tu nppi suis-sps non minorem tuam, Cic.for moveif-t. jKum P. Drcius ciim «c drvoveret, & equo admii'O in mcdiam aciem ir- ruebat ; aliqtiid de voiuptatibus co- gi'abat ; Id. for irruf rft. Bcae^nla qu<.ii.i(iie snnuiatqne luceret, f»c.-bat omnibus sui conveniendi po- testatem, Cir.fn lucubat. For the perfect. Obsecro te ut mibi ignosoas, quod ani- mi impos, vini vitio fecerim, Plaut. for feci. Remarks on the Tenses and Moods. 109 Ne tu linguam coinprimes posthac, e- Te rogo ut advoles, reepir&ro si te vi- tiam illud quod scies, nesciveris. Id. dero, Cic.foT respirabo. for nescies. This seems to favour the opinion of Ramus and Sanctius, who would not admit of the diversity of moods, though with the con- junctions there are certain differences to observe, as we shall she^r hereafter. V. Of the Imperative, The imperative, as we have above observed, is often taken for a third future ; which is undoubtedly owing to an imitation of the Hebrews, who call it the first future, and the common future they call the second. And indeed we can command only in regard to the time to come, as the grammarian AppoUonius observeth, lib. de Sijnt. cap. 30. Hence it is that the author of the rules by ques- tions attributed to S. Basil, establishes this as a principle for the right understanding of the sacred Scripture, as when the Vulgate says, FiantJUii ejus orphani, Ps. 108. for Jient. We find also that the future is frequently used for the impera- tive, not only in the case of divine precepts, No7i occidcs, non Jii- raberisf &c. but likewise in profane authors, Tu hcec silebis, Cic. Ciceronem pucrum curabis Sf amabis. Id. for cura 8^ ama. Sed va- lebis, nieaque negotia videbis, meqiie ante brumam expectabis^ Id. ad Trebat. for vale ; cura ; expecta : and the like. Hence also it comes tliat Sanctius laughs at those who distin- guish betwixt ama and amato, as if one related to the time present, and the other to the future, and as if they were not often joined in the same sense and in the same passages : Aut si es dura, nega : si)i es non dura, venito, Propert. Et potuni pastas age Tityre, ^ inter agendum Occtirsare capro (cornuferit illej caveto, Virg. And in the Georgics, after saying, Nudus am, sere nudus^ he adds, Primus humumjbdita, &c. The plural persons in nto, are scarce ever used except in the enacting of laws, Sunto, cavento, &c. Ad divos adeunto castCy Cic. 3. de Leg. And those in minor which I have entirely left out, are not per- haps to be found in any good author. But if any one should ask how there can be an imperative in the verb passive, since what comes to us from others does not seem to depend upon us, so as to be an object of our command ; we answer that undoubtedly it is because the disposition and cause thereof is frequently in our power : thus we say, Amator ah hero ; docetor a prceceptore ; that is, act so as to make your master love you : suffer yourself to be taught something. And in like manner the rest. VI. Of the Infinitive. The infinitive, as we shall shew hereafter in the chapter of jmpersonals, n. 1. is properly that which ought to be called impersonal, because it hath neither number nor person. But Sanctius, after Consentius, pretends that it is also indefinite in regard J 10 Section III. Chap. II. Book VI. regard to tenses ; and A. Gellius seems to be of the same way of tliinkiiig, because, said he, as we say volo legcre, we say likewise volui iegere. For wliich reason Saactius would not even have it to be made a distinct mood, and we may say that it is not one in fact, but only virtually and in power, inasmuch as it may be resolved by all tlie other moods. This may serve to explain several passages whose construction seemeth extraordinary, and is therefore referred to an enallage, which is not at all necessary among the figures, as hereafter we shall shew. Therefore when we read in Terence, Cras mihi argenlum dare se dixit : Sanctius saith that dare is not there for dahirum, and" that it only supposeth for itself, because dare may be a future, be- ing undetermined and of itself indifferent to all tenses. And it is the same as when Virgil says : Progeniem scd enim Trojajio ^ sanguine duci Audierat, Tyrias olim quce verteret arces. ^Vliere duci denotes a real future, because of itself it is indiffe- rent to all the tenses. In like manner in Cic. Qui brevi tempore sibi succedi putarent. Who believed that they %vere to be soon suc- ceeded : where he means the future. And according to this au- thor it is thus we ought to explain an infinite number of passages, where we see the infinitive put sometimes for one tense, sometimes for another ; as Eo die midta verbafecimus, mnximeque visi sumiis senatum conunovere, Cic. where commovere signifieth the time past. Sed ego idem qui in illo sermone nostra, qui est expositus in Bruto, mul- tum tribuerim Latinis, recordor longe omnibus unum antejerrc De- onosthenem, Cic. where anteferre is the same as antetuUsse. Hoc me memini dicere, Cic. that I did say. Ego illam vir-ginem forma hon& memini me videre, Ter. for 77ie vidisse, I remember to have seen. Dictus et Amphion Thebance conditor nrcis Saxa movere sono testudinis, S^ prece blandd Ducere quo vellet Hor. movere for movisse. Ccelera spero prolixa esse, Cic. where esse signifies the future. Again, Spe7-o amicitiam nostram non egere iestibus, Id. I hope our friendship will not have occasion for witnesses. Nee ille intermisit affirmare sine mora venire, Id. Magna me spes tenet, judices, bene mihi evenirc, quod miliar ad mortem, Id. And the like. For though we do not deny but in joining different verbs together, there may be an assemblage and comparison of different tenses, and of one action in regard to another ; yet it seems to be often the case that this distinction of tenses is not sufficiently clear, and that the two verbs mark but one precisely, to which of course we ought to attribute the action expressed by the infinitive. At least this is Sanctius's opinion, which seems to be authorised by the preceding examples, and those which we shall further add. For Thereby we see likewise what error it is to believe with Agroe- cius and L. Valla, that we cannot join memini with the preterite of the infinitive, and that we ought to say, memini me facere, and notfocisse, for this reason, they say, that as memini sufficiently in- cludeth the sigoification of the preterite, it is superfluous to join •I another Remarks on the Tenses and Moods. Ill another preterite to it ; because fecisse supposeth all the tenses, as well as facere ; and we find that Cicero and others have frequently- used the like expressions. Meministi me ita distribrnsse causam, Cic. Tihi me pertnisisse memini. Id. Memini me non sumpsisse quem accusarem, sed recepisse quern defenderem, 3. in Verr. Memini summos Juisse in nostra civitate viros, 1. de leg. and an infinite number of others. But this does not happen only to memini i it seems on several other occasions that this tense in isse is put indeterminately for all the rest. As when Virgil says : Magnum si pectore possit Exciississe Deum. Where Servius observeth that it stands for excutere. And Horace : Fratresque tendentes opaco Pelion imposuisse Olympo. And Val. Max. Sed abiinde erit ex iis duo exempla retulisse. It will be sufficient to give two examples thereof; which imports the future. And Seneca, Intra coloniam meam me continui, alioquin potuissem cum audisse in illo atriolo, in quo duos grandes pra^textatos ait secum declamare solitos. In Praef. Controv. and Gellius, Vel> u)tus, hercle, hie versus, Plauti esse hanc Jabidam, satis potest Jidei Jecisse. And in another place, Caleni, ubi id audiverwit, edixerimt^ 7ie quis in balneis lavisse vellet, cum magistratus Romanus ibi esset. And the like. However, this is no reason why in common use we should not rather make use of amare, for example, for the present, and ama- visse for the preterite, as we have given it in the rudiments. Vossius pretends further that amare will not stand for the imper- fect, as hath been the general opinion of grammarians, because, according to him, when 1 say, for instanccj Gaudeo quod anias, it may be explained by gaudeo te amare : whereas when I say, gaudeo quod jam turn amabas, it is not explained by te jam turn amare, but amavisse : and therefore the latter expresseth the three differences of the preterite. But Vossius's principle is false, and the example he produces, does not prove that the thing is general. For when Cicero in his letter to Varro, said, for instance, Vidi enim (nam tu aberasj nostras inimicns cupere bellumy Szc. it is obvious that cupere is there an imperfect, and that it should be resolved by quod turn cupiebant, since it denotes the same difference of time as aberas which he has expressed. In like manner in Virgil, Sape ego longos Cantando puerum memiiii me condere soles. If we should want to resolve it, we must say ; memini quod ciim puer eram, condebam longos soles cantando. And therefore, quod amabas, may be explained by te amare, as in the examples taken from Cicero and Virgil ; or by ie amavisse, as in that of Vossius. Which shews still further that all the tenses of the infinitive are frequently very indeterminate. VII. 0/FORE. Grammarians say very right that the infinitive hath no future ; but they e^tcept sum, whicU they think hs^s Jbre. ' Yet Ili3 Section III. Chap. II. Book VI. Yet sum, properly speaking, has no more future than the rest. Tor fore does not come from sum, but from /«y, which in the in- finitive made /6?e or fare by syncope for fuere : so that it may be taken indifferently for all tenses, as well as esse, amare, les;ere, and the other infinitives, as we have been just now mentioning. Com" missum cum eqnitntu prcsimm fore videbat, Caes. Ex qua conjicitur ut certns aniiiio res tciicat auditor, quibus dictis perorntiim fore intel- ligat, Cic. Quanto robare animi is semper extitit, qui vitam sibi inte- grani fore difficile dictu est. Id. Hence we find with how little foundation Valla said, that /ore could not be joined with another future, vi?, fore venturum, Jhcic/i- dumi fore, &c. since /ore is no more a real future than esse. And indeed we very often meet with the contrary in authors. Deindc addis, si quid seciis, te ad me fore venturum, Cic. Deorum immorta- liicm causa libcnter fact aros fore, Liv. Nihil horum vos visurosfore, Cic. Lepide dissimidat /ore hoc futurum, Plaut. and in the passive, Credite universam vim juventntis, hodierno Catilina' supplicio conji- ciendam fore, Cic. Ant sub pelt ibus hnbendos miliies Jore, Liv. We have already given instances of the preterite above; and therefore /ore may be joined to all tenses. But we are carefully to observC; that this verb always includes .something of the future, the same as /^t'xxw in Greek, so that as they have not a sufficient number of tenses for the infinitive in Latin, they frequently make use of this verb to mark the future, when they are obliged to distinguish different tenses ; as Scripsit ad me Ccesar perhumaidter, nondinn te sibi satis esse familiar em, sed certe fore, Cic. Sequitur iltud, vt te exidimare velim, mihi magnce curtc fore, atque esse jam. And therefore I did not think proper to strike it out of the rudiments designed for children, being willing to conform as much as possible to the established custom. VIII. Manner of expressing the Future of the Infinit'vce in the oilier Verbs. The participles in rus serve likewise to express the future of the infinitive, whether they be joined with esse or \v\t\\ fuisse, as Ama- iurum esse, to be about to love ; Amaturum fuisse, to have been about to love. But the latter tense seems to partake of the prete- rite and future both together. And the same is done in regard to the passive, Amandum esse, or amandum fuisse. These futures are declined, and agree like adjectives with their substantive ; Verc mihi lioc videor esse diclurus, Cic. Ut pcrspicuum sif omnibus nunquam Lampsacenos in eiim locum progressurosjuisse, Cic. But anciently they were not declined, as may be seen in A, Gellius, lib. 1. c. 7. For they said, for instance, Credo inimicos meos hoc dicturum, C. Gracch. Hanc sibi rem prccsidio sperant futurum, Cic. act. 5. in Verrem : according to the reading which A. Gellius maintaineth by the authority of Tiro, Cicero's freed- man. lloslium copias ibi occupatas futurum, Quadrig. Est quod speremus deos bonis bene fact ur am. Id. Si res divi/ice riiefnctcv esstnt, omnia ex sentQiUia processi^i'um, Valerius Antias. Illi polliciti sese facturum Remarks on the Future, 113 Jiictnnim omnia, Cato. Ad sum-mam perniciem rempuMicam perven- iurum esse., Silla. Non putavi hoc eamjactiirum, Laber. Etiamne habet Casina gladium i habet, sed duos, Quibus, altera te occisuriim ait, altera villicinn, Plaut. And such like passages, which those Qui vialant bonas libros, says A. Gelhus, would fain correct, while others, superficially ac- quainted with the grounds of the Latin tongue, have attributed to the figure of syllepsis, but without any i-eason. For it is owing only to the antiquity of the language, which considered these words, not as nouns, but as verbs, and as tenses of the infinitive, which has neither gender nor number ; and this they did in imi- tation of the Greeks, with Avhom the infinitive hath all the dif- ferent tenses, and the future among the rest, nroi'na-eiv, sma-Gxi, &c. And we must not mind whether this hath the termination of a noun or any other, since it depends intirely upon use. So that we must resolve Juturum like^re, and dicturtim like dicere ; Credo ifii- viicos meos hoc dicere, I believe that my enemies do say this ; Credo eos hoc dicturum, I believe they will say this. Hanc sibi rem sperant prcesidiojuturum, as if it were, sperant prcesidiofore, &c. IX. Another manner of supplying the Future of the In- Jinitwe, especially when the Verbs have no Supine. But if the verb hath no supine from whence a participle can be formed, we may with great elegance make use oi Jore, or of the ■^zxtidi^XeJidurum, by adding nt to it ; which happens particularly after the verbs spero, jmto, suspicor, dico, offirmo, and such like. Sperojbre ut caniingat id nobis, Cic. But when io futurum we join the preterite /wiwe, this is likewise one of those phrases which partake of the time past and the fu- ture, and contribute not a little to embellish the sentence. Vi- demtir enim quietijiiisse nisi essemus lacessiti, Cic. And both these turns of expression are so elegant, that they are frequently used in verbs, even when the other future might be formed by the participle. Nisieo ipso tempore guidam nuncii de Cce- saris victoria essent ailati, existimabant jileriqueJ'HhirwnJ'Hisse ut op- pidnm caperetur^ Caes. instead of existimabant oppidum capiendum Jore. Valde suspicor fore ut infringatur hominum improbitas, Cic. X. That the Injinitive hath frequently the force of a Noun Substantive. The infinitive by the ancients was called nomen verbi ; and whensoever it drops the affirmation peculiar to the verb, it be- comes a noun, as we have observed in the General and Rational Grammar. This noun being indeclinable, is always of the neuter gender, but it stands for different cases. For the nominative. Vivere ipsum, turpe est nobis, Cic. Nam ambos curare, propemodum Reposcere ilium est quern dedisti, Ter. That is, TO curare est rejjoscere. For the vocative. O vivere nostrum ! ' Vol. II. I For 1 14 Section III. Chap. II. Book VI. For the genitive. Tempus est nobis de ilia vita agere, for agendi Tempusjam abhinc abire ; Cic. Consiliuvi capit omnem a se equitatum dimiitere, or dimittendi, or di7)iissionis. For the dative. /Etas mollis c*!j- apta regi, for apta regimini, or rectioni, taken passively. For the accusative. Scripsit se ciiperc, for suam cupiditatem. Da mild bibere, for da potum. Habco diccre, for dicendum. Amat lu- dere, for liidum. For the ahhitive. Digitus amari, jnmiri, for amove, j}ce)ia. The infmitive is moreover frequently governed by a preposition understood, which may be resolved even by the conjunction quod or quia, as Gratidor ingenium non Icdidsse tnum, Ovid. Instead of 06 non latuisse, that is, qida non latuerit. And in like manner in Terence. Qiii>d plerique omnesjvciunt adolescentidi, Ut animum ad aliqiiod studiuvi adjungant, aut equos Alere, aut canes ad venandiim, aut ad ])/dlosophos. That is, ad alere ; just as he says, ad aliquod studium, aut ad philo» sophos. And Cic. Si equites deducios molcslejeret, accipiam equidem dulorem, mihi ilium irasci : sed multo mnjorcm, non esse talem qualem putassem ; that is, Ob ilium irasci, ob non esse talem. But this happeneth particularly when the infinitive is joined to an adjective after the manner of the Greeks, which is a common thing in Horace ; either in the active or passive ; Durus componere versus, for ad componendum. Celer irasci, for ad irascendum. In* docilis pauperiem pati, for ad patiendum, and the like : though the infinitive happening also to come after some adjectives, supplieth the place of another government. See the annotation to rule 18« p. 34. It is likewise to this government of the preposition that we must refer the infinitive, when it happens to come after verbs of motion, as in the Vulgate ; Non veid solvere legem, sed adimplere ; that is, 710)1 ad solvere, or ad sohdionem, &c. And though some have pretended to find fault with this scriptural expression, yet it is very common in Latin authors. As It visere earn, Ter. Non ego tejrangcre persequar, Hor. Non nos autjerro Libycos popidare penates Venimus, aut raptas ad littora vertere prcedas, Virg. But they who have condemned these expressions did not know perhaps that even when the supine is put, as eo visum, the force of the government is in the preposition, eo ad visum, as we shall shew iiereafter ; and therefore that it is the same as ad vidcre ; videre and vixum, being then only nouns substantives, and synonymous terms. This shews what it is rightly to understand the real foua- dation and principles of construction and government. Remarks on the Iuuegular Verbs. 115 Chapter III. Of Irregular Verbs. WE have already touched upon this subject in the Rudiments; but here we intend to treat of it more at large, and to shew from whence this irregularit}' arises, and wherein it consists, by which means we shall find that it is not so great as people imagine. I. Of SUM and its Compounds. The ancients, says Varro, 8. de L. L. used to conjugate Esunif €S, est; esicmus, cstis, esunl, in the same manner as eram, as, at ; ero, is, it, &c. Hence it is that Cicero in his third book of laws hath put esunto for sunto. Ast quando diiellum gravius, discordicB civium, esT.nto ne ampliiis sex menses, si senalus creverit. For thus Vossius insists upon reading this passage, which has puzzled such a number of learned men. For according to him, esum comes from the Greek future tVo- jxai, from whence, rejecting the diphthong, they formed at first esom, then esum, and at length sum. But Julius Scaliger and Ca- ninius derive it from hyi't. Which will not appear so extraordinary to those who have attended to the changing of letters, of which we intend to subjoin a particular treatise ; though some have at- tempted to ridicule the opinion of those two learned men on this subject. For it is easy to shew that I final is sometimes lost, as from /xt'Xf, is formed mel. 2. That the diphthong n frequently loseth its subjunctive, as A(V£/a?, ^neas. 3. That the s is some- times added not only for the rough breathing, as sttw, sequor ; -n/Aiav, semi ; but likewise for the smooth, as h, si; e'/^w, se^-o ; IfvM^ servo. 4. That the e is oftentimes changed into u, as Bpeviria-iotf Bnmdusiinn, from whence we may conclude, that of hi/.) they formed at first £;/A, afterwards J/x, o-t/x, and at length sum. Neither can it be said that this conjecture is ill founded, since we give authority for the change of these several letters ; and since this analogy oc- curreth also in the other persons. For es comes from tls, in the second person, which we meet with above fifteen times in Homer, as est Cometh from iW, and sunt from hr), according to the Dorians, for IktL Be that as it will, it may be likewise formed of t3-efj.xi, since it is not at all extraordinary to see the futures form other verbs of themselves, as from ayu-, fut. «| Section III. Chap. III. Book VI. quoted by Cicero in his second book of laws. Quoi auko DENTES viNCTi ESCUNT. And in Gcllius, who quotes it from the same place; Si morkus /icvitasve vitium escit, lib. 20. cap. 1. as Vossius and H. Stephen read it, though others read esit. But escit occurrcth also in Lucrct. lib. 1. Ergo rerum inter sunwiam, miuimamquef quid escit. Where the verse would be faulty were we to read esit, which has the first short, as well as erit. The preteritey?« and the participle y«i II. Of ISO Section III. Chap. IV. Book VI. II. Of Faki, and other Defectite Verbs of the same signijicat'wn. Hereto we may add four or five defective verbs of the same signification, /(7W, inqudm, oio, in/if, redo. Foil is scarcely used, saith Diomedes, thouf^h we meet with effor; but we say /ai-is emdjatur, in the same manner as daris and datiir, though there is no such word as (/or, and yet addor and red" dor arc in use. Fans occurretli in Plautus : Cunt intemn in meum ingenium fans non didicisti atqne infans. Inquio is obsolete, according to Diomedes and other ancients. But Priscian pretends it is used, tliough the passage he produces out of Cicero is corrupted. Aucupari verba oportebit, inquio, 2. de Orat. where according to Lambinus, Vossius, and others, we should read in quo. It may be defended by the following passage of Catul. Epig. 10. as Muretus reads it : ■ Volo ad Serapin Ferri mane : mane inquio puellec. Inquam seems to be only a prcterimperfect for inquieham : Inquimus is in Horace ; Communi sensu plane carets inquimus, lib. 1. Sat. 3. Jnquitis is in Arnobius. Inqniebant and inquisti occur frequently in Cic. as likewise inqnies and inquiet. Inque is in Plautus and Te- rence ; inqiiito, in Plautus. The tenses belonging to Aio maybe seen in the Rudiments. The imperative, of which some have doubted, as Diomedes ob- serveth, is proved by Nevius, vel a'i, vel nega. Aibant is in Attius for aicbant, just as we say in the second per- son ais for n'iis. Priscian says it hath not the first person of the preterite, and him we have followed in the 69th rule, vol. i. p, 291. Yet Probus gives us ai, aisti, ait, Sec. Tcrtullian makes use of the plural. Atqne ita omnes aicrunt,jiet voluntas domini, lib. de Fuga. Aiat is in Cic. Quasi ego curem, quid ille aiat aut neget, 2. do Fin. A«d the participle aiens : Negnvtia aientibus contraria, in Top. Infix cometh from injio, which Varro made use of, accord- ing to Priscian. And therefore as from capit is formed incipit, in like manner from Jit is derived injit, which signifieth the same as incipit. We say likewise dcfit, from whence comes dejiety dejiat^ defieri. Lifit is usually rendered by he saith, like ait. But as we have just now shewn, and as Festus also explains this word, it signifies the same as incipit. Homo ad pra^torem plo7-abundus devenit, InJlt ihi postulare, plorans, ejulans, Plaut. llafarier injit, Virg. But this mistake was doubtless occasioned by the infinitive of the other verb being frequently understood ; Ihi injit, annum se tertium Sf nona~ Remarks on the Defective Veres, 121 if nonagesiynum ngere, sup. logui or fan. Which i.s further con- firmed by the gUjssaries of Philoxenus, iitjit, oi^v^i i^Lyuv. Cedo properly signifietli no more than to give way or to per- mit. But it often liappencth that by process of time words are diverted into a dilF_-rent sense from their original meaning, as Agricola in his notes on Seneca hath learnedly observed. This appears further in prcesto, in amabo, in Liceo, vapulo, and vencu, of which we took notice when speaking of the Preterites, vol. 1. p. 305. and in others. For as when a person was called, he answered prasfo, or sto prcr, here I am ; so when they intended to signify that a thing was at hand and quite ready, they said prccstu est, taking this word as an advfrb. Again, because when a person offered to do a thing, or asked leave of another, the answer was always, cedo, that is, I give jjou leave, I jjennit j/ou, either to do, to say, or to give, &c. therefore they begin likewise to say, Cedo manum, give me the hand ; Cedo cantcrium, lend me your horse, or barely cedo, give me, fell me. Of cedo they have formed by syncope cette for cedite. Cette manus vestras, measque accipite : Enn. apud Non. III. 0/ Faxo, Ausim, Forem, and Q,\]jfL.?,o. We must also mention a word or two in regard to these four other defective verbs. Faxo seemeth to come from facio. For as the Greeks said clyu^ a|w : t/x?w, or tLku, ri^co : so the Latins s,Q.idJacio, facto, Jaxu. Ago, acto,axo. From whence comes udaxint, in Plautus; and axitiosi, that kfactiosi, according to Festus, several met together in order to perform or undertake a thing. They used also to say jacio, jacto, from whence came jctjo .• and iyijicio, injccto, from whence was formed injexo. Ubi qundruplator qicempiam vtjexit manum, Taididem ille iiH rursus injiciat manum. Plant. Others nevertheless are of opinion that faxo, axo, injexo, &c. are tenses of the future perfect, that is of the subjunctive, i'ov fccero, egero, injecero. And this verb w^e find also in Virgil, Ego feeder a Jaxo Firma manu, lEn. 12. Faxim in like manner seems to have been used for facerim (for the preterites heretofore retained the vowel of the present tense) or fecerim. And indeed, the sense agrees therewith : tibi lubens hene faxim, Ter. ; so of egerim they made assim, or axim, which is in Attius. And in Plautus we find Utinam me Divi adaxint ad suspendium, In Aulul. Faximus occurreth also in Plautus, as Vikewise faxem iox fecissem. ^nt faxint \s frequently met with in Cic. Dii faxint : and the like. And faxit is iu his 2. book of laws, qui servusfaxit, &c. Now as we say faxim for fecerim, so we say Ausim for aitserim,^ that is, aiisusfuerim. De grege non ausim quicquam deponere tecum, Virg. I dare not wager any part of the flock. Ausim. vel ienui vitem committere nulco, Id. FOBEM / 1522 • Section III. Chap. V. Book VI. FoiiEM is only a syncope for yiicre???, and fure for J' uerc, from the old verb Jiio, as hath been also observed, p. 116. Qu/E.so, according to Vossius, is only an ancient word for qiucro, just as tlicy used to say asa for ara, the s being frequently put for r, as we shall shew in the Treatise of Letters. Hence it is thatEnnius saith, quccsentibits, quccsendnm, for queer eniibus, qnceren- dum. And indeed, to ask or to beg a thing, is properly to look Jar it, both being expressive of desire : so tl)at the preterite qucesivi properly cometh froVn this old verb, pursuant to the analogy above observed, p. 11 G. Ch APT Ell V. Of Verbs called Impersonal, and of their nature. VERBS impersonal are ranked in the number of defectives by Phocas, Donatus, and Sergius, which obliges us to say something of them on this occasion. We shall therefore examine two points, 1. What is meant by a verb impersonal. 2. Whether these verbs have not more tenses than they arc allowed by gram- marians. I. JVhat is meant by a Verb Impersonal, and that in reality there is no other but the Injinitive. Julius Scaliger, and Sanctius, allowed of no other impersonals but the infinitive, and Consentius Romanus was long before of the same opinion. Their reason is because in all verbs whatsoever the infinitive is always without number and person ; whereas the other verbs called impersonals, are not without persons, having at least the third always, and frequently being susceptible of others. This opinion is founded on reason itself, by which we are de- barred from pronouncing any sentence, or forming any kind of speech that is not compounded of a noun and a verb. The better to understand this, and to show more distinctly the nature of those verbs called impersonals, we are to remember what hath been said above, chap. 1. That there are three sorts of verbs adjectives, namely actives or transitives ; neuters, or intransitives ; and passives. Therefore if these verbs are transitives, and signify an action which passeth into a subject, they have generally their nominative taken from without themselves, which nominative formeth this action : as hoc me juvat, this pleaseth me ; illud te decet, that be- conieth thee. If they are absolute and intransitives, then their nominative must be either included within themselves ; for lihet mihi hoc facer e, licet iibi tacere, oportet ilhtd agere, is the same as if you were to say, libido est mihi hocfncere, licentia or Ucitum est tibi tacere, opus est illud agere : or the infinitive which follows this verb, will be, as it were, its nominative ; so that licet tibi tacere, is the same as, to tacere licet tibiy or est res licita tibi : libet mihi hocjacere, that is, TO Remarks on the Impersonal Verbs. 123 rofacere hanc rem libet mihi, that is, the doing of this action pleaseth me: oportct illud a(rere, that is, the doing of this action is ne- cessary. Nor docs it signify at all, though we sometimes are in want of Latin nouns to resolve these phrases, for the thing is ahvays in the sense, and subsists of itself. liut if these verbs are passives, as statur, curritur, concurritur, sic vivitur, regnatunt est, amatuin est ; they ought then to l)e resolved by tlie verb substantive, est or Jit, and the verbal noun derived from themselves : Jit stntio, cursus or concur aus Jit, sic vita est, or sic vita fit. regiium fuit, amorjuit, &c. Hereby «'e see, properly speaking, that these verbs are no more impersonals than the otiiers, but only defectives, and de- prived (at least generally speaking) of the two first persons. Tiierefore what we ought most to observe in this sort of verbs, is that when I say amo, I include an intire proposition in a single word, making the verb comprize the subject, the affirmation, and the attribute, so that this word amo is equivalent to ego mm amajis : just as when we say, piidet, oportet, itur, statur, &c. we include in those words an intire proposition, the verb containing in itself the subject, the affirmation, and the attribute, which ought to be resolved, as we have shown above. Concerning which the reader may likewise see what has been said in the General Grammar, c. 18. Thus we see that what even in French we call impersonal, is not such. For when we say, on court, on warche, on parte, &c. ; this on, as Mons. de Vaugelas judiciously observeth in his Remarks on the French Tongue, comes from the word homtne : which ap- peareth from the Italian poets, who say huom teme, for hwnno, peo- ple fear ; and from the Germans and other northern nations, who render the French particle on by the word man, whicli in their language signifies the same as Jionime. And even from the Greek language, which frequently useth rU in the same sense ; as tSto In rts a.'noy.^'nxir^ olti vl, y.a.\a. yt iWorus. We might make this answer veryjustLy. So that it is the same thing to say in French, on dit or 'I'on dit, as homme dit, or Vhomme dit, by an indefinite terra, which may indifferently agree with either. And we may further remark in regard to those expressions, that the Latin is passive, dicitur, where we must understand hoc or itlud; and the French active, I'on dit, which implies I' homme dit. The reason hereof, and which few have ever observed, is because as the Latin always affects to use passive expressions, the French tongue on the contrary chuseth to render them by active ones. Now these passive impersonals are not always taken in a general and indeterminate signification, as Diomedes imagined (which is pecuhar only to the infinitive), since Cicero saith : Nunciatum est nobis a Varrone eum Roma venisse, Varro has told us, &c. And Seneca, Insanitiir a patre. And others in the same manner. But we must observe, that though these verbs be deprived of some persons, this is not so much owing to the verb, as to the de- fect in the thing, which may be applied to it, according as Scaliger hath remarked. Hence if we more frequently say decet, pudet, &c. it 124 Section III. Chap. V. Book VI. it is because the things joined in this sense are always put in the third person ; which does not however hinder Statius from saying. Si non dedecid tua jussa. And Plautus, Jta 7iunc piideo, atque ita paveo. vVnd Ennius, Miserete met anuis. And Plautus again, Ado- iescens loquere nisi piges, &c. Which was heretofore more frequent than at present : for it seemeth that they said also pceniteo, instead oi pcenitet me, since we find in Justin, Primi pcenitere cceperunt, in- stead of prinios pcenitere ccepit : and in Apuleius, Q,uum ccej^eiis serb pcenitere, instead of cum cceperit te sero pcenitere. II. Tliat the Verbs called Impersonah are not deprived of all the Persons zve imagine, even in the most ele- gant languages. The first mistake on this head is of those who fancy these verbs have not the third person plural, whereas it is otherwise, Parvum parva decent, Hor. Qucv adsolent, quccgue oportC7tt signa,Ter. Non te hcec piident ? Id. Quam se aliena deccant, Cic. Hcec facta ah illo oportebant, Ter. Semper metuet gitem sava pudebunt, Luc. The same we observe in the passives. Quo in genere multa pec- cantur, Cic. Nodes vigihmtur amarce, Ovid. In cceteris gcntibus mice regnantur, Tacit. Sacris piscibus hce nalantur undce, Mart. It is moreover false that impersonals are to be found only in the indicative, as Diomedes and some other ancients imagined. For not to mention that Varro gives them all the moods, we find a sufficient number of authorities: oporteto was in Numa's laws, according to Scaliger : oportiierit is from Caecilius in Priscian. Ci- cero says, Nee velte expexiri gtiam se aliena deceant, Offic. 1 . And Aul. Gell. Verbisgue ejus de/atigari poio'dmssent. And in like manner in the passive. Cum male pugnatum esset, Cic. Cum jam horis amplius sex continenter pugnarelur ; Caes. Ponitejam gladios hebetes, pugnetur acutis, Ovid. The infinitive is in Terence, in Hec. act. 3. sc. 1. Trepidari sentio, cursari sursum prorsum. And in Cicero, Hic maneri diutius non potest. In regard to licet, piget, placet, and others which have a double preterite, we have made mention of them in the Rules of the Pre- terites, vol. i. p. 306. ANNOTATION. We might also take occasion here to speak of derivative and compound verbs ; but as this seemed more particularly to relate to the conjugations, we placed them at the end of the Rules of Preterites, vol. i. p. 309, and the following. Remarks on the Gerunds. 125 Section IV. Remarks on the Gerunds, Supines, and Parti- ciples. Chapter I. Remarks on the Gerunds. I. What the ancient and modern grammarians thought of Gerunds. THERE is no one article, on which the grammarians have started more questions, and have been puzzled to answer them, than the gerunds. Sanctius, Scioppius, and Vossius, will have it that they are verbal nouns adjectives, or even participles. Certain it is that they are not verbs, and that they do not make a mood apart, as some grammarians have fancied. In the first place because they do not mark a judgment of the mind, nor aa affirmation, which is the property of the verb. And in the second place, because they have cases, and verbs have not. Thus we say for example, in the nominative, dicendum est ; in the genitive, dicendi causa ; in the dative, dicendo apta ; in the accusative, ad dicendum ; the ablative, dicendo'conseqid. They are therefore verbal nouns, and generally retain the go- vernment of their verbs ; causa videndi Romam ; Virg. Utenduni est cetate ; Ovid. Canes paucos et acres habendum ; Varro. But we must inquire what sort of verbal nouns they are, and what is the cause of this government. They who pretend that these nouns are adjectives, and consider that as such they must needs have their substantives, are obliged to say, that as we see many verbs govern their original noun, as >vMfere vitajn, pugnare pugnam ; so those gerunds being in the neuter, suppose for a substantive the infinitive of their verb itself, which is then taken as a noun verbal. For the infinitive was called by the ancients, nomen verbi. So that when we say for in- stance, j)ugnandum est, they would have us understand rl pugnare , and that pugnandum est pugnare is the same construction as pugnan- da est jntgna. But if we say, pugnandum est pugnam, they still would have us understand pugnare, and that its construction is double, namely that of the substantive and of the adjective, pugnandum est pugnare : and that of the verbal noun governing the case of its verh, pugjiare (for pugnatio J pugnam, like tactio hanc rem. And it is by this means they account for these expressions which seem so extraordinary, tempus videndi lunce, tempus legendi librorum, and the like ; for, say they, videndi will always suppose TO videre, as if it were tempus visionis : and videre as substantive will govern lunce, as if it were tempus videndcc visionis lunce. And this is the opinion I had followed after Sanctius, Scioppius, and Vossius, in the preceding editions. But \Q6 Section IV. Chap. I. Book VI. But all things considered, this turn of expression and this sup- position do not seem to be necessary, as we have already observed in the General Grammar. For in the first place what they say, that the infinitive is understood as a verbal noun which governeth the genitive, or even the accusative, is without probabilit3% since there is no fijundation to say that a word is understood when we have never seen it expressed, and when we even cannot express it without an absurdity, as it would be to say, legendum est legere, tempus est videndi videre, piigyinndiim est pugnare, S;c. 1. Were the jjerund legendum a noun adjective, it would not be different from the participle legendus, a, um ; and there would not have been sufficient reason to invent this new sort of words. 3. Since they say that this infinitive, in the quality of a verbal noun, governs the case that followeth, it is as easy for us to say that legendtim being only a noun substantive derived from the verb, shall produce this same effect by itself, without there being occa- sion to understand any thing. II. That the Gerunds are Nouns Suhstami'ce, and what is the real cause of their Government. Therefore I say, that the gerund is a verbal noun substantive, derived from the adjective or participle of tlie same termination, but which frequently addeth, to the signification of the action of the verb, a kind of necessity and duty, as if one were to say the action that is to be done, which the word gerund taken from gerere, to do, seems to have been intended to signify ; hence pngnandvm est, is the same as pngnare oportet, we must fight, it is time to fight. Nevertheless as words do not always preserve the full strength which they had at their first invention, so this gerund frequently loseth that of diifi/, and preserves only that of the action of its verb, as cantando riinipitur angiiis. Now this assertion, tliat the gerund is a substantive, ought not lo appear strange, since nothing is more common in all languages, than to see the neuter of the adjectives changed into a substantive, Tvhen it is taken absolutely ; as to ayx^h, boniim, goodness, and the like. This being premi?ed, it is a very easy matter to account for all those expressions that are formed by the gerund, for when we say, for instance, pngnandum e\t, legendiim est, it is as if it were piigna est, lectio est : with this addition of duty or necessity, or proximity of action, which we said was properly and peculiarly included in the gerund. And if we say legendum est Ubros, it is the same government as lectio libros, just as Plautus sailh, tactio hanc rem. And Caesar re- ditio domnm, &c. See above, p. 80. And if we say tempvs est videndi luna;, it is the same as tempus visionis Innce, nothing being more common than to see a noun go- verned in the genitive, and governing another in the same case; as Consides designatos maxima orbitate reipiiblicce virorum tedium, Cic. ad Plane. Hujits rei magnam partem Inudis atgue cxistimationis ad Libonemperventuram, Cses. And this is the way of accounting for all Remarks on the Gerunds. 127 all these phrases. Fuit exemplorum legendi potestas, Cic. Antonio JacuUas detur agrorum suis latronibus condonandi. Id. Dulehis tandem Sloicos nostras Epicureis irridendi sui Jacultatem dedisse, Id. Reli-' quorum sideruni qnce causa coilocandij'uerit. Id. Omnium rerum una est definitio comprchendendi. Id. Aut eorum qiue secundum naturam sunt adipiscendi. Id. Nominandi tibi istorum niagis erit quhm adeundi copia, PJaut. Venerunt purgandi sui causa, Caes. and the like. Hereby Hkewise it appeareth why, speaking of a woman as well as of a man, we say, cupidus sum videndi tui, and not videndce, be- cause as we have already mentioned in the remark on the pro- nouns, these geniti/es, mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, not admitting of adjectives, it is as if it were cupidus sumvisionis tui ipsius ; and it is the same* construction as tempus videndi lunce. Thus Terence, speaking of a young girl, hath these words : Ego ejus videndi cupi- dus, recta sequor. And in another passage, ut neque ejus sit amit» tendi, neque retinendi copia. And Ovid, Et spem placandi dantque adimuntque tui. Again, Otim pilacandi spem mihi tolle tui. So that It is a mistake, when in Acontius's letter to Cydippe, this same poet is made to say, Sit modo placanda; copia magna tui, whereas we should read placandi. We see further why it is better Latin to say with the participle amandi sunt boni, and the like, than amandum est bonos : because the verbal nouns substantives have rarely preserved the govern- ment of their verbs in the purity of the language ; though there are some instances of it. Hence also it appeareth, why it is frequently indifferent, to put the supine or the infinitive, or even the verbal noun in ib, (not- withstanding that Valla is of a different opinion) in the place of the gerund, agreeably to what we shall observe in the next chap- ter, as audiendo jucunda, aiiditu jucunda, audirejucunda, auditionc jucunda. Because it is very natural to put a substantive of the same signification for another derived from the same verb. And thus Cicero hath made use of it, when he says, &i qui ineunte cetate, venandi aut pilce studiosijiierint, &c. if 'there shotdd be any one that had a passion, tvhcn they tvere young, either Jor hunting, orjbr tennis; where we see that venandi, being in the same government as piUa;* nothing is more natural than to take it for a noun substantive, like pila, and to say it is there instead of venationis ; and in all pro^ bability Cicero would not have used it thus, unless he had this no- tion of it. ' This is likewise the reason why interpreters frequently render into one language by the gerund, that which in the other is ex- pressed in the verbal noun or by the infinitive, as in St, Paul hs Ittot.TLOYiv •ct/Vew;, where the ancient interpreter has put ad obedienduni Jidn,Jor the obedience qfj'aith, that is, to preach obedience v/hich comes from faith. Again, h Kyt^va-a-uv (/.ri y.xiTiistv, qui prcudicas non furandum, thou who preachest, that we must not steal, that it is a crime to steal. And thus we ought to explain jseveral turns of expression which seem ' 128 Section- IV. Chap. I. Book VI. seem very intricate in Latin authors, as when Livy saith : Negue immemur ejus quod initio consulatus imbiberat, reconciliandi nninios plebis. Not having forgot the vigorous resolution he had taken at the beginning ol his consulate, of reconciling the senate to the people : lor immemor ejus reconciliandi., is there for ejus reconcilia- tionis. And reconciliationis animos, is like tactio hanc rem. III. JFIiether the Gerunds are taken actively or pas- sively. But it is further easy to answer this way the question which is put, whether those gerunds are taken actively or passively. For V lien they sup[)ly the place of the infinitive of the verb or of an- other verbal substantive, if this infinitive or other verbal noun, by which they may be resolved, is active, they will be likewise actives : and if it be passive, they will be passives. Thus when Virgil saith : Quis taiia Jando temperet ^ lacrymis : Jhndo, being there iov Jan, in fando, or injhri talia, it must be active. Whereas when he says, Fando aliquid sijbrte tuus pervenit ad aures, there it is for dnm dicitur, and consequently passive. And when we read in Cicero, Hie locus ad agendum amplissimuSy ad dicendum ornatissimvs. Agendum and dicendum, being there for actio, and dictio, that is, ut actio habeatur, they seem passive. But sometimes there is so very little difference between the action and the p ission, tliat one need only to look at them with very little obli()iiily, to tcike them in either sense, which is of no sort of consequence, and does not deserve to be a matter of dispute. The principle we have here established, contributes also to the easy clearing up of several difficult passages, as — Uritque •videndo J'cemiua, Virg. tliat is, in videri or in visu ipsiiiSy for dum videtur. Just as in Lucretius, Ahtinlus in digito subter tenuatiir habendot for dum hancn'r. Thus when we find in Sallust, where he spealcs of Jugurtha; cum ipse ad impc/andiim 7 '.^idiuni vocaretur, which hath puzzled a great manv learned men ; that is, ad imprrnri, or ut el imperareiur, as Seiviii--, and after him M:inutius, Alciatus, Gentilis, and Sanc- tius explain it. And it is witliout foun(httion that some have at- tempted to amend (lie text, and to read ad imperatorem. Even Cicero him>elf h.-. made use of this expression, and explained it in his letter to Petus, Nunc ades adiniperandiim, vel parendum potius^ 8IC ENIM A.vTiQUi LoQUEBANTiJR. For this nieaneth, «' 'da-m, to the best of bis Chapter II. Remarks on the Prepositions. THE prepositions that have no case are not adverbs, says Sanctius, because they have always their case understood ; as, Lorigo post tempore venit, that is, Lungo tempore post id tempus. But we have shewn in the nineteenth rule, that there are a great many words supposed to be prepositions, which are otherwise, S^c. A preposition, as the very name implies, ought always to pre- cede its case in the natural order of construction. If it followeth, this is by means of a figure called Anastrophe, as Glandem atque cuhiiia propter pncrnabant, Hor. Thus qnamobrem is for ob quant rem ; qunpropter for propter qnce or qua ; quocirca for circa quod, &c. Prepositions of both cases may be joined in composition, not only to the other parts of speech, but moreover to themselves ; as, Inante diem quintiun Cat. Novemb. Cic. Exante diem Nan. Jun. Cic. Insuper his, Virg. Insuper nlienos rogos, Lucr. We meet even with postavite in Varro ; circiimsecus in Appul. incircum in Macer. Jurisc. And these compounded prepositions may be likewise joined to a verb, as insuperhahcre in Gellius, Appul. and Papi- nian, for to despise, or to set slight on a thing. Now in regard to the regimen of these prepositions, we must say either that they govern the same case as the simple, which is last in composition, as Exante diem quintum idus Oct. Liv. or that there are, in such case, two sentences included in one, so that this signifieth, ex die ante diem qui>dum, &c. Prepositions are sometimes derived from a noun ; as circum from circus, secundum from secundus ; for whatever is next a thing, comes after it. Hence some are of opinion, that when we find p)rcesente testibus, absente nobis, and the like, absentc and prcrsente are become prepositions, and have the same force as clam nobis, coram testibus, &c. And Vossius seems to favour this notion ; though we may also explain these phrases by a Syllepsis, as we shall further observe when we come to treat of the figures of construction. Remarks on the Conjunctions. 153 Chapter III. Remarks on the Conjunctions. I. That the Conjunctions have not alzvays the ^ame thing before as after them. IN figurative syntax the conjunctions do not connect the words so much as the sense ; and therefore they have not always the same case after as before ; yet if we resolve the phrase by the sim- ple construction, we shall find they have always like cases : for emi centum aureis ^ pluris, implies emi centum aureis, Sf pretio pluris teris. Est domusjratris ^ mea, that is to say, Est domusjratris Sf domus men. So when we say, Malo esse Roma quam Athenis, it means, Malo esse in urbe RomcB quhm in Athenis. But when Boe- tius saith, Mulier reverendi admodum vultus, Sf ocidis ardentibus ; we are to understand cmw?, that is, Etjnulier cum oculis ardentibus. And in like manner the rest. It is the same in regard to the interrogation : for if I answer in the same case, it is because I understand the same verb : but if I suppose another, I shall answer in another case ; and even sup- posing the same verb, if the government be changed : Quanti emis- ti ? Grandi pectin ia : and the like. Conjuncti-ons have not always the same degree of comparison after as before : Homo Sf mei observantissimus, Sf sui juris dignita- tisque reiinens, Cic. nor the same tense and moods ; Nisi me lactdsses amantem, Sf Jalsa spe producer es, Ter. Conjidebam ac mihi per- suaseramjore, &c. II. Which Conjunctions require rather the Indicative, and which the Subjunctive. We have already seen, p. 108. that these two modes are com- monly taken for one another. Nevertheless they are sometimes determined by the conjunctions. Quanquam, etsi, fametsi, are more commonly joined with the in- dicative, though they are sometimes found with the subjunctive. Quanquam Volcatio assentirentm; Cic. Etsi illis plane orbatus essem, Cic. Etsi pars aliqua ceciderit, Caes. Quamvis, licet, etiamsi: Quajido, or ciim (for since) quandoquidem, are generally joined with the subjunctive ; yet we sometimes find them with the indicative ; Me quamvis pietas Sf cura moratur, Hor. tvhich occurs frequently in this poet's writings. Nam ista Veritas etiamsi jucunda nan est, mihi tamen grata est, Cic. Quando te id video desiderare, Cic. Since I see that, Sfc. Quandoquidem tu mihi affuisti, &c. Id. ■ Quandoquidem est ingenio bono. Cumque huic veritus est optima adolescenti facer e injuriam, Ter. Quod, whether it be used m giving reason, as we have already observed on the chapter of Adverbs, n. 3. p. HG. or whether it ,W 154 Section V. Chap. III. Book VI. it be put after the verb instead of the infinitive, as in the following n. is joined both with the subjunctive and the indicative, because on all those occasions it is a relative. See the places here quoted. Ut for that, commonly takes the present subjunctive, if it has a verb of the present or future tense before it : In eo vis maxima est tit simus ii qui haberi voiumtis, Cic. Ut i}i perpetua jjace essepossilis, providebo, Cic. If it be a preter tense, we put the imperfect subjunctive after ut : Tantum cepi dolorem, jit consolatione egerem, Cic. Nevertheless if the action signified by the preter tense still con- tinueth, wc may put the present after ul : Ornre jnssit ad se ut xe- rtias, Ter. Because she has desired it, and desires it still. Ut tor post quam requires the indicative. Ut siomis in Ponto, terj'rigore constitit Ister, Ovid. Since we have been. In like manner Donec for qunmdiu : Do7iec erisjcelix, midtos mimerabis amicos, Ovid. DuM likewise denoting the present, Dum apparatur virgo, Ter. "While they are dressing her. But Dum, signifying, provided, or until, requires the subjunc- tive. Dam prosim tibi, Ter. Tertia dum Lntio regnantem viderit castas, Virg. Jamdudum and Jampridem are more elegantly joined with tlie indicative, when an action is implied, which still continueth. Jamdudum animus est in patinis, Ter. In like manner Jam oliim. Olim jam, imperator, inter virtutes tuas, livor locum qucerit. Quint. Quasi and ceu vero for quasi vero, are put with the subjunc- tive, Quasi nan norimus nos inter nos, Ter. Ceu vero nesciam, Plin. As if I did not know, S)-c. In the same manner Tanquam for quasi. Tanquam Jiesciamus, Phn. Likewise tanquam si. Suadco videos tanquam si tua res agalur, Cic. But tanquam for sicut governs the indicative. Tanquam Philosophorum hnbent disciplince ex ipsis vocabula, Ter. Perinde by itself frequently assumes the indicative, Hac ipsa omnia perinde sunt, tit aguntur, Cic. But perinde ac si is ever joined to the subjunctive. Perinde ac si virtute xncissent, Caes. Ne, when used for a prohibition, is joined either to the impera- tive, or the subjunctive. Ne crucia ie, Ter. Don't torment youi'- self. Ne post cotrferus cidpam in me. Id. If it be used in interrogating, the same as an and num, it chuses tlie indicative. Quid puer Ascanius? Superaine <^' vescitur aura? JEn. 3. If it serves only to express some doubt, it requires the subjunc- tive. Honestumnefactu sit an turpe dubitant, Cic. Hereto we might also add ne for ttt ne, which always requires the subjunctive, in favour of id, which is understood. We shall see examples hereof in the next chapter. The other conjunctions generally follow the nature of the dis- course, sometimes admitting one mood, sometimes another, ac- cording as the context and the several particles seem to require ; which Remarks on the Conjuncttons. 155 wliich is easier learnt by the use of authors, than by any instructions we are capable of giving. III. Of Negatke Conjunctions. Nobody can be ignorant that where there are two negatives in the Latin language, they frequently destroy each other, and there- fore are equivalent to an affirmation : yet we must here observe, that the contrary oftentimes happeueth. Hence we see that Plautus hath, Neque nescio, for nescio ; and Terence, nee nemo for et nemo : And in another place, Ne temere facias, neque tu hand dicas tibi non prcedicium. And Virgil, At non infelix animi Fhcenissa, nee unquam Solvitur in so77inos, oculisve aut pectore noctem Accipit Mn. 4. And Cic. Negabunt id nisi sapienti non posse concedi. And in another place, Neminem unquam non re, 7ion verbo, non vultu denique offendi. And Livy, Ut nemo non lingua, non manu promtior in civitate habe- retur. But this is still more usual as well as more elegant, when the negative is put for the disjunctive "je/; Nidlam esse art em nee di- cendi, nee differ endi putant, Cic. Non me earminibus vineet, nee Or- pheus, nee Linus, Virg. Nulla neque turpi, neqiiejlagitioso qucestu, Cic. Qiianquam negent, nee virtutes, nee vitia crescere, Cic. And this remark is still more considerable in the Greek language, where we sometimes meet with three negatives successively, which only strengthen the negation, as we have shewn in the New Method of learning that tongue. The conjunction Nec is taken for Sj non. But sometimes it joins a thing, and makes the signification thereof fall upon another in the same tense, as in Virgil, speaking of an old horse that ought to be discharged from labour, Hunc abde domo, nec turpi i^nosce senectcc ; that is, Huyic abde domo, S) puree senectce non turpi. Which some not rightly understanding, imagined it implied a con- tradiction. After 7i.on modo, we sometimes understand also a non. See the figure of Elhpsis, in the next book, n. 11. IV. Some other remarks concerning particular Con- junctions. Licet is properly never any thing but a verb, as per me licet, sup. tibi, ox Vobis, &c. and it is also made use of in compliances, as if one should say, veniam ad te? the other would answer, licet, you may, I agree, I permit you. See the Preterites, vol. 1. p. 306. Therefore we may make use of this verb in all these tenses, Licet facias : Licebit repotia celebret, Hor. Licebit curras, Hor. Li- cuitfaceres, &c. where we see that the reason why licet governs the subjunctive, is because ut is understood. And indeed we never find any other than the subjunctive mood in classic authors ; which made Sanctius and Alvarez believe that the rule was without ex- ception ; though in civilians we read, Licet svbjecta transactio est, IJlp. Licet non fuit damnatio secuta. Mod. ^ -^ . Nisi }56 Section V. Chap. III. Book V^I. Nisi is oftentimes taken for xed, as IVIanutius and Stevech have observed, Eodem modo, nnseres alito, nisi priiis data biberc, Cato, for sedprius. Nisi utperiadumjiat, visam quid velity Plaut. Ei liberorum nisi divitifV, nihil erat, Id. Qimmobrcm -^ P. nescioy nisi mild Deos satis ncsciofuissc irntos, qui aiiscultaverim, Tcr. Nisi Poljiliimmeum multis modisjam expecto, ut redent domum, Id. Nihil mihi gratius fa- cere potcs, 7iisi tamen id erit gratissimum, si qucc tibi mandant confe- ceris, Cic. Tuas litems expcctabam : nisi illud qiiidem mutari, si ali- ier est, ut oportet, non video posse, Id. Omnino hoc eodem modo ex hac parte Jiunt, nisi illud erat infinitum, Id. Nee cur ilk tantopere con- iendat video, nee cur tu repugnes : nisi tamen multuminus tibi concedi potest quam illi ; laborare sine causa. Id. Cohortibus armatis septus se- natus, nihil aliudvere potest decernere, nisitimere. Id. Ep. ad Octav. Quod qucB cccteri miserias vocnnt,voluptati habuisset : nisi tamen Re- pub, bene atque decore gesta, Sail. And in Spanish nothing so com- mon as to see their sino (which properly answers to nisi) put for sed. Now this remark helps to explain several obscure passages not only in profane, but in ecclesiastic authors. As in this celebrated expression of Pope Stephen to S. Cyprian, Nihil innovetur, nisi quod traditum est, which some of the learned moderns pretend to be corrupted, and that we ought to read in id quod traditum est. But nothing can be clearer or better expressed, if we consider that nisi is there for sed. Nihil innovetur ; sed quod traditum est ; Let there be no innovation, but abide by tradition. In like manner in the Old Testament of the Vulgate edition ; when Naaman, after his cure, saith to the prophet ; Non enim faciei ul- tra servus tuus holocaustum nut victimam diis alienis, nisi Domino soli ^ for sed Domino soli. And in the New Testament also of the Vulgate edit, quos dcdisti mihi, custodivi : ^ nemo ex iis periit, nisijilius per- ditionis, John 17. that is, sedfliusperdilionis. For Christ is speak- ing of his elect, to whom this son of perdition did not belong. And in St. Paul. Miror quod sic tam cito transferimini ab eo qui vos vocavit in graiiam Christi, in aliud evangelium, quod non est aliud : nisi sunt aliqui qui vosconturbant. Gal. 1. that is, sed sunt aliqui, &c, Scientes quod non justificatur homo ex operibus legis ; nisi per fdem Jesu Christi, Ibid, that is, sed per Jidem J. C. Again, Fanes propositionis comedit, quos non licebat ei edere, nequeiisquicum eo erant: . nisi soils sacerdotibus. Matt. 12. Et pnvceptum est iUis nelcederent fcenum terrfP, neque omne viride, neque omnem arborem : nisi tanttim homines qui non habent signum Dei infrontibussuis, Apocal.9. Non intrabit in earn ali quod coin quinatum, aut abominationem facie^is &; mendacium ; nisi qui scripti sunt in libro vitcc agni, lb. 21 . Unde emm scismidier, si virum salvum fades ; et, &c. which Gaza translates thus, 'axa' Jo-w; "E»»ing their thoughts inort at IttBge, and ^vith the greatest simplicity, .liave thereby shewn us tJie «ia- tural government, and what we are to suppose in the more fi^'ura- tive and concise manner of writing, which was afterwards adopt- ed. The most general rules that we ought to consider herCj and Svhich have been pai'tly hinted at already in the preceding re- marks, and in the Syntax, may be reduced to nine or ten heads, and these should be looked upon as fundamental maxims, in order to take the thread of the discourse, and to understand an author thoroughly. I. Verb understood. 1. GENERAL MAXIM. Every sentence is composed of a yvoun and a verb, and therefore where the verb is not expressed, it ?nust be understood. Hence wha't the grammarians call apposition, as Anna soror ; Vrbs Athena;, is properly an ellipsis of the substantive verb, for Anna ens, or (because this participle is obsolete) qiicB est soror-f TJrbs qua; est, or qt^ce dicitur Athetia: : just as Caesar says, Carmo- nenses qua; £st Jirmissima civitas, lib. 2. 13. C. Hence it is that the French liardly ever make an apposition by substantives only, be- cause this laiiguage ha;s an aversion to the figure ellipsis. But either they put one of the nouns in the genitive, La ville dc Rome, the citij of Rome i or they add a verb. La xille qui est appelee Rume, the citi/ whifh is called Rome ; or they add an adjective to one of tl>e two substantives, Rome ville celebre, Rome ajumous city ; Anne ma 'sceur, my sister Anne ; and not Rome ville ; sceur Anne. For which reason they do not translate, Ora pro nobis peccatoribus, Friezjiour 'nous pecheurs, prayjvr us sinners i hut, priez pour nous pauvres pt' cheurs, prayjbr us poor sinners, or priez pour nousqui sowmes ptdieurSf pray for us •volto a;e sinners. And in like manner the rest. Now the apposition is not only formed of one word, but like- 'wise of many, Donnrem tripodas, pra;mia Jortimn, Hor. that ig, qui sunt pra^miafortimn. Vicina co'^gi ut quamvis avido parerent arva fijluho : grattim opus agricolis, Virg. But it is customary to refer to apposition, words that have more of the nature of an adjective; as Homo servus ; Victor exercit us s Nemo howo, &'C. t There OF THE ELLIPSIS. 159 There are also a great many occasions oi wliich the vrrb is un- derstood, especiully the substantive verb, tyer/ ro.s y?/j tandem, sup. estis? And some other verb likewise, as in Fompeianum cogito, Cic. sup. ire. Dii meliora, sup. faciant. When one speaks proverbially, Fortuna fortes, Cic. sup. adjuvat. By a rhetorical figure, Q_a>s ego, Virg. sup. castigarern ; and on many other occasions which may be learnt by use, or may be seen in the 2d list hereto annexed. II. The Nominative understood before the Verb. II. GENERAL MAXIM. Every verb hath its nominative expressed or understood ; but there are commonly three ways of suppressing the nominative. 1. In the first and second person, Amavi te^ quo die cognovi, Cic. sup. ego. Quidjacis ? sup. tu ; &c. 2. In verbs relating to the generality of mankind, Aiunty Jeruntf prcedicant, sup. homines. S. In verbs that are called impersonal. Vivifur, sup. vita. For since we say, Vivere vitam, it follows that we may also say Vivitur ■vita, because the accusative of the verb active may always be Tfendered by the nominative of the passive. In like manner when we say, peccatur^ we are to understand peccaiuni, and Cicero has expressed it, Quo in genere niu/ta peccantur. VigUatur, sup. nox, as Ovid has it. Nodes vigilantur aniarce. Festinatur, propcratur^ sup. res, ovfugQ ; as Virgil hath expressed it, Festinatefugam ; and the rest in the same manner. The reason of this is because thesfe verbs are called impersonal through a mistake, as we have already shewn, p. li!2. and following, and that they may have their nomi- native and persons like the rest. " Hereto we may refer those verbs which Sanctius calleth Verba natune, that express a natural effect, as Pluit, tonat, fidgnrat, tiin- git, lucescit, where we understand, Deus, ccelum, or nature ; or the jioun itself whence the verb is derived, as pluvia, nix, lux, &c. since we find that the vulgar languages oftentmies put this nomi- jaative, at least with an adjective, as in French, it a plu une grosse ^pluie, it has rained a heavy shotver : And in Latin other nouns are joined, as saxa pluunt, Stat. Tantum phiit iiice glanais, Virg. The infinitive oftentimes supplieth the place of the nominative, .and ought to be understood as such in discourse, because it is con- .^idered as a verbal noun, according to what hath been already •^said, p. 113. J II. The Accusative understood after the Verb. III. GENERAL MAXIM. Every verb I'ctive hath its accu- isative expressed or understood. But it is oftentimes omitted, and especially before the relative H a 3 At simul heroum laudes, S>; facta parentis Jam legere, 8^ quce sit poteris cognoscere virtus. And in Cic. Itaque simul experrecti sumus, visa ilia contemnimus. Si is understood when we say • Tu quoque magnam Partem opere in tanto, sineret dolor, Icare haberes, Virg. Decies centena dedisses Huic parco paucis contentOy quinque diebus Nil crat in loculis, Hor. Ut h not taken for quamvis, as some people imagine, but then we understand esto or fac, as in Ovid, Protinus ut redeas, facta vi" debor anus, that is, esto ut station redeas, tamen, &c. Neither is ut taken for utinam, as when Terence says, Ut Syre te magnus per dat Jupiter i for we are to understand oro^ or precor ut, &c. Whea 175 NEW METHOD. Book VII. When we say, cave cadas, /axis, &c. we are to understand nei as it is in Cicero, Noiine atvcam ne scelus faciam ; likewise with the ne we are to understand ul, according to Vossius and Scioppius, for otherwise this 7ie would not govern the subjunctive. See what hath been said above, in explaining vereor ne, p. 162. What they call the potential or concessive mood may be like- wise resolved by this figure, as Fraugas poiius qiiutn conigas, that iSyJlet potius ntjrnngax, &c. Vicent, that is, estout vicerit. Obsitf prosit, nihil curan', ibr an obsit, &c. In like manner uhen we say. Bono aniiiij sis, it mesLnHfJiic id sis, Sec. Ames, Icgas, that is, moneo te v.t, or J ac ut ames, legas, &c. After non nioclb, nun solu)n, nan tantuni, (provided it does not hurt the sense) we are to understand non; as, Alexander non modo par- euSf sed etima lihcralis, that is, non modo non parous. Ita ut non modo civitns, sed ne vicini quideni proxinii sentiant, Cic. Non modo illi invidetitr cetali, x^erum ctium Juvctur , Id. Offic. 2. Hence it comes that the non is sometimes expressed. Qjina non modo vituperatio nulla, sed etiam summa laiis senectutis est, &c. Concerning which the reader may consult Muretus in his varicp /ectio7ies. . Tiie particle nempe is orteulimes necessary for resolving se- veral absolute modes oF speaking : as. Sic video philosopkis placu- isse ; Nil esse sapicntis prceftare nisi culpam, Cic. that is, nempe nihil esse, &c. Ccetera x^ero, (jnid qjusqne me dixissedicat, aut quomodo ille accipinty aid quajide mecnm vivant ii qui me assidiie colunt S^ ohset' vant,prcestare non possum. Id. that is, nempe, quid quisqiie,&c. Hoc verb ex quo suspicio nata est, me quasivissc aliquidin quo te offendercm^ translatitium est, Id. that is, nempe me qucBsivisse, &c. These are the most considerable things we had to observe in regard to the figure of Ellipsis, whereby every body is capable o% judging of" all the rest. For the most general rule that can be given upon this subject, is to take notice of the natural and most simple way of speaking, according to the idea we receive from vulgar languages, which oftentimes point out to us what we ought, reasonably to understand. Yet because on those occasions we may be at a loss for words, unless vv~e happen to be very conversant in the language, I shall therefore subjoin three lists. The first shall be of nouns: and the second of verbs, where I do not intend to include all those that may be understood (for this would be too tedious a piece ofvvork) but only the principal ones. Tlie third is to be ot' prepositions, Vhich generally form most of the governments and connexions of speech in all languages. XJI. FIRST LIST. Of several Nouns understood in Latin authors. £de:s m understood, wlien we s.iy, as we have shewn (hat it is also nn- Kst (iomi to the qut-sllon Uhi. See derslood, when wf say, Parvi pendo, the Syntax, rule 25, p. 50. and fol- A^« sum soltx-ndo, &c. lowing. Ambo, when we say, Mars Sf Venus. IE% is understood, when we say, Ra- capli dolis, Ovid. Cmlor £C Pollux tiQt or tal/uta aecepii Sf expensi, just allernis orienlet &; occidenles. And the OF THE ELLIPSIS. 177 Ihe like. For this is a kind of El- lipsis acooidiii? to Scioppius; unless we choose simply to say that then the two singulars are equivalent to a plu- ral, and refer it to the figure of syl- lepsis, of which hereafter. Amnis, when we say, confluens, projlvens, torrens, fluvius. See the Genders, vol. 1. p 6. Animus, when we say, Rogo te ut ioni consulas, that is, vt stalnas hanc rem esse boni anim'i, proceedt from a good icill ; though we generally translate it by the person that re- ceives, / beg you will lake litis in good part. Ars. or SciENTiA, when we say, Me- dicina, Mitsica, Dialeclica, Rkeloricn, Fabrica, &c. Arvum, when we say, novale. Citlta novalta, Virg. But when he says, Tonsas nnvales, we are to understand terras, so called A novando, says Varro, because they are renewed, or the seed is changed. Bo.v^, when we say, Eomo frugi : for the antientsused to say, bonce frugis ; afterwards they said, bonce frugi ; and at length frugi, by itself, as Sanctius observes. Campum, when we say, per nperlum ire. Carcer, as it was heretofore neuter, ought to be understood, in saying, Pistrinum, Tullianum, &c. Causa, in saying, Exercilum opprimen- d(£ tiberlatis habet, Sallust. Successo- rum Minervce indoluit, Ovid. Integer vitce, sceleris purus, Hor. See the Syn- tax, p. 22. Caro, when we say, buhula, vervecina, suilla, ferina, &.C, Castra, when we say staliva, hyberna. See fleteroc. vol. I. p. 161. Centena, when we say, Debet decies, or decies seslertium. See the chapter on Sesterces, in the particular obser- vations, book 8. Clitellas, when we say, Imponere alicui, to impose upon him, to deceive him. For this is properly ti eating him as an ass, C(ELUM, vfhen we S3iy, serenum, purum, &c. Consilium, when we say, Arcanum, secrelum, propositum, Perstat in pro- posito, &c. CopiA, when we say, Eges medicince, abundas peciiniarum. Corona, when we say, Citii:&. dona- tus ; Muralem, Obsidionalem adepius, &c. As likewise when we say, • Voi. II. serta ; just as serttim refers to cvmra^ mentttm, which we find in Cato and in Pliny. Crimine, or actione, when we say, . Furti damnatus. Repeiundarum pos- titlutus. See rule 2S. Datum, when we say, Aon est te fallere cuiquam. Dies, when we say, Illuxit, or mens est natalis, &c. Dii, when we say, Superi, Ir^feri, Manes, &c. DoMus, when we say, Regia, Basilica. DoMUM, when we say, Uxorem duxit. Exta, when we say, casa el porrecta, as in Cicero, Ne quid inter ccesa &! porrecta, ul aiunl, oneris nobis ad- dalur, aul temporis. That vyhen I shall approach towards the expiration of my time, I may net be troubled with any new protraction of my of- fice. The metaphor is taken from hence, that when the entrails are cut and drawn out of the belly of the victim, which is what they called C.9iSA, the priest, who offered the sacrifice, held and considered them some time before he presented them upon the Altar; which is what they called Porricere, Facultas, or potestas, when we say, Cernere erat. Nun est te fallere cut' quam, &c. Testa, when we say, Bacchanalia, Sa- tttrnalig, Agonalia. Finis, when we say, haclenus, quatenus. For it mean', hacfine lenus. Frumenta, when we say, sata ; as fruges, when we say, satce. FuNERA, when we say, Justa persol- vere. Homo, in adolescens,juvenis, amicus, fa- miliaris ; and whenever the adjective which agreeth with man, is taken absolutely, as miser sum, salvus ium ; also in optimates, magnates, mortales, Germani, Galli, &c. Idem, as Eguo fere qui homini morbi, Plin. for fere iidein qui. Ingenium, or isstitutum, or morem, when we say, AnUquum obtines. Plant. Nunc ccgnoscn vcslrum tarn superbum, Ter. Is, for talis, or tantus, is very often understood, as Homo improbus, sfd cuipaucos itgenio pares invenias, for is cut. Iter, when we say. Sua pergis, quo tendis? Virgil has even expressed it, Tendit iter velis portumqice relinquit. N JUDICES, 178 NEW METHOD. Book VII. JuDicEs, when we say, Mitlere in con- silium. Whence, according lo Asco- nius, it is taken for perorare, when the orator having finished, the judges met in order to gather the votes. Teslibus editis ila mittam in consilium ttt, &c. Cic. JuDicio, or Jure, when we say, faho, merito, immerilo, which are all of them real nouns adjective. Lapis, when wesaj', Molaris, Laud EM, when we say. Cur mihi de- trahis ? Liber, when we say, annalis, diurnus- In like manner in the plural, LiBRi, when we say, pugillares. As also when we say pandects, a Greek word, which Tiro, Cicero's freedman, gave for title to books that he wrote on miscellaneous questions. 3,uos Graco titulo, says Gellius, TravSEKTttC, libra inscripsit, lanquam omne rerumalque doclrinarum genus conlinentes. And afterwards this very title was conferred on the body of the civil law collected by Justinian, which is otherwise called Digesta, orum. Several have doubted of what gender this word Pandectee ■was, because, as Varro and Priscian have very well observed, the nouns in »ij of the first declension of the Greeks, which in that language are mascu- line, being changed into a in Latin, become feminine, as o ;)^apT»)?, lusc charla. Hence Budeus has said Pandeclas Pisanas in the feminine. But Vossius believes that this rule of Priscian will hold good only as to nouns that have no relation to an- other more general word understood, as in this case libri ; for which rea- son he says, comcla and planela are masculine, because ix{-^S is understood. Ant. Aug. H. Stephen, Mekerchus, Andr. Scliot, and several others, are of this opinion. And Ciijas himself has acknowledged his error, since in his latter works he always put it in the masculine. LiBR£, or MBRARUM, (gcnitlve sin- gular or plural of lihra, a pound) when we say, Curona aurea fuit pondo v'ginli quinqne, Lin. and the like, that is, pondo or pondere librarum '25. For pondo is only an ablative like mundo. See the Genders, rule 8, and the Heretoclites, list 6. LiNEAS, when we say, ^d incilas re- dacl'is, reduced to extremity; for incilie comes from cieo for tnovfo. b0C»tusd those who play at draughts. being driven to the last row, can stir no further. Hence it is that th» men at draughts are called incUi, that is, immobiles. But where Lucilius said. Ad incita, we are to understand Inca. Hence it is, says St. Isidorus, that they gave the name of inciti to those who had lost all hopes of ever extricating themselves from their mi- sery. LiTERAS, where Cicero says, Tiiduo abs ie nullas acceperam. And in this passage of Plautus, Hodie in ludum occaepi ire lilterarum ; lernasjam scid, A. M. O. Where there is no sort of foundation, say Scioppius and Vos- sius, for taking this word ternas for the three conjugations of verbs, as Alvarez has done, just as if a child could learn three conjugations, the lirst day he went to school. Locus, when we say. Hie senex de pro- ximo : ab humili (sup. laco) ad sum- mum (sup. locum.) In medium ,• con- venerunt in unum, &c. Prima, secun- dn, tertio, &c. sup. loco. LocA, in the plural, when we say, /Estiva, hjberna, stalica, pornaria, rosaria, supera, in/era, &c. LuDi, when we say, Circcnses, Mega- lesii, Sitculares, Funebres, &c. Malum, when we say, Caveo tibi, 71- meo tibi ,• Metuo a ie, de te, pro le, &c. But when we say cnvere malo, we are to understand se a malo. Mare, when we say, profundum, ultiivt, tranquillum, Mensis, when we say, Januarius, Apri- lis, October, &c. MiLLE, or rather millia, which sup- poseth also 7iegotia, when we say decern or centum sesterlia, or denatia. See the chapter on Sesterces in thtt next book. MoDiA, when we say, Millia frumenii . MoDO, in perpeluo, cerlo, &c. Mortem, when we say oh'iil. And it is still usual to say occitmbere mor* tern, &c. Navim, when we say, solvit, conscendit, appulit. Negotium. We have already taken notice of this, as one of the most general rules. It may also be ob- served on this occasion, that this same noun is understood, when wft say lanto, quanta, aiiquanto, hoc, «im ? answers the old man. And thus Scioppius explains it. This noun is also nnderstood, when we say 7nille or millia, sup. negotia ; for mille being an adjective like the other numeral nouns, it must needs have its substantive, concerning which see the chapter on Sesterces in the next book. JIdmus, or NUMERUs, when we say, de- Jiarius, quinarius, &C. Also when we say, quadrans, quin- cunx-, sestertius, &c. NuNTiuM, when we say, Obvidmilli mi- simus. Nux, when we say, avellana, juglans, pinea, persica, castanea, &c. Officium, when we say, Nan est meum, or Regium eU bene facer e. Also when we say. Est regis, &c. Opera, when we say, Bucolica, Geor- gica, Rhetorica, orum, &c. Opus, when we say, Hoc nnn solum la- boris, veritm etiam ingeniifuit. Oratio, when we say, prosa, which Cometh from prorsa for recta, the contrary of which is versa. For prorsus heretofore signified rectus, from whence comes prorsi limites, in Festus; Prorsa Dea, that presided over women in labour. Ostium, when we say, posticum, a back door. OvES, when we say, hidentes ; hence it is generally feminine in this sense. But if we join it with verres, it will be masculine, as in Non. bidenti verre. Pabs, when we say, Antica, postica, decima, quadrageiima, primas, secun- das, Sue. Non posterinres feram, Ter. Eisecundns deferl. Quint, sup. partes. In like manner, pro raid, pro virili. sup. parte. Passus, when" we say. Ire duo millia, Mart. Luiitudo septingentorum mil- Hum, Cebs. Pr/^dium, when we say, suburbanum, Tusculanum, &c. PuER or PuELLA, when we say infans ; for this word is an adjective : hence it is, that in Valerius Maximus we find puerum infantcm, that could not speak. Raster, when we say, bidens, tridens, &c. Ratio, when we say, expensa, imptnsa, summa ; just as we understand ra- tiones, when we say coniurbare, to confound one's accounts, and to use some fraud, either towards the master or towards the creditors, to make them lose their turn, and to pay the last before the first. Rem famii.iarem, when we say, deco' quere, to squander away his estate, to turn bankrupt ; whence also we have decoctor, a bankrupt. Sermo, in these familiar phrases, of Cicero's, Brevi dicam. Cmnplecti brevi, Brevi respondere. Circum- scribi S^ dejiniri brevi, sup. sermone. And when he says, Brevihus agere, brevibus aliquid dicere, sup, sermo- jiibus or verbis, in short, in a few words. Servus or Minister, when we say. Est illi a pedibus, or circicm pedes, a manu, or ad manum, a. secretis, a. libellis, &c. Sestertium, (for sesterliorum) when we say centum millia. And both are understood when we reckon by the adverb, as debet mihi defies, and the like. See the chapter on Sesterces \u the next book. SiGNUM, when we say, bellicum or clas» sicum canere. SiNGULi, when we say, in naves, in annos, in horas, &c. Solum, when we say. Terra defigitur arbor, Virg. sup. 171 solo. Hence ia Sallust, Arbores quce humi arido al- que arenoso )iascuutur, that is, in solo humi arido, &c. Tabells, when we say, in eborcis, laureatis, &c. For heretofore the tablets or table-books took their name either from the matter they were made of, or from the number of leaves. As eboreie, citrex, dupli- ces, iriplices, &c. Laureatep, were those which the emperors used to send to the senate after obtaining a victory. N2 Ta- no NEW METHOD. Book VIL Taberna, when we say, medicina, su- irina, tcxiiina, lonstrina, fabiicn, sn- Ihin, laniaua, &o, whicli are all ad- jectivHs. See pist.-iriiim in the Hetcr. vol. 1. p. 137. Tabu us, when we «ay in diiodecim. For the twelve tables were the fun- damental laws of the Roman re- public. Tempus, when we -say ex en, ex quo, ex il'lo : Ex illo fiuere res JJanaum, Virg. Tcrlio, quarto, exlremo, Set'. Opiate, brevi, sera, &c. Terlium fonsul, postremum ad me v(nit, ice. Hoc noclis, id ittalts, &c. Antehnc, posiliac, ( liac is here taken for hec. ) Antea, poslea, prrrterea, pest ilia, sup. iempora. Cicero hath even expresbed it. Post ilia tempora qukunque rem}), agitavere, &c. Non iicehal nisi prtr- finiLo loqui, ?.\x\}. tempore. Prope adest cum alieno morevivendum est mifii, Ter. sup. tempus. Eril ciimfccisse nolles, sup. lempus. And an infniite number of the like sort. Teiira, when we say, patria, conthiens. Likewise when we say, jacet humi, in- stead of in lerrd humi. For the earth is divided iTt aquam et hnmnm, ac- cording to Varro. In like manner, when we say, Natus est JEgypti, sup. in terrL See r. 25. p. 50. Vada, when we say, brevia, shallows, flats. Vasa, when we say, Jtctilia, vitrea, chryslallina. Just as Vas, when we say, atramenlarium, sa- il num. VERnA. Doccre pauds, Virg. sup. verbis. Responsum paucis reddere, Id. Pro re pauca loquar. Id. panels le V lo, Ter. sup. verbis alloqui. As also, Pauds est quod te volo, for Est neguliinn propter quod pnttcis te verbis alloqui voln. Dicer e pauca, sup. verba. Respondere pauca, Hor. &C. Via, when we say, kac, iliac, islac, qua, e&, recto, &c. Appia, Aurelia, &c. As also viam, when we say, ire, in- gredi. Virgil has even expressed it, [!qtte reditque viam, 8cc. ViNUM, when we say, mustum, merum, Falernum, Mnsiicum, &c. which are nouns adjective. ViR, Uxor, or Femina, when we say, conjux, maritus, or marita. And in the plural, opiimates, magnates, primates, majores, &c. sup. viri or feminic. Virga, when we say, rudem accipere, that is, to be discharged from further business. For one of the ways of discharging was by the praetor's put- ting a rod or wand on the head of the person whom he discharged or re- leased, and this rod was called rudis, from its being rough and unwrought. It had also the name of festuca, as likewise of vindicia, because by this method, servi v'lndicahantur in liher- iatem. Hence cometh rude donalus, discharged from ail exercise or busi- ness, because when a gladiator came to be excused from fighting any more, they used to give him one of those rods. Urbs, when we say, natus Roma for in urbe Rom(e. See rule 25. p. 50.- Utile or commodum, when we say con- sulo tibi ; prospicio rrdhi, &c. It rnay likewise be observed on this occasion, that it is a kind of Elh'psis, at least according to Sanctius and Scioppius, when we do not follow the gender of the termination in particular nouns, but only the gender of the signification in regard to the common and general term. As, In names of trees, Delphica laurus, patula JagiiSy tarda morus^ &c. sup. arbor. In the names of herbs, Diclamnum pota sagittas pellit, Plin. Cen- tuncidiis trita ncclo, sup. herha, Idem. In the names of provinces, islands, towns, and others, con- cerning which see what has been said when treating of genders, rule 3, 4, 5, and 6. But then with the Ellipsis, there is also a Syllepsis, as we shall shew hereafter, p. 189. XIII. OF THE E L L I P S I S. XIII. SECOND LIST. Of several Verbs widerstood. 181 Adspicio or video, when we say. En qualuor ecles, Ecce hominem. En Priamiim. But if we put the uomina- tive, Ecce homo, en Priamus, we are to understand adest or venit, or the like. Amet or ADJirvET, when we say, Mehercule, Mecastor, Medius Jidius, (heathen forms of swearing, which Christians ought not to make use of) that is, 3Te Hercules, Me Deus Fidius amet or ndjuvet. And Cicero him- self informs us, that mehercule was said for Me Hercules. Thus Edepol is composed of three •words, that is of e for me, de for Deus, and pol for Pollux, sup, adjuvet. But ■we likewise say epol, that is, me Pol- lux, sup. adjuvet. So that it is a mis- take to write {edepol with an a, as practised by those who pretend that it means, guasi per adem Pollucis, which is not true. Canere, when we say, scit fidibus. CtEPiT, when we say. Ire prior Pallas, and the like. See the Syntax, p. 34, and the Figurative Syntax, p. 170. Dici, when we say, Male audit, he has a bad character. For it signifies male audit de se, or in se, or sibi dici ; so that male does not refer to audit, but to dici, which is understood. In like manner, when we say. Audit bonus, audit doctus, it implies, audit dici esse bonus, according to the Greek construction which we explained in the 5th rule, p. 14. Dico, when we say, Bona verba gutEso, sup. die. Nugas, sup. dicis. Sed htia, 1U ego absim, con- Jici pcssunt, that is, po^ito ut ego ab- sim, or esto, or fac ut, &c. Bono sis animo, or in animo. Facio, when we say, Dii meliora, sup. faciant. Studt-s, an piscaris, an ve- naris, an omnia simul? sup. facis. Hid node mliil prn vigilaium est in urbe, that is, Jiikil factum eit prcelerguam, &c. Ire, when we say, In Pompeianum co- gito. Rhodum volo, inde Athenas, &c, LoQui, when we say, ScitLatint, GrtEce, &c. See p. 34, Moneo, or FAC UT, when we say ames, legas ; ametis, leqatis ; Istud 7te dicas; lllud cogiles tecum; ISikil rescribas, Obsecro, imploro, or nuncupo, when we say, Pioh Deum. atgue komi- numfidem. See the Syntax, rule 35. p. 74. Oro ut, or PRECOR UT, when we say, Dii meliora ferant. Ul ie perda' Ju- piter. Sui illi Dei irati sinl, where gui signifies ut, or rather ^uj, sup. modo. See the remarks on the pro- nouns, ch. 1. n. 5. p, 93. and re- marks on the Adverbs, n. 2. p. 145. Paro, invenio, or the like, when we say, U'ide mihi lapidem ? Marlis sig- num, quo mihi pacts autori ? &c. Sum, es, est, is frequently under- stood : Suid mihi tecum ? sup. est, Huud moia (sup. est J festinant jussi. Hei mihi, imlibi, sup. est. See r. 35. p. 74. Suxnarn (malum) isla seivi' tus volur.taria, sup. est. Timeo, cave, vide, or the like when we say, Ah le nefrignra ladant. At ut satis conlemp/ala sis. Verum ne quid ilia tit u bet, &C. Of XIV. THIRD LIST. Prepositions that A, AB, AD, IN, ought to be understood with the names of large places or provinces, where they are not ex- pressed, as ^gypio remenns, Tac. sup. ab. Degit Carthagine, sup. in. See the Syntax, rule 25. p. 48. A, AB, are also understood with nouns signifying cause, instrument, trou- ble, &c. as. Culpa pallescere, Ense perforatus, Pleciere capite, &c. See the Syntax, rule 32, p. 70. With are to de understood. nouns of time, when they signify after, as Rediit hoste superalo, after having overcome the enemy, which is what we call the ablative ABSOLUTE. See the 34th rule, p. 72, With nouns signifying difference, or distance, as Stulto intelligens quid interest ; Abest virt'.ite illius. See the' 30th rule, p. 66. When we would signify only a part J 182 NEW METHOD. Book VII. part ; animo otiosus, for ab nnimo, in regard to ihe iniricl. Mulih, rebus me- lioT, for n multis rebus. See the 52d rule, p. 61). Ad, is understood in expressing measure or space. Lalus quinque pedes. See the 26th rule, p. 3.3. In expressing the end one aims at. 2ui(l Jrustrti luboramus ,■ for ad quid. Ramus visum or visere, for advsum, or ad visere. See the remarks on the Supines, ii. 3. p. 132. Also when wc say Cetera Icclus, for gucad ccflera, and the like. See the annotation to the 24th rule, p. 45. Ante, with nouns signifying time, Pridie Kalf'tidas, sup. ante. Mullos abhinc avuos, sup. ante. See the 26th rule, p. 53, and following. Circa, when speaking of time, as Tu homo id atnlis, that is, circa id (etofts. Cum, when speaking of instroraents, SagHld. saucius. See the 32d rule, p. TO. When we say, officio, honore, odio persequi, and the like. Sec. For it is the same signification as when Cicero saith, Cum equis persecuti sunt. To express time, eras, prima luce. Instead of which Terence hath, Cras cum primo lucu. But with time we may likewise understand in. See the 26th rule, p. 53. Pe, e, ex, with nouns that express plenty, or want, or the subject, as Nugis rejerti libri. Plenus vino. E- guus ligno fabrefnclus. Sacrificare tauro vcl agno, &c. See the 28th rule, p. 62. With the names of place that ex- press departure, F.xire Romd, Ilalid cedere. See the 25th rule, p. 48. With nouns sisrnifying time, as noctu or node. Ilord prima, Tertid vigilid. See the 2Cth rule, p. 53. With nouns that denote the cause or manner, Fltre alicujus o/.ibi ; vic- tilare Idio ; qunre for qua de re, li.c. See the 32d rule, p. 70. In like mauuer, laboro dolore, for e dolore. Amuris abundanlid hoc feci. Virlute clarus, &C. Also, Lege agere cum aliquo. Vo- care aliquem nomine, &c. In, with nouns signifying place, whe- ther in the ablative or the accusa- tive, as Domome conlineo, Vic. Sardi- niam venit, Cic. See the 25th rule, p. 48. With nouns signifying time, whe- ther in the ablative or the accusa- tive. See the 26lh rule, p. 53. and following. Wltl) nouns that denote the sub- ject or object, as Opus est mihi lihris, for in libris. See the annotation to the 28th rule, p. 65. With nouns that denote the cause, Accusal me eo quod, &c. for in eo quod. With nouns that express the state or condition. Sum magno lirmre, for in magno timore. Magna est apud omnes ghrid. De pace nee nulla, iicc magnd spe sumus, &c. With nonns that denote the means to attain the end, as Libris me obleclo. Ludis delectari. Sec. With nouns that denot-e order and arrangement, as Ordine a liquid facer e or cidlucare. With nouns that denote a particu- lar thing. }\on arm'tsprceslantior qudm iogd. Ob or Propter is oftentimes under- stood, when an inCtiitive supplietb the place of an accusative, that de- notes the cause or end, as Accipio do- lorem mihi ilium iraici, that is, ob irasci. See the remarks on the Verbs, chap. 2. n. 10. p. 113, 114. Iluod is frequently governed by the same prepositions, when we say, '2tiod ego le per hanc dexleram oro, Cic. that is, propter quod. Sund utinam miniis viicp cupidusfuisiem, for quam-oh-rem. See the remarks on the Adverbs, n. 3. p. 146. Per is frequently understood with nouns signifying time or distance, Vi.vii cen- tum annos. Distal quinque milliaria. See the 26th rule, p. 53. Also with nouns signifying a part, hirsulus brachia, for per brachia, and the like, of which wo have taken no- tice, in the annotation to the 24th rule, p. 45. and shall take further notice hereafter when we come to treat of the figure of Hellenism. Vr/e in comparisons, Dociior cictfris, for prcE Cfeteris, Sec. See the 27tli rule, p, 55. and following. To express the cause, Ilomini la- crymcE cadunt gaudto, Ter. that is, pro: g audio. Pro, with nouns signifying price, Emi magno, that is, pro magno pretio. Au- reus unus valet decern argenteis, that is, pro decern. See the 29th rule, p. 66. Sub, with the ablative called absolute, especially when it denotes some post, condition, dignity, or pre-eminence, as Te consule, Jpto teste, Aristottde au- tore, sole ardenie, Sec. See the 34th rule, p. 12. CHAP. OF THE ZEUGMA. 183 Chapteii ir. Of the second sort of Ellipsis^ called Zeugma. HITHERTO we have treated of the first sort of elh'psis, where we are obliged to understand some word which is not at all mentioned in the sentence. The second sort is, when the vrord has been already mentioned, and yet is again understood once or oftener. This is called Zeugma, a Greek word that signifieth connection or assemblage^ because under a single word are comprized several other nouns that depend thereon : and of this there are three sorts. I. A word understood as it was compressed before. The first is, when we repeat the noun or verb, in the same man- ner it has been already expressed. Donatus gives the following example hereof from the 5}d book of the jEneid: TroJHgena interpres Divum, qui numina Phcehi, Qui Iripodas, Clarii lauros, qui sydera sentis, Et volucrum linguas, Sf prcepetis omina penned. For sentis is expressed but once, and ought to be understood five times. It is however to be observed, that when we do not repeat the word that has been expressed, but understand a new one, it is not merely a Zeugma, but an Ellipsis, as already hath been ob- served, p. 168. II. A word understood otherwise than it was expressed before. The second sort of Zeugma, is when the word expressed cannot be repeated without receiving some alteration. 1. Either in gender, Ei genus, 8^ virtus nisi cum re vilior alga est, Hor. JJtinam aiit hie surdus, out hcec mutajiicta sit, Ter. 2. Or in case, Q,uid ille Jecerit quern neque pudet quicquam, nee metuit quemquam, nee legem se putat tenere uUam ? Ter. for qui nee metuit, &c. 3. Or in number, Sociis Sf rege recepto, Virg. Hk illius arma, hie currus fuit, Id. Tutaturjavor Euryalum lacrymaque decorce, Id. 4. Or in person, Ille timore, ego risii corrui, Cic. Quamvis ille niger, quamvis tu candidus esses, Virg. III. A word understood in the enuyneration of parts. The third is, when after a word which includes the whole, a dis- tribution of the parts is made without repeating the verb, as Aqui^ la volanint, hcec ab oriente, ilia ab occidente, Cic. Consules pnfecti, ' Valerius in Campaniam, Cornelius in Samnium, Liv. Bestia alia: mares, aliccfemince, Cic. Where we may observe how wrong it is to say, that &k such occasions we are always obliged to use the genitive of partition, as bestiarum alia, &c, ♦ IV» 184 NEW METHOD. Book VII. IV. Elegance to be observed in 7xgard to the Zeugma. It is sometimes extremely elegant to understand the same word under a different meaning ; as Tucolis harbam, il/e patrem. Nero siistidlt matrem, JEncax patron, &c. ClIAPTEIl III. Of the second figure, called Pleonasm. A PLEONASM is when there happens to be a word more than is necessary, as magis majores nugas agere. Plant, where viagU is superfluous. Sc ab omnibus desertos potius, quam abs te defcnsos esse malurit, Cic. Where poiius is superfluous, because of the force of the word nmlo. In the same manner in Cicero, Omnia qucecanque. In Terence, Nihil quicquam, where omnia and quicquam are superfluous. Likewise when a noun is joined to a pronoun, m the same pe- riod, Sed urbana plcbs, ea verb prccceps erat multis de causis, Sail. Posthumius autem, de quo nominatim senatus decrevit ut statim in CUiciam iret, Fusanoque succederef, is negat se iturum sine CatonCf Cic. ad Att. for is is altogether redundant in this passage, unless it be to render the sentence more elegant and perspicuous. For which reason those pronouns are often repeated in French. Also when there are two particles in a period, that have the same force, as Oportuit prcescisse me aide, Ter. Nosmeiipsos, Cic. Nidlam esse alteram, Plant. Qids alter, quis quisquam, &c. or two negatives that make but one, as neque nescio, and others, of which we have taken notice already, p. 15.5. In a word, whatever is inserted in a sentence without any depen- dence on tlie sense or government, is called a Pleonasm. But it is to be observed that sometimes what we look upon as abundant, was inserted by the antients for the sake of elegance, strength, or perspicuity ; and therefore is not really abundant. We must likewise take notice that some grammarians happening not to understand sufficiently the real causes of government, give us as a Pleonasm what is indeed a most simple and natural expres- sion ; as when Linacer says that Venit ad Messenam, in Cicero, Ab Romci abire, in Sallust and the like, are pleonasms ; whereas the construction depends entirel)'^ on the preposition, as we have shewn in the 25th rule and following, and when it is not expressed, it is an Ellipsis. Thus vivere viiatn, gauda-e gaudittm, Jurerefurorem, servireser- ritutetn, and the like, may indeed be called Pleonasms, in regard to the use of authors and to the sense, because the verb by itself signifies as mucjj as when joined with those other words : though with respect to the construction, it is rather an Ellipsis, when they are not expressed, as we have already observed, chap. 2. n. 3. l>ut when an adjective is added, as longam vivere vitam, duram ser- vire servilutem, it is then no longer a Pleonasm even according to the sense, because the verbs vivere and scrvirc do not by themselves imply this meaning. . la ON THE SYLLEPSIS. 185 In lilce manner the pronouns, Triihi, tib'i, sihi, are oftentimes taken for a Pleonasm, when they are only the real dative of rela- tion ; as me, se, te, the real accusative, necessary in construction. Qui mild, tumjijtnt senes, Ter, Mihi, that is, in respect to me. Me id faccre studeo, Plaut. mcj'acere is only the real construction of the infinitive; and if it were simply stiideo facer e, it would be an El- lipsis, where we should be obliged to understand me ; and in like raanner the rest. Chapter IV. Of the third figure^ called Syllepsis. SYLLEPSIS or conception, is when we conceive the sense different from the import of the words, and thus the con- struction is formed according to the meaning, and not to the words. This figure is of very great use for the right understanding of au- thors, and may be divided into two sorts according to Scioppius, one simple or absolute, and the other relative. I. The simple Syllejms. The simple Syllepsis is when the words in a sentence differ either in gender, or number, or both. - 1. In gender, as when Livy saith, Snmniliiim duo milUa ccesi, and not ccesa, because he refers it to homines. There were two thou- sand Samnites slain. Duo miltia crucihus qffixi, Curt. Duo millia electi qui morijuberentur, Flor. and such like ; where we may see that L. Valla had no foundation to find fault with these Scriptural phrases. Duo millia signati, &c. And when Horace saith, Daret ut catenis Jhtale monstrum, quce generosius perire qucerens, &c. he put quts, because by monstrum he meaneth Cleopatra. Thus it is we find Ducn importuna prodigia, quos egestas, &c. Cic. Potiiis quam islam a me operam impetres, quod postidas f Phut. Ulii est scelits qui meperdiditf Ter. And in one of the hymns of advent, Verbum supernum prodiens, A patre olim exiens, Qui natus orbi subvenis ; Cursu declivi temporis. Verbum qui, because Verbum is the same as Filius Dei ; especially, after having mentioned the Father. Hence it is when Urban VIII. set about revising the hymns, he did not choose to alter this expres- sion, but only corrected the second verse, where the measure was not observed, and put E patris ceterni sinu. And I remember this gave occasion to a person to find fault with that Pope for leaving a solecism in this hymn ; so dangerous is it to be only a smatterer in learning, and have but a slender knowledge of the real principles of the Latin tongue. 2. In number. There is also a disagreement in number, as turba ruunt, Virg. because the word turba, though a singular, in- cludes a multitude. And in like manner, Attcrum in alterius mactatos t> ne NEW iMETHOD. Book VI I. maclatos sanguine cernam, Virg. Ut alter aiterum nee opinato vide- rimiis, Cic. Missi mairnis dc rebus nterque Irgati, Hor. Proplerea quod, for propter id quod. In the same manner as Plautus said, a^nor amara dnt tihi satis quod agre sit. And Cic. Si tempus est idlitmjure hominis necandi qucB luuila sunt. Quid enim Jail in illis Uteris, j)r(vter querelam temporum, (xvx. non animum meum magis sollicitum haberent quam tuum '^ Cic. Quce for quod, referring to quid. Servitia repudiabat cujus initio ad eum magnce copies con- currebant. Sail, in Catil. that is cnjus servitii, for servitium is taken there for slaves, as Cicero hath put it, cceptum esse in Sicilia nioveri servitium. In like manner Terence says, Aperite aliquis ostium, which agrees very well with the French language, ouvrez la porte quelquun, that \?.y ouvrez la porte (speaking to them all) S<; que quelquun de vous Vouvre. It is likewise by this figure that the same poet saith, ac- cording to Ramus and Scioppius, absente nobis, and Plautus, prcc- sente nobis. 3. In gender and number, as Pars in carcerem octi, pars bestiis objecti, Sail. Pars mersi tenuere ratcm, Virg. Allerum in alterius mactatos sanguine cernam, Virg. Mars S^ Venus capii, Ovid. But that which is formed with the Preposition cum, seemeth somewhat bolder, and is tolerated rather in the writings of poets than of orators : Ilia cum Niso de Nnmitore sati, Ovid. Syrus cum illo vestro susurrant. Ter. Divellimur inde Iphitus 4" Pelias viecum, Virg. Remo cum fratre Quirinus — -juj-a dabunt, Id. Yet Cicero has also made use of it, Dictrarchum vero cum Aristoxeno cequali Sf condiscipulo suo, doctos sane homines relinquamus. And Q. Curtius, Pharnabasus cum Appollonide 8^ Athenagora vincti traduntur, lib. 4-. In like manner an excellent author has wrote thus in French, laissant sa mere avec sajemme Sf ses eiifans prisonniers. II. The I'elat'we Syllepsis. Tlie relative Syllepsis, is when we refer the relative to an ante- cedent that has not been expressed, but of which we form an idea by the meaning of the whole sentence. Inter alia prodigia etiam came pluit, quem imbrem avesjeruntur rapuisse, Liv. The reference is here made to imber, which has not been expressed, but is in- cluded in the word pluit, as if it were carnis imber pluit. In like manner, Perliteras me consolatus sum, quem librum ad te mittam, Cic. Where per literas is taken for the composition or work which he promises to send. Mitkridaticum verb bellum, magnum atque difficile, &; in midta varietate terra marique versatum, totum ab hoc expressum est, qui libri non modb L. Lucullum fortissimum &( clarissimum virum, verum popidi Ilomani nomen illustrant, Cic. where qui libri refers to his work, which is included in these terras, bellum expressum est. De Prcetiana heredilate, quce quidem mihi magno dolori est fvalde enim ilium amavi,) hoc velim cures, Cic. here ilium refers to Pretius his friend, whom he has not mentioned, but who is included in these words, Prcetiana hccreditate. Sed antea conjuravere pauci contra rempublic. in quibus Calilina J^uit, de qtta quambrevissime potcro dicam. Sail, That OF THE SYLLEPSIS. 187 That is, de qua conjuratione, says Sanctius. Et laudare fur tunas mens, Qui gnatiun haberem tali ingenio prceditum, Ter. That is, meas hominis qui, &c. Nam Sextianiis dum vulo esse conviva, Orationem in Attium petitorem Plenam veueni Sf pest il entice tegit, Catul. Carm. 45. Where we must understand ille, that is Sextius, for the nominative of legit. For this nominative is included in the adjective Sextiauus ; and it is just as if it were, Nam Sextiiipse dum voto esse conviva, &c. Deinde Philenorum arcc, quern locum habuere Carthaginenses, Sail, where we must understand locus by apposition, as if it were Arce locus, quern locum, &c. Likewise in Virgil, Inierea socios, inhumataque corpora terrcs Mandemus, qui solus ho/ios Acheronte sub imoest. Where honos is the apposition of mandare corpora terrce. Again, Hortamur Jari quo sanguine cretus, Quidve ferat memoret, quce isitjiducia capto, iEn. 2. That is, qucB hortatio sit Jidncia capto, in order to encourage him to speak. And in Cicero, Atque in hoc genere ilia qiioque est infinita silva, quod oratori plerique duo genera ad dicendum dederunt, 2. de Orat. where quod supposeth negotium. For the meaning is. Quod negotium, nempe silvam illam hifinitam, plerique dederunt ora- tori, tanquam duo genera ad dicendum. To this relative Syllepsis we must likewise refer these modes of speaking by short parentheses, which are so graceful in the Latin Janguage, and include a relative that has no other antecedent but the very thing expressed before; as quare quoniam hcec a me sic petis, ut (quce tua potestas est) id neges me invito usurum, Cic. ad Attic. Tamen (quce tua suavitas est ; quique in me amor) nolles ci we hoc tempore cEstimationem accipere. Id, ad Rufum : that is, to nolle accipere quce tua suavitas est, &c. Where we see that the relative, being between two nouns of different genders, agrees here with the latter, according to what was observed in the rule of the relative, p. 6. To this figure also we must refer a great many obscure passages of the Vulgate, where the pronoun relatives do not refer to the nearest noun, but to some other more distant, or which is under- stood ; as Prcecipiens Jesus duodecim apostolis suis, transiit inde ut doceret <^ prcedicaret in civitatibus eorum. Matt. IL where eorum refers to Judceorum, and not to the apostles who are mentioned immediately before. Cwm loquitur mendacium (Diabolus) ex pro- priis loquitur, quia mendax est, S^ pater ejus, (sup. mendacii) Joan. 8. Et erant Phariscei 8^ legis doctores, &c. Sf virtus Domini erat ad sanandum eos, Luc. 5. that is, the great multitudes mentioned be- fore, and not the Pharisees. You may likewise see S. Matt. c. 12. V. 9. S. Luke c. 4. v. 15. and the 98th psalm v, 8. The relative adverb is sometimes resolved by the same figure, as in this passage of Job in the Vulgate, Nudus egressus sum de utero matris mece, 8^ nudus revertar illuc. Where illuc does not refer to the preceding word, which is uterus, but to another understood, which is the earth, or the dust. C ii a p. laS N E W MET H O D. Book VII. Chapter V. That the Syllepsis is fre.que.ntli) joined mth another figure, and oj' some dijjicult passages which ought to be referred thereto. WE are also to observe that the Syllepsis is frequontly joined with other figures, as with the Zeugma, the Ellipsis, and' the Hypcrbaton ; and this is what renders it more strange and dif- ficult. Hereto we might refer some of the passages cited in the precedent chapter : but we must illustrate the matter further by more particular examples. I. JSyllepsis xvith a Zeugma. It is joined with a Zeugma, when the adjective or relative does not refer to the gender of the nearest substantive, but to some other that precedeth ; as Amor Urns ac judicium de me, utriim mild plus dignitatis in perpetuum, an vohiplaiis quutidie sit allaturus, non facile dixerimy Plaiicus Ciceroni, where allaturus refers only to amor tuus, so that we must understand allaturum once more, along w'lih judicium. In like manner, Gens cui natiira corpora animbsque magis magna quain Jirma dedit, Liv. Pedes ejus pirccisos Sf caput Sf manus in cistam chlamyde opertos pro munere natalitio matri misit, Valer. Maxo Nefando quideni auditum est crocodilum aut ihim aut Jielem violatum ab Aigyptio, Cic. 1. de iiatur. where he makes the construction in the masculine, though ye/cs, which is tlie latter word, be of the feminine, as we have already shewn when treat- ing of the Heteroclites, vol. 1. p. 142. col. 2. Qidn ctiam vites ^ caulibus brassicUque si propc sati sint, ut a jjestijeris Sf nocentibus re- Jugere dicuntur, nee eos tilla ex parte contingere, 2. de natur. where he likewise makes the construction in the masculine, because of caulis, masc. though brassica, the latter, be feminine. Ccvlum ac terra ardere visum, Jul. Obsequens. Philipjn vim atque arma toti Grcecice cavendam metuenddmque esse, Gell. as H. Stephen reads it, and as it is quoted by Saturnius and Sanctius. And in Virgil, Me puer Ascaniiis, capitisque injuria cari, Quern regno Jlespericujraudo. Where he puts quern, though cajnit, the latter word, be of the neu- ter gender. Thus in the 2. de Natur. Dear, by the same figure Cicero saith, TLx ccthere igitur innumerabiles flamm^ siderum existunt, quorum est princeps sol, Szc. Deinde reliqua sidera magnitudinibus immeu' sis. Atque hi tanti ignes tamque multi, non modb nihil nocent ter- ris, rebusque terrestribus ; sed ita prosunt, ut si mot A loco sint, con- Jlagrare terras necesse sit a tantis ardoribus. Where woia, which we find in the best copies, refers to sidera, and not to ignes, which is the latter word. But if we read mota; in the feminme, according to Lambinus, we must needs refer it to Jlammce, which is only in the beginning of the precedent period, and then this figure will be still more extraordiiiar\'. And OF THE SYLLEPSIS. 189 And it may further be observed that tliis same figure is also practised in regard to the verb, when after two different nouns, it IS not pat in the pkiral so as to follow the noblest person, nor made to agree with the Intter person, though it be put in the singular, as Ego Sf popuhis Bom. helium indico Jacioque, Liv. not indicit nor indicimus, &c. II. With an entire Ellipsis. And though these constructions seem very extraordinary, yet there are others still more surprizing, when this figure is joined with an entire Ellipsis, that is, when we must understand a word that has not been at all expressed, which happens particularlj' on two occasions. 1. When we make the construction and the reference in the worthiest gender, pursuant to what hath been explained, in the 4th rule, p. 9. though departing entirely from the gender of the noun expressed, as when Virgil saitli, Timidi Damce, Talpce oculis' capti, which he could not say without understanding masculi, with* those epicenes of the feminine. Thus Cicero saith, Qiwd si hcec apparent iyi hestils volucribus, agrestibus, natantibus, suibus, ciairibus, Jeris, primum id se ipsi di- ligant, &c. Where it is remarkable that he has put ipsi in the mas- culine, though there is nothing before it to which it can be referred but to besticCf since all the other nouns refer to it, either as ad- jectives, or as substantives of the common gender, put by apposi- tion. And Virgil : Hinc pecudes, nrmenta, viros, genus omnejerarum, QuEMQUE sibi tenues nascentem arcessere vitas. We might mention a great many other examples of the same sort : and it may likewise be observed, that when we take the common and general noun to refer to, rather than to the particular noun which has been expressed, this is also a Syllepsis joined with an Ellipsis: as in suam Eunuckum, su:p. Jabulam. Centauro invehitur magna, sup. navi, &c. Which is sufficient to shew tkat the Latin tongu6 hath its irregularities, or rather its figures in gender and construction, as well as the Greek ; and that no expression is u^ed in either without some grounds, or reason. '2.. The second case where the Syllepsis is joined with an Ellipsis, is, says Scioppius, when understanding the attribute or subject of a preposition, we take the gender of the word expressed, for that of the other understood, to which it refers notwithstanding; as if holding a diamond in my hand, I were to say, Hcec est gemma, where hcBC without doubt would refer to adamas, though masculine. And this construction occurs quite at length in Virgil, where he says : — Fatilis descensus Averni, Sed revocare gradum, supetdsgue evadere ad auras. Hoc opus, hie labor est. Where hie labor, as well as hoc opus, refers to to revocare and to evadere. And Cicero has used it in the same manner, where he says, Solum igitur quod se movet hicjbtis, hoc principiwn est movendiy 190 NEW METHOD. Book VI I. movencfi, in Somn. Where quod se movet, (which is self-moved) is the subject to which hie Jons, unci hoc pnncip/utn refers. Thus it is elegant to say, Hie error est, non scelus, that is, hoc negotium est error, S; non est scclus. We say, Hie est pants qui de ccelu descendit, that is, hcec res est panis qui, &c. And in like manner addeth Scioppius, Hie est sanguis meus ; hoc est corpus meum, for hcec res est sanguis meus; hcec res est corpus meum, &c. But this relative Syllepsis occurreth also in regard to the attribute, wlien it is evidently understood, and yet without being referred to, as when we say, Leo est animaliumfortisyiinus ; homo animalium divinissimus, it seems that we ought necessarily to understand ani- mal : lea, or homo ed animal, &c. So that we conceive the neuter gender, which would require us to \i\xi Jbrtissimum, diviuissimum, &c. thougli we oftener use the masculine, that is, the gender of the substantive expressed, according to what has been observed in the rule of the Partitive, p. 59. III. IVith an Hyperhaton. The Syllepsis is joined with an Hyperbaton (of which we shall treat presently) when in a sense bordering on that above explain- ed, there is likewise an inversion of the order of words. As in the passage of Tertullian, of which the Protestants have attempted to avail themselves, where he says, Acceptuin panem Sf distributum dis- cipulis corpus suum ilium fecit, hoc est corpus meum, dicendoy id est Jigura corporis mei : jigura autem, &c. where it is plain that Jigura corporis mei, is only the explication of the subject of the preposi- tion, as Cardinal du Perron proveth admirably well in his book on the Eucharist. For it means, hoc or hcec res, id est Jigura corporis mei, this thing which is the legal figure of my body, est corpus ■meum, is my body. For it is certain that otherwise there would be no sense or meaning in what follows. Chapter VI. Of the fourth Jigure, called Hyperbaton. AN Hyperbaton is the mixture or inversion of the order o^ words, which order ought to be common to all languages, according to the natural idea we have of construction. But the Ro- mans were so fond of figurative discourse, that they hardly ever used any other, and Horace is the most obscure of all in this way of writing. The figure ha!ith five species. 1. Anastrophe, which is the inversion of words, as mecum for cum me. Quamobrem, for ob quam rem. Qua de re, for de qua re. His accensa super, Virg. Ore pedes tetigUque crura, Hor. and in like manner Quhin potius for potius quam ; quamprius for priusquam. Ilium sccpe suis decedensjovit in idnis, Qudm prius abjunctos scdula lavit equos, Prop. Which is borrowed from the Attics, according to Scaliger, who say ii v^iv, instead of Trfiv v. 2. Tmesis, when a word is cut in two, as Septem subjecta trioni. Virg. OF THE HYPERBATON. 191 Virg. for septentrioni. Garrulus hunc quando consumet cunque, Hor. for quandocunque, &c. Quo me cunque rapit tempestas : and the like. 3. Parenthesis, when the sense is interrupted by parenthesis; as Tityre dum redeo (brevis est via) pasce capellas, Virg. 4. Synchisis, when the whole order of natural construction is confounded, as Saxa vocanf Itali mediis quce injluctibus, aras, Virg. That is, Jtali vacant aras saxa ilia, quce sunt in mediis Jiuctibus. • Donee regina sacerdos Marte gravis geminam partu dabit Ilia prolem. Id. That is. Donee Ilia sacerdos regina, gravis Marte, dabit partu pro- km geminam. Si mala condiderit,in quern quis carmina, jus est Judiciumque. Esto, si quis mala : sed bona si quis Judice condidcrit laudatur Ccesare, Hor. That is, Si quis bona carmina condidcrit, laudatiir judice Ccesare. -Instates peragct qui nigris prandia maris Ille salubresjiniet, &c. That is, Ille quijiniet prandia nigris maris, peraget cestaies salubres. He who will finish the meal called prandium, with mulberries, •hall enjoy good health all the summer. Et male laxus In pede calceus hceref, Id. for male hceret. Contra Lcevinum Valeri genus, unde Superbus Tarquinius regno pulsus Juit, unius assis Nan unquam pretio pluris licuisse, notante Judice, quern nosti, populo, &c. Id. That is, Lcevinwn qui est genus Valeri, S^ a quo Tarquinius Superbus pulsus J'uit regno sua, aliquando licuisse non pluris pretio unius assis, judice populo notante, quern tu nosii. Hnbet gladium ; sed duos quibus altera te occisurum, ait, altera villicum, Plaut. in Cassin. that is, quibus ait se occisurum, altera qtiidem te, altera verb villicum. To this same figure Linacer would have us refer these modes of speaking, where a construction is used in a sense that seems quite inverted, as in Virgil, Ibant obscuri sola sub node, JEn. 6. for soli sub obscurd node. Sceleratam intorserit hastam. Ibid, for ipse sceleratus. Dare classibtcs austros, JEn. 2. for dare austris, or com- mittere austris classes. To expose them to the winds, which is ge- nerally called an Hypallage. Nevertheless, to be ingenuous, these modes of speaking are not a figure of grammar. For either they subsist in a plain and natural construction, as the latter ex- ample, dare classibus austros ; it being indifferent in regard to con- struction to say, dare classibus austros, or austris classes, to expose them to the wind, or to make them receive the wind : or else it is a trope, or a figure of rhetoric, as sold sub nocte, where the night is called sola, just as death is called pallida, because it makes us pale. But to this figure of Hyperbaton we may very well refer the following elegant and useful phrases of Cicero's, where the rela- tive is always before the demonstrative, which serves for its ante- cedent, as, /SVfi? /20c non concedo, ut quibus rebus gloriemni in vobis, easdem ]9^ NEW METHOD. Cook VII. easdem in aliis repreltoidatis, Cic. Qnarum enim tu rerum cogitations nos levare cegriludine volidstiy earum etiain commemoratione lerwnwj Id. for earum rerum quarum^ &c. Hereto \vc must also refer these other phrases, where the rela- tive being placed first, it is followed by an entire period which serves for its antecedent : as in Livy, Quod bonum,faustum,fel'ixque sit, Qiiirites, regent create. And the like. 5. Anacoluthon, when there is hardl^f any connexion or construction in the sentence, as in Terence, Nam oninesnos quibus est alicunde aliquis objectus labor, omne quod est interea tempus ])rius- qitam id rescitum est, lucre est. And in Varro, Mc in Arcadia scio spectatum sueni for spectasse. Likewise in Cicero, Prcetor interea, ne pulchrum se ac beatum putaret, atque ali quid sua sponte loqueretur, ei qnoque carmen compositum est. Cic. pro Mura'na. Et enim si ora- tiones, quas nos vndtitudinis judicio probari volebamus (popuiaris est enim illajacultas, S) ejfectus etoquentice est aiidientium approbatio) sed si reperiantur nonnidli, qui nihil laudarent, nisi quod seimitari jwsse conjiderent, Cic. 2. Tusc. Quce qui in ntramque partem excelso ani- mo magnoque despiciunt, cumque aliqua his anipla S^ honesta res objecta est, totos ad se convertit &; rapit : turn quis non admiretur splendorem pulchritudincmque virtutis? Off. 1. Where we see there is no sort of connexion in those periods. But this figure is oftentimes only a specious term to make us overlook several things in antient authors, which seem rather to have dropped from them inadvertently, than to be rationally accounted for. Chapter VII. 0/ Hellenism, or Greek Phrase. BESIDES the figures above mentioned, it is proper also to observe, that there are several phrases whose construction is borrowed from the Greeks, which way of speaking is included under the general term of Hellenism. Linacer extends this figure to an infinite variety of expressions, merely because they are more common among the Greeks than among the Latins. But we shall be satisfied with referring to this figure whatever particularly belongs to the Greek tongue, having treated of the other things by principles which are appHcable to both languages. I. Hellenism by ATTiiACTioisr. Now in order rightly to understand the expressions borrowed from the Greek, and even to comprehend the Greek authors, we must always distinguish in the Greek phrase between attraction and government ; that is to say, when one case is rather attracted by another preceding case, than governed by the verb to which it refers. This is what Budeus transiently has observed in several parts of his Commentaries, and what Sanctius has made a very considerable point of; Grceci, says he, e duohus casibus fsise mutub respiciant) alterum tantiim regunt, alteriim illi adjungunt, ita ut alter ah OF THE HELLENISM. 193 ab altera trahatur, ut m§i xiyoy uv i'Xs^x, de verbis quibus dixi, for qucs dixi. Thus we find in St. Paul, to o-iD/ix* u/awv vxni tS h Cif/.~v xym ttyiom (A.xroi hiy, » '^X^'''^ *''''' ®^^' '* ^^^' 6- 19" Corpus vest rum tempLum est Spirilus sancti, in vobis existentis, cujus (for quern) habetis d Deo. And in Demosthenes, Ik tmv lTnTo>iuiv ruv Ixsi'm (/.xQ-h^iT^e uf *:ain if this be a figure, it belongs to rhetoric, and not to grammar : as it is very common in narratives to make use of the present in recounting past transactions. For the anticipating or combining of tenses is very common in rhetoric; but this does not relate to grammar, which one way or other finds its government. 4. In mood, as ralehis for xale, Cic. But we have made ap- pear above, p. 109, that ihe imperative was only a real future; and therefore we ought not to be surprised if they were frequently put one for the other. Jlo»iai.iJestiJia)c, paiare, &c. iorj'estinahunt, parabont, say they. But this is only an ellipsis of a verb understood, as cceperuni, or some other which governs this infinitive, according to what we have shewn, p. 170. 5. In OF THE ANTIPT. AND E N A L. 199 5. In number. But here it can only be a figure of rhetoric, as when they give for instance, dedimiis operam, Cic. for dedi, which is very common ; or they must be things referrible to the prece- dent figures ; as Nominandi istorum tibi erit magis qiihn edendi copia^ Cic. Wliere they will have it that edendi is tlie singular for the plural edendorum ; whereas it is but an Ellipsis of to edere understood, as we have shewn in the chapter of Gerunds, p. 125. Sitempus est ullumjure hominis necandi, qiicc multa su7it, Cic. This is only a Syl- lepsis, of which we have made mention above, p. 186. and the like may be said of the rest. Whence we conclude that all that can be said of the figures of grammar, may be reduced to the four above laid down, or to Hellenism. Therefore I am of opinion that upon a careful perusal of what hath been said in the Syntax, and in these remarks, very few difficulties will arise in regard to government that may not easily be solved, and tliat hardly any pasage will occur in ancient authors, but what may be accounted for. But as the chief found- ation of all languages depends on practice, I have endeavoured to collect here a multitude of verbs of different governments, which perhaps will be the more useful, as some of them are not to be found even in the most copious dictionaries. They are comprised in the following list, which is only an abridgment of a more ex- tensive work, wherein we intended to include every remark that could be made on the elegance of this language, for the service of those who endeavour to write pure Latin ; and perhaps some day or other we may publish a separate work on this subject for the use of learners, if ever we find that they have derived any benefit from this abridgment. '200 NEW METHOD. Book VII. LIST OF VERBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS. A. ABauenare aliquid, or aliquid alicujiis, ric laaiimnte, Ali()ium ab altero, se ab alio, alium a se, volun- tatt-m alicujiis at> aliquo, id. Abderf. se litleris tX in littfras : se in teneb' is, id. to hide or bury one^s self. Abdicare, simply, or maeistratum, or se magislratu, id. to aedicule, or to resign. Abdicare aliquem, Tuc. to renounce him. Aboucere a consuetiuiinp, Cic. to Ireak off, or viian from a cuUom. Ab o.mni rrip. cura, id. lo retire, to re- sign. Vi (S" per vim, id. to cany off by main free. In aliquem locum, id. Ex acie, id. A fide, id. Ad nequi- tiam, lerj ■ Me coiivivam abducebat sibi, Cic. Equitatum ad seabducere, rJ. to draw the cavalry lo himself. Aberrahe propiisitn, fiC a proposito, id, to wancer fr. m hii subierl. Nihil equidem le>or, sed tamen aberro, id but at least I divert myself. Aberiatio a doloie, id. any diveision that gives an allay to g'ief, Aberrat ad alia oralio, id. digresses. Aberrant inter se oratioiies, Liv. do not agree. Artificem re in melius quidem sinas aberrate, Flin. do not s'ffer him to depart from his model, even though he were to mend it. i Abesse urbe, domo, 5r ab urbe, ab dpmo, Cic. to be absent. Alicui abesse, id. to be wanting tuvsards him, to forsake him. In altercatioiiibus abesse, id. not to be there. Abhorret faclnus ab illo, id. he is far from committing such a wicked action. Parum abhorrens famam, Liv. not at all afraid of defamation. Illud abhorret a fide, Cic. thai is alto- gether incredible. Ab diicenda uxore abhorret, id. he has an aversion to matrimony. Abjicere se alicui ad pedes, &! ad pedes alicujus, Cic. to throw himself at his fett. Abjiceie se & prostemere, iV/. Consi- lium aedificnndi abjicere, id. to lay aside all thr'u^hlt of building. Abjicere ad terram, id. in herbam, id, humi, Pliv. to throw hpi,n ihe g'ound. C'o-'itationes in rem humilem abji- cere, ^'ic. to apply his thoughts to it, Abjicere animum, id. to despnd. Abire magistratu, id. to finish his office. Ab emptione. id. lo depart from his bargain. Ad vulgi opini'pnem, id, to be led uwau bi) vulgar opinion. Abire, ii, ab, de, fe, ex, loco, id, to he gone, to go out. til r I lire. Non hoc sic tibi abibit, Ter. you shall not esciipe thus, Abi ill malam crucem, Ter. go and hang ijoursi If. Abjijdicare sibi libertatem, Cic, to shew himself nnvourthy of liberty. Se vit^, Plaut. lo part trith l\fe. Abnuere aliquid alicui, Cic. Alicui de re aliqua, Snl. to refuse him some- thing. Abrogare leeem or legi, Liv, the former more usual, to demand the repeal of a law. Abstinebe sese dedecore, animum a scelere, Cic. to abstain. Ignem ab rede, Liv. not to set Jire lo it, iEgrum a cibo, Cels, Abstinere jus belli ab aliquo, Liv, n't lo trtot him with the full severity- of the rights of tvar. Abstinere maledictis £( a maledictis, Cic. Ab-tinere irarum, Hor. Placidis bo- nis, Ovid. Ahs-tine isti banc tu manum, Plaut. Abstrudere in fundo, in silvaro, Cic. to hide. Abuti stndiis, id. to make a wrong use of his studiis, Operam abutitur, Ter. he Ivselh his labour. Accedere alicui proximo, Cic. Virg. Deo ad similitudinem, Cic, to re- semble. Ad aliquem, Cic to draw near OF Verbs of different Governments. 201 near him. Alicui ad aurem, id. Quos accedam ? Sail. sup. ad. to whom shall I apply ? Quas vento ac- cesserit oras, Virg. sup, in. to what coast the winds uiitl drive him. Accedit quod, Cic, there is this be- sides ; or simply, besides, moreovtr. AcciDERE. Omnia enim secundis- sima nobis, adversissitua illis accidisse, id. to have happened. Where we see that this verb is taken either for good or bad fortune. AcctPERE ab aliquo, Ter. De ali- quo, Cic, Ex aliquo, Plant, to receive or to learn from, a person, Accipere in contumeliam, Ter. to take in bad part. Acceptutn plebi, CtES. Apud plebem, Plant. In pFebem, Tac. agreeable to the people. Acceptum, or in acceptum referre, Cic. to be obliged i properly, it is to place to your account. AcQuiEscERE lecto, Catul, to rest upon the bf-d. Alicui rei, Sen. to set one's heart upon a thing, to fix upon it. In tuo vultu aC(|uiesco, Ci(^. your pre- tence gives me comfort, AoffQUARE cum virtute fortunam, id to be no lets successfii' than brave. Aliquem sibi, id. to render him equal to one's self. Judices adaequarunt, id, the judges Vtre divided. Addicehe mnrti, id. In servitutem, Liv. to condemn to. Addicere liberum, Cic. to declare one free. Ni aves addixissent, id. If the augu- ral birds had not approv-d it by their signs. The contrary is Abdicere. . Adesse omnibus puguis, id. to be present at every battle. Ad exercitum, Plaut. Ad portam, Cic. In cau^a, in aliquo loco, ad tempus, id. Adesse alicui, id. to favour him, to as- sist him with one's creditt or presence. Adhsrere castris, Appul. In re aliqua, Ovid. Ad rem aliqiiam, Plaut. In rem aliquam, Cic. to slick to, to ad- here, or keep close to. Adhibrre severitatem in aliquo, or in aliquem, id, to use severity, Reveren- tiam adversus, or erga aliquem, i/. Adhibere viuura aegrotis, id, to give them uine. < Adigerk jusjurandnm, or aliquem jurejurando, or aliquem ad jusjuran- dum, Liv. Per jusjurandum, Cies. to oblige by oath. Adire aliquem, ad aliquem, in jus, Cict to go to see, to go, &c. Ilia pericula adeuntur praeliis, id. they run those risks in battle. Adjungere aliquem alteri £C ad anii- citiam alterius, id. to make him his friend. In sucietalem adjungere, Liv. Admiscere Illiquid in aliud, Plin. Alicui, or cum aliquo, Cic. to mingle uitli. ■ ■ Admisceri ad aliquod concilium, id. to be admitted to it. Admonere, See Monere. AootESCiT aetas, ratio, cupiditas, id, Vi'g. grou.'s, zvaj>es strong. Adolescere ad aiiquam aetatem, Pliti. Annosterseuos, Uvid. In partum, Co/um. Adolescunt ignibus araB, Virg. are covered with ike fire of (he sacrifices. Flammis adolere penates, id. Adoftare sibi filium, Cic. Aliquem pro filii), Plaut. to adopt him, Aliquem in divitias, Plin. to make him his heir. Aliquem ab aliquo, dc. Se alicui or- dini, Plin. Adscribere civitati, in civilatem, or in civitate, Cic. to make him free qf the city. Adversari alicui, id. Aliquem, Liv, Contra & adversus aliquem, Plaut, to resist, to amtradict, '^ Anibitionem scriptoris adversari, Tac. Adveri^ari quomiuus aliquid fiat, Cic, to hinder. Advertere, simply, Ter. Animum, Liv. Animo, Plin. to give attention. Advertere urbi agaien, Virg. to make it diata near, to make it take the read towards the city. Scythias adverteret oras, Ovid, aas arrived. Advertere in aliquem. Tacit, to punish him. Adulare. Pinnata cauda nostrum adulat sanguinem, Cic. Ex. veteri poetd. Si Dioiiysium non adulares, Val. Max. from thence cometh Adulor, paS' s've. Ca vend urn est ne assentatoribus patefaciamus aurcs ne adulari nos sina- mus, Cic. Tribuuus militum adulatus erat, Fu/. Max. Aduiari deponent. Adulari aliquem, Cic. Alicui, 2m. to fatter a person. The former is preferable even according to Quiutilian. MmVLari alicui, Cic. to bear envy to a person, Aliquem, id. to endeavour to surpass him, yEmulari instituta alicujus, id, to equal, to surpass, ^mulari cum aliquo. Lie. to rival a person. Invicem aemulari, Quint, to rival one another. ^stima«e aliquem, Plaut. De ali- quo, Cic. to esteem him, ^stimare magni, or magno, id. ^stimare litem capitis, id. to judge 202 NEW METHOD. Book VII. a person deserving of death, or of banish- ment. Aggredi aliquem dictis, Viig. ali- quem i' verbis alicujus, Plaut. Ca- vere obsidibus de pecunia, CfPs. tn give security by hostages. Sibi obsidibus ab aliq''0, id. to t«kf securilij by liu tiigis. Quod nihil de iis Augustus testa- niento cavisset, Suet. We say Cavere aliqno, cr per ali- quem, Cic, to take bail c r security vf a person, Caetera quae qtiidem provider! pute- runt, cavebuntur, ul. Cederr locum, Slat. Loco, Cic. Cas. to quit. Ad locum, Liu. to go thither. E vil^, Cic. to die. F.xitio, Ovid, to turn out to one'i destiuction. In proverbiuin, to become a pr^veri. Intra fiiiem juris, Liv. to abide within thr limits uf h'S light. Ccdt re alicui, Virg. to comply with a pennn. Cessit mihi, id. it has ka'ipenrd tome. Honori non cedere, Virg. to dtitrae no less honour than is done us. Haereditas alicui cedit, Vtrg. remains to him. Pro pulmentario cedit, Colum, is tukei% for nourishment. Cedit dies, Ulp when the day of pay- ment b-gins to draw near. Ccr^EE. See the Syntax, rule 24, p. 43. Certare laudibus alicujus, Virg. to oppose his gieat'iess. Cum aliquo, Cic. to fght. Bello there. CoNSTARE per ipsum, id. In depend only upon himself. Sibi, Cic. Hor. to be consistent zcilh himself. Ex multis, Cic. to be conipoiirdtil of. Agri constant campis & vineis, riin. consiU of fields and vineyards. Constat gratis tihi navis, Cic. cods you nothing. Auri ratio, id. the sum is entire. Non constat ei color negue vnltiis, Liv. his colour and counlennnce changes. Mente vix constat, Cic. he is hardly in his senses. Hoc constat, or constat inter omnes, id. it is biynnd nil doulit. Constat hac de re, 2uint. Plin. Constat hoc niilii tecum, yhl Ileren. CoNsuESCERB alicui, Ter. Cum ali- quo, Plaul. tofrer/uent his company, Consuesccre pronuntiare, Cic. to ac custom one's self to. Ade6 in teneris consucsceie multum est, Virg. Plaustro & aratro jnvencum consuescere, Colum. Omnia pericuia a pueritia consueta ba- beo. Sail. CoNSULERE boni, Suint. Plant, to take in good part. Alicui, Cic. to do him teivice. Aliquem, id. lo ask counsel. Consuli quidem te a Cssare scribis, sed ego tibi ab illo consuli mallem, id. but to signify, I give you counsel or advice, zve say rather, Autor tibi sum. Consulo te banc rem, or de bac re, id. Consulo in te, Ter. I am contriving something for you, or against you. Consulere in commune, Ter. to con- iHlt the public good. Contendere alicui, Hot. Cum ali- quo, Cic. Contra aliquem, id. to dis- pute, to maintain a thing against an- other. Contendere aliquid ab aliquo, id. Contendere animum, Ovid. Animo, Ci''.to bi'nd vni's mind. Cursum, Virg. Plant, lo run swiftly. In aliquem lo- cum, Cic. to make all expediiion lo a place. Contendere rem cum aVik re, id. Alicui rei, Hor. to compute it. CoNTiNoERE se inter se, or inter scse, Plant. Colum. to touch one anothtr, to ie allied. Atque in magnis ingeniis id plerum- que contigit, Cic hath often happened. Contigit mihi, id. it hat happened to me. Cont'n;it mihi, id. it relates to me, it belongs lo me. Contu)r it. DispurARE aliquid Sf de aliquo. Plant. Cic. Circa aliquid. Suint. to treat about somethlns;. Mu'ta disputat quam- obrem is qui torqueatur, beatus esse non possit, Cic. DibSENTiRE de veritate ab aliquo, id. In re aliqi a ab altero, id. Cum aliquo de re aliqua, id. Alicui opinioni, 3uint, Coliim. to disagree about, Ne orationi vita dissentiat, Sen. Dissentiunt inter se, Cic. DissiDERE capital) odio ab aliquo, id, to hate him mirlaHy. Dissidere a seipso, secumque disccrdare, id. Inter se dissid'iit & discordant, id. Si toga di'^sidet impar, Hor. if it be of different length, or wteven, DiviDERE nummos viris, Cic. In viros, Plaut. to distribute, to divide. Factum cum aliquo. Plant. Dividere sententiam, Cic. to ask to di- vide the judge's opinion, iri order to follow one part, without being obliged to follow the other. DoCERE de re aliqua, Cic. to give ad- vice of it. Rem aliquam aliquem, Ter. to teach it him, DotERE ab animo, ex animo. Plant. Succossu alicuju";, Ovid. Dolore alicu- ju-, Vi'g. t" b' deeply afflicted, Dolel iiiihi cor. Plaut. Hoc cordi meo, ill. C.iput k sole, id. Doleo me, Pltul. Vicfm alterius, Cic. Casuni aliorum, C/'c. Propter ali- quem, 3u nl De aliquo Ovid. DoNARK alii|ueni re, vel rem alicui, Cic. to mak' him n preseut of a thing. DuBrTARE de fide alicujus, Ad //e- renn.t d ubl of hi\f\d ily, Haec dum dubitas, Ter. while you <^re conii'ie>i"e. DoMiNARi aliv. Animum alicui, Ter. to content, to satisfy him, ExPLicAUE rem aliquam, vel de re aliqua, Cic. to explain something. ExPOSTULARE cum altero injuriam, id, De injuria, Ter. to expostulate. ExpRiMERE vocem alicujus, Ces. to make him speak. Risnm alicui, Plin. Jun. Pecuiiiam ab nliquo, Cic. Exprimere effigicm, uL to draw to the life. Veibum verbo, de verbo, h verbo, exprimere, id, to translate word for wnrd. Exprimere ad verbum do Grsecis, id. Vim Grascorum pENDERE. Impendebat moiis altis- simus, Crps. ftun-bem, Plin. lo be imported, in aliquem, to inveigh or speak bitterlg against. Inviderjb laudes alicui, Lii, Hot. Cic. Laudibus alicujus, Cic. to envy a persnn^s praise. Invidere alicui, Ter. Aliquem, Ocirf, to bear him envy. Alicujus, Plaut. In hac re tibi invideo, Cic. Invideat Herniogencs quod ego can- to, Hor. The accusative only, without the dative of relation, after tliis verb, is more rare. Yet Cicero, in the third book of his Tusculan questions, ob- serveth, that as we say videre Jlorem, so invidere jlorem would he better than fori, if the custom was not against it. Hence Quin. lib. 1>. c. 3. enumerates among the incorrc-ct phrases of his time, Huic Rti invidere, pro quo, adds he, omries veteres, 6s" Cicero ipse banc REM. Whereby we see that the custom has varied. But the accusative with the dative is common enough. Ut nobis optimam naturam invidisse videantur qui, &c. Cic. Jampridem nobis coeli te regia, Csb- sar, invidet, Virg. Invitare h'lspitio Sf in hospitium, Liv. Cic. Ad legcndum, Cic. Domum, Liv. Tecto ac domo, Cic. to invite, to desire to come. Invocare subsidium, id. to ask for succours. In auxilium aliquem, Suint. Ire viam, Virg. to go. Itineribus alicujus, Cic. to keep the same road. Sub- sidio, Ccps. In subsidium, Cic. Accersitum, Ter. to p) to fetch. Si porr5 ire pergant, Liv. if they have a mind to go further, Eamus visere, Ter, JuBFRE. See the annotation to the 12th rule. .JuNciRE prudentiam cum cloquentia, Cic. Dextram dextrae, Vtrg. Leones ad curruin, Virg. to put to. Rliedam equis, Cic. Res inter ae^id. JuRARE alicui, Plin. Jun. per sidera, Virg. In legts, Cic. In verba aliqua, C(rs. Maria aspera, Virg. Pulcherrimum jusjiiranduiT), Cic. Qui (Ifiiegat & juravit morbum, id. Belluai ingens juratur. Slat. .lurandiisque tuum per nomen poni« mns aras, llor. The latter examples shew plainly that this verb may govern the accusa- tive of itself, and that Vossius had very little ground to affirm that it never did govern this case but by virtue of the preposition per. For besides its being hard to say that J«»-«rc jusjnran- dum, or morbum, is jurare per jusju- randum, OF Verbs of different Governments. 215 randum, or per morbiim ; it is moreover evident that since we say juranrlas aras in a passive sense, we might likewise say jurare aras in a real active sense. And adding per lawn nomen, he plainly in- timates that the force of the verb and the preposition are two different things, which ought therefore to be distin- guished. So that when we say per sidera ju'O, we are to understand juramenlum per sidera, just as jurandas aras per tuum nomen, &c. L. Laborare invidia vel e\ invidia, Cic. to be envied and haled. Ex pedibus, id. De verbo, non de re, id. to trouble himself about terms. A veritate, Liv. to be examined for nut telling the Irulh. "Laborare arma, Slat, to work, or make. Ad rem aliqnam, Cic. Ambitios^ circa aliquid, Quint, to lake great care. Ad quid laboramus res Romanas, Cic. Laboratur vehementer, id, they are in great pain, or concern. Latere alicui, id. Aliquem, Virg. See the Syntax, rule 15. p. 31. Legare ad aliquem, Cic. to send nn ambassador to. Alicui, id. to bequeath. Ah aliquo, id. Sibi aliquem legare, id. to make him his deputy. Levare nietum aiicui, vel aliquem metu, id. to ease him of, or to remove his fear. LiBERAUE aliquem metu, Ter. Ali- quem culpac, Liv. to acquit. Fidem suam, Ci's. to fulfil his tourd, Aliquem a creditoribus, Sen. to set him free, Lociui alicui, Ter. De aliquo, Cic. Apud aliquem, id. Cum aliquo, id, to speak. LuDERE pila, id. Ludum, Ter. Alei S^ aleam, Suet. In numerum, Virg. LuERE aes alienum. Curt, to pay his debts. VcensiS, Cic. to be punished. Se, Ulp. to pay a ransom. Oblatum stuprum voluntaria morte luit Lucretia, Cic. expiated. M. Maledicere alicui, Cic. K alii. Ali- quem, Tertul. Petron. Manare. Mella manant ex ilice, Hor. flow. Manat picem haec arbor, Plin, Manat cruore culter, Liv. Manere ad urbem, ad exercitutn, Liv, In urbe, in exercitn, Cic. to slay or abide there. Aliquem, Plaut. Hor. Virg, to wait for him. In proposito, Cic. Statu suo, id. Sententia ma net, vel in senteiitia ma- neo, Cic. iVFanere promissis, F«rg. to keep his luord. Manent ingenia seuibus, Cic. Ad te poena manet, Tibul. Maneat ergo istud, Cic. let this stand good. Maneat ea cura nepotes, Virg. let our posterity take care for that. Mederi alicui rei, Cic. to remedy. Quas minus mederi possis, 7W. Contra serpentium ictus medentur, Plin. Haec mederi voluerunt, Cic. Medicare capillos, Ovid. Semina, J^irg. to give an artificial preparation or tincture to a thing. Alicui, Ter. Cuspi- dis ictum, Virg. to dress a wound. Meditari rem aliqiiam, aut de re ali- qua, Cic. to meditate or think on a thing. Memini me videre & vidisse, id. Rem aliquam &" rei alicujus, id. De alicujus periculo, id. to recollect. Ciceronis &^ Ciceronem. See the Anno- tation to the llth rule. Memoror, which Valla denies to be ever found with the genitive in clas- sic authors, occurreth in Cicero, Sui oblitus, alii memoretur, for alius, in 4 Ca- til. which shews the little foundatioa this author had to censure the following passage of the Vulgate, Memorari testa- menli sui sancti. Merere & Ri bene vel mal6 de ali- quo, Cic. to deserve well or ill of a person. .Apud aliquem, Liv. to serve or lu bear arms under him. Sub aliquo, id. Stipendiuni in aliquo bello, Cic. E- quo, pedibus, Liv. to serve on foot, or on horseback. Alicui, Slat. Lucan, to serve to the profit rf any one. Mereri laudem, Cccs. Offensam, 3uint. Scio banc meritam esse ut memor esses sui, Ter. she deserved aplace in your memory. Saepe quod vellem meritam scio, Ter. that she often did whatever I would have her. Mergere aliquem ^quore, or sub ^quore, Virg. Unda vrl in undis, Ovid, to put under water, to sink. Metuere alicui, Plaut. Pro ali- quibus, Cels. Propter aliquos, Plaul» Aliquem, Cic. Ab aliquo, id. De vita, id. to fear. Metno ut ft' metuo ne. Seep. 159. Mi:u commend Cesar, you offend me. Offen- dere in arngantiam, Cicer. lo give into pride or arrogance. Sin quid offenderit, sibi totum, tibi nihil offenderit, id. but if he takes any wrong step. It mil be all t'l himself. Cecidisse ex equo & latus ofl'endisse, id. that he fell from his horse and hurt his side. S' in me al quid offendistis, id. if you have fou'id any fault with me ; if in aught I hcv offtnded you. Ciim rffendisset poiiuium Atheniensi- um prope jam desipientem seaectute, id. having friund. Offendeie in scopulis, Ovid. Ad sti- pitem, Cidum. to run, or hit against. Naves in redeuiido offenderunt. Cms. ■were unfortunate, fell into the enemy's hands. Offendere alicuius existimatinnem, Cic. to hurt his reputation. Alicui ani- mum, id. to shock, or lo vex htm. Olere. Olet unguenta, Ter. he smells of perfume. Olet huic aurum meum, P^aut. he hath got some inkling of my gold. Olent ilia superciiia inalitiam, Cicer. Olentia sulphure, Ovid, that smells of sulphur. Redolentque thymo, Virg, Opponere pericuiis, Cic. to expose to danger. Ad omne periculum, id. Opponere pignori, Plaul. Ter. to pawn, or to pledge. Opponei-e manum fronti, or ante ocu- los, Ovid, to put before. Oppugnare aliquem clandestinis con- siliis, Cic. to endeavour to ruin him by underhand doings. Oppugnare consi- lia alicujus, Piaut. Pallere argenti amore, Hor. to grow pale. Pindarici fontis haustiis non expailuit, Hor. he u.as not afraid of, Palpare & pi. Palpare aliquem, munere, Juv. to caress, to flatter, Cui male si palpere, recalcitrat, Hor. Pecto'-a palpanda manu, Ovid. Parcere labori, Ter. to spare, Ali- quid alicui, Ter, to forgive him. Parcite oves nimiiim procedere, Vi'g. do not sujer them to go too far. 218 NEW METHOD. Book VII. Precantes ut a caedibus, & iiicenclia parceretur, Liv, ihut they would abstain from. Participaue servum consiliis, Pluut. io imparl your secrets to liirn. Siuis laiides cum aliqiio, Liv. Rem aliquam, Cic. to par'ake, or have fiis share, Pasceue piatum S^ in prato, Ovid, to feed. Animum pictura pasclt inani, f^irp;. Hie pascor bibliotheca Fausti, Cic. id. Delector. Pasci, deponent. Apes pascuntur arbuta, Virg. Armenia pascuntur per herbas, Virg. and Ovid. Pei.lere tectis, Ovid. A foribus, Plir}, E foro, Cic. £x aliqua regione. Plin. Domo, regno, civitate, agro, se- dibus, &c. Cic. to drive from. Pendere promissis, id. to depend en promises. Aiiimr et animis, id. to be in doubt. Pendet animus, vel animus tibi pendet, Ter. you are in suspense. Cui spes omnis ex fortuna pendet, Cic. De te pendentis, te respicientis amici, Hor. Pendent opera intcriupta, Vi'g. remain imperfect. Casu pendemus ab «no, Lucan. ue depend on. Ad sua vota pendentes, Sen. In sententiis civium fortunam nostram pendere, Cic. Dumosa pendere de rupe, Cic. to be at the top of a ruck. Hi summo in fluctu pendent, Virg. ere tossed to the top of ike waves. Illisariue prora pependit, Virg, stuck there. Scopuli pendentes, Virg, hanging as it ttere in the middle of the air, and leaning over us. Nnbila pendentia, Virg. Pendere pa3nas temeritatis, Cic. Pcenas pro scelcre, Lucr. to pnij. Pater is nihili pendit, Ter. gives himself no sort of trouble. Magni pendi, Lurr. to be greatly esteemed. Penetrare in ccelum, Cic. to enter into heaven. Atlantem, Piin. to pass beyond. Sub terras, C/c. Seinfugam, Plant, to run atiay. Pedem intra aedes, Plant, to enter. Ad Romanos, Pli7i. to go towards. Pensare una laude crimina, Plin. to recompense. Laudem cum crimine, Claud. Pensari eridem truliiiii, Ilor. to be neighed in the same balance. l>i nci'NCTARi aliquem, ^Tiint. Hor, Ab aliquo, Cic. Aiiquid, aliquem, Plaul. Aiiquid ex alio, id. 6( Cic. Aliquem de re aliqua, id. to inform one^s self, to inquire, to ask. Pergo prajterita, id. to ivave or pass over in silence, Perge facere, Ter. to go on. Permittere se in lidem vel fidei ali- cujns, Clibus, Liv. to refrain from. A lacrymis, Virg. Alicui, Cic. EX&H juvenum temperare, Plaut. lo govern them, Sibi teiupcrare, Cic. to command him- self Tendere ad littora, Liv, In Latium, Vii^. to go towards. Tendit iter velis, Virg. begins to make sail. Rete tenditur accipitri, Ter. Manibiis tendit divellere nodes, l^rg, endcavmirs. Tendere adversiis autoritatetn sena- tus, Liv. to resist or uiithitand. Tendere alicui raetum aut spetn, Cic. to shew or hold out to him. Hie SGGvns tendebat Achilles, sup. pelles, or tentoria, Virg. pitched his tent. Time RE aliquem, Ovid, to fear him. Alicui, Ter. to fear lest some mis- fortune happen to him. Ab aliquo, Cic. to be afraid of him, to mistrust him. De republica, itl. to be afraid for the repub- lic. Dp vitrl, Ceelius Ciceroni, I ainafraid of my life. Tinieo ut, 6r timeo ne, See p. )59. Trader E in custodiam, Cic. Ciisto- dia;, Colum. to deliver up, or send to prison. Se totum alicui, Cic. to give one^s self up entirely to him. Tkansfiger e gladio aliquem per pec- tus, Liv. Cum armis corpus alicujus, Liv. to run through, to stab. Vacare morbo vel a morbo, Celt, to be free from illness. Sibi, Mart, to work for himself. Philosoplii;r>, Cic. to study philosophy. In aliquod opus, Ovid. Vacare culpa, Cic. a culpa, Senrc. to be free from fault. Ab oami admi- nistralione, Cic. to be exempt from. Ani- mo, id. to be at leisure, to have nothing to do. Vacat locus, Ca^s. the place is empty. Vacat mihi, iiumt. I am at le.sure. Vacat annales audire, Virg. Tantum huie studii relmquendum, quantum vacat a ptiblicis (>fficiis, Cic. Eorum animus ponendi pectuniam nunijuam vacavit, Val. I. 4. c. 3. sup. vacationem, ul vult Sanctius, lib. 3. never gate their minds to the amassing of money. Vagari passim toto foro, Cic. In agris, id. to wander about. Vagatur errnre animus, id. Valeui:. Valet oculis, Gell. Va- lenl ejus oculi, Plaut. his eye-sight it good. Autoritate valet, Cic. Valet ejus au- toritas, id. Valet tanti, valet nimis, among the civilians. Denos ajiis valebant, Varro. Quid igitur ? Valetur, Plaut. we are very well. Vapulare. See the Preterites, vol. 1 . p. 305. and the Syntax, vol. 2. p. 68. Vehere amne, Ovid. Per maria, Plin. to convey by water, by sea. Vehi curru, Cic. In curru, Ovid. Equo, Ovid. In equo, Cic. lo travel, or ride in a coach, or on horseback. Velle aliquem, Plaut. to want to speak to him. Alicui, Cic, to wish him well. Alicujus causa, id. Rem volo defensam, id. I will have it defended. Quid sibi vult istud ? Cic. What's the meaning of this ? Venire alicui auxilio, Liv. Subsi» dio, Cic. Suppctias, Uirl. to come to the assistance of. Venire alicui advcrsiim, Plaut. to go to meet him. In certamen cum aliquo, Cic, to fight him. In consilium alicuj\is, id. to cumc to give him counsel. Sub j actum telorum, Liv. to come ivithiri shot of. Iiiimicus alicui venire, Cic. to be his enemy. Ad inimicitias res venit, id. Venire viam, id. to go his own way. Ad me ventnm est, id. Mihi venit in dubium fides tua, id. I begin lu doubt of, De sorte venio in dubium, Ter. 1 aw in danger of losing the principal. Venit mihi in mentcm Platonis, Cic. I Call Plato to mind. in mentem venit de speculo, Plaut, Venit in mentem P. Roniani digni- tas, Cic, V'ertere aliquid in laudem, Tac. to turn to praise. Stultitia; aliquid alicui, Plaut, to impute it to his folly. In rem suani, IHp. t<> turn to hisprojil. In pri- vatum, Liv. to his piivatc use. Ad se partem alicujus rei, Cic. to appropriate lo tiimstlf. Vertere Platnnem, Cic. to translate Plato. Graeca in Latinum, Suint. De Gfjecis, Cic. Kx CJiajcis, Ter. Tribus iu rebus fer6 vertitur omnis virtus, Cic, consists in, is included. Intra f OF Verbs of different Governments. 225 Intra fines hos vertuntur omnia, Ccel. ad Cic. In priorem partem sunt versa & mu- ■ tata omnia, id. are changed. Jam verterat fortuna, Liv. teas now changed. Quae te genitor sententia vertit ? Virg. has made you change opinion. ViGiLARE ad multam noctem, ^ de mulla nocte, Cic. to sit up vfiy late, Noctes vijilare ad ipsum mane, Hor, Vigilare studiis, Proper, In scelus, Stat. Noctes vigilantnr amaroe, Ovid. ViNDicARE se ab aliquo, Sen. De aliquo, Cic. to be revenged of a person. Tc vald6 vindicavi, Cic. yitlico. I have got my full revenge of you. Ita jMan. Peccatum in altero vindicare, Cic. to punish. In aliquem scelera alterius vindicare, id. Vindicare a labore, id. to exempt. Grails bis vindicat armis, Firg. Vindicare in libertatem, Cic. to set at Tiberty, to restore, Libertatem, Cees. to defend the liberty. Se ad snos, Cic. to return safe and sound to them. Se existimationi horoinum, id. to maintain his reputation. * Some write the following exam- ples with an e, Vendicare. But we shall make it appear in the ninth book, of Letters and Orthography, that we ought always to write Vindi- CAUE. Aliquid pro sue vindicare, Cic claim. Sibi assumere & vindicare, id, Dicere suum & vindicare, id. Ululare. Ululant canes, Virg howl. iEdes ululant plangoribus femineis, Vir^. do ring with. Tristia ulularunt Galli, Lucan, Centum ululata per urbes, Lucan. Utor. See the Syntax, rule 33, p. 70. to to Vol. U. Q [ 226 ] BOOK VIII. PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS. On the Roman Names, On their Figures or Arithmetical Characters. On their manner of counting the Ses- terces. And on the division of Time. Useful for the understanding of Authors. Chaptkr I. Of the Names of the Antient Romans. Taken from Va l. Maxoius, SiGONius, Lipsius, and other authors. I ' H E Greeks had only one name, but the Romans had JL sometimes tliree or four, which they called PrjENOMen, NoMEN, Cognomen, and sometimes also Agnomen. The prccncnien is that which agreeth to each individual ; the «o- men that which denotes the family from which he is descended ; and the cognomen, that which agreeth to a particular branch of this family. I. Of the Proper Name, Vr2£.^o-m EN. The prccnomen was therefore, as the very word expresseth, what was prefixed to the general name, and amounts to the same thing as our proper name, by which we distinguish brothers of the same family, as when we call them, I'eter, John, James, &c. The prcenomen was not introduced till a long time after the nO' men. Hence it was customary among the Romans to give the fa- mily name to children, of the male sex, the ninth day after their nativity ; and of the female the eighth, according to Festus and Plutarch. And those days were called dies lustrici, because it was a ceremony whereby they were acknowledged as legitimate, and of such or such a family, whose name was given them. Whereas they did not receive the pranomcn, till they took the toga virilis, that is, about the-age of seventeen, as appeareth by the epitome of the 10th book attributed to Valerius Maximus. Pueris, says he, 72071 priuaquam iogam virilem sumerent, puellis non anlequam nuherentj •prcenomina imponi morisfuisse Q. Scavola autor est. This is farther confirmed by Tally's epistles, where the children are called Cicero- vex pneri, till that age, after which they are stiled Marcus JUius, Quiiitus filius. And though Cicero in the last epistle of the 6th book to Atticus calJeth his nephew, Quintum Ciecronem ptierum ; yet it i« very pro- bable Of the Roman Names. 2^7 bable that Cicero wresteth the sense of the word pueTf to distinguish him from his father, who was also called Quintus ; or perhaps be- cause he had but very lately taken the toga virilis. And in regard to what Sigonius mentions from Plutarch and Festus, who, ac- cording to him, are of a different opinion from Valerius Maximus, we are to take notice that those authors do not speak of the prce7w- men, but of the nomen, which, as hath been above mentioned, was given to children the 8th or 9th day after their nativity. And there is no manner of doubt but this is what led Sigonius into a mistake. In conferring this prcenomen, they took care generally to give that of the father to the eldest son, and that of the grandfather and the ancestors of the family to the second, and to all the rest. Varro observeth that there were thirty of those prcenomina, in his time, or thereabouts, whereof the most usual may be reduced to eighteen, some of which were marked by a single letter, others by two, and others by three, as we shall here exhibit them, toge- ther with their etymology. 1. With a single letter we find eleven. A. stands for Aulus, so called from the verb alo, as being born Diis (de^itibus. C. stands for Caius, so called a gaiidio parentum, D. stands for Decimus, that is, the tenth born. K. stands for K.i;so, taken from cctdo, because they were obliged to open his mother's womb to bring him into the world. L. stands for Lucius, from hix, Incis, because the first who bore this name, was born at break of day. M. stands for Marcus, as much as to say, born in the month of March. But M' with an acute accent on the top, or M* with a comma, signifieth Manius, that is, bor7t in the morningi or rather quite good, because manis heretofore, as we have already observed, p. 150. signified good. N. stands for Numerius, which cometh from mimerus, number. P. makes Publius either from the word piibes, or irom popidus^ as much as to say popular and agreeable to the people. Q. stands for Quintus, that is, the fifth child of his family. T. stands for Titus from the word tueri, as if the defender or preserver of his country. 2. With two letters we find four. AP. stands for Appius, which cometh from the Sabine word Attius. For Aitius Clausus was the first, who having been ex- pelled his country, came to Rome and changed his name into that of Appius Claudius. CN. stands for Cneus, as much as to say noevus, from some mark on his body. SP. stands for Spurius, which denotes something ignominioOs in birth. For this word in the \jdX\x\. tongue signifies also spurious or illegitimate. Spurii, quasi extra puritatem, Sf imjnundi, says St. Isidore. TI. stands for Tiberius, that is, born near the Tiber. 3. With three letters, we find three. Q 2 MAM". i228 PartiC. Obseuv. Chap. I. Book VIII. ■ MAM. that is, Mamf.rcus, which in the Tuscan language signific.) Mars, according to Fcstus. SER. that is, Servius, from the word servus, a slave, because the person who first toolc this name, was not free born. SEX. that is, Skxtus, as much as to say thcsixlk horn. These are the eighteen proper names most usual among the Romans. To which we might likewise add some that are very well known in antient history, as Ancus, Aruns, Hodilius, Tiilliis, and some others. II. Of tlie general Name, Nomen Gentis. The nomen or name was what agreed to the whole race or family with all its branches, and answered to the Greek patronymics, ac- cording to Priscian, lib. 2. For as the descendants of TEacus were called JEacidcs, so the descendants of lulus son of TEneas, had the name a? JuUi ; those of the Antonian family, Antonii, and the rest in the like manner. Hence we may observe that all those general names which they called Gent'dilia, are properly adjectives, and that they all terminate in ius, except two or three, namely, Vc' ducccus, PoppcBus, and perhaps Norhanus ; though Lipsius questions whether the latter be one of those names. III. Of the pariicular surname^ Cognomen and Agnomen. The particular surname called cognomen, was properly the name by which the different branches of the same stock or house, ?«fa£/e?9 igente, were distinguished ; as when Livy says that the house of the Potitians was divided into twelve families. For gens S)- Jamilia were like the whole and its parts. Those of the same stock or house were called Gentiles ; and those of the same bianch or family, Ag- nati. As we See in France that the royal house hath been frequently divided into different branches, as those of Valois, Bourbon, Or- leans, Montpensier, &c. Thus when we say that the family of the Caesars were of the race of Julius ; Julius is the general name of the race, or norncn gentis ; and Ctcsar that of the fumil}', cognomen Jci- milicc. But if you add Caius for his proper name, this will give us the prcenomen. Therefore all three will be C Julius Ccesar. There are some who hereto add the agnomen, which signifieth as it were an increase of the surname, and was conferred on some particular occasion, as when one of the Scipios was entitled A^ri- canns, and the other Asiaticus, because of their great exploits in those parts of the world. And no doubt but a man might in this manner have sometimes a particular surname, and as it were » fourth name. Hence the author ad Herennium makes mention of this agnomen, when lie says, Nomen axitem cum dicimus, cognomen (l»oque S) agnomen inlelUgalur oportet. Yet it is certain that the word cognomen comprehendeth likewise this sort of nouns, witness Sallust, when he says of Scipio himself, jyjasinissa in amicitiam recent us u P, Scipione, cui pustea Africano cog- nomen J'uit ex virtute : ana Cicero writing to Pompnnius, who was surnamcd Atticus, for having performed his studies at Athqns, says. ■tf^ Of the T?oman Names. 225 cays, Tcque non cog7wmen Athenis solum deportasse, scd hitmanitatem ^ prurfe?itiam intetligo. And indeed if we examine closely into the thing, we shall find that there are no surnames, I mean of those which are called cog- nomina, and distinguish families, but what are thus derived frora some particular occasions ; since even the proper names (jtrccnomi^ na) are originally owing to such occasions, as we have above de- monstrated in pointing out their etymology. IV. OBSERVATIONS on the Names of Slaves, Freednien, Women, and Adoptive Childieo. And fast of Slaves and Freedmen. Slaves formerly had no other name than that of their master, as Lucipor, Marcipor, for Lucii puer, Marci puer. Yet in process of time they had a name given them, which was generally that of their country, as Sijrus, Davus, Geta, &c. Just as in France the lackeys are sometimes called Champagjie, Basque, Ficnrd, &c. When they were enfranchised, they took the prcenomen and the nomen of their masters, but not the cogn(>men, instead of which they retained their own prcEnomen. Thus Cicero's learned freedman was called M. Tullius Tyro, and others in the same manner. 7'he like was observed in regard to allies and foreigners, who assumed the name of the person, by whose interest they had obtained the free- dam of the city of Rome. 2. Of Women. Varro takes notice that the women had heretofore their proper and particular name, as Caia, Ccecilia, Lucia, Volumnia. And Festus says that Caecilia and Tarratia were both called Caice. We likewise meet with Titia, Marca, &c. in Sigonius and others. And those names, as Quintilian observeth, were marked by inverted letters, thus, 3, -^^ j^, &.c. In process of time they were discon- tinued : if there was only one, it was customary to give her the name of her race or stock ; or sometimes it was softened by a di- minutive, as Tullia or Tulliola. But if there were many, they were called after the order of their birth, Prima, Secunda, Tertia, Quarta, Qiiinta, &c. or these were formed into diminutives, Se- cundilla, QiiartiUa, Qiciidil/a, &c. But as several are mistaken in affirmins that the women had no 'prcenomen ; so they are also in an error in pretending that they had no cognomen. For. it is certain that Sylla's daughter, who was married to Milo, had the surname of Cornelia; and Caelius writing to Cicero, speaks of Paula, who had the surname of Valeria. 3. Of Adoptive Children. It was customary for those who were adopted, to take the names iand surnames of those who adopted them. And in order to mark their birth and descent, they only added at the end the name of the house or stock from which they were descended, or the sur- name of their own particular branch ; with this difference however, tljat •230 Partic. Observ. Chap. I. Book Vlll. that if tlip}' made use of this surname, they wrote it simply ; whereas if they used tiie name, they formed it into an adjective ; Si cognomen, integrum servabant ; si nomen, mutatum S^ iujiexum, says Lipsius. For example, M. Juniua Brutus having been adopted by Q. Ser- xiiliiis Ccepio Again ; he took all his names, and preserved only the name of his own branch, calling himself Q. Servilius Ccepio Agalo Brutus. On the contrary, Octavius having been adopted by his grand uncle, Julius Ccusar, he preserved the name of iiis house, changing it into an adjective, and was called C. Julius Ccvmr Octa- vianus ; which did not hinder them from preserving also any sur- name they might have acquired, as Atticus, who having been adopted by Q. Ccecilius, had the surname of Q. Ccecilius Fomponia- nus. Atticus ; or from acquiring any new one by their merit, as Octavius, who had afterwards the surname of Augustus given him. To this rule of adoption we must refer what Suetonius saith, that Tiberius having been adopted by M. Galliiis, a senator, he took possession of lu's estate, but would not go by his name, be- cause he had followed the party that opposed Augustus ; and what Tacitus sa)'s, that Crispus Sallustius adopting his sister's nephew, made him take his name. And such like expressions. V. Other observations on changing the order of those Names. Though the usual custom of the Romans was that above ob- served, of putting the ^r«?no»?nly in the second place, as Sigonius observcth. Thus we find in Livy, Allium Ttd- lus, Manlius Cnceus, Octavius Melius. In Cicero, Malaginensis M. Scipio. Ill Suetonius, ad Pompcium. 5. The Of Names under the Emperors. 231 5. The prccnomcn or proper name put last under the Emperors. But those changes were still more considerable under the em- perors. For whereas during the time of the republic, the fra- nomen was the proper name which distinguished brothers and in- dividuals from one another, as M. TuUius Cicero, and Q. TuUius Ciceroy brothers ; on the contrary in the monarchical state of Rome, the proper name which distinguished individuals, was ge- nerally the last, whence it came that the brothers, commonly speaking, had nothing in particular but that; as Fiavius Vespa- sianus, and Fiavius Sabiinis, brothers, in Suetonius. This new custom appeareth plainly in the case of the Senecas. For Seneca the father, the rhetorician, was called M. Annceus Seneca; and he had three children, M. Annceus Novatus^ L. Anna:iis Se- neca, the philosopher ; and L. Annceus Mela, father of Lucan the poet. Yet the latter of each of those names was so far the proper and particular appellation, by which they were distinguished from one another, that the other two are common to them all ; and that Seneca the rhetorician, father of those celebrated sons, sometimes gives both to himself and them only the latter of those three names, as appeareth by the title of his first book of Controversies, Stneca, Novato, Senecoe, Milce fiUis salutem. And his eldest son Novatus, having been adopted by Junius Gallio, he is called by Eusebius in his Chronicle, Julius Gallio f rater SeneccE ; though his brother, Seneca the philosopher, generally calls him by the last of those three, which was his proper name, as in the title of his book on a Happy Life, and in his epistles ; likewise St. Luke in the Acts of the Apostles, c. 18. calls him by no other name than Gallio. Whence it is clear that in those days it was the last nam.e that distinguished the brothers from each other, as might be demon- strated by several other examples. Hence aLo it comes that only this last name was generally given to the principal persons of the empire in the first ages of the Church, as sufficiently distinguishing them from every body else. This is the reason that though St. Jerome in the preface to his commentaries on the epistle of St. Paul to the Galatians, speaking of Victorinus, that famous professor of eloquence at Rome, ob- serves that he was called C. Marius Victorinus ; yet Victorinus was in such a manner his proper name, that this very St. Jerome in his treatise of Ecclesiastic Writers, chap. 101. and St. Austin in his Confessions, book 8. chap. 2. call him only Victorinus. It appeareth likewise that St. Paulinus, Bishop of Nola, was called Pontius Meropius Paulinus ; and yet St. Austin and other authors generally give him the latter of those three names only, as that by which his person was particularly distinguished Thus Rufinus is called only by this name in the writings of S Jerom, S. Austin, and S. Paulinus, though his name was Tjran:.ius liu- Jiniis : nor has S. Prosper any other appellation in the autient writers of the Church, though his name was Tyro Prosper. Nor is Volusian, governor of Rome, mentioned by any other name in the 1st and 2d epistle of S. Austin, though we find by an antient inscription 2i32 Partic. Observ. Chap. I. Book VIII. inscription that he was called Caius Canotiius Rtifiiis Volusinnns ; nor 15oetius by any other than tJiis name, though he was called Auicius Boelius ; this name of Aniciiis, which is here put first, being nevertheless the name of the noble family from which he was descended. 6'. Edxeption to this rule of taking the last name under the Emperors. Contrary to this general rule of the Roman names under the emperors, it is to be observed however (as Father Sirmond hath observed in his notes on St. Sidonius) that we call Palladius the person who wrote on agriculture, though his name being Palla- dius liutilius Taurus yEmilia7ius, we should call him yjvmiliaiius, as he is stiled by St. Isidorus. In like manner we give the name of Macrobius to the person whom Avienusand Boetiuscall Theodosius, because his real name was Macrobius Ambrosius Aureiius 2'Jieodosins : and we give the name of Cassiodorus to that great man who was called Cassiodorus Senator, the word Senator, which was his real name, having been taken by many rather as the name of his dig- nity than of his person. But though a few such particular cases may occur, they must be considered, notwithstanding, either as exceptions to the general rule, or as errors that have crept into the title of the works of those authors, through the negligence of those who, choosing only to put one of their names, did not reflect that the custom of the antients was changed, and that the last name was become the proper name of individuals. 7. Other names changed as xvell as the latter. It is also observable, as Father Sirmondus shewcth extremely well in the same place, that whereas the antients always retained the name of their family together with their proper name, this custom was so far altered in the latter ages, that not only the pro- per name, but likewise all the others were changed in regard al- most to every individual, not attending so much to the general name of the family, as to those which had been particular to the illustrious men of that same family, or to their relations and friends. Thus the son of the orator Symmachus was called Q. Flavins Memmius Symmachus, having taken the name of Flavins from his uncle by the father's side, and q? Memmius from his uncle by the mother's side. Thus St. Fulgentius was called Fabius Claudius Gordianus Fulgeyiiius, having taken the name of Claudius from his father, and that of Gordianus from his grandfather, which is oltentimes the cause of our not being able to trace the antiquity of families. Of THE Numbers of the Romans. 233 Chapter II. Of Figures, or Arithmetical Characters, among the Romans. I. In what vianner the Romans jnarked their Numbers. H E Romans marked their numbers by letters, which they anged thus : 1 I One. 5 V Five. 10 X Ten. 50 L Fifty. 100 C One hundred. 500 Id Five hundred. 1000 do One thousand. 5000 lOD Five thousand. 10000 CCI03 Ten thousand. 50000 Idod Fifty thousand. 100000 ccclooo One hundred thousand These are the figures of the Roman numbers, with their sig- rjification and value : for, as Pliny observeth, the antients had no number above a hundred thousand; but to reckon higher, they put this number twice or thrice. Whence comes the manner of computing by, bis, ter, quater, quinquies, decies centena miUia, and others, of which we shall have occasion to speak in the chapter on Sesterces. II, Proper observations in order to understand these Figures thoroughly. In order properly to understand these figures, we must consider : 1. That there are only five different figures, which are the first five, and that all the rest are compounded of I and C ; so that the C is always turned towards the I, whether it comes before or after, as may be seen above. 2. That as often as there is a figure of less value before a higher, it signifies that we are to deduct so much from the latter, as IV. four : xl. forty : xc. ninety, &c. Whereby we see that there is no number but what may be expressed by the first five figures. 3. That in all those numbers, the figures go on increasing by a fivefold and afterwards a double proportion, so that the second is five times the value of the first, and the third twice the value of the second; the fourth five times the value of the third ; the fifth twice the value of the fourth, and the rest in the same manner. : 4. That the figures always begin to be multiplied on the right side, 50 that all the o which are put on that «de are reckoned by § five, 234 Partic. Observ. Chap. II. Book VIIL five, as those on the other side are reckoned by ten ; and thus we may easily find out all sorts cjf numbers how great soever : as when an author in tlie IGth century, giving a list of the number of citizens in the Roman empire, puts contrary to the custom of the antients, cccccccIoododd.o. Iddooodo. cccIooo. ccIo,-). taking the first c after the I for one thousand, or the first c on the right hand for five hundred, and proceeding through the whole with a tenfold progression, in eacli figure on ei'Jier side, I see immediately that the whole comes to one billion, five hundred millions, a hundred and ten thousand citizens ; which we should express thus by Ara- bic cyphers, 1500,110,000. But as we have already observed, the antients did not pass ccclooa. one hundred thousand in those figures. III. JVhat this manner of reclioning has been orving to, and whence these Figures have been taken. Now if I may be permitted to reflect a little on this manner of counting, it is easy to judge that it is owing to this, that mankind having begun at first to count with their fingers, they told as far as five with one hand, then adding the other hand, they made ten, which is double ; and hence it is that their progression in these numbers is always from one to five, and then from five to ten. To this same cause the very formation of these figures is owing. For what is more natural than to say, that I is the same as if an unit was shewn by raising one finger only ; and that the V is as if depressing the middle fingers no more was shewn than the little finger and the thumb, to include the whole hand; and adding the other to this, they formed as it were two V, one of which was inverted under the other, that is an X, which is equivalent to ten. I Manutius shews further that all the other figures are derived from the first, because as the V is only two 1 joined at the bottom, so the L is only two I, one upright and the other couchant ; and adding thereto a third on the top, they expressed by this figure a hundred, instead of whicli the transcribers, for greater currency in writing, have borrowed the C. And if we join a fourth I to shut up the square thus □, this makes five hundred, instead of which they afterwards took the id, and at length the D. Doubling this square \Zl.\ they formed their thousand, instead of which the transcribers, either for the sake of ornament, or for greater con- veniency, began likewise to round this figure, and with a dash of the pen to frame it thus co , afterwards thus u, for which reason we frequently meet with the couchant cypher co , or a Greek w to mark a thousand. But afterwards they marked it thus cio, and after that cd, and at length because this has a great relation to the Gothic 1' 2 , they took a simple M to denote a thousand, as likewise C for a hundred, and D for five hundred. And hence it comes that there are but just seven letters which serve for this sort of numbers, namely, C. D. I. L. M. V. X. except we havy a mind to add also the Q. which tome have taken for five hundred, according to Vossius. IV. Whether Of the Roman Sesterces. 233 IV. JVhether there are other methods to mark the Ro- man Cypher than the preceding. We must also take' notice of the opinion of some, that when there is a bar over the cyphers, this gives them the value of a thousand, as v, X five thousand, ten thousand. Bui Priscian's manner of computing, nannely, that to express a thousand, the X must be put between the C's,'thus CX3, and to express ten thou- sand we should put the M there, thus CiVl3, is absolutely false and contrary to antiquity ; and it is owing to this only, that not knowing the real foundation of this manner of computing, which I have here explained, they thought to adjust it to our's, which proceeds by a tenfold progression. And though we sometimes find the L between the C's, thus CL3, or the like, this is only a mistake of the transcribers, who perceiving that on those occasions the I is generally bigger than the C's, they took it for an L. So that even then the L ought to be reckoned only as an I, and to mark no more than one thousand. Chapter III. Of the Roman Sesterces. AS I have some notion of publishing a separate essay on the antient coins, with their respective value reduced to the standard of the present currency in France, I shall therefore speak here of sesterces, only in regard to grammar. The sesterce was a little silver coin in value the fourth part of a Roman denarius, or two asses and a half, which as was also called libra, because at first it was of copper, and weighed a pound. Hence the vv-ord as (quasi ces, says Varro) came from the matter; and the word libra, from the weight that was given it. And when they added the ablative pondo, it was to determine the word pound or weight, which of itself was also by measure. Hence it is that heretofore they marked the sesterce thusL. L. S. the two L's making two pounds, and the S signifying s«n?, two pounds and a half. Whereas the transcribers have since given us an H with the S, thus H. S. And this sesterce, pursuant to the valuation which we have elsewhere observed, was equivalent to a sou and two deniers, French money, or something more. In order to count the sesterces, the Romans proceed three ways. From one to a thousand they reckon them simply by the order of the numbers, without understanding any thing; Sestertii decern, viginti, centum, mille, &c. From a thousand to a million they reckon three ways, ei- ther by the numeral nouns, which they make agree with ses- tertii, as 7nille sestertii ; or by putting the neuter sestertia witli mitlia expressed or understood, as decern sestertia, or decern millia sestertia; or in short by putting sestertiuni in the genitive plural formed by syncope for sestertioriim, as octo vnllia sester- Hum, centena millia sestertium. Which they likewise mar k some- times by putting a bar over the capital letters, fhus c. m. s. % whicfe 236 Partic. Observ. Chap. III. Book VHI. which bar sheweth that the number is taken for a thousand ; so that the C which makes a hundred, stands here for a hundred thousand, though they frequently put this bar, where it is impos- sible to judge of the sum but by the sense. From a million upwards they reckon by adverb?, as decies, r/- cies, centies, sestertium, &c. where we must always understand ceit'. teiia millia, sestertii or seslertium, or else millia only, when ccnlcna lias been already expressed, as when Juvenal saith : Et ritu decies centena dahuntur Anliquo : that is, decies centena millia. But if the adverb alone is expressed, then we are to understand all these three words centena millia sesteriium. Thus bis millies, for example, is the same as bis millies centena millia sesteriium. We are to observe however that sestertius and numus frequently signify the same thing: tlius mille niimum, milte sestertiiim, or 7uiUe numum sesteriium^ may be indifferently said one fpr the other. II. Reason of these expressions, and that mille sirktli^ speaking is always an Adjective. Various are the opinions concerning the reason for this con- struction and these expressions : for not to mention those of Varro, ■Nonius, and some antients, whO' without any probability ima- gined that these genitives, juunmum and sesteriium (formed by syn- cope, instead o^ numorum and sestcrliorum ) were accusatives; mille is generally taken as a noun substantive that governeth the genitive niimmum or sesteriium. Scioppius on the contrary pretends that mille is always' an ad- jective, in the same manner as other numeral nouns ; and there- fore that we must suppose another noun on which the govern- ment of this genitive depends. And therefore he endeavours to show in his fourteenth letter, that then we must understand res or negotium, just as when Juvenal says : Quantum quisque sua nummorum possidct arcci : Where quantum being an adjective ought necessarily to suppose negotium. So that if we were to say, res or negotium mille nummorum est in area, the construction would be quite simple and intire : but if we say Mille nummorum est in area, it is figurative, and then we must understand res, which governs mille nummorum (which are the adjective and substantive) in the genitive. Now res mille nummo- rum, is the same thing as mille nunmii, just as Phredrus saith, res cibi for cibiis. Which we have shewn elsewhere more at large. Perhaps we might make use of this principle to solve some dif- ficult passages, which coincide with this same construction, as when Terence saith, Omnium quantum est qui vivunl ornalissi^ne, the most vain fellow in the whole world. For it meaneth, Quan- tum est negotium omnium hominum qui vivunt, ^ov quanti sunt homines qui vivunt. Just as the (i reeks say %f5j/xa Saf/xa-ov 'yv)ixiy.os for 3af/>t«roj yvv^, an admirable woman. And a^ Paul the learned Civilian said, Si juraverit sejilio mco decern operarum daticrum, liber csto. And in another place, Cum decern operaruinjussus ^st dare, for decern Of the Roman Sesterces. 237 decern operas. And it is certain that he might hkewise have said, Chn decern talentumjussus est dare, where there cannot he the least doubt but he must have understood rem, since Terence hath even expressed it, Si cognutiis talcntum rem reliquissct decern, &c. Wliere it is also obvious, that rem decern talenlinn and decern talenia, are the same thing, and therefore that decern is the adjective of talentum, let it be in whatever case it will. Therefore if I say, Reliquit tnihi decern talent uin (omitting rei7t, as this Civilian has done) there is no manner of doubt but they are both in the genitive, and but that this word res, is understood upon the occasion. For which reason when we say mi/le homimim, mille nummum, it is the same construction as decern uperarum, decern talentilm ; and we hiay further affirm that it is a construction of the adjective and substantive in the genitive governed by res or negoiium, which is understood. At least this is the opinion of Scioppius. This seems even to be the principle, by which we ought to ac- count for these expressions framed in the plural, as when St. Je- rom saith. Si Origenes sex miUia scripsisset libros. And Livy, Fhilip- jjei nummi quatuor mUlia viginti quatiior. And Cicero, IVitici tne- dimnos duo millia. For if this principle of Scioppius be just, we must resolve these phrases, and say, Scripsit libros ad sex millia ne- gotia illorum librorum ; tritici medimnos ad sex millia negotia illorum jnedimnorum. And in like manner the rest. Wliich will not perad- venture appear so extraordinary, when we once conceive, that the word res or negotium with the genitive of a noun, always supposeth this very noun in the nominative, res cibi for cibus. Millia nego- tia medimnorum, for mille inedimni, &c. For that millia in the plural is an adjective, is beyond all doubt, notwithstanding what Linacer, L. Valla, and Scaliger, pretend; since we find in Pliny, Millia iempestatum prcesagia : in Tully, Decent millia talenta Gabinio esse promissa, and the like. Such is the principle laid down by Scioppius, and in the main it seems to be undeniable. This however does not hinder but 'm practice, which is the master of speech, magister S) dictator loquendiy as Scaliger expresseth himself, one may say that mille is fre- quently taken as a substantive, being then rather for y^iXixs than X'^'°'> according to A. Gellius, as when we say unum mille, duo millia, &c. one thousand, two thousand, &c. And thus we are furnished with an easy method of resolving those expressions. For it is not to be imagined that the custom of language should be so confined to general rules, but it may sometimes make a sub- stantive of an adjective, and sometimes an adjective of a substan- tive ; nor that the human mind will take a perplexed ami dark winding in order to apprehend things, when it can find a shorter and clearer method. Hence there are a great many nouns taken substantively, though in the main they are adjectives, as vivens, mortalis, patria, Judcea, molaris, &c. which, strictly speaking, do refer to homo, terra, dens ; and the same may be said of the rest. And therefore when we say mille denarium est in area, mille equi- tum est in exercitu, I see nothing that can hinder us from looking upon mille as a substantive ; or at least as a noun taken substan- tively. '23S Partic. Obseuv. Chap. III. Book VIII. lively, which shall govern the genitive denarium, equitum^ &c. And thus it is that Lucilius says, Tu miUi nummum putcs into qucerere centum : With a thousand sesterces you can gain a hundred thousand. Therefore when we say, Sex millia scripsit libros, tritici medhnnos recipii duo miliia, we may take it, either as an apposition, libros sex millia ; or resolve it by ad libros, ad sex millia : which does not hinder but in the main we may also resolve it by negolium, accord- ing to Scioppius's principle : just as, strictly speaking, mortalis ought to be resolved by homo, Judcea by terra, and the rest in the like manner. Be that as it may, we must observe that when a verb or an ad- jective is joined to this word mille, it is generally made to agree in the singular, whether we are to understand wen^o^iitw, as Scioppius pretends, or whether we take it, not for ;^/X/o/, but for x^Ktxs, a thousand, as A. Gellius will have it. Qui L. Antonio mille nummum Jerret expensitm, Cic. Quo in Jcindo mille hominumjaciie versabatur, Cic. Ad Romuli initium plus mille 8^ centum annorum est, Varro. Ibi occiditur mille Ikominum, and not occiduntur, says Quadrigar, in A. Gellius, lib. 1. c. 16.* III. Oilier remarkable expressions in regard to the same subject. When we meet with Sestertium decies numeratum esse, Cic. act. 4. in Verr. it is a Syllepsis of number, or numeratum which refers to negotium, understood, instead of numerala, which it should have been ; as indeed it is in some editions, because we are to suppose centena millia. In like manner, An accepto centies sestertium fiecerit, Velleius, lib. 2. de Curione, for acccptis ceiities centenis millibus ses- tertium, and the like. Now as the antients said, decies sestertium, or decies centena millia sestertium ; so they said likewise decies crris, or decies centena millia arts : decies ceris numeratum esse, &c. where the word ess is gene- rally taken for the asses, which at first were of brass, as already hath been observed. ♦ And this is so much the more to above noun hath this in particular, be observed, as in French it is quite that it does not take an s at the latter the reverse, the construction being al- end, except it be to mark the miles ways in the plural with this numeral on the highway; for every where else noun as well as with the rest, since we write in French un mille, dix mille, we say for instance, Les cent or les mille trente mille, &c. one thousand, ten i/iou- soldats venus d'ltalie fureni tues en ce sand, thirty thousand, &c. though we (omhat, the hundred, or thousand sol- say, deux cens, two hundred, quatre' diers uho came from Italy, were killed vingls, fourscore, and the like with an s. in this battle. Again, il y en a eu mille But when we say, mille dc lues, it is a tues, or rather mille de tues and not tui, partition, as if it were mille occisurum nor de lue, there were a thousand killed, or ex numero occisorum. Where it appears likewise that the Ov Days and Hours. 239 Chapter IV. Of the Division of Time according to the Antients. TH E antients had a particular manner of reckoning and expressing time, which is necessary to be known fur the right understanding of authors. I. Of Days. We shall begin with a day, as the part of time most known and most natural. The antients divided a day into natural and artificial. The na- tural day they called that which is measured by the space of time the sun takes in making his circuit round the earth, which in- cludes the entire duration of day and night. Artificial day they called that space of time which the sun stays above the horizon. The natural day is also called the civil, inasmuch as it is diffe- rently computed by different nations, some beginning it one way, and others another. Thus the Babylonians began their day with the sun-rise. The Jews and the Athenians began it with sun-set, and in this they are imitated by the modern Italians, who reckon their first hour from the setting of the sun. The Egyptians began it at midnight, as we do. The Umbrians at noon. The day which commences at the setting or rising of the sun, is not altogether equal. For from the winter solstice to the sum- mer solstice, that which begins from sun-set, has a little more than 24) hours: and quite the contrary from the summer solstice to the winter solstice. But the natural day which begins at midnight, or at noon, is always equal. On the contrar)^ the artificial day is unequal in all parts of the earth, except under the equinoctial line. And this inequality is greater or lesser according to different climates. Now from thence ariseth the difference of houi's, of which we are going to speak. II. Of Hours. There are two sorts of hours, one called equal, and the other unequal. Equal hours are those which are always in the same state, such as those which we make use of, each of which constitutes the four- and-twentieth part of the natural day. , Unequal hours are those which are longer in summer, and shorter in winter for the day; or the reverse for the night; being only the twelfth part of the day or of the night. Therefore dividing the artificial day into twelve equal parts, ive shall find that the sixth hour will be at noon, and the third, will be half the time, which precedes from sun-rise till noon ; as the ninth hour is half the time which follows from noon till sun- Bet ; and the rest in the same manner. This 240 Pautic. Obseuv. Chap. IV. Book VIII. This is uliat gave occasion to the naming of the canonical hours of prime, tierce, sexte, none, and vespers, in honour of the sacred mysteries that were accomplished in those hours, in which the Church hath therefore been used to say those prayers. III. Of the JVatches of the Night. The twelve hours of the night were divided into four watches, and each watch contained three hours. Hence we frequently find in Cicero and other writers. Prima vigilia, secunda vigilia, &c. IV. Of Weeks. Weeks were composed of seven days, as the Scripture sheweth. And almost all the oriental nations have made use of this method to compute their days. Whereas the western world did not adopt; it till the Christian religion was established, the Romans gene- rally reckoning their days by nines, and the Greeks by decads or tens. But the Pagans called their days by the names of tlic seven planets; thus the first was dies So/is, the second dies Lunce, the third dies Marfis, the fourth dies Mercurii, the fifth dies Jovis, the sixth dies Veneris, the seventh dies Sntnrni : and these names are still in use, except that instead of dies Satiirni, we say dies Sabbat? , that is, the day of rest; and instead of dies Solis, we call the first day of the week dies Domini, in memory of the resurrection of the Son of God : the other days, from the custom of the Church, are called Ferice according to their order ; thus Monday, Feria se- cu7ida, Tuesday, Feria tertia, and so on. V. Of Months. Montlis are composed of weeks, as weeks of da)'S. But months properly speaking are no more than the space which the moon takes either in her course through the Zodiac, and is what astro- logers call the periodical month, or in returning from one con* junction with the sun to the next conjunction following, and is what they call the synodical month. Yet this name hath been also given to the time which the sun takes in its course through the twelfth part of the Zodiac, whereby ' two sorts of months are distinguished ; lunar and solar. The lunar synodical month, the only one considered by the an- tients, is little more than twenty-nine days and a half. The solar month is generally computed at thirty days, ten hours and a half. But the month is further divided into astronomical and civil; Astronomical is properly the solar month ; and the civil is that which has been adapted to the custom and fancy of particular na- tions, some making use of lunar, and others of solar months. The Jews, the Greeks, and the Romans, heretofore made use of lunar months ; but to avoid the different fractions of numbers, they made them alternately of nine and twenty and thirty days, calling the former cavi, and the IdiWcr pteni. The Egyptians preferred the solar months, each of which they made of thirty days only, adding to the end of the year the five days that OF Weeks and Months. 241 that arose from the rest of the hours, and neglecting the six hours or thereabouts that arose from the half hours, which was the reason that every fourth year their seasons fell back a day. We may be said .likewise to m ike use of those months, though we render them unequal, reserving moreover the six hours to make a day thereof every fourth year, as hereafter shall be ex- plained. Yl.Theantient manner of reckoning tJieDays of theMonth. The Romans made use of three terms to denote the several days of the month ; these were the calend>, the nones, and the ides, which they marked thus, Cal. or Kal. Non. Id. The calends they call the first day of every month, from the verb y.xXiu, voco, because as the antients computed their montlis by the revolution of the moon, there was a priest employed to observe the new moon, and upon his first perceiving it, to give notice thereof to the person who presided over the sacrifices ; then the people were called to the Capitol, and information was given them how many days were to be reckoned till the nones, and upon the day of the nones all those employed in husbandry were obliged to be in town, that they might receive the direction for the festivals and other ceremonies to be observed that month. Hence some are of opinion that the nones were called 7inncc, quasi novce, as much as to say new observations ; though it is more likely the reason of this denomination, was because from that time to the ides there were always nine days. The word ides, according to Varro, was owing to this, that in the Etruscan language, iduare signified dividere, because they di- vided the month into two almost equal parts. After the first day, which went by the name of calends, the six following in the month of March, July, and October, and the four in the other months, belonged to the nones : and after the nones there were eight days belonging to the ides; and the re- mainder after the ides was reckoned by the calends of the next, month. These particulars may be easily retained by these two Latin verses. Sex Mains, noiias, October, Julius et Mars ; Quafuor at rcliqui : dabit idus quitibet octo. So that in the months above mentioned, each of which had six days for the nones after the calends, the day of the nones was properly the seventh ; and of course the ides were the fifteenth. But in the other months that had only four days betwixt the calends and the nones, the nones were the fifth, and of course the ides the thirteenth. And the proper day of the calends, nones, and ides, was always put in the ablative, calendis, iionis, idibus, Januariiy Februarii, &c. But the other days were reckoned by the follow- ing term, expressing the number of days till then, and including both terms, whether nones, ides, or calends, as quarto nonas, sup. ante : sexto idus : quinto calend. &c. Now they never said prima nonas ; but nonis, 8cc. mor secimdo no- nas, because secundus Cfmeth from sequor, and the business here is Voj^. II. R to 242 Partic. Observ. Chap. IV. Book VIII, to mark the preceding day. For which reason they made use of pridie ; just as to signify the following day they made use of poS' tridie, as pridie nnnas, or nonarnni. Postridie cnlendas or ccdenda- rum, where we are to understand the preposition ante or post, when there is an accusative ; whereas the genitive tionarurn, or the hke, is governed lilie the ablative die. VII. Of the Year. A year is properly the time which the sun takes in performing its revolution through the twelve signs of the Zodiack. It is di- vided into astronomical and civil. The astronomical or tropic year, is that which includes the exact time the sun is in returning to the same point of the Zodiack from which he set out : this the astronomers have not yet been able exactly to determine, though by the nicest observations it is found to consist of 365 days, 5 hours, and 49 minutes. The civil year is that whicli hath been adapted to the custom and fancy of different nations. The year appears to have been of three sorts among the Ro- mans. That of Romulus, who made the year only of ten months, beginning it in the month of March, for which reason the last month was called December. That of Numa, who corrected this gross error of Romulus, adding two months to the year, January and February, and com- posing it of 355 days only, which are twelve lunar months. That of Julius Caesar, who finding this calculation also erro- neous, added ten days and something more, whereby he made the year to consist of 365 days and six hours exactly, re- serving the six hours to the end of four years in order to form an entire day, which they inserted before the sixth of the calends of March, and therefore that year they reckoned twice the sixth of the calends, saying the second time his sexlo cnlendas^ whence came the word bissextiis, and then the year had 366 days, and was called bissextile. This manner of computing has continued down to our times, and because of its author is still called the Julian year. Now the ten days which Cassar gave the year above what it had before, were thus distributed : to January, August, and December, each two : to April, June, September and November, each one. But as in these latter times this calculation hath been likewise found imperfect, and the equinoxes had insensibly retrograded, in- stead of remaining where Julius Caesar had fixed them, thence it clearly appeared iliat the year did not contain exactly 365 days and six hours, but that it wanted eleven minutes : this in 131 years made the equinoxes fnil back almost a da}', because an hour containing sixty of those minutes, a day must contain 1440 of them, which being divided by 11. give 1S0.|^, so that the equinoxes were fallen back to ihe tenth of March. For which reason, in the year 1582, Pope Gregory XIII, in order to correct this error, left out ten days of that year, by which means he re- stored those equinoxes to the 21st of March, and to the 22d or 23d oii Srpi ember; and that the like inconveniency might be . avoided OF Olympiads and Lustres. ^43 avoided for the future, he ordained that as 131 muhiplied by three malcb 39.'5, that is near 400 years, the computation should be regu- lated by hundreds, in order to make a round number ; and there- fore that in 400 years, the Sist three terminating tliree centuries should be common without reckoning the bissextile. And this is properly what is called the Gregorian account. So that in this calculation, there is never a hundredth year a bissextile, except those that can be measured by four. Thus 1700. 1800. 1900. 2100. 2200. are not bissextile. But the years 1600. 2000. 2400. &c. are bissextile. VIII. Of the Spaces of Time composed of several Years. And first of Olympiads and Lustres. I shall but just touch on these matters, because to treat of them fully, requires too copious a dissertation, and properly belongs to another subject. The Greeks reckoned by Olympiads, each of which contained the space of four entire years. And those Olympiads took their name from the Olympic games, which were celebrated in the neighbourhood of Pisa, heretofore called Oli/mpia, in Pelopon- nesus, whence they had the name of Olympic. Those years were likewise denominated Iphiti, from Iphitus, who instituted, or at least revived the solemnity of those games. The Romans reckoned by lustres, that is, by a space of four or five years : for the word lusti-iirn, according to Varro, cometh from tuo to pay ; because at the beginning of every fifth year, the people used to pay the tax imposed upon them by the censors, whose offices had been established at first for that space of time, though afterwards they became annual. ^ 2. Of the Indiction and the Golden Number. The Indiction is a revolution of 15 years, which according to Hotoman was established by the emperor Constantine, who pub- lished an edict ordaining that the subjects of the Roman empire should no longer reckon by Olympiads but by Indictions. Theif name perhaps was borrowed from some tax that was paid to the emperors every fifteenth year ; for indictio signifieth a tribute or tax. The Golden Mumber is a revolution of 19 years, which was invented by Meto the Athenian, in order to reconcile the lunar to the solar year ; at the expiration of which term of 19 years it was found that the moons returned to the same days, and that the moon recommenced her course with the sun, within an hour and some minutes. And this was called the goldgn number, either for its excellence and great utility, or because, according to some, the inhabitants of Alexandria sent it to the Romans in a silver calendar, on which those numbers from I to 19 were in gold letters. This number was likewise called the great lunar Cycle, or decennoveimalis, and IwraJexalw^/j of 19 years, or Me- tonicus, from the name of its author ; and has been of great use in the ecclesiastic calendar, to shew the epacts and the new moons, ' R 2 since 244 Paktic. Observ. Chap. IV. Book VIIL since tlie council of Nice had ordained that the feast of Easter should be celebrated the first Sunday after the full moon in March. 3. Of the Solar Cycle, and the Dominical Letters. Tlie SOLAR Cycle, or the dominical letters, is a revolution of 28 years, at the end of which the same dominical letters revert again in the same order. To understand this properly we are to observe, that as the year is composed of months and weeks, every day of the month is marked out in the calendar by its cypher, or by one of the follow- ing seven letters, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, the first beginning the first day of the year, and the others continuing in a constant round to the end. Hence those letters would invariably distinguish each feria or day of the week, as they are invariable in regard to the days of the month, if the year had exactly but a certain number of weeks ; so that as A always signifies the 1st of Januar}'^, B the 2d, C the 3d, in like manner A would always stand for Sunday ; B, for Monday, &c. But by reason the year has at least 365 days, which make 52 weeks, and a day over, it happens to end with the same day of the week as it began; and therefore the next year begins not with the same, but with the following day. That is, as the next year. 1651 begins with a Sunday, it will finish also with a Sunday, consequently the following year 1652 will begin with a Monday. And thence it comes of course that the letter A, which always answers to the first of January, having stood for Sunday one year (which is being the Dominical Letter), it will stand only for Monday the next year, in which of course the G will be the do- minical letter or characteristic of Sunday : and so for the rest. Hereby it appears that if the year had only 365 days, this circle of dominical letters would terminate in seven years, by retrogres- sion, G, r, E, D, C, B, A. Biit because from four to four years there is a bissextile, which has one day extraordinary, two things ensue from thence. The first, that this bissextile year hath two dominical letters, whereof one serves from the 1st of January to the 25th of Febru- ary, and the other from thence to the end of the year. The rea- son of wliich is extremely clear, for reckoning the sixth of the ca- lends twice, it follows, that the letter F, which answers to that day, is also reckoned twice, and therefore it fills two days of the week, the consequence of which is, that the letter which had hi- therto fallen on the Sunday, falls now on the Monday, and the precedent by retrogression takes its place in order to be the charac- teristic of Sunday. The second thing that follows from thence is, that as there are thus two dominical letters every fourth year, the circle of these letters does not terminate in seven {years, as it otherwise would ; but in four times seven years, which make twenty-eight. And this is exactly what they call the solar cycle, which before the refor- mation of the calendar, began with a bissextile year, the dominical letters of which were G, F. § 4. The OF THE Julian Period, S^c, 245 4. The Julian Period, the Sabbatic Years, a Jubileey an Age. The Julian Pbriod is formed of tliose three cycles or revo- lutions multiplied into one another, that is of 15 for the indiction, of 19 for the golden number, and of 28 for the dominical letters; which make 79S0 years. The use of this period is very com- mon among chronologers, and of vast advantage for marking the time with certainty ; because in all that great number of years, it is impossible to find one that has all the same cycles as another*, for instance 1. the cycle of the sun, 2. the cycle of the moon, and 3. the cycle of indiction. This period was invented by Jo- seph Scaliger, and is called Julian, from its being adapted to the Julian year, and composed of three cycles which are proper to that year. The Jews reckoned their years by weeks, of which the seventh was called Sabbatic, during which they were not allowed to till the land, and their slaves were to be set at liberty. They had likeVvise their years of Jubilee or remission, which was every 50th, or according to some every 49th year; so that every jubilee year was likewise sabbatic, but more solemn than the rest ; and the years of both terms, that is, of the preceding and following jubi- lee, were likewise included in the number 50. And then each estate, and whatever had been alienated, was to revert to its former master. The word Age, which is frequently used, includes the space of one hundred entire years, according to Festus. Servius observeth, that scBculum, which we render age, was also taken sometimes for the space of thirty years, sometimes for a hundred and ten years, and sometimes for a thousand. 5. Of Epochas, and the word Mum. We may likewise take notice of the diffei'ent Epochas, which are certain principles, as it were, and fixed points, that chronolo- gers make use of for the computation of years ; these they like- wise call JErje, from a corrupt word taken in the feminine for the neuter ccra, a name they gave to the little nails of brass, with which they distinguished the accounts and number of years. The most remarkable of all is that of the birth of Christ, as settled by Dionysius Exiguus, which commences in the month of January of the 4714'th year of the Julian period, and is that which we make use of. That of the Olympiads begins 776 years before the birth of our Saviour. That of the foundation of Rome of the year 752 before Christ, according to the most probable opinion. And several others, which may be eeen in those who treat more diffusely of these matters. ( 245 ) BOOK IX. Of letters, AjuI the Ortliography and Fronunciation of the Antlents. Wlierein is shewn the aiitient manner of pronouncing . the Latin tongue, and occasion is taken to point out also the right manner of pronouncing the Greek. Extracted from the best treatises both of antient and modern xvriters on this subject. '^I^IIE Reader may consult what hath been said in regard X to Letters in the GENERAL AND RATIONAL GRAMMAR. * But hei-e we follow a different order in favour of beginners. For whereas, one would imagine, that we ought to set out with a treatise of letters, as the least constituent part of words, and consequent!}' of speech ; and afterwards proceed to quantity and pronunciation, before we entered upon the analogy of the parts of speech, and the syntax or construction which in- cludes their arrangement; we have reserved the two former parts for the present treatise, after having previously discoursed of the other two ; not only Air this reason, that there can be nothing more serviceable to those who begin to learn a language, than to intro- duce them immediately intd the practical part, but likewise because there are several things in those two latter parts which suppose some progress, and knowledge of the former. And indeed if tlie point be only to know how to assemble the letters, children ought to be well acquainted with this, when they enter upon the study of languages, and therefore they have no oc- casion here for any instructions about it ; which made Quintilian say that this is beneath the office of a grammarian. But if we would examine this point with any degree of accuracy, and develop the several difficulties that entangle the subject, we shall find the truth of the following remark of an antient writer; Fronte exile neiiutium Et di^num piteris pntes, Aggiessis labor arduus. Terenlian. Maurus. But I hope this labour will not be unprofitable, since it may con^ tribute, as Quintilian saith, not only to sharpen the ivits of young people, but likewise to try the abilities of those ivho are more advanced. And I persuade myself that it will help to demonstrate the * A translation of this work was lately published by F. Wingrave, Successor to J, Nourse iu the Strand. nature ■ Of letters, <^^c. Q4>7 nature and mutual relation of letters; which is indeed the ground- work of pronunciation and orthography ; the reason of the quan- tity of syllables and dialects ;_^the surest way of arguing from the analogy and etymology of words ; and frequently serves as a clue to find our way through the most corrupt passages of the antients, while it shews us the manner of restoring them to their genuine sense and purity. Chapter I. Of the Number, Order, and Division of Letters. THEY generally reckon three-and-twenty letters in the Latin alphabet. But, on the one hand, K being hardly any loiiger of use, and the I and U being not only vowels, but also consonants, and thus forming two new letters, as consonants, which the most skilful printers distinguish even from I and U vowel, by writing J consonant with a tail, and the V consonant with a sharp point, even in the middle of words ; it would he better to reckon twenty-four letters in the alphabet, giving the Hebrew names Jod and Van to the J and V consonant. Thus of these twenty-four letters there are six vowels, that is, which have a distinct sound by themselves, and can by themselves form a syllable ; and eighteen consonants, that is, which have need of a vowel to form an articulate sound and compose a syllable. The six vowels are A, E, I, O, U, and Y. Of the eighteen consonants, X and Z, as pronounced by the antients, are properh^ no more than abbreviations ; X being only a c and an 5 ; and Z a (/ and an s, as we shall demonstrate presently. For which reason they are called double letters. Of the sixteen remaining there are four called liquids or gliding letters, L, R, M, N ; though, ^operly speaking, none but L and R deserve that name, the other two, especially M, being hardly gliding. There are ten which may be called mutes, and divided into three classes, according to the relation they have to one another, and as they may more easily be changed one for the other, thus, ( B, P, F, V. Mutes J C, Q, G,J. ( D, T. Of the two remaining S makes a class by itself, only that we may join it to X and Z, as it constitutes the principal part of the double letters. And those three may be called hissing letters, though it is a fault in some to give them too hissing a sound. In regard to H, it is only an aspiration, though it ought not to be struck out of the order of letters, as hereafter we shall more particularly observe. This is, in my opinion, the clearest and most useful division of letters. As to the distinction of consonants into semi-vowels and mutes. 248 NEW METHOD. Book IX, mutes, whosoever will take pains to examine into the matter, must find that this half sound which he gives to the semi- vowels, L, M, N, R, S, X, does not proceed from their nature, hut only from the vowel which he prefixes to them in telling over the alphabet, el, cm, cr, es, ex ; for if it had been customary to prefix the vowel to all the others which they call mutes, and say eb, cc, cd, &c. they would have an half sound as well as the precedent. And it is easy to shew that it was merely through caprice, and without any solid reason, that the Latins prefixed the vowel to some letters rather than others. 1. Because the Hebrews and Greeks, of whom the Romans borrowed their alphabet, have always begun with a consonant in naming those letters in general. 2. Because x being composed of c and 5, it is evident that according to reason it ought rather to be pronounced alter the manner of the Greeks cii, than ecs^ as it is generally sounded, •which is difficult and disagreeable, not only to young people, but to grown-up persons. 3. The F has so great an affinity with the Greek ip, that, the ^ being a mute, there is no reason to think but F was a mute likewise, and 3'et they put a vowel before ef. Upon the whole there is room to believe that this distinction ought not to be minded, though we retain the name of mutes in opposition to that of liquids, and not of semi-vowels. Therefore letters may be divided into Vowels ("open, (shut, Liquids, \A, E, T. JO, U, Y. L, 11. 1 M, N. Consonants, Mutes, Hissing, Aspiration, F,V. G.J. \X, Z. I 11. } } } 10 3 I 24 Chapter II. Of Vozvels in general, as long or short. THERE is no one article in which the moderns have varied more from the pronunciation of the antients than in this. For the distinction ottlie vowels, long or short, on which depends the whole quantity of syllables, save only those which are long by position, is now no more observed, except on the penultima of \vords of more than two syllables. Thus Of letters, ^c. 249 Thus in pronouncing amabam and circumdabam, it is plain that ma is long in the first word, and da short in the second. But in pronouncing dabam and stabam, it is impossible to tell whether the first s}'llable of either be short or long. In sounding legimus in the present, and legimus in the preterite, we give no mark that the c in the first syllable of the present is short, and in the preterite is long. Reciting mensa in the nominative, and mensa in the abla- tive, one cannot judge whether the last be short in one, and long in the other. Now the antients, in uttering those vowels, distinguished exactly the long and short ones, wheresoever they occurred. Hence St. Austin takes notice, that when we find this passage in writing, Non est absconditum a te os mev.m, it is impossible to tell at first whe- ther the of this word os be long or short; but it' it be pronounced short, it comes from os, ossis ; and if it be pronounced long, it comes from os, oris. And this without doubt added greatly to the beauty of versification. For which reason the same Father says likewise, that in this verse of Virgil, Anna virumque cano, Trojce qui primus ab oris, if we were to put primis, the last of which is long, instead of pn- mzis, where it is short, the ear would be offended, and cease to find the same harmony. And yet there is no ear, however, so delicate, that, without knowing the rules of Latin quantity, and hearing this verse recited with primus ab oris, or primis ab oris, would be able to distinguish any thing that gave offence more in one than the other. The antients also observed this distinction of long or short vowels in their writing, in which they frequently doubled the vowel, to denote a long syllable ; which Quintilian acknowledged to have been practised till the time of Attius. Sometimes they inserted an k between these two vowels, in order to strengthen the pronunciation, as Aliala for Ala or Aala ; and, after dropping the first A, they likewise made Hala ; for this is still the same noun, though some learned men have been dubious about it. And it is for this same reason that we find in the antients mehe for mee or me long, mehecum for niecum, and the like; just as we say vehemens for veemeyis ; prehendo for preendo ; and mihi for the antient mi or mii. But afterwards, for the sake of brevity, they were satisfied with drawing only a small stroke over the vowel, to shew it was long, thus A, E, O, U. Though for the vowel I they never \ased this mark, as we shall shew hereafter. And hence it is that we still meet with totiens for toties, quotiens, vicensimus, for- monsus, aquonsus, and such like ; which is owing entirely, as Lip- sius observes, to the ignorance of transcribers, who took this small stroke for a tittle, that stood for an n or an m, as is still practised, not knowing that among the antients it served only as a mark of quantity. 250 NEW M E T II O D. Book IX. CllAPTKR III. T Of' Vowels in particular. And particularly of thoie that are called open. n E three first vowels, A, E, I, are called open, because in pronouncing them the mouth ought to be opened wider than in pronouncing the rest. I. Of A. Notliing more remains to be said of the A, after what hath been mentioned iu the preceding chapter, except that this vowel hath a relation and affinity with a great many others, as we shall see in the sequel. We may further observe that it is the most open of them all, as the most simple, and the easiest to pronounce ; for which reason it is with this that children begin their alphabet. So that if we do but rightly consider the natural order of those yovyels, we shall find, that from this, which is the most open, they diminish gradually down to the U, which is the most shut, and which of all the vowels has the greatest need of the motion of the lips to pro- nounce it. II. (y E. There is scarce a letter that admits of more different sounds in all languages than this ; particularly in French. We may take notice of three of those sounds which sometimes occur in a single word, as/^rmd6', netlete^ brevete. Sec. The first is an c which I call open, because it is pronounced with the mouth open. The second is generally called obscure and mute, because it has a weaker sound than the rest ; or feminine, because it serves to form the feminirte rhymes in French metre. And the third, opposite to this, is called e clear, or masculine ; as also e shut : it is frequently marked with a small accent over it to distinguish it from the rest. Besides this the French language hath another, which is pro- nounced like an «, and therefore ought rather to be called an a, since the figure is quite accidental in regard to letters : and perhaps it would be better to write it with an n, were it not for point- ing out the derivation of words in the original languages. As Empereur for Ampcreur, because it comes from Invperator ; en for an, because it comes from in ; pendre ior pandre, because it comes from pendere ; grandement,foriement, dijfficilement, &c. nient for mant^ be- cause they come from the Italian. But as for the other open e, which some make use of, as in bete, Jete, tele, or with an S, hcste, feste, teste, we ought to look upon it as the same with the first e "in brevete, fennele, &c. from which- it hardly differs, except in some length of quantity or accent." This seems to be well illustrated by the comparison of these two words, fer, and/crT-e, where this e, which becomes longer ii)' the first svilable of the second word, is nevertheless the same as that Of letters, §c. 251 that of the first word. And therefore we may reduce all the French E's to tluee, or at nnost to four, if we likewise include that which is sounded as an A ; and these four different sounds may be observed in a single word, as Deterrenient. But the latter, which is called the long and open e, and appears particularly in these words, bele, Jtle^ tete, &c. properly corre- sponds with the Greek eta, whose sound it perfectly represents, since the aforesaid eta was introduced on purpose to distinguish the long E, saying /3^t«, as if it were beeta. Which made Eustathius say that ^n^-h, bee bee, expresseth perfectly well the bteating of the sheep ; wherein he is supported by the authority of the antient poet Cratinus. So that it is really amazing, there should be people who still pronounce it like an i, contrary to the general analogy of the language, since Simonides, who invented the two long vowels n and u, did it with no other intent than to make them correspond to the two short ones e and o ; contrary to the unanimous opinion of all the antients, and the testimony of the ablest writers of the latter ages ; and contrary, in short, to the standing practice of the best scholars both in France and other nations ; which might be fur- ther evinced by a great number of authorities and arguments, drawn from the comparison of all languages, if it had not been already sufficiently demonstrated by those who before us have handled the subject. 'On the contrary, the e shut expresseth the Greek ItJ/z^o'v, like the last in Jermete. And the other, which is between both, gives a particular grace to the French language, the like of which is not to be found in any other ■ for it forms the feminine rhymes in verse, as when they say Jerme, terms, &c. But it is very remarkable that this E, which constitutes almost one half of the French rhymes, hardly ever occurs twice successively in the same word, except in a few compounds, as devenir, revenir^ remener, eutretenir, contrepeser, &c. and even here it is not at the end of the words. For which reason in verbs that have an E fet minine in the penultima of the infinitive, as peser, mener, it is changed into an open e in those tenses which finish with this E feminine: so that they say, celu se phe, il me mene, as if it were paise, maine, &c. And in the first persons which end with this same E feminine, it is changed into an E masculine in interroga- tions, because of the pronoun je which follows and is joined to it, and which hath also an e feminine. Thus we say, faime, je joile, je prie. But in interrogating we say, Joiie-je? nime-je? prie-jef And if, to facihtate the pronunciation on those and other occar sions, people would only accustom themselves to put some little mark on the e feminine, as it is customary to put under the 9 in parti- cular words, it would be distinguished from the e masculine, which has its mark over it, and the plain letter e might remain for what we call the e mute and obscure. And thus we might effectuate, al- most without any trouble, such a distinction in orthography and pro- nunciation, as may be deemed perhaps of all others the most ne- cessary in the French language, since v/e see daily that not only fo- reigners, but even those who are versed in the language, are mis- taken and puzzled in the distinction of those two e's. i52 N E W M E T H O D. Book IX. The Latins had also their different sounds of this letter. They had their E long and open, wliich answered to the Greek Eta, and for that reason was frequently doubled, as we see in medals and antient inscriptions, /ee/ix, seedes, M^, sufcu.s ; Tfiocvfjia. or rpa/fAx, according to the Dorics, whence it is that the Liuins have also caiidex or codex, caitrns, or corus, &c. And hence it is perhaps that as this diphthong an partook greatly of the A, so the O had also some affinity with A. For the vEo- lians said ^piros for s^§ol■ro!, cxercitus ; ovu for uvu, supra. Which the Latins have likewise imitated, borrowing domo from ^a^iD, and saying Fabius for Fovius, according to Festus; Farreus for for reus, &c. And in French the A and O are oftentimes joined in the same word, lafjn,Jaon, paon, which are prououDced with a long A, lartf- Of letters, ^c. 2,55 farii pan / though Ramus takes notice that in his time some marked the long O with these two letters AO, which they did perhaps in iinitation of the Greeks, who change «o or aw, as well as ea, into w long in their contractions. The O hath likewise an affinity with the E ; hence it is that of >,iya>, dico, the Greeks have made XiXoyx, dixi, and the like; that the ^olians said r^ni/.ioi for r^ifjLu, tremo, that the Latins of o-vriy^u, libo, made spondeo i of pendeo, pondus ; of tego, toga ; and they say ndversum or advorsiim ; vertex or vortex ; nccipiter for accipitor, or acceptor, U^x^, according to Festus, a bird of prey j hemo for hojuo ; ambe for nnibes, for ambo and ambos, in Ennius : exporrectus for cxperrectus, &c. Hence also it is that there are so many adverbs in E and in O, vere and vera, tute and tuto, nimie and nimio, cotidic and cotidio, rare and raro, in Charisius, and such like. And it is by this very analogy, that the nouns in US make, i6me the genitive in ERIS, as vidnus, vulneris, and others ORIS, «s peons, pecoris ; stercus, sferceris, and slcrcoris. See. And that the verbs have a reduplication in E and O, as momordi for memordi, spopondi for spepcmdi, &c. But the O had still a much greater affinity with the U. Hence it is that the antients, says Longus, were apt to confound those two letters ; and though according to him, they wrote consol with an O, yet they pronounced consul with an U. And Gassiodorus informs us that they wrote prccstu for prcesto ; pobliciim for publi- cuvi ; colpam fov culpam, &c. Pliny in Priscian tells us the same thing, and thence it is that we say hue, Uliic, for hoc, illoc, which Virgil himself hath made use of. Hoc tunc ignipotens ccelo descendit ah alto, Mn. 8. Which is likewise proved by Servius on this passage. And Quin- tilian observeth that they said, Hecoba, riotrix, with an a for an u ; that of Odysseus, the iEolians made Udijssens, whence the Latins- had borrowed Uli/ssetis. And in short his tutors had wrote Servom with an o, whereas in his time they wrote it with two uu, though neither of those writings did perfectly express the sound which struck the ear. II. Of v. From what has been said it plainly appeareth that the U had a very full sound, which bordered very .much on the O. And Te- rentianus expressly declared that the U filled the sound of the diphthong OT. In vain does Lipsius, as well as Vossius, pre- tend that this pronunciation was only for the U long, and that the short one was pronounced like an v-^iKov, that is like a French u. For Priscian teacheth the contrary, and doubtless his autho- rity is preferable to their's on this occasion. And in regard to the argument which they draw from a passage of Varro's, which says that they pronounced /z<2Y in the present, differently from hat in the preterite ; we shall shew hereafter, in the treatise of accents, that this difference was only in the quantity, and not in the sound. And if any body should still doubt of this truth, we might fur- ther produce the authority of antient marbles and inscriptions, v.hich being written according to the simple pronunciation, have - frequently ou for u, not only in long %vords, as loumen, nountios, ' \ S56 NEW METHOD. Book IX. but likewise in the short, as fouom, Jbiio, &c. And Jbtnt for fuit is in Gellius, lib. 1. c. 12. according as we find it in the edition of H. Stephen, esteemed by all the learned. And it is without foundation that Vossius attempts to correct it. Besides, we find that Ausoniu?, speaking of the sound of this Towel, does not make this distinction, but says absolutely, Cecropiis ignota notis,Jerale sonans U. Where mentioning that there is no such sound among the Greeks, he plainly gives to understand that it could not have the sound of it-^iXov; as on the other hand he has sufficiently pointed out the natural sound of this letter by the word Jhrale, whereby he meant the note of the cuckoo, or of the night owl, to which a parasite in Plautus alludeth, where he says, Tu, TU, illic inqiiam, vin' adferri noctuam, QucE TU, TU usque dicattibi? nam nos jam nos usque defessisumus. Which perfectly represents the sound of the U like on, according to the note of that wild and well known bird. And if any body should object that Cicero in his book de Ora- tore takes notice that heretofore they wrote .Phruges and Piirrhus without Greek letters, and therefore that the u on those occasions had the sound of v\)/(/uio solitum tibi ; ytiegue timoris- Argue. Where proinde being only a dissyllable, perfectly expressed the sound of this diphthong, says Vossius. Hence, as in these words where the O was strongest, it has prevailed, and been afterwards changed into U ; in like manner where I was strongest, it has often remained by itself. For from XolSu or xdCu comes libure ; from loiber or leiber comcth liber ; and thereby we see that it is no wonder that the Athenians did not all understand in the same planner this oracle pronounced at Delphi : and that some took ^//>ios for Aoz/xos, aj'ainine instead of the plague. Not that these two words had cntuely the same sound, says Vossius, but because in reality there was very little difference. Chapter VI. Of the nature of I and V consonants. Whether there, are any Triphthongs, or other Diphthongs among the Latins, than those above explained. IN order to explain entirely what relates to the Latin diphthongs, it is necessary for us here to take notice of the 1 and V con- sonants. I. JVhether the I and V xcerc Consonants amo7ig the antients. Scioppius pretends that the I and V were never any thing else but vowels among the Latins, and his principal argument is that in verse we often see them unite into a diphthong, as Jidsset, of two syllables in Lucilius ; piiuita, of three in Horace ; suadety suasit, suetus, and others, of two in Virgil : Suadei enim vesatiajcwies &c. where the u in sua is pronounced in the same manner as in qua. So that according to him the Latins pronounced vinumy vale, just as the Germans pronounce ivin, wal, &c. Hence he believes that in navita, the first syllable was pro- nounced in the same manner as in nauta, because it is only the same word ; and the first in yaw'ior (which we find in Plautus) in the same manner as mjlnttor, the I being lost in those words, merely because it was scarce distinguished in the pronunciation. This may be supported by the authority of Tully, when he shews that there was no great diflerence between caiuicas and cave ne eas. For the E of cave, being hardly distinguished, no more than \njace, dice, and the like imperatives, where it is now entirely disused ; they seem to have said cau-n'eas, for cave ne eas. 11. Whether Or LETTERS, ^x. 263 II. JVhether there are any Triphthongs. Now according to this opinion of Scioppius, we must also admit not only of more diphthongs than are commonly allowed, but of course of triphthongs, as \3M in aqucBy VEA in alvearia, laquearia, &c. Seu lento fuerint alvearia vimine texta, Virg. And we find even by Cornutus, that they were admitted by some of the antients ; for otherwise they would not have given them- selves the trouble to refute this opinion. Besides that Charisius expressly declares in the beginning of his first book, that sylla- A bles may be long either by a single vowel, as A, or by two, as UA, or by three, as \]M. On the contrary Quintihan says, that there are never three vowels in a single syllable, but one of them is changed into a con- sonant. And Terentianus maintains the same thing. Syllabam nee invenimus ex trihus vocalibus. Vossius likewise rejects these triphthongs, insisting that the Ro- mans had at all times the J and V consonants, and founding his opinion on this, that the oriental languages have their vmi and their jorf, which answers to these two letters, as we likewise find that they have been adopted by the French and by other vulgar languages. We read also in Cassiodorus, that according to Cornutus, Varro had taken notice of the V consonant, which he called va or vau, because of its rough sound. Priscian declares the same thing, and confirms it not only from Varro, but likewise from Didymus. And it does not seem at all probable, that the Latins, after following the iEolians in every thing, should not likewise have borrowed their digamma, that is the V consonant which sup- plied its place every where ; pursuant to the same Priscian. This is further corroborated by the figure invented by the em- peror Claudius for this V, which is only an inverted j. Which doubtless he would never have done, had it not been received in the pronunciation. Whence one might infer that the use of this V consonant was greater than that of the I, for otherwise he would have no reason to order a new character for one more than for the other : though they are both marked as consonants in the antients, as in Quintilian, Charisius, Diomedes, Terentianus, Priscian, and others. St. Austin, in his book of the Principles of Logic, observes also as a thing beyond all sort of' doubt, that in these words venter^ xafer, vinum, and the like, where V is a consonant, the sound is strong andjidl. For which reason, says he, we drop it in some words, as amasti, abiit, for amavisti, abivit, &c. in order not to offend the ear. And hence it is, he addeth, that we derive the etymology of the word from vist because sonus verbi, quasi validusy congruit rei quee signijicatur. Which is consonant to the opinion of Plato in his CratyluB, and to that gf the Stoics, who believed there were 264 NEW METHOD. Book IX. were no words, but what could be some way accounted for by the sound of the letters: though Cicero laughs at this opinion, which St. Austin likewise seems to disapprove. But besides these reasons and authorities, Scioppius's opinion is liable still to three or four difficulties, which it will not be easy to solve. The first is, that it destroys the position in verse, where one would think that ad, for example, in adjiivnt could not be long, if the I after the D were not a consonant. And it signifies nothing to say with this author, that the ad is long by the apposition of the diphthong m, which being hard to pronounce, sustains this first syllabic. For if tfiis length of ad proceeded only from the dif- ficulty of pronouncing the second syllable, how comes it that this syllable itselfvvas not long, since according to him it lasted longer in pronouncing ? And how came it to give to the first syllable a length of time and quantity by sustaining it, when it was neither long, nor sustained itself? But if the length of one syllable might be owing to the fullness of the next, how comes it that the first in Adaiicliis, is not rather long, since the second is so full and so hard to pronounce, as to be long both by nature and position ? The second objection that may be made against him, and which depends on the first, is, that if the j was a vowel in ah Jove, ad- Juvat, and the like, it would be a diphthong with the next vowel, and therefore would lengthen that syllable, whereas it is short. To which it signifies nothing to answer, that all diphthongs are not long by nature, because the first in giieror, and the second in aqua, sanguis, and the like, are not such. For it may be said, I think, that those syllables are not real diphthongs ; the nature of the diphthongs, as we have already shewn, being to have a double sound, whereas that of the U was always to become a liquid after these two consonants, Q and G ; as in agua, sanguis, &c. and even frequently after 8, as in suavis, suetiis, suudet, and the like, whose genuine pronunciation is to be only of two sylliil)les. And then the U was lost, and slippe.£i^iov, vermis from tX/ix/v?, or FtA/iAdiy, a toorm, &c. And by the same analogy of 7ijger they have made nigellus, of umbra, umbel/a, and such like diminutives. They used also to say conjiacuit for conjraciiit, Varr. Parilia for Palilia, Festus ; just as we say Alvernia for Arvernia, Auvergne. But the R was put also for D, as Priscian observeth, Arvocatos for advocntos ; arverna for adverna. And in like mar>ner meridies for medidies, taken from media dies, &c. And the R was likewise changed into S, as we shall shew hereafter. The M hath a very obscure sound, and is pronounced on the edge of the lips, whence it was called mugientem litteram. It was often dropped in prose, as it is still in verse. Restittituiri, in the civil law, instead of restituUim iri. Sake for saltern. Vet. Gloss. On the contrary the N was called tinniens, because it had a clearer and neater sound, the tongue reaching the palate of the mouth, as Nigidius and Terentianus observe. Which sheweth that it was pronounced in Manlins the same as in an, in menses the same as in en, &c. Though sometimes it lost great part of its force in particular v.ords, and helped to form a simple sound between it and g, as we shall more particularly take notice in the 9th chap. num. 7. Scaliger in his book de emend, temp, observes, that the Chal- deans frequently changed nun into lamed; Nabo7iassar, Nabolassar ; Nabonidus, Lahonidus. It was also customary with the Greeks to change the n into I, saying for instance, XeV«? for vfVw, from whence we have lepus : 'nXiviJ.uv for itnv[j.uv, from whence we have pulmo : MeixXtor for Manlius, See. But sometimes they dropped the n entirely, as 'OfTi7o-/o?, for Hortensius : which made Lambinus imagine, that the real name of this Roman orator was Hortesius, contrary to the authority of antient copies and inscriptions. Besides, we find by * a mul- Of letters, <^c. 267 a multitude of other examples, that it was usual with the Greeks to drop the n, when it happened not to be final, as TaWla Na^- Qiovrjatx, AaySavtxria, 'ij-wav/a Ta^ycuviriTla in geographers and histo- rians, for Gdllui Narboiieiisis, Lugdiineiisis, Hispania TaraconetisiSf 'Ova\ris for Vate/is, &c. KXriiJ^-ns, Kj^o-xr?, Uoi^yiq, for Clemens, Cres- cens, Pudeus, in the New Testament and elsewhere. This letter is also sometimes lost in Latin, as when of abscindo is formed abscidi in the preterite. We likewise meet with abscidit for ocnoTtpLvti, in the present, V. Gloss. Hence they used to write coss. to signify consides, as Quintilian observeSh by cutting otF the n. But very often this omission of the 7i can be attributed to no other cause but the ignorance of transcribers and sculptors, when we find in the antients, for example, Clemeti for dementi^ cojiix for conjiix, meses for menses, &c. Because as the small stroke^ that are put over the vowels to mark the long ones a, e, o, have been sometimes taken by the ignorant for tittles that made n and m, as we have already observed ; so on other occasions, where they af- terwards really signified those same letters, they were omitted by those vvhi) believed that they were only marks of quantity. And that is what deceived Lambiuus in the word Hortcsiiis, as we have seen but just now. Quintilian says that the m was frequently at the end of words in Latin, but never in Greek, and that the Greeks changed it then into n, because the n had a more agreeable sound, though it was rare in Latin to see words ending with this letter. Hereby we see that it is an error to pretend that in Greek the n ouglit to be pronounced like an m before ^, w, or /* ; since at the end of words it would be a barbarism, according to Ramus, to say To» ^lov, as if it were torn bion, rw ixi^ilx, as if tern meriday and the like. But N had also an affinity with R, as dirus and hivos, Juria from in tlie word obtiuuit, bat the ear could distinguish only a p, optinuit. Ilcnce we iind by antient inscriptions, and by the old glossaries, that these two letters were often confounded, npsens for abseiis, optimns for nbfimus, 2}leps for plcbs, poplicus for pub- ticiiSy and such like. Hence we have still remaining 5?/:/;;)o?io for sub' pono, oppo?io for obpojw, &c. And several nations frequently pro- nounce one of these letters for the other, as the Germans, who say, ponum vinum for bonuin, aiid the like. The Greeks also used frequently to change these two letters, one for the other; and Plutarch takes notice that it was customary for the inhabitants of Delphi to say, ^ocnh for 'nat.rBiy, l2ixfo¥ for tt/x^ok^ &c. And hence it comes that whenever an S followeth, we change the b into p. Scribo, scripsi, just as the Greeks say, Xsi^u, ^ei'-^u, Sec. for the B, according to Priscian, is never suffered to precede the S in any syllable. But this is not so general as this author imagined, since we still meet with absis and absinthium, for the Greek words a4/ recedit lenis S^ hebes sonus. Hence Tuliy rallies a Greek, who instead of Fundnniits, said *?/«- r/a//2W5, that is a /; with an aspiration, P-hundariius. Nevertheless, upon the decline of the language, these two letters used to be put for one another, as may be seen by the old glossaries, yo/ozx for •phalanx^ and in like maiM)er,Jl/os(iphHt,Jh/erce, &c. The V, that is the V consonant, had a f'uller sound, but less rough than we now give it, by which we make it border very near upon the F. Jt had more of ihe^. German W, mnurn, wine ; concerning wliich see what hath been already said, c. 6. And hence the Greeks frequently changed it into qv, Varus, Oii«fof, &c. III. Be- Of letters, ^^0. 269 III. Relation bettveen the V and the Digamma. This V supplied the place of the iEolic Digamma, which was so called because it had the figure of two ramwas, one upon ano- ther, thus, F. But we are particularly to observe that the digam- ma was not pronounced so strong as we now pronounce the V con- sonant, for which reason it produced no position inverse, as we shall shew hereafter. Hence Joseph Scaliger, in his notes on Eusebius, hath extremely well observed this difference between the digamma and the V consonant, that after the digamma is dropped, the word still subsists, as F«xi»», Ixhv, u Fov, wov : whereas the V is necessary to form the word, as vulgus, volo, vado, which would be destroyed, were we to say only zilgus, olo, ado, &c. IV. Other Relation betxveen V and B. This V consonant had likewise a great relation to B, for which reason in words derived from the Greek, one is often taken for the other, as /S/w, vivo ; ^Ix, vis ; ^ovXoj, volo ; j3«/vw, venio ; ^aS»^&/, vaio ;*i3o3-xw, vescor ; ^oii, vox; 0v^oi, vorax ; ^sQxw, vo- veo. For we have already taken notice that e was frequently changed into o, and di into e. Hence it comes that the Greeks sometimes rendered by a /3 the Latin words that begin with a V, ^xXti^b for valere, because, as they no longer used the digamma, they had nothing that came nearer to it ; especially since the B began akeady to degenerate from its natural sound, which is that of 0. This is a further proof, says Lipsius, that this V was not sounded in the present manner, because otherwise the Greeks would as naturally have attempted to express it by

. For they used to say bruges for fruges, as Cicero takes notice; of ^^i(A.u they ma.de J'remo, of $x(Tx.oi.>os Jasciniim, o{ ^h9Q;,_fundum, &c. And on the contrary they used to say sijilare for sibilate, whence also comes the French word siffier ; they said af vubis for ab vobis ; and thence we have still remaining, suffero for subfera, sujfficit for subficit, suffasio for subj'usio, and others. Whereas the Macedonians, as Plutarch informs us, said Bi^ivjrot for tXt7nTov, and such like ; and according to Fcstus we say album for a.X(po¥, a kind of white itch; from a/Afw coiiieth umbo ; and the rest in the like manner. VI. Other relations of B orFtoM, and of V to F or PH. As the letter M hath a very obscure sound, and is almost as labial as B and P, hence it is often changed into one of these two letters; as globus, a globe; glomus, a bottom, or clew of thread: Submitt'), summillo, (/.eXXitv, JEo\. /Se'XXe/k, ttxQovo-x, JEo\. (AxdoDo-tx, •vermis from e^ttw, somnus from i/Trvoj, polluo from iji.i?<.vvu, /x,(XKvXer, uEo\. TrinKvXoi, whence the Italians have taken picolo, little. Again, as P hath a relation to B, and B to F, so P hath also a relation to F, as Jido from 97£;9a/ persuadeo, figo from •nt'iyu. And it has likewise a relation to PH, either because originally this PH is no more than an aspiration added to the sound of P. or because in process of time this PH was pronounced like an F, which, as we have just now observed, has an affinity with P. Thus trophccum comes from rqciixm, romplicca from fo^)T»)y we make gubernator, of y.Kios gloria, of egi actum, of nee otium, negotium, &c. And Quintilian observes, that in Gains, Grteius, they did not distinguish whether it was a C or a G. Hence it is that of centum they formed quadringenta, quingenta, septingenta, &c. Of porricere (which is still used in regard to sa- crifices) they mdiAe porrigere, and the like. It is supposed that the letter G was not invented till after the first Punic war, because we always find a C instead of G on the column called Rostrata, which was raised at that time in honour of Duilius the consul, and is still to be seen in the capitol at Rome, asMAcisxRATOs, leciones, pucnando,copias Carta- ciNiENSis. Which is impossible to account for, unless we take the C in the same sound as K. And it is observable that Suidas, speaking of the crescent which the senators wore upon their shoes, calls it TO 'Pw^a^/.ov x.tx'jt'Ka,, plainly shewing thereby, that the C and K passed for the same thing ; since indeed there was no difference between them in the sound. For whereas at present we greatly soften the C before E and I, pronouncing Cicero nearly as if it was Sisero, they on the contrary pronounced it in this and in all other words, the same as in caput and in corpus. Vol. II. T I say 274 NEW METHOD. Book IX. I say the same of G, which always retained the same sound. For whereas we have greatly softened it before e and i, pro- nouncing it in rtcris and retre, as in the French word recent and tegir ; they on the contrary pronounced it every where as in rego. Hence St. Austin saitli, Ciim dico lege, in his duabus syllabisy aliud Gr(scus, (dind Lalimis intelligit ; giving us to understand, that the Latins pronounced the g as strong iu lege, as the Greeks in xiyt, and that these two words had in his time but one and the same sound. V. Relation bttzveen G and J consonant. The soft pronunciation which we give to G, is likewise the cause of its having a great relation to the sound with which we pronounce J consonant, when followed by an E or an I. For we sound regi like rejicio, and rege like pejero, and so for the rest. But this soft pronunciation of the G is lost, when it happens to be followed by an a, o, or ji, as regat, rego, regum, whereas we al- ways preserve it with the J consonant, asjacio, major and mnjus, &c. And if we should be asked whether this J consonant had really this same pronunciation among the antients, we refer to what has been above mentioned, chap. 6. p. 262. VI. Whether the antients p7'o?ioiinced Gn in the manner the French do at present. Another question may arise, whether the Romans pronounced the G before n, in the same manner as the Italians do at present, and as the French pronounce it in these words, Agnez, magnifique, Espagnol, &c. In all probability they did not, but pronounced the G in agnuSf as in agger, for this other pronunciation being so particular, and differing so greatly from the usual sound of the G, the antients would not have failed to take notice of it. It is moreover observable that the G is sounded so very little in these words Agjiez and the like, that it serves only to denote the liquid N, as the same G in Italian is a sign of the liquid L, Jigliola, daughter. Hence it is that the Spaniards do not use the g at all on those occasions, but are satisfied with putting a small tittle over the n, to signify its being a liquid, and that it receives this pronunciation, writing senor, and pronouncing segnor. And for this reason also Ramus, in his French grammar, useth a par- ticular mark for this liquid n in French, without putting a g, but only a small comma under the n. VII. That there is still a middle sound between G and N, which is neither i7itirely one nor the other, and has given the Greeks occasion to change Ninto T before y, Another difficulty may here arise, to know whether the N is changed into r on certain occasions among the Greeks, as in «ty;«AOf, Or LETTERS, <^x. Q75 elyftXot, oly^io-x, uyxv^x, &c. and whether the r be then pro- nounced as an N. For it seems, says H. Stephen, to be a mistake of the transcribers, who lengthened the v a h'ttle too much in the ligatures of the small letters, and made a y of it. Hence in MSS; in capitals, such as those he made use of in corapiling his The- saurus, we find those words intire with an N, ANl EAOS, and the like. Besides, Joseph Scaliger, in his notes on Eusebius, quotes, from au antient inscription, ANKYPA for oiyxv^x. And indeed, addeth H. Stephen, it seems ridiculous to say tljat this N should be changed into r, for no other end but that the r should at the same time be pronounced like an N. But in answer to this, we do not say it is pronounced like a Greek N, but as a vulgar n ; or, to speak more properly, with a middle sound between the N and the G, according to Victorinus, contemporary with Donatus, St. Jerome's master, who acknow- ledges this change of letters, and this pronunciation among the Greeks. Which made Scaliger say, that if we sometimes meet with an N, this must be rather deemed an error of the tran- scribers, who imagined they should express this sound better by this letter, whereas, according to Vossius, it seems rather to re- quire a new character. And the Latins had something like it in their language, which Nigidius, as Gellius observeth, used to call ^ false N, as in aiiguis, ancora, increpat, ingenuus, and others : In his enim non venim N, sed adidterinum ponitiir, these are his words, Nam si ea litter a esset^lin- fua palatum tangeret. For which reason Varro, according to 'risciSn, lib. 1. takes notice that Attius and the antients used to put two gg on this occasion; like the Greeks, writing aggidus, aggens, aggenint, and the like. Chapter X. Of the third class of Mutes, which are D a?7d T. THE letter D is only a diminution of T, as G is of C, even according to Quintilian. This seems to favour those who in Greek do pronounce the r like a S after a v, saying ma-ttx as if it were7r«>S«; Xe'ovto? as if it were >,'ia'»lo^\ a softening that perhaps may be admitted, though it is not a fault to pronounce it otherwise. But even in Latin it is very certain that there is a great relation between those two letters, in consequence of which they are often changed one for the other, as at for ad; which made Quintilian laugh at those who scrupled to write them in- differently ; set for sed, haut for havd, and others in the writings of the antients : Quit for quid, adque for atque, &c. in inscriptions and elsewhere. The French write voit with a t, though it comes from videt with a d. And whenever the d is at the end of a word, and the T 2 next 276 NEW METHOD. Book IX. next begins with a vowel or an h without being aspirated, they pronounce it hke a t, and say, for example, grant esprit, grant homme, though they write grand esprit, grand humme. Which shews that in French we ought always to lean harder upon the final con- sonants when the next word begins with a vowel, than in any other place. In every other respect the French have almost intirely preserved the sound of those two letters, except in the T, which is in great measure softened, when joined with an i, before another vowel, where it is sounded almost like the s of the antients, prununtio, as if it were pronunsio. Whereas they pronounced it in lUium, vitiuni, &c. all the same as in ///?5, vitis ; of which nobody can entertain the least doubt, becaase this soft sound is taken notice of by none of the antients, and moreover because it is a constant maxim, that no consonant hath two different sounds, either among the Latins or among the Greeks, this privilege, as Lipsius observes, being reserved for the vowels. True it is that we have a fragment of one Papirius a gram- marian, which mentions that the ti before another vowel was pronounced like tzi, justitia like justitzia. But besides that this ■pronunciation does not intirely establish our's, this very author excepts, among others, those words in which an i comes imme- diately after ti, as olii, &c. Which shews that this pronunciation was introduced only by degrees, and in proportion as the Latin was corrupted by the mixture of foreign languages. Hence also it is, that in the old glossaries we find eciam for etiam : and in Festus, Murtia Deu or Murcia (the goddess of sloth) according t« {he observations of Scaliger. Chapter XI. Of the Hissing Letters. UNDER the name of hissing letters we include the S, and the double letters which are resolved by S. I. Of the letter S. S is called a hissing letter, because of its sound. It has been variously received among the antients, some having intirely re- jected it, while others affected to introduce it every where, Pindar calls it )clQnXoti. adulterinnin, and has avoided it in almost all his poems. Quintilian says it is harsh, and makes a disagreeable sound in the connexion of words. For which reason it was often in- tirely rejected, dignu\ oninibu\ and the like in Plautus, Terence, and elsewhere. In some Latin authors it was also changed into T, in imitation of the Attics, as mertare, pullare, aggretus, fojr vier- sare, pulsare, aggressus, &c. Others, on the contrary, affected to introduce it every where, Casmoence for Canicence, dmmosce for dumoscv, &c. And Quintilian takes Of letters, ^c' 277 takes notice that in Cicero's time, and afterwards, they frequently doubled it in the middle of vvords, caussa, divissiones, &c. Be that as it may, there is no doubt of its being harsh if it be too hissing, or too often repeated; which obliged the French to soften it in such a manner, that when it happens to be in the middle of two vowels, they pronounce it like an Z, sa3'ing mizere, and not missere. And this soft sound they have introduced into Latin words, pronouncing miseria, like the French word misere, though the Romans always sounded their S in the same manner as in seria, and the like. This letter had an affinity with R, which is the reason of there being so many nouns in ER and IS, as vomer and vomis, ciner and cinis, voiiicer and volucrisy saluber and salubris, pulver and pulvis, and many others, where we must also suppose the change of E into I, of which we have taken notice above. Others are in OS and in OR ; labos and labor, honos and honor, &c. The Attics were also used to put the o- for ^, ai^a-nv for ufp-nv, masculus ; ^m^aaXios for ^xppxKios, midax, &c. Thus from rvqaK^ comes turris; from IVw (of which they made taoyLxt) era; from v^iaov, porrum ; irom xiXm, celer, and the like. And so from jFk- £ius, Furius ; Valesius, Valerius, Sec. But S had likewise a relation to D, as appears even by the Z, which includes both these letters, as we shall demonstrate in the following numbers ; by the increase of several Greek and Latin nouns, clarnis, clamydis, for clamis, ys ; lapis, lapidis, &c. (whereto we may refer litis, ditis, militis, and the like, because of the above-mentioned affinity between D and T) by the compounding particles, assumo for adsumo ; by the Greek and Latin verbs, a'Jw, canOyoiTu; lu do, lust, &c. and, in fine, by divers particular words, as from edit comes est, he eats, by Syncope, for esit, II. Of the Double Letters. The double letters always include the S, and therefore in great measure partake of its hissing. The Greeks have three, Z, S, t; but the Latins have only two, X and Z ; which is the case of most of the vulgar lan- guages. The X is equivalent to cs, as dux for dues, for which reason it makes ducis in the genitive ; and likewise to gs, as rex for regs, (notwithstanding what Vossius says) for which reason it makes regis in the genitive. For since G and C have so great an affinity, as we have already observed, and since they are so frequently changed one for the other, as negligo for nee lego, there is a very strong probability that the same double letter is also capable of expressing them both. This X was sometimes put with a C, as vicxit, juncxit, and sometimes with an S, as cappadoxs, conjuxs, &c. S. Isidore takes notice that it did not obtain before the reign of Augustus, and Victorinus informs us that Nigidius would never make use of it. The Z had a softer sound than X, for which reason Quintilian calls it mollissimum 8f suavissimum. Yet this is not the same sound 278 NEW METHOD. Book IX. as we give it at present, which is only a moiety of the S. Beside this ft had something of the D, but with a very soft pronunciation ; Meze)itius, as if Medsentms ; Zethiis, as if Dsethus, &c. Hence it is that the Dorians changed this letter into SD, whe- tlier in the beginning of a word, as clvyos for ^vyos, or in the middle, as a-t/p/VJw for av^l^u. Not that the ^ was equivalent to a-o, as Vossius remarks in the first book of his gramm;ir ; but by reason of a kind of tran'«position or Metathesis; both Flaccus and Longus observing, that as the X began with a C, in like manner the Z outjht to bejrin with D ; so that all the double letters end with S. Yet Erasmus and Ramus pretend the contrary, and Sex- tus Empiricus endeavours to prpve against the torrent of gramma- rians, that ^ was as much equivalent to o-S as to la. Be that as it may, the /Eolians also changed the t ii>to ^, as l^aQaXKstv for ^lacSocf^Xeiv, calumniari ; from whence they took ^uZoXoe for diabolos, which we meet with in S. Cyprian and S. Hilary ; and which Erasmus renders delntorem or calunnnatorem, and Budeus ad- >versariiim, and is the usual woid by which S. Paulinys distinguishes the evil spirit. The Latins likewise have frequently changed this ^ into D, and sometimes into S, taking odor, from ol^eiv, and from /:a«i^», massa ; from zjxr^t'^u, pntrisso, &c. The Z had also the like affinity with G. Hence it is, as Sca- liger observeth, that when the modern Greeks would express the month called Gimnadi, they write ^(«//.a^/, and to express a Per- sian or a foreigner by the word Agiami, they write 'a^«/x/. This •was even customary among the antients, as Capella observeth. Z, says this author, a Gra'cis venit, licet etiam ipsi prima G Grceca vtebatdur ; tmm TETTM dicebatd, nunc ZETUM dicimus. The Latins also of ^iZyos have made jugum, of (mi^ov, niajtis, and the like, where the ; consonant had nearly the same sound as g. The Italians, to express the J consonant, prefix a G, and pronounce it like dg ; they write Giacomo, but pronounce Dgiaconw for Jacomo, James. And it is observable likewise in French, that they who cannot pronounce the G, or the J consonant before e and i, (be- cause these letters require to be sounded with a kind of hissing) pronounce exactly a Z, as when they say, le zibet, du zinzembre, dex zettons, ze ne sgai, zirai la, instead of gibet, du gingembre, des jettons, Sec. By all these relations we find it is no wonder that the Z, which in Greek ought to characterise the fourth conjugation, because it is the fourth consonant of their alphabet, is also changed into two a- in the present ; that is, that the verbs of this conjugation ter- minate in ^u or (7crw. We find likewise why some take now and then a S, and others now and then a y, for the characteristic of their second aorist. This is intirely owing to the affinity betwixt the t, and those other two letters; which may be observed in a single word ; for what the Latins call viridarium^ the Italians call verzieri, andthe French un verger* Of letters, ^c, 279 Chapter XII. Of the aspiration H. GRammarians ai'e in doubt whether H ought to be ranked among the letters or not, because they say it is only an aspiration. We acknowledge that H is only an aspiration, but we add that it is a real letter nevertheless, because every character instituted by mankind, to apprize us of some change in the pronunciation, ought to be deemed a real letter, especially where it has a place in the alphabet among the rest, as we see that H has. And in- deed it is very ridiculous to imagine that H is not a real letter, because of its being only an aspiration, since we see that the oriental languages have three or four letters which they call gut- turals, to express only the different aspirations. The H supplies in Latin the rough breathings and the aspirate consonants of the Greeks ; and thus it has two general uses ; the 1. before vowels in the beginning of syllables, as in honor, hcedusy prehendo ; the 2. after consonants, as in thronus, Rhodus, johilosophuSf charitas, I. Of H before Vowels. With regard to the former use the French have greatly changed the pronunciation of this letter in Latin words, and preserved it onl}' in some French words. For in Latin they hardly pronounce it at all, as in honor, homo, humor ; and in French it is entirely lost in t)iese very words, honneur, homme, humeur ; and in inpst words borrowed from the Latin or the Greek, pronouncing them as if there were no H, but merely onnerir, umeur, omme, &c. Now it 'is beyond all doubt that this was not the Roman way of pronouncing, but that they sounded the H with as strong an aspiration as it is sounded in words purely French, such as la har- diessCf la halcbarde, la hauteur , &c. And perhaps they gave it even a stronger aspiration. This appears by two clear and irrefragable authorities. The 1. of St. Austin, who, complaining to the Supreme Being that man- - kind were more diligent observers of the rules of grammar than of his divine laws, mentions that they were so exact in this pro- nunciation ; Ut qui ilia sonorum Vetera placita teneat, ant doceat, says he, si contra discipliyiam Grammaticam, sine aspiratiotie primd syllabce, Ominem dixerit, magis displiceat hominibus, qumn si contra tuaprcBcepta hominem oderit, c/im sit homo. Conf. I. c. 18. The second authority is of Catullus, who rallies a person for introducing the letter h into every word. For the raillery is not because he pronounced the h in a different manner from others, but because, as the h had something of a harsh sound, he offended the ear by putting it where it ought not to be. Chona- 280 N E W M E T H O D. Book IX. Chommoda dicebat, si quando commoda vellet Dicere, 8^- hinsidias Arrius, visidias : jEi turn mirijice sperabat se ase locutum, Cum quantum poterat dixernt hinsidias. Credo, sic mater, sic liber avunculus ejus, Sic maternus avus dixrrat atque avia. Hoc misso in Syriam, rcquierant omnibus aures, Audibant eadem liccc ieniter Sf leviter. Nee sibi pod ilia metuebant talia verba : Cum subito affertur nuntius horribilis, luniosjluctus postquam ilhic Arrius isset. Jam non lonios esse, sed Hionios. Carm. ^5. Here a person may ask in what manner this H ought to be pra* nounced, when it is before words beginning with an i aspirated in Greek, as Hieronymus, Hierusnlem, &c. One would think that, since I is never a consonant in the CJreek language, and that even the Latins, as already ha»:h been observed, gave it a softer sound than we, this I ought always to pass for a vowel, though with the aspiration, and that we ought to say Hieronymum, Hieru- salcm, &c. just as Arrius said Hionios, when he wanted to aspirate the I of lonios ; and since even the modern Jews pronounce tlieir Jod in this manner. Yet the practice is various upon this head, some pronouncing it as a vowel, while others give it the whole force of a J consonant, as if it were Geronimus, just as the French always say Gerome, Gcrusalem, &c. wherein we must conform to the custom of vulgar languages. II. Of H after Consonants. In regard to H after consonants, Cicero de Oratore observes that the antients did not make use of it, and that they only put it after vowels, which made him inclined to say pulcros, triunipos, Cartaginem, &c. But that at length having reserved the specu- lation of these things to himself, he had fallen in with the custom of the people in regard to the practical part and to pronunciation ; however that they still continued to say Orcinos, Matones, Otones, Ctrpiones, sepulcra, coronas, lucrymas, without H, because this gave no offence to the ear. Quintilian moreover affirms that the antients used frequently to drop it before vowels, saying ccdos, ircos, &c. whereas in his time they were fallen into the opposite excess, saying, c/ioro7ia, prcschonesp and the like. But we must consider the language, as it was in its purity. . Therefore as this H after consonants was introduced into the Latin tongue merely to supply the Greek aspirates, it seems as if it ought to be put only after the four consonants, C, P, T, R ; though this happens (at least in regard to the three last) only ia Greek or foreign words. in. Of Of letters, ^c. 281 III. Of the pronunciation of C¥L. CH is pronounced differently in Latin and in French. For in Latin it is always pronounced like a K, making no difference with the C, except before the vowels E and I, or the diphthong, ce, o?, before which the C is pronounced like an antient S, as already hath been observed ; whereas the CH always preserves its sound of K ; Achilles and Achates being pronounced in the same manner. But in French the genuine sound of CH before all vowels, is that which obtains in char, cher, chiche, chose, chu, chou. For which reason, though we have retained this h with the other con- sonants in words derived from the Greek, which begin with an aspirate, yet one would imagine it ought to be omitted with the C, as in caractere, colere, Bacciis, and such other words, to prevent the mistakes of the unlearned, who being unacquainted with the derivation of those words, might pronounce cha instead of ca, cho instead of co, and chus instead o^ cus. And this is the opinion of Mons. de Vaugelas in his remarks on the French tongue, to which we refer the reader. And indeed there is the greatest probability that both the Greeks and Romans were strangers to this pronunciation, since it is so particular to the French tongue, that the Italians, in order to ex- press it, write sci, as sciolere, sciaractere, &c. Though it is very certain that the Greek X and the Ch of the Latins were pro- nounced differently from the Greek y.airTtx and the Latin K or C before any vowel whatever, that is, by giving it a strong aspi- ration : for otherwise Catullus could not have censured a man for saying chommoda instead of commoda, as we have seen in the epi- gram above quoted. IV. Of the pronunciation of ^H. The same may be said in regard to Ph : for we pronounce it like F, saying philosopkie, as if it were Jilosophie. Whereas the antients pronounced it almost like a P with an aspiration, p-hi- losop-hia, or rather yhilosofhia, since it partook, as it still does par- take, of the nature of y in its aspiration, and yet had not the same sound as it; as appears by the above quoted testimony of Cicero, who otherwise would not have laughed at a Greek for giving the sound of 4> to F, pronouncing Fundanius at if it were Sundanius, that is Fhundanius. V. Of TH and RH. In regard to Th in theatrum, thesaurus, and Ilk in Rhodus and the like, the H is hardly perceived in the modern pronunciation of the Latin, though there is no doubt but it was distinguished by the antients, and in the Greek these aspirations are to be ob- served. VI. From 282 NEW METHOD. Cook IX. VI. From whence the Latins bo?Torved this aspiration H. The Latins borrowed their H from riic Greek Ht«, as the Greeks had borrowed it of the Phoenicians, and these of the Syrians, who formerly said Ihia instead of Helh. Which evidently shews that we ought to pronounce Eta in Greek, and not Ila. But at first this H was used only as an aspiration ; for which reason they wrote HEPOAO for '^u^ov, HOAOI for loZ, HEKATON for £x«Tov, ceniicm ; whence it conies that the H formerly signified a hundred, as the first letter of that word, pursuant to the observa- tion of Longus, Scaurus, and Friscian. They likewise used to put the II with the weak consonants, in- stead of the aspirates, which were not invented till some time after by Palamedes ; so that they wrote THE02 for QEOS and the like, VII. Of' some relations between the H and the JEoUc iliga?nma, -which at length was changed into V co?i' sonant, and into p. But it is further observable, according to S. Isidorus, whom Cheke and Vossius have followed, that from the H arose the mark of breathings ; for splitting it in two, at first they made F for the rough bicathing, and j for the smooth, which were after- wards rounded, in order to give to the former the following mark <, and to the latter that of a comma. This is further con- firmed by antient editions, and among others by Aldus's Hesy- chius, where the different breathings of the Greek words are marked by these two moieties of the H, namely I" and .j. And if we examine strictly, we shall find that from the former moiety was taken our small h, where they only lengthened tlie second instead of a transverse line. And to this same reason it is owing, that the C in vulgar languages was sometimes no more than a mark of aspiration, or of a stronger sound, as we still see in Clo' inire, which is the same as Loiaire ; in Clovis^ which is the same as Lovis or Loiiys and the like. But as this mark of aspiration was not rounded in the begin- ning, perhaps it was owing to this that the digamma F, which represented nearly the first half of an H, hath oftentimes passed for a rough breathing, as appears in FtXtn for IaeV^j, Fe/^^h? for iJ^^'cu, &'C. And neither this digavima, nor the Attic H made any position in verse, as Friscian observeth ; which the Romans have followed, their h having no power to render a syllable long by position. The mutual affinity between these two letters is the reason that even in Latin they have been frequently put for one another ;y^- dum for hccduyn,fircum for Inrciim^foriolum for hariolum, Jbsttm for thostem, heminas forjemiuas, hebris ior febris, and the like. But this digamma used also, though not so often, to be put for a soft breathing, as F/XAo? for Jxxo?, strabus, squint-eyed. It was customary likewise to insert it in the middle of words, to prevent the hiatus or concurrence of vowels, as lYus for 'Ls, from whence comes Of letters, S^c. 283 comes owV, JFov for Joy, from whence ovum. Where we see also that the V consonant has ever supphed the place of this digamma. It is owing to all these relations that the rough breathing, the H, the digamma, and the V consonant, are oftentimes con- founded and interchanged for one another. For example, of 'Enrol or Ytnrol the Latins have made Hetieti or Veneti. In the same manner from 'Er/« or Fsj-Za cometh Vesta ; from la^iis or YnT^its, vestis ; from e^^ , l^, or F^^ , ver ; from lifii^x or Via-ni^Xy vespera } and so for the rest. But sometimes this digamma, or this rough breathing, is changed into &, as Passerat sheweth in his treatise of letters ; ^p-nru^ for f-!iru^, ^^olos for folos. Which particularly obtained among the Cretans, who said IZov or uQiov for oxium, and the like, always putting a /3 instead of the digamma ; whence perhaps ariseth the mistake of pronouncing fi like a V consonant. Now these, as well as most of the preceding variations, are proper to be observed, not only in order to discover the origin and derivation of words, but likewise to understand divers obscure passages, to correct such as have been corrupted, and to decipher the antient manuscripts. Therefore to facilitate the use of them, I have subjoined the following table, where the most considerable of these variations will appear immediately at a single glance; though I did not intend to include them all, but only the most necessary. And here you are to observe, that when I shew that one letter may be put for another, as E for K, fociem for Jaciamf this means that we may generally conclude vice versa, as A for E, inars for mers, baiare for belare ; and the same may be said of others which I mentioned above, though 1 havenot inserted them in this table ; having been satisfied, for the sake of brevity, with taking notice only of the most usual and most remarkable manner of writiqg. TABLE Of the manner of writing of the Antients. Id O c CO C3 W O o Pi O PS w z -95 w K r e o (0 V0W£L, as 5 / Consonant, s o Both, a* ^^A Syllable, as Vowel, < Consonant, V In Qua- lity, in the change of Vowel, as Eidera /or idem. Le'item for litem, Ubei, &,e. Maiia, Caiius, eiius, /ur Maia, Caius, &c. Jous/or jus. Souo, quicuonqu ; /or suo,quiciinqj Juus /or jus. Arbitratuu, luuit,/orarbitratu,luil. Vicxit, juncxit, /or vixit, junxit, ice. '^ Quotiens /or quoties. Exsigunt,exsercere. Amasso/oramaso.o/amijro. Quips /or quis. Obstendit/or ostendit. Stlis/or lis. Tuad/r tua. Plebed, marid, estod. Leibertated /or libertate. < Postidca/or postea. Indotestato /or intestate. Fenus /or foenus. Popli /or popoli. Adicito,subice,reice; for Adjicito.subjice, rejice, Osa /or ossa. Clase, jusit; for classe, jussit. Acera/or acerra. Telex /or pellex. A. Faciem /or faciam, &c. I. Leber, Menerva, praesentebos ; for praesentibus. E. Versus, voster ; for Versus, vester. V. Servos, volnus/or Servus. Dicont/or dicunt. AV. Coda/or Cauda ; plostrum/or plauslrum, &c. OEanrfOI,/orV. Coerare,/or curare. Oilier, oitiJe./or utier, utile. &c. Consonant, as E. Dicundo, faciundo, ferundo ; for dicendo, I. Optumus, Maxumus, jestumare. O. Adulescens, epistula ; for adolescens, ice. Y. ^guptus, Sulla, Surius ; for iEgyptus, &c. P. Obtimus/or optimus. G. Cenas, lece, lecio ; for Genas, lege, legio. L. Fidius, dingua; for Filius, lingua. R. Fedetrius /or feretrius. B. Af virod/or ab viro. Sifilus/or sibilus. D. Delicat /or dedicat. R. Conflacuit for confracuit. C. Pequnia/or pecunia. D. Arlabi, arfinis; for Adiabi, adfinis. D. Assum, asveisa ; for Adsum, adverta. R. Asa, casmen, minose; /or Ara, carmen, minorc. J). Alexanter, Cassantra, Set for sed. Quit/or quid. B. Vobem /or bovem. They have also frequently preserved the final letters of prepositions in com- pound words without changing them, Inlustris, atiectus, Conlega, &c. 5 Ausom /or aurum. Exfociont /or efifugiunt. Prodigos /or prod i- r Adecito/or adicito. Addeictos for addictus. Continoeis for continuis. Dei- \cundo/or dicendo. Endo/or in. Fasis /or farris. Fousiosos/or furiosus. Max- In both < sumo /or maximo. Oloi /or illi. Poplosjfor populus. Poplei /or populi. Pra;. I i seted /or prffsente. Proxsumos /or proximus. Sopera /or supra. Faxsitybr ^ ^fecerit. Rupsit/er ruperit. Jousit, jousus, /or Jussit, &c. I Both, as Of orthography. 285 Chapter XIH. Of the genuine Orthography to be observed at present, SUCH was the manner of writing that obtained among the antients. But as custom has departed in many things from that antiquity, we must see which is the genuine orthography, to be observed at present in the use of the Latin tongue. Orthography may be known either by reason, or by authority. By Reason, when we consider the analogy of the language and the origin of words : thus we have shewn in the Preterites, vol. 1. p. 257. that sumo makes sumsi and not sumpsi. Thus we know that gratia is written with a T, because it comes from gratus ; and that audacia on the contrary is written with a C, be- cause it comes from audax, acis. And we learn that delicice ought to be writ with a C, because it comes from delicatus ; that we ought to write vindico, and not vendico, as it is in most books, be- cause we say vindicice, and they both come from rindex. To reason also we ought to refer the distinction which we find between certain words, as between ara and harny between abeo and habeo, and the like. By Authority, when we follow the manner of writing most usual in good authors, as when we write caiissa, caussce, because thus we find it in antient inscriptions, in Cicero, Virgil, and Quintilian. But as there are many words, concerning which the learned are divided, and others that are written two different ways, for instance, neglego or negligo, Jieri or here, we shall therefore subjoin an orthographical list of the best authority. List of some particular words, whose orthography may be depended upon. AF.Rius and iErHERius ought to be Arcesso is better than accerso, be- wiitten with an i in the penul- cause it comes from arcio, compounded tima, according to Aldus ; and the of ar for ad, and of cio, to call. For antient copies favour it, as also the the r used to be put for d, as we shall Greek analogy asjio?, aiSegioj. Yet see presently. This verb hath been we may write them with an E, as already taken notice of in the Pre- well because we find it thus written terites. There are some who dis- in some antient copies, as because tinguish between these two words, as they are more consonant to the Latin Charisius, Diomedes, and Agroetius, analogy, which says, igneus, malleus, who pretend that accerso is taken for &c. to bring or la call i and arcesso for to Anachorita is commonly written accuse, to appeal, or to repel. But Ter. with an i, and thus we find it in St. Scaurus and Veljus Longus reject this Jerom and in Calepine. Yet it would distinction, affirming that whichever be better with an E, because it does way it be written, it preserves the not come from avayui^i^ai , recedere facio, same signification, and is never taken but from ava;;^ajjE»), recedo. for arcere, to repel, or keep of. And Appur.Eius, see lower down, Sail. therefore it ought to be wrote according Apsis or Absis, see the Heteroclites. to its real derivation. Artus 285 NEW METHOD, Book IX. Artus occurs in aiitient manuscripts for Arctus, close, narrozo, though wc cannot condemn the latter, which was first introduced for the sake of dislin- guishing it from arlus, a joint. AucTOR. When it comes from cm- geo, there is no sort of doubt but it ought to take a 0, as audor patrimo- nii : or auct'ir, an auctioneer (seethe Preterites, vol* 1. p. 2^4.) But when it is taken for the person who begins, or is the author of a thing, then there issomedoubt. Theantient inscriptions and MSS. make use of C even in this sen'^e ; which Vossius \n his Etymolo- gist approves of. And others give also this reas(in, that it is then, quasi Actor. But in French we ought always to write it without either C or H. Auteur, AUTORITE, &C. Bf.niV'iius occurs in antient wri- ters for Benevolus And reason seems to confirm it, because the E is fre- quently changed into I in roniposition. Benivolus, says Beda in his Orthogra- phy, and malivolus, malificus, just as of pace is formed pacificus. BuciNA was said for Boccina, ac- cording to St. Isidorus. And thus we find it in antient MSS. and inscrip- tions. CfliSTiJS and Cestus, which a great many confound, (lught to be distin- guished, accordinir to Serviu-. For the latter is feminine, and siirnifies the waist of a new married wonian, or of Venus, and comes from x^vteTV, pun- gere, because it was marked with little points. But the firmer is masculine, signifying the arms of fencers, and comes from C(E(Io. Sin ciuilo fidit pugnattt commitlere cfPslu, Virg. C/ETERA, because it is said for 5 tTi^a., though we find It with a simple e in old MSS. and inscriptions. Cecjdi, and not CiEctoi, • with (p, thounh it ronies from cadu, because the a" is what is dKimrt-d into i long, and the first syllable is only an auument. See the Preterites, v. 1 . p 1 12. CtBLUM, because it comes from xoTxov, tavum. CoEPi, to signify J A«pe 6cg«rt, from the old verb caepio. For cpi comet h from cnpto. See the Preterites, rule 28, vol. 1. p. 210. CoNviciuM ought to be written with a C and not with a T in tlie pe- nultima, either bi^cause it comes from vkus, according to F«-stus, or because it is said fur canvocium, according to Labeo, by reason it is only a confusion of sonn.;ht ever to be wrote, having the authority of antient MSS. Edepol and not Oedepcl, as some pretend who derive it from ab cede Pol- lucii, but it is compounded of three words, me, dens, Pollux, sup. adjiivet. Therefore edepol is for medipol, in the same manner as we still say ecnstor or mecaslor, for me Castur, sup. udjuvet. which are forwis of swearing in use among the antients. " F.pHEBiuM or Ephebeum, is the ge- nuine writing; as in (Ireek tilvanus, JEneas Silvius, Rhea Silvia, Which is proved by the autho- rity of antient MSS. and even by the Greeks, who in translating these words write, 2iXuttvo?, Zi'xua?, 2iX0»a, as may be seen in Strabo, Plutarch, Suidas, and others. SoLEMNE, rather than solenne, as it is written by those who derive it from s'llus and annus, Tor the antient MSS. have solemne, and Sanctius is strongly for this orthography, because, as Festus observeth, it comes from the old word soUus, which in the Os- cian language signified totus, whence also Cometh Sullers, according to the same author. So that the word solemne does not properly signify what is done every year, as they pretend, but what is done commonly and usually, or principally and chiefly j with a so- lemn and extraordinary apparatus, and even with a particular sense of reli- gion, as much as to say o'Xoc was never admitted into Latin words, and ought to be used only in those of Greek original. SUBOLES is better than snbules, not only because we find it written thus in antient copies, but because it comes from su bole SCO, SuBsicivA, or SuBSECivA, and not succissiva. For which we have the au- thority of the best MSS. and of the antient inscriptions ; and it is likewise agreeable to analogy, because it does not come from surcido, but from subseco, according to Vossius. T/ETEB, Of LETTERS, ^c, 289 Tjeter, and not Uter, according to logy favours it, for in Greek we say the antient copies. tjottaiov, though most moderns now Thus or Tus. See the Genders, vol. write Troph«um. i. p. 20. ViNEA and Tinea, are always written ToFOs, and not Tophus, because it ia with an e in the penultima, though not of Greek original. Ursinus mentions his having seen them Trop£Um, as we find it in antient somewhere with an i. MSS. and inscriptions : and the ana- Chapter XIV. Of some other Remarks on Orthography. I. Of Words that ought to begin with Capitals. TH E Romans had no other letters but capitals. But since small letters have been introduced, it is proper to observe, where the capitals ought to be placed. Words beginning with a capital are therefore; I. Proper names, as, Moses, Homerus, Cicero, Roma, and evea adjectives formed of those words, as Mosaicus, Homericus, CicerO' nianus, Romanus, &c. Our Saviour's name is likewise wrote often in capitals out of jespect, Jesus Christus. II. Nouns that in some measure supply the place of a proper name ; as Dominus for Christ. Fo'eta for Virgil. As also those of arts and dignities, as Rhetorica, Astrologin, Rex, Dux, &c. Those of festivals, Fnscha. In short, all those that are intended to be any way remarkable or to make a figure in discourse. But you must avoid using too many. III. Words that begin a new period. Yet when the period is very short, you may be satisfied with a small letter, as we shall shew hereafter. IV. The beginning of every verse ought also to be distinguished by a capital. II. Of those Words which the Romans expressed by a few letters only. The Romans generally expressed their proper names by a few letters orily. Some by a single letter, as A for Aulus.: others by two, as CN for Cnceus : others by three, as MAN for Manliiis^ and the like, which may be seen in the pi-eceding book of Particular Observations, chap. 1. n. 1. p. 227. The inverted letters signified the proper names of women, as j^ for Marcia, 3 for Caia, as already hath been mentioned, p. 229. but 3 likewise stood for the syllable con, as ojux for conjiix, oliberta for conliberta, &c. F by itself made Filtus, N. Nepos, M. F. or M. N. Marci Jilius, Marci nepos, and so for the rest. Q. sometimes stands for Quintus, sometimes for Qmestor, and sometimes for Qtiirites, ac- cording to Diomedes. Vol. II. U P. C. ^90 NEW METHOD. Book IX. P. C. makes Pafrcs Comcripti, R. P. Respublica, P. R. Pupulus Jiomamis, S. P. Q. R. Seiiafits Popidiisque Romanus, S. C. Sctiatns ConsuUtim, Cos. Consul. Coss. ConsuleSt H. Sestertius, a small - sesterce. See what has been said in the preceding book of Ob- servations, chap. 3. p. 235. When the same letter is repeated, it frequently is a mark of the superlative ; thus B. B. is as if it were twice beve, bene, and for optime, or even for boni, boni, that is, optimi. In like manner F. F. s\gn\^es Jo)tissi7m, or Jclicissimi, P. P. piissimi, L. L. ttben- tissime ; or locus laudabilis, a lemarkable passage in a book, says Valerius Probus, as the Greeks used to put a ;^ to signify ^^-nrov or Xfio-'/Aov, and on the contrary a to signify things which they thought worthy of censure or blame. M. M. merilissbno, ot maluSf mains, that is pessiijius. III. Of the right manner of putting Syllables together. I. When a consonant happens to be between two vowels, it must always be put with the last, as a-tnor, le-go, &c. II. If the same consonant be doubled, the first shall belong to the former syllable, and the second to the latter, as au-nus, flam-ma. III. Consonants that cannot be joined together at the beginning of a word, generally speaking, are not joined together in the middle, as ar-duas, por-cus. Though there are some examples of the contrary in Greek, as Ix^^'os, liostis. IV. But consonants that may be joined together in the be- ginning of a word, ought also to be joined in the middle without parting them. And Ramus pretends that to act otherwise is com- mitting a barbarism. Therefore we ought to join bd. he-bdomas,^ '^bdellium. cm. Pyra-cmon, xyAXsO^x, tabes. en. te-chna, Cneus. ct. do-ctus, Ctesiphon. gn. a-gnus, gnatus. mn. o-mnis, JVInemosyne. p/i^/i.na-phtha, phthisis. ps. scri-psi, psittacus. pt. a-ptus, sb. Le-sbia, ) because tve say ( Ptolema^us. so. pi-scis. scamnum. sm. Co-smus, smaragdus. sp. a-sper, spes. sq. te-squa, squamma. St. pa-stor. sto. tl. A-tlas, Tlepolemus. tm. La-tmius, Tmolus. in. iE-tna, ^ ^vni<7xw. Exception to this Rule. Words compounded of prepositions are an exception to this rule, since in these we must ever separate the compounding parti- cle, as in-erSf ab-esse, abs-triisus, ab-domenf dis-cors, &c. And Of punctuation. 291 And the same judgment we ought to form of other compounds, asjuris-consultus, alter-uter, amphis-bcena, et-etiim, &.c. IV. Of some Other paiHicular Mm^ks. When a vowel is dropped at the end of a word, we put over it a small comma, called apostrophe, as egon', ain*, viden*, Jiostin*^ &c. for egone, aisiie, videsne, nostine. And this figure, though rare among the Latins, is very common in French and in Greek. When we want to separate one vowel from another, we put two points over them, as aeniy to show that they must not be pro- nounced tsra ; iii a dissyllable, to show that it must not be pro- nounced vi in one syllable, as in Ovid. Ne temere in mediis dissoluantur aquis : where the verse would be good for nothing, were we to read dis- solvantiir in four syllables. When we want to draw two words into one, we put a small line between them, as in Virgil nnte-malorum. This is what the an- tients called vip' h, unitio. And its figure is sometimes thus~. Chapter XV, Of Punctuation. THE manner of pointing, that is, of making stops or pauses in discourse, seeraeth arbitrary, and to differ in some mea- sure according to the idiom in which a person writes, and evea according to the particular turn of style which lie has formed : yet since it has some foundatii n in reason, we shall mintion what is most observable in regard to this subject, according to the practice now established among n)ost of the learned. I. Of Three Sorts of Dist'mctiois. The distinction observed in discourse, either in speaking or writing, is threefold. The first is only a light breathing, or a short pause, which seems designed only to sustain tl)e voice, and to avoid obscurity and confusion: this is called xo/x/ixa, in Tully incisiim. that h, fragment, or a part cut off, and is marked by a small c inverted thus ( , ) which we call comma or virgida. The Greeks give it another name, t-Tror^y/u.*), and the Latins subdistmclio, for a reason we shall mention hereafter. The other is a longer pause, that takes in a greater part of the , sentence, but still leaves the mind in suspense, and in expectation of what follows. This is called /iae3-», media, whence comes the French word mediation, or y.Z\ov, viembriim : and it is marked with two points thus ( : ) Bat this pause is subdivided, as we shall show presently, the one which is the complete member, being marked with two points ; and the other with a point and a virgula, which some call a semicolon. u 2 The 292 NEW METHOD. Book IX. The third is that which finishes and renders the sentence en- tirely perfect ; it is called period, and is marked with a single point at the erid of the last word, thus ( . ). The Latins call it ambitus^ or circuitus ; and the Greeks Tt>.nx rixo<;, tTot-na-ts, ti^uXov, Sec. (where the penultima is long) only because the accent is on the antepe- nultima. This has been particularly the practice of ecclesiastic "Writers, who neither in this respect, nor in whatever relates to poetry, have been so exact, as to serve f»r any rule to go by. Thus in the hymn to the Holy Ghost, the word I'aracletus hath the penultima short, though in Greek it be written with an «, TIoc^cckXvtos, consolator, which has been owing entirely to the ac- cent on the antepenultima. And thence proceeds the error of those who in the Church service have generally wrote Pajoclitus with an ?', into which they were also led by the bad pronunciation of those who sound »> like i, though to say the truth, this word is neither Greek nor Latin. The third is that the Romans have sometimes appropriated the Greek words to themselves in such a manner, as to render them entirely conformable to the analogy of their own language. Thus they said crepidas, the penultima short, as it came from crepiturrif Of QUANTITY. 301 erepition, whereas according to Gellius it comes from x.fviTi^ac. And in Enoius we find Hectorem long, because he looked upon it in the same manner as pc^ore???, and the like. But there are still some words whose quantity is disputed, which it will be more proper to throw into a separate list at the end of this treatise, in order to proceed to other rules. llULE IV. Of a Vowel long by Position. A voivel is long, zohen followed by two consonants. Examples. A vowel is long, whenever it is followed by two consonants, or by a double letter equivalent to two consonants, which is called Position; as at plus, Deum cole. Carmen, sapiens, &c. Now the double letters are X, 7L, as aa:is, Gazay ape .v. ANNOTATION. For a syllable to be long by position, there must be at least one of the consonants in the very syllable lengthened. For if they are both in the next, this does not, generally speaking, make it long ; ■dsjrigurej'rondes ; cequora Xo'xes ; scepe stilum vertaSy &c. Yet it sometimes happens otherwise, as Ferte citiferrum, date tela, scandite muros, Virg. Which Catullus and Martial seem particularly to have affected, as it is very common in Greek. Rule V. Of a Mute and Liquid.] 1. Whenever a mute is followed by a liquid in the same syllable, the preceding short vowel becomes common in verse; 2. JBw^ remains short in prose. Examples. What has been hitherto said, relates to that sort of position, which they call firm and unchangeable. But there is still another called weak and change- able, which is when after one of these seven letters B, C, D, F, G. P, T, distinguished by the name of mutes, because they have only a kind of obscure sound, there follows one of these two, L or R, which are called liquids or gliding letters. For in that case the 302 NEW METHOD. Book X. •the preceding vonfcI, which by nature is short, be- comes common in verse; that is, it may be put either long; or short ; as Et primo similis yo\ucn, mo.v *vera volucris, Otuh Nov ttnthrds prqjhrt, Fhccbusfugatinck tenebras, Id. Omne solum Jorti patria est, mihi patria cceluyn. The same may be said of re//o, replco, poplcs, locu- pks, and the like. 2. But in prose this position of a mute and liquid, never lengthens a syllable by nature short ; therefore it would be wrong to say for example, lociiples, tene- hrce, the accent on the penultima, when it should be on the antepenultima. ANNOTATION. These liquids have also the same force in Greek words, as Cij- clops, Pharetra. But besides L and R, this language hath the liquids INI and N ; as Tecmessa, Ci/gnus, Progne, &c. The position is weakened in Greek, when the vowel is followed by vin, or qd, or pt, whence INIartial took the liberty to make the second short in smaragdus, lib. 5. epigram. 11. SardoiiJ/chas, smaragdos, adamantns, iaspidas uno. But we are to take particular notice of two conditions necessary for this weak and changeable position. The 1. the mute and liquid must be both in the same syllable. The 2. the syllabic we want to make common in verse, namely that immediately preceding these letters, must be short by nature. Hence the first syllable in ^obruo will be ever long, and not com- mon, because the first condition is wanting, the br not being in the same syllable, for it comes from ob and ruo j the same may be said of obtucor, quamobrcrtiy &c. Again, the first is ever long in acris, ntri, watr'ts, fratris, for want of the second condition, because they come from rtt^r, nter, mater,frater, whose first syllable is long by nature. ^We must say the same of ambidacnim, candelabrum, dclubrum, lavacrum, simula- crum, salubre, volutabnim, which arc long by nature, a circum- stance that has not been always attended to by Christian poets. Vossius further observeth that this kind of position of mute and liquid is so weak, that we ought not easily to make use of it, for the purpose of lengthening a syllable short by nature, without having some antient authority ; and he adds for example, that he would not choose to make the penultima long in gcnihix. Now the weakness of this sort of position is owing to the in- equality of two consonants, because the liquid gliding away much nimbler than the mute, to which it is joined in the pronunciation, it drags the mute in some measure along with it, or produces an inequality, in consequence whereof the preceding syllable is not sufficiently sustained, as it is when there happen to be two other consonants. Of QUANTITY. 303 consonants, for instance astra, or even two liquids, as terra ; for •then there is no inequality in the consonants : or when the liquid is before, as ars, alius, for in that case it is sustained by the fol- lowing mute : or in sliort when they are in a different syllable, as abluo, for then the liquid does not draw the mute after it with such force. This the autionts must have perceived in the pronun- ciation, though we are hardly sensible of it at present. JVfietJier 1 he sometimes a Double Letter ^ and V some' times a Liquid, To the double letters by us mentioned, grammarians add like- wise the I, when it happens to be between two vowels, because, say they, it tlien makes the preceding vowel long by position, as inajo/f rejicioy aio,. But this error hath been sufficiently refuted in the treatise of Letters, chap. 6. num. 2. p. 26^, where we proved that the first syllable in those words was not long by position, but by nature, and because the antients pronounced it as a diphthong. For otherwise, the vowel before / must be ever short, as we see in set7iijncens,jurejurando, antejacit, bijii^us, and others. They say likewise that the V after Q is a liquid consonant, be- cause otherwise the first in aqua and the like words, would be long. But we have also given an answer to this in the same treatise, chap. 6. n. 2. p. 264-. Hitherto we have been upon the general rules, we must novr come to such as are particular, and first of all mention a word concerning derivatives and compounds, because they relate to middle syllables. OF DERIVATIVE WORDS. WE shall content ourselves with giving an Annotation in regard to derivatives, because it is very difficult to lay down any general rules about the matter. Yet we may observe that in ge- neral they follow the nature of their primitive. Thus antmare and animosus have the two first short, because they come from animnx, whose two first are short also. And on the contrary the two first in natnralis are long, because it comes from nTitura where they are long also; and the first syllable of this word is long, because it comes from riFitimi. . Thus the second is short in vircnneus and sanrriiineus, because of Its bemg short m virgini and sangiiini. The penultima is long m aratrum, ambulacruni, volutabrum, because it is the same in arti'.umj ambulatum, volutatum : but the first is common in Izquidu.it because sometimes it is derived from llqueo, the first short ; and at other times from the verb liquor, which hath its first syllable long, when of the third conjugation. For although we say Itquatur the first short, we likewise say liquitur the first long : but the noun liquor, oris, liquor, hath always the first short. Exceptmis 304 NEW METHOD. Book X. E.vceptions to the preceding Rule. There are a great many derivatives shout, though their pri- mitives be long ; as dux, ducis, from duco ; dicax from dlco ; sopor from sopio ; sagax from sagio ; ditio from dis, dilis ; Jtdes from J'ldo, thougli Tully derives it from Jhcio, quia id Jit quod dicihir : but there is more analogy in deriving it fromjido, just as in Greek vi'^is comes from ttsI^u, from whence Jido is also derived according to Vossius. Add to these molcstus from moles, and several others which may be learnt by use. There are other derivatives long, though they come from short primitives; as vox, vocis, from voco ; rex, regis, and regida, fvom rego ; tegida from tego ; scdcs i'rom sedeo ; macero from macer ; humor from hi/mus ; humanus from homo ; secius from &ecus ; mals'' dlceidior, the third long from maledicus short, and others which may be learnt by the use of authors. But what is most remarkable on this head, is that the deriva- tives do not follow their primitive, when they drop or add a con- sonant. For as the first in rtttidit is long, because it reduplicates the t, though it comes from rcfero the first short : so the following have the first short, though they come from long primitives, be- cause they lose a consonant, as disertus from dlssero, farina from J^ arris ; ciirulis from ciirro, ofella from qffa ; mamilla from mamma ; tigillum from lignum ; sigillum from slgnum ; and the like. There are even some that do not follow the analogy of their nearest primitive, but of another more distant, as y^1^«ws the first short, which does not foWow J ari the first long, but (paw, from whence cometh (p^j/x*, dico : as lUcerna the first short, which does not follow the quantity of lux, but of t?)? Aux^?, whence lux itself ' is derived by contraction instead of lucis : as vadum, the first short, which does not follow the quantity of vado, the first long, but of ^aJw, from whence comes vado as well as ^cz^ti^u : as likewise notot which does not follow the quantity of the supine notum, the first long, but of vow, from whence comes, voio-xw, vuo-ku, y/vwo-xw, and from thence (rnosco or nosco. And so for the rest. OF COMPOUND WORDS. THE quantity of compound words is frequently known by that of the sin)ple, and the quantity of the simple by that of the com- pound, which boys will easily discern, provided they are accus- tomed betimes to the right pronunciation of Latin. For it is the same quantity in lego ^nd per lego, in legi and perlegi. As also in pro/jus and improlms ; in scrlbo and adscribo ; in vcnioy advenio, ad' vena : and the like. ' And this quantity is still preserved, when the vowel comes to change as in elign, seligo, taken from lego : thus from ciido comes iccido ; and from ccedo^ occido : from Iccdo, alltdo, coUldo : from audio, obediu, obedis, &c. But the following are short, though their primitive be long: the compounds of dico ending in dicus ; as causidtcus, veridicusy &c. Of QUANTITY. 305 Sic. dejero ai\dpejcro, fromjuro .• cognition gnd agnitum, from ywtum, which are shortened by the analqgy of simple polysyllables ia itum ; as taciturn, bibitum, &c. nihilum, from ne and hihim ; innu- ba and prouiiba, from nubo ; but the antepenultima in cunnubmm is common. For in Virgil we find connubia, the antepenultima long : and we likewise find it short in co7i?iubio, conniibiis, unless we chuse to make them trisyllables. Connuhio J ungam stabili, propriamque dicaba, 1 ^n. The second is long in imbedUus, though baculus hath the first short ; and the third is short in semisopitus taken from sopio, the first long. The participle ambitus hath tlie penultima long, contrary to the nature of the supine ambitumy as also of these verbal nouns ambitus and ambitio. Yet Lucretius makes ambitus also short iix the participle; for which reason Scioppius and Vossius look upon it as common, because this word is compounded of ambe and ituSy even according to Varro ; so that when the i is long, it comes from the diphthong ei, ambitus for ambcitus (as we say ambages long, from fl^o short, because it is said for ambcages) ; and when it is short, it conforms to the nature of its supme 2tiim, as the others aditiis, exitus, imtus, obitus, suhitus, which are always short, because they are formed without any appearance of contrac- tion. _ ''''•'■'■■ ■ '■■'■■■' -^ Now ambe comes from a/.vip/, of which was first formed ambi, af- terwards ambe, the (p being changed into b, just as in ambo taken from a/Ai^iw : as may be seen in the Treatise of Letters, p. 270. Rule VI. Of divers Compounding Particles. ' 1. A, DE, SE, DI, are long, when joined to verbs or nouns. 2. Yet DI is short in disertus and diremi, 3. Re is short except in refevlfrom^ the noun res. Examples. ' ' 1. All those particles are long in composition, amitto, deduco, erumpo^ dJripio, separo, and the like. !2. Di is short in these, d^irimo^ diremi^ du^emptum, disertus, dlserti, &c. ANNOTATION. De sometimes preserveth its long quantity before another Towel ; as Deest serxitio plebes hoc ignis egentis, Stat. "Which deserves more to be remarked than followed. For in general it is either made short. Dona dthinc auro gravia, JEn. 3. or it is joined with the following vowel in the same syllable, Deest Jam terrajugce, JEu. 10. Vol. II. X 3. R^ 306 NEW METHOD. Book X. 3. Re is short in composition, as redeo; refero, re- fers ; r^Jert, rcjerre^ to tell or relate. But rcfert, it bthuveth, it concerneth, it is useful, is long, because it does not come from the particle ?'e, but rather from the noun res. PrcEterea nee jam jiiutari pahula refert. Virg. ANNOTATION. The poets, in order to lengthen the particle re in composition, do sometimes reduplicate the following consonant, as retligio, ret- tulit. Though we must not imagine that they did it always, as some pretend, not considering that the chief rule of poetry is the ear, which would be sometimes offended with such reduplications. Hence in revulvo, r evert o, the consonant is never reduplicated^ because it is contrary to the nature of this V, which perhaps at that time was not a consonant. Nor is the consonant repeated in redeo, redoleo, and the like, be- cause the D is only a letter that was borrowed already to prevent the hiatus and meeting of vowels. There are also some other oc- casions on which it is not practised. Rule VII. Of the other Prepositions. 1. The other prepositions arc short except pro. 2. But pro is also short in the following coni' pounds ; profiteor, protervus, proficiscor, procella, procus, profanus, profecto, pro- fundus, pronepos, profari. 5. In the following, pro is doubtful, propello, propulsOj procurro, propago. Examples. 1. The other prepositions being short by nature, are also short in compound words; as adimo, abesf, aperio ; coercuit, cd?nedo, obumbrant, omitto, dnhelat, 'in- offensus, suptresse, subeunt, peragit. We must except /;ro, which is long ; produco, pro- ferOj prbve/io, prdfugio, &c. 2. But in the words mentioned in the rule, pro is short, as pi^dtervus, prhftcto, Sec. and some others which use will shew : as likewise those words where pro is the Greek preposition '^^^o, which signifies ante, i as Of QUANTITY. 507 as propheta, propontis, and the like ; though sometimes the Greek j'j/'O is long, conforming to the Latin ana- logy. 3. In some compounds /;7'o is common, as propello, propubo, prupago, as, a verh; and propago, uiis^ a noun ; procurro, procumbo, profunda^ &c. Rule VIII. Of Words compounded without a Preposition. In compound words A, O, are generally long; and E, I, U, are generally short. But compounds formed by contraction, as also the compounds ofdies,\\bhand ibi, have i long. Examples. In compound words two things may he considered, the former and the latter part. As to the latter part there is very little difficulty about it, because it is ge- nerally just as it would be out of composition. Thus the second in dedecus is short, because it comes from decus, the first short. Abator hath the second long, because it comes from iitor, the first long. But it is more difficult to know the quantity of the former part of the compound. Nevertheless in general it may be said, that these two vowels, A, O, are long; and that these other three E, I, U, are commonly short. But we must inquire into this more particularly. A is long in the former part of the compound, as quare, quapropter, quacunque, quatenus. Yet there are some short, which may be learnt by use, as he.vdmeter, catapidta. E is short, whether in the first syllable, as nefas, tie- fastus,nefandus,nefarius, tredecim, trecenti, netjueo, equi' deni, neque : or in the second, as 'vatedico, madefaciOy tremefacio, according to Virgil (though Lucretius and Catullus make E also long in this sort of words): or in the third, as hujuscemodi, &c. The following are excepted, having the first long, sedecimy nequaniy nequitiOf nequaquam^ nequicquam, ne- X 2 quando^ 308 NEW METHOD. BookX. guando, memet, mecum, tecum, secum. As also these, which have the second loiiii", vetiejicus, videlicet. I is short whether in the first syllable, as Mceps, tri- ceps, bicolor, tricolor, biviiun, trivium, siqiddem : or in the second, as agricola, aliger, artif'ex, caussidicus,J'a' tldicus, onmipotens, totidem, miigenitiis, wiiversus, Sec- We must except those where the I changes in de- clining, as quldam, qutvis, qullibet, quallcumquc, quan-' ttvis, unlcuique, relpubliccE. Those also which come from a contraction, as lli- cet, scilicet, blgce, quadriga;, pi^ldie, postrldie, tiblcen for tibiiceti, &c. The compounds of dies, as bJduum, trlduum, merl- dies ; but quotidie is doubtful. The following have also I long, trlceni, trlcesimuSy slquis, and Idem masculine. As also mmirum, ibidem, ublque, utroblque, ubJvis : but ublcumque is commonly the same as ubi. O is generally long, as alidqui, introduco, quandoque, quandbcumque, utrbbique, and others. We must except however, hodie^ quandbquidem, quoque. Also the compounds of two nouns, as TimoiheuSy sacrosanct us, &c. U is short, whether in the first syllable, as ducenti^ diipondium ; or in the second, as quadrupes, caniujkr, Trojugena. But genuflectOy cornupeta, usuvenit, tisucapit, are still doubtful among grammarians ; though the surest way, in my opinion, is to make u long on those oc- casions, because it is an ablative that remains iutire in its natural state. ANNOTATION. Here we may be asked whether the second is long in paricida j matricida, because we find them long in Ausonius. Ut parlcidae regna adimat JDidio, De Sev. Imp. Matricida Nero proprii vim pertulH ensis. Though in regard to the latter, there are some who read matrh- fuecida Nero, &c. On the contrary we find that paricida is short in Horace. Telegonijuga paricida;, Od. 29. lib. 3. But aspQriaida is a Syncope fox parenticida, being taken not only for Of QUANTITY. 309 for one who kills his father, but likewise for a person that violates the duty he owes to his parents and to his country, we may say that Horace has made it short, merely by considering the dropping of the syllable, and leaving the others in their natural quantity : whereas Ausonius must have considered this word as formed by contraction, and therefore he made it long. — — ■■, , . 1 I. ■■■.>-■■■ .1 - ,.„ I. . _ .._ , — .- ,, „ . .■■■■I ^ ^^ ■ I H I ^1 ■ ,■ , , _ ^^ Of preterites and SUPINES. Rule IX. Of Preterites of Two Syllables. . 1. Treterites of two syllables have the former long, as egi. 2. But the following are short, bibi, fidi, tuli, dedi, steti, scidi. Examples. 1. Preterites of two syllables have the former long, as egi, veni, tudi, mci. 2. Yet the preterites of the following verbs are short; bibo, bibi; findo,j idi ; fero, tuli ; do, dMi; sto, steti ; scindo, scidi. ANNOTATION. Some have been for adding lavi to the above verbs, because of this verse in Virgil. Luminis effossijluidum lavit inde cruorem. < But lavit is there the present tense, as well as lavimus in Hor. lib. 1. sat. 5. coming from lavo, lavis ; hence we meet with lavere, and in the passive Invi, to be •voashed, in Nonius. AbscIdit is long in Lucan, lib. 6. Ille comani Iceva morieuti abscldit ephebo* And in Martial, lib. 4. Abscldit vultus ensis uterque sacros. Which sheweth that this preterite was heretofore doubtful, un- less we choose to say that it comes then from absctdo, compounded of abs and ccedo. But this verb being obsolete, the surest way is to pronounce the above preterite short in prose, ab&cidit. Now this rule of the preterites of two syllables ho'ds also good' fbr the j)Kiral ; farjlerunt,jiarunt, norunt, and the like, have- al- ways the former long. But we findjMver»ji the former short, once in Catullus, Rule X. Of Preterites with a Reduplication. 3 , The two first syllables in preterites that have a reduplication are short, 2, But 310 NEW xMETHOD. Book X. 2. But the second in pepedi, is long, as also in cecidi J rom caedo. Examples. 1. Preterites with a reduplication have the two first syllables short, as dldici from disco; ceci/d from cano; ictigi from tango; cecidi from cade. 2. But pedo hath the second in pepedi long, as also ccedo in cecidi. Qui nullum forte cecldit. Juv. A N N O T A T 1 O N. In regard to the other preterites, if it be a syllable that does not depend on the increase, they follow the quantity of their present, as colo, colui, tlie first short. Except pomi, the first short, from pono, whose former is long. And gcnui, which followed its old verb gtno ; as likewise j^otuif which Cometh from polis sum. Except also divisi, divtsum, the second long, from divido, the second short. But if it be a syllable that depends on the increase, the rules thereofshall be given hereafter. Yet we may observe at present, thfi*^^ all preterites, either of two or more syllables, ending in vi, have ever the penultima long, as arnavi,Jlcvi, quivi, audivi, &c. Rule XI. Of Supines of Two Syllables. 1. All supines of two syllables are long. 2. Except those of eo, reor, sino^ do, ruo, sero, lino. 3. The supines of queo, and sto, are short, 4. The supine of cio is long, and that of cieo is short. E X A M P L E S. 1. Supines of two syllables, as well as preterites, are long ; as notum or notus from nosco ; visum, or wlsus from video ; motum from moveo. 2. But the six following verbs have their supines short ; eo, itum ; reor^ rdtus sum ; sino, situm ; do, da- tum, ruo formerly had riitum, from whence comes di- ri'itum, erutum, obriitum ; sero, sdtum ; lino, litum. 5. These two have also their supines short, queo, qiiitum ; sto, stdtum ; but staturus, though derived from thence, hath the former long. 4. Cio, Of quantity. 311 4. Cio, cis, civi, cllum, cii^e, the former long. CieOj CIS, civi, cltum, the former short. Excltum ?'uit (id f'ortuSf c^' Uttora complent. Virg. Bacckatur quaiis commotis excita sacris. id. ^ ANNOTATION. Of the Supine Statum. It appears that Statum is short by the substantive status, hujus status ; by the adjective status^ a, urn ; and by the verbal noun statin. Hie status in ccelo multos vermansit in annos. Ovid. Mnsa quid a fastis non stata sacra petis ? Id. Catnpm, S^ apricis static gratissinia mergis. Virg. Hence its compounds which change a into i, make this i short in the supine, a$ prcestitum ; hence also the verb statuo, which seems to be derived from this supine, hath the first short. Urhem quam statuo vestra est Virg. Yet the participle stalurus, hath the former long. Tunc res immenso placuit statura labore. Lucan. As also its conipounds. Constatiiray5«V Megalensis purpura centum. Mart. And this made Priscian believe that the former in the supine sta- tum was also long, though what hath been above mentioned, proves the contrary. Nevertheless we may say. I fancy, that it was heretofore common, since we still see in the compounds, that in those which retain the a it is long, though in such as change the a into i, it is short. Non praestata sibi prcestat natura, sed unus, St. Prosper. Whence also it comes that stator is short in Prudentius, and long in Ovid. And statim, which is derived from stando, according to Vossius, is long in Avienus and Alcim. Avitus, but short in Ca- tullus, whose authority is preferable in this respect. Verum si quid ages, siatimjubebot Epigram. 33. CyCiTUM and Scitum. CiTUM is long when it comes from cio, because it follows the fourth conjugation ; as it is short when it comes from cieo^ because it follows the second. But citus signifying quick, lively^ active, is short ; whereas for divisus, it is long : as erctum citum, erctum non citum. See Servius on the 8th book of the -^neis. Scitum is ever long, whether it comes from s^j^ or scisco. Sci- tusy from sciOi signifies handsome, pretty, ivell made, graceful ; Scitus puer, Ter. Coming from scisco, it signifies ordained and decreed^ from whence we have plebiscitum, a decree of the people. Plautus plays with those two words in his Pseud, act. 2. sc. i: Ps. Ecquis is homo scitus est? Ch. Plebiscitum non est scitius. Wliere Larabinus is evidently mistaken, in saying that scitum had the first syllable long in plebiscitum, but that every where else it was short. RUL£ A 312 NEW METHOD. Book X. Rule XII. Of the Supines of Polysyllables. 1. The supines of pohj syllables in UTUM arc long. 2. As are also tJiose in ITUM, when they come from a preterite in IVI. 3. But all others in ITUM are short. Examples. 1. The supines of polysyllables in UTUM are long, as solUtum from solvo, solvi ; indutum, from in- duo, indui; argutum from argiio, argui. 2. The supines in ITUM are also long, when they come from a preterite in IVI ; as qiuesitum from qucE- To, qucEslvi ; cupJtum from cupio, cupivi ; yetitum from peto, petlvi ; audltum from audio, audJvi. 3. The supines in ITUM are short, if they do not come from a preterite in IVI : as taciturn from taceo, tacui ; agnitum from agnosco, agnofi ; cognitum from cognosce, cog7iovi; mouitum from monco, mouiii. But the penultima in recensltum is long, because it Cometh from cemio, cetisivi, and not from ctnseo, ctnsui. Of the increase of VERBS. Rule XIII. The nature of the Increase of Verbs. TVlien the verb hath more syllables in the other tenses than in the second persan present, this is called Increase. Examples. The increase of verbs is ever regulated by the se- cond person present : so that those tenses which do not exceed this person in syllables, have no increase; as a?7ws, amaut ; audis, audit. But those which exceed it by one syllable, are said to have one increase; as amamuSf audllis ; where the second is called an in- crease, Of quantity. 313 crease, because the last is never counted for such. Those which exceed it by two syllables, have two increases ; as amubamus, docebamus. Those which exceed it by three, have three increases, as amavefi- tis, &c. Even the increase of the passive is regulated by the second person of the active ; as amaris, the second is the increase. Amabaris, the second and third are in- creases, measuring them by amas. In regard to verbs common and deponents, we must imagine the second person of the active, and regulate them in the same manner as the rest. Rule XIV. Of the Increase in A. 1. The increase in A is long. 2. ^ut the verb do hath da short. Examples. 1. A is always long in the increase of verbs, as ex- probrare^ stabam, bibdmus, fueramus. The verb DO makes the increase DA short through- out ; as damns, dubwit, ddri, datum, &c. Farthe dabis pcEuas. Likewise in its compounds drcumdamus, circ^mdd- hunt, circumddre, venundd?'e. But every where else it hath A long like the other verbs ; ddbdmus, dabatur. ■ QucE jam for tuna dabatur. Virg. HuLE xy. Of the Increase in E. 1. The increase in E is long, 2. Except in beris, eram, ero, erim. 3. Verbs of the third conjugation have it also short in the first increase of the present and preterimperfect^ where there happens to be an ^ after E. Examples. 1. E in the increase of verbs, is also long, generally speaking, in all conjugations* In 514 NEW METHOD. Book X. In the first : aS"^ amemus, atnaremus ; amave runty amartris vel amarere, dedissemus. In the second, docebam, docercm, docerer, docereris. In the third, degebrnn, legerunt vel legere, kgissemuSy legeris vel legere, legetur, legemur. In the foLirtlij audicris vel audiere, aiidietur ; audi- *verunt vel audlvere, &c. 2. But it is always short in the following syllables, beris, cram, era, erim, through every person, amaberis vel amabere ; ducueram ; potcro, potmro ; kg'ero, lege- ri??i, iigeris, &c. 3. It is moreover short in verbs of the third conju- gation, in the first increase of the present and preter- imperfect, where there happens to be an R after E ; as legeris vel legere, in the present of the indicative passive; legtre in the imperative passive, and the infi- nitive active ; legcrem and legcrer, in the preterim- perfect subjunctive, active and passive. But it is long even in the third, when one of these conditions is wanting ; as if it be in the second in- crease, legereris\e\ Icgerere^ legeretur, preterimperfect passive of the subjunctive. If it be a preterimperfect that has not ah R after E ; as legebmn, legebar, SiC. Or if it be any other tense than a present or a pre- terimperfect, were it even then to have an R after E ; as legerunt vel legere in the preterite ; legeris vel le- gere, legetur in the future indicative. In like manner scjnberis, and laberis, &c. because the b then belongs to the termination of the present, and not of the fu- ture in bor. Scriberis Variofortis ^ hostium. Hor. Sic tibi cumjluclus subterlabere Sicanos. Virg. And the like. VVlierein the third conjugation con- forms to the general rule. ANNOTATION. It seems that the penultima of the third person of the preterite in ERUNT was heretofore short, or at least common, especially in verbs of the third conjugation, and that one might say legenmt, as well as legerunt, legereiit, legtrint, legcro, &c. this analogy being particularly founded on the E followed by an R. Which may be further confirmed by the authority of Diomedes, who, lib. 1. hath these Of quantity. 315 these words, Fere in tertio ordine plcrumque veteres tertia persona jinitiva temporis peifecti, numeri plundis, E mediam vncrdem corri- piunt, quasi legerunt, enihunt, &c. And indeed Virgil does not scruple to make it short, not only in those verbs of the third, but likewise, in others. Matri longa decern tv\en\ntjastidia menses. Eel. 4;. Miscueruntqiie herbas, Sf non innoxia verba. Georg. .'}. Obsticpid, steteruntque co^'k^, S^ voxfaiicibus hcesit. lEn. 2. For thougn some would fain read these passages with the third person plural in erant or erint ; yet, as Pierius observes on the second example, the reading in erunt has been generally received. Besides, other poets have used it in the same manner. Nee cithara, intonscB profueruntve comce. Tibul. AbitKTUS illuc quo priores abierunt. Phoedr. Nee tua defuerunt verba Thakn^se mild. Mart. We might further produce a vast number of authorities, which shew that this is not a licentia poetica, as they call it, but the ancient analogy of the language, and that we could not condejun a per- son that would still chuse to follow it, though it be always better to make those words long, were it for no other reason but that the ear, the chief judge of poetry, is more accustomed to it at present. Rule XVI. Of the Increase in I. 1. The increase in I is generalli/ short, 2. But the first increase in the fourth conjuga- tion is long : 3. As also m velim, sim, malim, nolim. 4. All the preterites in I VI are long , hut they make IMUS short. Examples. 1. The Increase in I, generally speaking, Is short, as In fhe future of the first and second conjugation, amabitis, docelntur. In the present of the third, legimus, labttur, aggre-^ dUur, Even in the fourth, in the 2, 3, and 4 increase, audirnini, audiremmi, audiebamni. But it is long in the first increase of this last con- jugation, which is the most considerable in regard to verse, audJre, mollltur^ sclrent, servJtum, scmus, Ibo, abibo. 3. The following are also long, slmus, vellmus, no- iJmus, malmus, with the other persons, sitis^ velJtis, &c. 4. All S16 NEW METHOD. Book X. 4. All the preterites in IVI are long, aiidJ'vi. Even in the third, pttJvi, quceslvL And they all make IJMUS short in the plural, quce- six^imus. Even in the fourth, audivimus, venimus. Observe therefore, that vemmus long is the present, JVe are a coming ; and Tcfiimus short is the preterite, we are come. And so for the rest. ANNOTATION. In regard to the terminations of the subjunctive RIMUS and RITIS, concerning which there have been such high debates among grammarians ; Diomedes, Probus, and Servius will have it that they are always long in the future, which Vossius seems to favour, though he owns that there are authorities to the contrary, as in Ovid ; Obscurum nisi nox cumjecerit orbem ; Vidcritis, steilas illic uhi, &c. 2. Metara. Again, Ilfcc uhi dixeritis, xervet sua dona rogale. In regard to the preterite the thing seems still more uncertain. Diomedes and Agroetius will have it short; on the contrary Probus pretends it is always long. Hence it plainly appears that those syllables were takeri by the poets sometimes one way and sometimes another, and therefore "JVC may hold them common, since Virgil himself says in the pre- terite, Namque ut stipremamj^aha inter gattdia noctem Egerinius, 7iosti, &c. JEn. 6. For it is too weak an argument to say with Servius, that he wrote thus through necessity, and by a poetic licence ; just as if he who ■was prince of poets, and perfect master of his native language, could not find another word to make the foot suitable to his verse. And, as a proof of what I say, w^e find that RIS is rather short than long in the singular, as we shall shew hereafter when treat- ing of the last syllables ; which ought to be a presumption for the plural. Rule XVII. Of the Increase in O. The increase in O occurs hut seldom, and is always long. Examples. The increase in O occurs in the imperative only, and is always long, as amatote, facitote. Cumque lo(]ui poterit ; matrem hciXoie salutet. Ovid. Ru LE Of quantity. 317 Rule XVIII. Of the Increase in U. The increase in U is short ; but URUS is long, as docturus, lecturus. Examples. The increase in U is short, as su??ius, volumus. Nos numerus sun^us S^Jhtges consumere mtti. Hor. But the participle in IIUS, and tiie future of the infinitive in RUM which is fprmed from thence, are long, doctUrus, kcturm, amaturus, amaturum, &c. iO\\Vy> JHfm — .. : r \ < OF THE INCREASE OF NOUNS. Rule XIX. What is meant by the Increase of Nouns. 1. The increase of nouns is when the genitive. hath more syllables than the nominative. 2. The increase of the genitive always regulates the other cases. Examples. 1. The increase of nouns is when the other caseis have more syllables than the nominative : hence if the genitive does not exceed the nominative in number of syllables, there is no increase, as musa, musce; dominus^ domini : but in the plural, of mu&arum^ dominormn, the penultima is an increase. 2. The genitive ever regulates the increase of the other cases, as sermo, sermonis, sermom, sermouemj ser- md?2e, scrrnoiies, sermdnum, where the d is always long. OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. The first declension has no increase but in the plural, which comes within the rule we shall givelowerdown, after we have gone through the increases of the sin- gular. Rule 318 f^EW METHOD. Book X. Rule XX. Increase of the Secontl Declension. 1. The increase of the second in the singular is short. 2. Except Iber and Celtiber. Examples. 1. Nouns of the second declension have their in- crease short; gener, generi; puer, pueri ; prosper, pro- sptri ; vir, mri ; satur, satiiri. 2. Yet Iber, signifying an inhabitant of Iberia in Asia, or of Spain, makes Iberi long. As also its compound Celtiber. M'lstis hie Colchus Iberis. Claud. Gallorum Celtce, rniscenies nomen Iberis. Lucan. Vir Celtiberis non tacende gentlbus. Mart. ANNOTATION. We say likewise Iberes of the third declension : but then Priscian tlimks it is rather taken for the inhabitants of Iberia towards Col- chis : yet from the above example it appears that Claudian did not use it in this sense ; and the Greeks say "iQv^, "iQ-n^os, to denote both those nations. One would think that this long increase, which has made its way into the second declension contrary to the analogy thereof, was taken from thence. INCREASE OF THE THIRD DE- CLENSION. Rule XXI. Of the Increase of Nouns in L. 1. ALTS neuter is long. 2. A LIS masculine is short. 3. ILIS and ULIS are short, 4. ELIS atid OLIS are long. Examples. 1. The neuter nouns in AL make ALIS long in the genitive, hoc animaL animalis, ^ 2. The Of quantity. 519 2. The masculines make it short; hie Asdrubaly Asdruhalis ; hie Amiibal, Annibalis. . 3. The increase of nouns in IL and UL is also short ; as vigil, vigiiis ; pugil, pugiUs ; consul, consii- lis ; e.vul, e^vidis. 4. Nouns in EL and OL make their increase long, Daniel, Danielis ; sol, solis. Rule XXII. Increase of Nouns in N and O. The increase in 1. ANIS, 2. ENIS, and 3. ONIS, is long. v 4. INIS is short ; 5. except IN, INIS. 6. ONIS either in proper names or gentiles varies. Examples. 1. The increase anis is \on^; Pcean, Paanis; Ti- tan, Titdnis. 2. The increase enis is long; ren, rents; splen, splints ; siren, sirenis. 3. The increase o??is is long; Cicero, Ciceronis; sermo, sermmis ; Plato, Platoitis. 4. The increase inis is short ; homo, hominis ; virgo, virginis ; ordo, ordinis ; carmen, carmmis. 5. Except those in IN which make INIS long; as Delphin, Delphlnis ; Salamin, Inis; Phorcyn, the name of a man, Phorcynis. 6. Proper names in On sometimes make bnis short, as Memnon, Memnbnis ; and sometimes they make it long, as Helicon, Hcliconis, in which respect we must consult the practice of authors. Gentiles for the most part make onis short, as Ma- cedoy dnis ; Sa.ro, Mis : Except Burgundidnes, which is rather looked upon as long. Alvarez adds Eburdnes, and a few others, in respect to which we must be de- termined by custom. With regard to proper names, there is very little certainty about them. Rule S20 NEW METHOD. Book X. Rule XXIII. Of the Increase in ARIS. 1. The increase ARIS in mascuUnes is shorty 2. (Add the neuters, nectaris, jubaris.) 3. But the neuters in AR make ARIS long. Examples. 1. The increase ARIS is always short, if the noun be masculine, as Ccesar, Ccesaris; lar, /aris; mas, ind- ris ; par, paris ; dispar, disparts ; impar, imparls. 2. Tiiese two are also short, though neuters, iiectary nectaris ;Jubar,Jtdmris ; with bacchar, aris, also neu- ter, and the peuuUima short. 3. The other neuters make ARTS, long, as calcar, calcaris ; iaguear, laqueciris; pidvinar, pidvinaris; ex- emplar^ eicmplaris. Rule XXIV. Of the Increase ERIS. 1. The increase in ERIS/Vom ER is short. % Except Iber, crater, Ser. ver, and Reciraer. Examples. 1. Nouns in ER make the increase ERIS short, as career, carceris; mulier, mulieris; cether, (Etherisj aery a^ris. 2. Except the following, which make it long, Ibery Ibdris, a native of Iberia near Colchis. And this noun is also of the second declension. See Rule I9. Crater, eris ; Ser, seris ; the name of a people v.'ho manufactured silk. Velleraque ut foliis depcciant tenuia Seres. Virg. Ver, veris, the spring. Hecimer, eris, in Sidonius, a proper name ; and in short all Greek nouns that have an ri in the increase, u.s poder, nris; spinier, ri?is, &c. Rule XXV. Of the Increase of Nouns in OR. 1. All the mascuUnes in OR make ORIS long, 2. Except Memor. 3. The Of quantity. 321 3. The neuters in OR, 4. as also Greek noims, 5. and arbor, make ORIS short. Examples. 1. Nouns in OR, when of the masculine gender, make their increase long, as timor, timdtis; lepor, le- poris; vigor, vigoris; decor, decoris. — Indulget nata decori. Ovid. 2. Yet memor hath memor'is short, because it is an adjective, and heretofore they used to say membris and hoc memore. 3. If they be neuters, they make ORIS short, marmor, inarmbins ; ceijuor, cequbris ; hoc ador, adbris, 4. Greek nouns in OR have also a short increase. Hector, Hectbris; Nestor, Nestbris , Castor^ oris', rhetor, rhetbris. 5. Arbor hath also arbbris short. Rule XXVI. Increase of Nouns in UR. 1. The increase of nouns in UR is short. 2. Except fur, furls. Examples. 1. Nouns in UR make their increase short ; whe- ther jn OKV^,Si'^femur,fembris; robur, robbris; jecur, jecbris; ebur, ebbris : or in URIS, as murmur, mur- muris ; turtur, turturis ; vultur, vultiiris ; Ligur, Li- guris. 2. Yet/wr makesy}?m, long ; as also trifur, trifuris, ANNOTATION. Hereto we must refer the Greek nouns in YR, as martyr (or martur) martiris, or marturos ; and the like. Rule XXVII. Of the Increase of Nouns in AS. 1. The increase ADIS /rom AS is short, 2. Vasis yVoTTi vas is long. 3. But maris y*row mas is short. Vol. II, . Y Exam- S22 NEW METHOD. Book X. Examples. 1. Nouns in AS make the increase ADIS short; whether they be femi nines, as Pallas^ PaUddis, the goddess Minerva; lampas, ddis, a himp; or whether they be masculines, as Aixas, Arcddis, an Arcadian; 'vas, vddis, bail, or surety. 2. But vas, vas/s, neuter, is long, a vessel. 3. Mas, maris, is short. Rule XXVIII. Of the Increase ATIS. 1, The mcrease ATIS from AS is long, ex* cept anas, anatis. 2. 3iitfrom other nouns ATIS is short. Examples. 1. The increase ATIS is long, when it comes from a noun in AS, as cetas, cttutis', pietas, pieiaiis; dignitas, dignitatis, Except anas, which hath anatis short. 2. The increase ATIS is short, when it comes from other nouns than those in AS, for instance from nouns in A, c£?rigma, cetiigmdtis; dogma, dogmdtis. As also Hepar, hepdtis or hepdtos, short. Rule XXIX. Of the Increase of Nouns in ES. 1. ISfotms in ES make their increase short, 2. Except merccs, quies, locuples, ha^res. 3. A7id Greek nouns which make ETIS. Examples. 1. Nouns in ES make their increase short, as mileSt miUtis ; Ceres, Cer^ris; pes, pedis ; interpres, interpretis; seges, segUis. Likewise prases, prcesidis, and the other derivatives o( sedeo. ^. These are excepted, merces, mercedis ; guies, quietis; locuples, locuphtis ; h(sres, hcsridis, 3, And Of QUANTITY'. 323 3. And Greek nouns which make ETIS, as lebes^ lebetis ; tapes, tapetis ; magnes, magndtis ; Dares, Dare- tis ; and others. ANNOTATION. PrcBs makes also prcedis long, as likewise ces, ceris; but this it by reason of the diphthong. And bes makes hessis long by position. Formerly they used also to say mansuesy ctis, long ; as likewise inquies, etis. But at present we say rather mansuetus, u, inquieiuSf ij where the penultima still remains long, because of their original. Rule XXX. Of the Increase of Nouns in IS. 1. The increase of Nouns in IS is short, 2. Except Quiris, Samnis, glis, lis, Dis. Examples. 1. The increase of nouns in IS is short, as puhiSf pulveris; sanguis, sanguinis; C/iaris,.Charitis, usual in the plural ; Charites, the graces. 2. In the following it is long. Quiris, Quirliis ; Samnis, Samnltis ; glis, glJris ; lis, litis ; Dis, Dltis. Rule XXXI. Of the Increase of Nouns in OS. 1. The increase of nouns in OS is long. 2. Except bos, compos, and impos. Examples. 1. The increase of nouns in OS is long, as os, oris; dos, dotis ; cusfos, custodis ; i2epos, nepotis. Greek nouns in OS have also a long increase, as rhinoceros, otis ; likewise T?^os, Tj^ois ; heros, herois ; Minos, Minois, though followed by a vowel, because in Greek they are written with an w. 3. These are short, bos, bovis; compos, compotis ; impos, impotis. Rule XXXII. Of the Increase of Nouns in US. 1. Noims in US have their increase short, 2. Except the comparatives in US. Y 2 3. And 324 NEW METHOD. Book X. 3' And nouns that make the genitive in URIS, UDIS, and UTIS. 4. But pccus makes pecudis shoj^t ; as intercus, intercutis. Examples. 1. Nouns ending in US have their increase short, as mumis, muncris ; corpus, corporis ; lepus, leporis ; tripus, tripod is ; decus, oris. 2. The comparatives in US make their increase long, as melius, melioris; majus, majoris ; because they borrow it of the masculine, as major, vi'ajdris. Sec. 3. Nouns whose genitive is in URIS, UDIS, or UTIS, make their increase long, as jus, juris; tellus, telluris; incus, incudis; virtus, X)irtutis ; salus, salU- tis, &c. 4. These are excepted, pecus, pecudis, a sheep, a flock; intercus, intercutis, a droj)sy. ANNOTATION. Tills shews, as we have elsewhere observed, that they come rather ^vom pecudis, Jnijiis pecudis ; intercutis, /nijus intercutis, than from pecus or intercus, which in all likelihood would follow the analogy of the other nouns in us, that have utis long. See vol. i. p. S5, 86. and p. 167. col. 2. Ligiiris, the name of a people, is also short ; which shews that it comes rather from Ligiir, as Verepeus has given it, than from Ligus. The names of places in US "of Greek original make UNTIS, and of course are long by position, as O^jms, Onuntis, the name of a town, and such like. Rule XXXIII. The Increase of Nouns ending in S with another Consonant. 1. Nouns ending in S with another consonant make their increase short. 2. Except gryps, Cyclops, hydrops, plebs, and Cercops. Examples. 1. The increase of nouns ending in S, with ano- ther consonant, is short; as ccelebs, ccelibis ; hyems, hy^mis, Dolops, Doldpis ; inops, indpis ; auceps, auchpis ; 2. But Of QUANTITY. 325 2. But these have their increase long; gryps, gry- phis; Cyclops, Cyclopis \ hydrops, h yd topis, whence comes liydrdpicus ; pkbs, plebis ; Cercops, Cercdpis, the name of a people, who for their malice were meta- morphosed into apes, Ovid. Mctam. Rule XXXIV. Of the Noun caput and its compounds. The noun caput and its compoiinds, have a short increase. Examples. Caput, and all its compounds are short in their in- crease through every case singular and plural, capitis^ cap'ite, capita, capMbus ; sinciput, sindpitis ; occiput, occipitis ; anceps, ancipttis ; biceps, bicipitis. Rule XXXV. J" Of the Nouns in X which form their Genitive in GIS. 1. The increase in GIS is short, 2. Except frugis, legis, regis. Examples. • 1. Nouns in X, whose genitive is in GIS, make their increase short, as Allobi'o.v, AUobrbgis ; C07ijuA\ conjiigis ; i^emex, remigis -, Phryx, Phrygis. Q. The following are excepted, Jru.v,Jrugis ; re.r, regis; as also le.v, legis; but its compounds vary ; aquilex, aquilegis, short ; Lelex, Lel^gis, short, Uie name of a people ; exlex, exlegis, an outlaw. Rule XXXVI. Of the Increase of Nouns in AX. 1. The increase ACIS from AX is long. 2. Except abax, smilax, climax, storax, fax. Examples. 1. Nouns in AX make their increase long, as paz, pads ; ferax, feracis ; jornax, fcrnacis. 2. These are excepted, abax, abacis ; smilax, smi- Idcis; a yew tree ; climax j climdcis ; storax or sty rax, styrdcis ; fax, Jdcis. Add 306 NEW METHOD. Book X. Atltl to these Arctophi^la.i\ acisj a heavenly constel- lation, and a few more Greek names. Hulk XXXVII. Of the Increase of Nouns in EX. 1. The increase of noims in EX is shoi't. 2. Except halex, vervex, a7id fex. Examples. 1. All nouns in EX have their increase short, as 9ie.i\ jfecis ; prei^pr'ccis ; Jrut e.v, J ruticis ; verte.v, t'ertlcis. 2. These three excepted, /mle.v, halecis ; ^'ervex-^ vertdcis ; j'ex\jech. ANNOTATION. To tliese some are for adding vibex. But we choose rather to say vihix^ Icis, according as we liave marked it in the genders, vol. i. p. 55. and then it will follow the next rule. Rule XXXVilL Of the Increase of Nouns in IX. 1. JSlounsi?! IX.ICIS, have their increase long; 2. Except filix, pix, vix, larix, calix. eryx, vaiix, fornix, salix ; S. To which add nix, nivis. Examples. 1. Nouns in IX make their increase in ICIS longj as rocILv, rad/cis; Jtlix,Jdlcis\ vie t rid; njicirlcis ; vibuvy *vihlcis. 2. The following are excepted, Jilix^ fdicis ; pix, picis 'y rix, Ticis; in the plural ttces ; larix, laiHcis ; calix, calicis ; eryx, erycis; varix,var1,cis; Jornix,Jor- Tiicis; salix, salicis. 3. iV/cT likewise makes nivis short. Rule XXXIX. Of the Increase OCIS. 1. Nouns in OX make the increase ocis long ; 2. Except praccox, and Cappadox. Examples. . 1. The increase OCIS from nouns in OX is long; as 'iwx, vocis ; Jerox,Jerdcis ; velox, velocis, f Q, These Of quantity. 327 2. These are excepted ; prcEcox^ pracHcis; Cappa- dOiV, Cappadocis, Rule XL. Of the Increase UCIS. 1. The increase UCIS /row UX is short* 2. Except lux and Pollux. Examples. 2. Nouns in UX make their increase UCIS short; as dux, ducis ; redux, reducis ; cru.v, crucis ; ww.r, ?mcis ; truJCy trucis. 2. The following are excepted; lux, liicis; Pollux, Pollucis. Talis AmiclcBi domitiis PollQcis habeiiis. Virg. ANNOTATION. In these latter rules, as in a great many others, we have omitted several words, that are not only more difficult to learn, but likewise less useful, since they occur but seldom, and it will be sufficient to observe them in the use of authors. Such are atrux, atax, colax, panax, Pkarnax, Syphax, which make their increase ACIS short. Such are also cilix^ coxendix, his- trixy natrix, onyx, sardonyx, which shorten LCIS, &c. Of the INCREASE of the other DECLENSIONS. The other two declensions, as well as the first, have no increase, except in the plural. This should be re- ferred to the following rule, which likewise includes the second and third declensions for the increase be- longing to this number. Rule XLI. Of the Increase of the Plural. 1. Ifi the plural increase, I and U are short ; 2. But A, E, O, are long. Examples. The plural increase is when the other cases exceed the nominative plural (which always depends on the genitive singular) in number of syllables. 1. And then it makes I and U short; as sermones, sermombus; *cites, mtibus; maniiSj manimm ; portus, portiium, portubus. 2. But 328 NEW METHOD. Book X. 2. But A, E, O, are long; as musir, miisariim-j res, reriim, rebus; 7nc'dici, medicoriim ; Jwo, duorum. ANNOTATION. Here we are to observe that there is a singular increase even in the plural ; as in this word sermonilms, the second is a singular in- crease, and is long, because it is ruled by the genitive sermonis. But the penultima is a plural increase, because it has more sylla- bles than this same genitive, and therefore belongs to this rule of plurals. The former is long in bubiis as well as in hdbns, because it is only a Syncope for bovibus ; which happens also to bucida for bovi- cula.'^ True it is that Ausonius has made the former short in bubus, considering it as in the singular increase of bos, bovis ; but the au- thority of Horace, Ovid, and Lucretius, is preferable to his. Paterna rum bobus exercel suis, Epod. 2. Non pr()fecturis littora bobus aras, Ovid. OF THE LAST SYLLABLE. Rule XLII. A final. 1. A at the end of words is long ; 2. Except ita, eia, quia, puta; S. But it is sJioi't at the end of nouns; 4. Except the ablative case ; 5. And the vocative of Greek nouns in AS. Examples. 1. A is long at the end of words, as a7?ia, pugna, interea, ultra, meword^ triginta, and the like. 2.V There are four adverbs that have the last short; itd, eid, (juia, puid, for videlicet. Y\di per ipsum ; Scaruk age. Val. Flaccus. //ocputa )ioiijustum est, illudmale ^rectuis isiud. Persius, sat. 4. S. The nouns are short through all their cases end- ing in A, except the ablative. The No?Jim. Forma bomim fragile est. Ovid. The Accus. Hectora donavit Priamo. Ovid. The Vocat. Musa ??uhi caiisas memora. Virg. The Of quantity. 329 The Plural. Dederas promissa parenti. Virg. 4. The ablative is long. Anchora de pior^ jacitur, Virg. 5. The vocative in A of Greek nouns in AS is also long. Quid miserum iEnea laceras ? Virg. But from the other terminations it is short, as we shall see presently. ANNOTATION. Of the Vocative ending in A. The vocative of Greek nouns in ES is short when it ends in A, as Anchisa, Thijesta, Oresta, &c. because then this case can be only of the Latin declension. But these same nouns having E in the vocative, make it long, because this is a Greek case, ^nd fol- lows the Greek declension, which has an ^. The Cohans likewise gave the termination A to a great many nouns that were in AS in the common language, as Mida for Mi- das, Hyla for Hylas, &c. and then their vocative may be short. Hence it is that Virgil in the very same verse has made this last syllable both long and short in the vocative. Clamassent, tit littiis Hyla, Hyla omne sonaret. Eel. 6. Unless we choose to attribute the length of one to the caesura, and the shortness of the other to the position of the next vowel. Of some Adverbs in A. Antea is long in Catullus and Horace: Petti, nihil me, sicid zniea juvat^ Scribere Versiculos. Epod. 11. _ Contra is long in Virgil. \ Contra non ulla est oleis cultura : ncqiie illce. We find it short in Ausonius, and in Manilius, who was his con- temporary. But in regard to the verse, which the Jesuits Alvarez and Ricciolius quote from Valerius Flaccus to authorize this quantity ; Contraque Lethcsi quassare silentia rami ; It proves nothing, because the passage is corrupted, and the right reading is this : Contra Tartareis Colchis spumare venenis, Cunctaque Lethcei quassare silentia rami PSstat. PosTEA an adverb is long, according to G. Fabricius, in his treatise of poetry, as Vossius observeth. Which appears likewise by this iambic of Plautus. Si autoritatem postea defugeris, In Pcenul. act. 1. sc. 1. We might also prove it; to be short by this verse of Ovid, 1. Fast. Postea mirabar cur non sine tilibus esset. But it seems we ought to read it in two words, post ea, as Vossius gays, because being an adverb it is long every where else. POSTILLA 330 NEW METHOD. Book X. PosTiLLA is also long in Enniim and in Propertius, 1. 1. EI. 15. Hi/sipile nuilos postilla sensit amoves. PuTA for videlicet, of which some have doubted, is short, as ap- peareth by Servius on the 2. ^n. where observing that the adverbs in A are reckoned long, he particularly excepts pida and ita. This is further confirmed by the above-quoted verse out of Persius, Hoe putTiy &c. as Priscian likewise quotes it, lib. 15. and as Casaubon declares he found it in MSS. though some editions read ]mto. Witli respect to the passage of Martial, which is quoted from lib. 3. epigram. 29, Esse put a solum, &c. it is plain ihdX pula is there fof cense or crede, and is not then an adverb. Ultra is long in Horace ; Ultra quam satis est virtidem si petat ipsain. In Virgil ; Qtios alios muros qua; jam ultra mcenia habetis f As likewise in Juvenal, Persius, and others. And in vain does Erythraeus quote Serenus to make it short ; Curaque nil prodest, nee ducitur ultra cicatrix, since the best copies have ulla. Of the Nouns in Ginta. The nouns in Ginta are esteemed doubtful by some, because they are found short in the old poets, as in Lucilius, and in those of a later date, as Ausonius, Manilius, and otiiers : but those of the intermediate time, who flourished during the purity of the language, always made them long. Triginta capitumj'cetus enixajacebit. Virg. And the surest way is to follow this quantity. For as to the passages they quote from Martial to prove their being short, Vossius shews that they are corrupted. Rule XLIII. E final. 1. '^ at the end of words is sliort ; 2. But at the end of Greek nouns it is long ; 3. And at the end of nouns of the bth declension; 4. And of ohe, feime, fere : 5. And of all adverbs formed of US. 6. But bene, male, inferne, superne, are short. 7. The imperative of the second conjugation is long : 8. As are also these monosyllables me, ne, sg, t6. E X A i\l P L E s. 1. E is short at the end of words, af> furiosi, utile, partly ille,Jrat?gtre, doccr^, sine, Jtiente, panCj Achilla. . Haud Of quantity. 531 Hand eqwdem sine mente reor^ sine numin^ di-viim Adsumus. Virg. g. Greek nouns are long in whatever case they happen to be, when they are written with an «, accord- ing to what hath been already observed, p. 3g9, as Lethe, Anchisey Cete, Mole, Teiiipe, &c. ANNOTATION. Achilla and Herculc are found sometimes short : Quique tuas pronvusjrerait Achille domos. Propert. But then we may say it is rather according to the Latin declen- sion, than the analogy of the Greek. Which frequently happens to nouns that follow the third declension in Latin. 3. E is long at the end of words of the fifth de- clension ; as, re, die, requie ; also hodie, postridie, an(| the like, taken from dies. Node dieque mum gesture inpectore testem. Juven. Tame is also long, and ought to be placed here, be- cause it is really an ablative of the hfth declension, which came from Jatnes, Jamei, jiisi like plebes, plebei, in Livy and Sallust. 4. These words are long in the last syllable, yerw^?, fere^ ohe. Mobilis i^ varict est ferme natura malorum. Juven. Jamque fere sicco subductce litioyx Jmppes. Virg. Importunus amat laudcui, do?2ec o\iGJam. Hor. 5. Adverbs formed of nouns of the second declen- sion have also E long ; as indigne, pr(2cipue, placide, minimi, swnme, "valde (for valide) sancte, pure, sane, &c. 6. Except beji^ and male, which are short : Nil bene cum facias, fads attamen omnia belle. ]\fart. Inferne and superne ought also to be excepted as short, unless we had authority for the contrary, which is not perhaps to be found. For thus it is in Lucre- tius: Terra superne tremit, magnis concussa ruin'is. Upon which Lambinus says : Millies jam dixiultimam syllabam advcrbii superne, brtvem esse: itaqiie eos err are ^ui hoc loco S^^ similibus legi volant superna, Which neither Desp^uter, nor Alvarez, nor Ricciolius i^five observed. 7. The 332 NEW METHOD. Book X. 7. The imperatives of the second conjugation have also E long, as mone, vide^ habe, doce. The other imperatives are short. Fide and vale are also sometimes short. And cave is but seldom loni;. Vade, vale, cav^ ??e titubes, maiidataque Jrangas. Hor. Idgiie, guod ignoti faciunt, vale dicere saltern. Ovid, 8. Monosyllables make E long, as me^ ne, se, te, ANNOTATION. From this rcHe of monosyllables we must except the enclitics que, ne, ve, and these other particles ce, te, or pte, as Uiquc, hicce, iuapte, &c. because they are joined in such a manner to the other words, that they form but one, and are no longer considered as separate monosyllables. In regard to imperatives as well of this as of the precedent rule^ we may observe with Vossius, that the reason of their being long, is because they are formed by contraction. For ama, he says, comes from amne ; just as the Greeks say «/xa;£, oifAx, mete. And thus doceo should have docee, the last short, of which they have formed by'contraction doce, the last long; just as in Greek we say Joxef, 2oKii. And though there are some imperatives of the second also short, this is because those verbs were heretofore of the second and third conjugation, as some of them are still ; for wc say Jlilgeo, es, and Jtdgo, is ; tergeo, es, and tergo, is, &c. And hence it is that we find respondc and salve short in Martial. Si quando venict ? dicet : responde, poeta Exierat, Lector salve. Taces, dissimidasque r Vale. Idem. Though all these verbs are rather long or short, according to the conjugation in which they have continued. Rule XLIV. I final. . , 1. 1 at the end of words is long. 2. But niihr, tibf, cm, sibf, ubi, ibi, are douhtjid. 4. Nibi and quasi are short ; 4. j4s are also the neuter nominatives, 5. JVith the Greek datives, 6. And Greek vocatives. Examples. 1. I at the end of words is long, as ocull, MercurT, class!. Dum spectant Icesos oculi, ladwitur Ss ipsl, Ovid. 2. The Of QUANTITYr; 333 2. The following have I either long or short, mihif tibi, cm, sibi, ubi, ibi. 3. And these have it short, nisi, quasi. 4. As also the neuters in I or Y, ^py, Moly, gumnii, sinapi, hydromeli, &c. To which we may join these Greek nouns, as Mesorij Payrii, Phaoti^ Phar- miiti, Tyhi, &c. 5. The datives of Greek nouns are also short, as Minu'idi, Palladi, Thetidi, Paridi, Tindarid\ Pkillidi, &c. 6. As also their vocatives, whether in I or Y ; as Adoni, Alexi, Amarilli, Brisei, Cecropi, Chely, Daphm^ Inachh Lycaoni, Pari, PhyUi, Thai, Tyndari, whereto we ought likev/ise to refer all the patronymics in IS, which make IDOS. ANNOTATION. TJti IS long, as also velutl. Namque videbat uti beltantes Pergama circum. Virg. Improvisum aspris veluti qui sentibus anguem. Id. But sicuti is short in Lucretius and elsewhere, and perhaps is not to be found of a different quantity, though grammarians mark it as common. Vtique is short. Ibidem, ubique and ubivis are long, though they come from ibi and ubi common.' Some have fancied them doubtful because of this verse of Horace. Nan ubi vis coramve quibicslibet. In medio qui ; But we must pronounce it in two words ubi vis, or according to others ubi sis. Siciibl, though common, is generally long. Nisi and quasi, which I have marked as short, are reckoned common by some, because there are some authorities for it in tli« latter poets, and in Lucretius, who says: Et devicta quasi coganturferre pattque. But the best authors constantly make them short. Quoque sit nrmento, veri quasi nescia quccri. Ovid. Nihil hie nisi carmina desunt. Virg. As for the Greek nouns, we are to observe that these are some- times found also long, as Oresti, Pijtadi, and the like datives, be- cause this termination is then entirely Latin, those cases in Greek being 'OffV'?, Uvhx^-n, which are of the first declension of simples. Nor can we even shorten the datives that arise from contraction, as Demostheni, Arj/xoo-Sf'vE/, metamorphosi, {juraiyLo^ipua'ii, because this would be contrary to the general rule. And if we would also re- fer Oresti io this rule of contraction, we should find more reason to make it long, because it will come from 'Ofir"; as Sucrati from ZuK^xTSi ; and sq for the rest. Rule 334 NEW METHOD. Book X, Rule XLV. O final. 1. O at the end of words is doubtful : 2. But the datives and ablatives in O are long. 3. in these words is short : imo, duo, scio, mode, cito. 4. In eo it is long ; 5. As also in monosifllahles, 6. And in adverbs derived from nouns. Examples. 1. O at tlie end of words is sometimes long, and sometimes short; as led, quando, nolo. 2. The datives and ablatives in O are lonsr, somno. vento, oaio. Nutritur vento, vento restinguitur ignis. Ovid. 3. O is short in the following words, im'6, duo, scid, and its compound nescio, modo, with its compounds quomodb, dummodd, &c. cito. To which we may add egd, cedd, (for die) il/ico, which are more usually short. 4. Ed is long, and so are its compounds, adeo, ided, Ibit eo, gu6 vis, zonam qui perdidit, inquit. Hon 5. MonosyUables are long, dd,std,prd. Jam jam ejjficaci do manus scientia:. Hor. 6. Adverbs derived from nouns are long, because properly speaking they areonly ablatives, as subitd,me- riio, muUo, falso, primo, eo, vero. Ergo is always long, because it comes from s^yu : but sero is doubtful. ANNOTATION. We find modo long in Catullus. Hue quid putcmiis esse? qui nioclo scurra. Sero being doubtful follows the general rule. For though it is more frequently short, yet we meet with it also long. Hen sero revocatur nmor, SQro(\\.\Q jnventn, Tibul. Hereto some add sedulo, crebro, and mutuu ; but they are more commonly long* Profecto is iilso long, because it is derived from "pro facto, by- changing A into E, according to what has been said, p. 252. Yet we find it also short \x\ Terentianus Maurus. Now the reason why O is not only sometimes long, and some- times short, but also generally common of its nature, is because it answers to these two Greek vowels o and u, in imitation of which the Latins pronounced several of their words. And thence also it Of quantity. 53S it comes that O In Latin is oftener long than short. For in the first place the antients made the verbs almost always long, because in Greek it is an «. And Corradus excepts from this rule no more than scio and nescio^ which Victorinus asserts to have been made short, to distinguish them from the datives and ablatives; scio from scius, whence cometh sciulus ; and nescio from nescius. Vossius however adds cedo for die. Facti crimen habet. Cedo, si conata peregiL Juven. And he shews that thought he most eminent poets make O more usually long in the other verbs, yet those who flourished some- what later, generally made it short: as Martial. Nee volo boletos : ostrea nolo : tace. Secondly, the datives and ablatives are always long for the same reason ; Kufa>, e'fyw, &c. Thirdly, all the other cases which in Greek end with an u, are long in Latin, as Alecto, Echo, Sappho, hujus Atidrogeo, hunc AthOf &c. But those which end with a v after u, are reckoned common in Latin, as nxarwv, Flats ; ^^xKut, draco; though Corradus will still have them to be only long, as indeed Victorinus affirms that they were always reckoned by the antients. Fourthly, the gerunds in DO, according to the same Corradus, and Valerius Probus, ought always to be long. And the reason is because they are only nouns, as we have shewn in the remarks on Syntax, book 6. And though they may be sometimes found short in Tibullus, Juvenal, and Ovid ; yet they are not so ia Virgil, who constantly makes them long. Fifthly, the interjection O is long by nature, because it is an u, O lux DardanicB, spes dfidissima Teucrum, Virg. And if it be ever short, it is merely by position, that is because of the vowel that follows it. Te Coridon 6 Alexi, Idem, which we shall account for hereafter, when we come to speak of the manner of scanning verse. Rule XLVI. U final. Words ending in U are long, as vultu. Examples. V is long at the end of words, *cultu^ cornu, promp- m, FaiithU, Tantum ne pateas "verbis simidator in ipsis E.ffict^ nee vultu destrue diet a tuo. ANNOTATION. Words ending in u are long, because this Latin u was pro- nounced with a full sound, like the French diphthong ou, as we have shewn in the Treatise of Letters, book 9. c. 4. n. 2. p. 255. But those which terminate ia Y (which was pronounced like the French 536 N E W M E T H O D. Book X. French uj, are sliort, Moly, Tiphy, &c. Yet indii, which was used for in, and )ie)iu for non, are short. They are both still to be seen in Lucretius. Rule XLVII. B and C final. 1. B ^^ the end of words is short : 2. C is long. 3. Except nee and donee, which are short ; 4. Except also fac and hic the pronoun, which are doubtful. Examples. 1. B at the end of words is short, as db, bb, sub. puppi sicfatur ab alta. Virg. 2. C is long, as dc, hlc the adverb, hdc, due, sic. Sic oculos, sic ille manus^ sic ora ferebat. Virg. 3. These two are short, ??ec, dome : Donee erisfelix, multos numerabis amicos. Ovid. 4. The following are doubtful ; fclcy the impera- tive oifacioy and }nc the pronoun. Hlc vir htc est, tibi quern promitti so'pius audis. iEn. 6, Hic gladiofidensy hlc acer ^ arduus hast a. ]Sa\. 12. ANNOTATION. The adverb hie is long, because it was pronounced almost like ei, says Vossius, whence it is that in antient marbles, we often find it written thus, heic. But as for the pronoun hie, Voss. 2. de arte Gram. c. 29. says it is akoai/s short by nature, and that whenever we find it long, it is because the c had the full sound of a double letter ; for which he has the authority of Victorinus, Prohus, and Capella. To understand this, it must be observed, agreeably to what Priscian says, lib. 13. that this pronoun hicy hcec, hoc, frequently assumed the particle ce, hicce, hcECce, hocce, and that this final e being lost by Synalepha, there remained only two cc, hicc, hcecc, hocc, which is also confirmed by Longus in his orthography. Be that as it may, there is no doubt but this pro- noun is much oftener long than short. Horace constantly makes it long; and for twice that we find it short in Virgil, Solus hic injiexit sensiis, JEn. 4. with the other above quoted of the 6th, it is above fifteen times long, whether he wrote it with two cc, or otherwise. The same may be said also of hoc, which is always long in the best authors. But take notice that the verse which Smetius quotes on this occasion, from JEn. 11. fl/c nnnis gravis, atque animi vmturus Aletcs, proves nothing, because hic is there an adverb only. Fac Of quantity: 337 Fac, for the imperative ofjacio, is always long by nature. Hoc fac Armenios—— Ovid. And if we sometimes find it short, it is because they used, for- merly to wntejace, according to Vossius after Julius Scaliger and Yerulen, as in the same poet. Jane face aternos pacem, pacisque 7mnisiros, though Giffanius is of a contrary opinion. Rule XLVIII. D and L final. 1. T) is sliort at the end of words ; 2. As likewise L, 3. Except nil, sol, sal ; 4. And Hebrew words, as Daniel. Examples. 1. D is short at the end of words, as dd, sM, qidd- gidd, is t lid. Q. Words that terminate in L are also short, as tribunal, jil, mel, semel, penigll, pbl, procuL 3. The following are excepted, 7i7l, sol, sal. 4. Hebrew names are also excepted, as Daniel, Michael, Michbl, Raphael, Sec. ANNOTATION. Nil is long, because it is a contraction for nihil, which is short, according to the general rule ; De nihilo nihil, in tiihilum nil posse reverti. Persius. The following verse of Ovid is brought against us. Morte nihil opus est, nihil Icariotide tela. But then the reason of the last of nihil being long in the second foot, is because of the caesura. Of Words ending in M. The Greeks, as we have observed, p. 267. did not end any word at all with this letter, but it was a common termination with the Latins. Yet as it is always cut off in verse before a vowel, there is no necessity for giving any rule about it. However, we may observe that the ancients let it stand and made it short. Vomerem atque locis avertit seminis ictum. Lucr. And if we find it sometimes long, this is in virtue of the caesura, as HcBC eadem ante illam, impune S^- Lesbiajecit. Propert. In composition it is also short. Qiio te circumagas. Jiiven. Concerning which see what is said in the third section of this book, c. 3. n. 1. speaking of the Ecthlipsis. Vol. II. Z -- Rule ^38 NEW METHOD. Book X. Rule XLIX. N Final. 1. . N is long at the end of words : 2. Except an, in, and clein ; 3. Except also nouns in EN making mis; 4. As likewise tamen and viden*. Examples. 1. N is long at the end of words; as Dan^ lien^ en. Also in Greek words masculine and feminine, as Tildfi, Sj/refi, Salamtn, Phorcyn, Likewise Acteon, Corydbn^ and the like, which have w. And Greek accusatives of the first declension, as JEncan, Anch'isen^ Caliwpen. As well as the genitives plural, as Cim7nerdn, be- cause it is also an w. 2. In the following N is short, dn, 1,n ; likewise Jondn ?indjvrsitdn, compounded of iin. Also dein, proin, for dtinde, proinde. 3. Nouns in EN, that make IN IS, are also short, as nomen, noniinis ; peeler?, ptctinis ; tibicen, tibicinis, 4. As likewise tamtn, and its compound attamSn. Also viden', and such like ; as riOsrin\ aui, satin\ egdn\ ne7ndn\ which are said by apocope instead of widesne, ntmbnt ^ &c. ANNOTATION. Hereto we may add the Greek nouns in on, which are of the second declension in Latin, as Ilion, and the like, which in Greek have an omicron. As also the accusative of nouns whose nomi- native is short ; as Maian, Eginan, Alexin, Thclin, litn, Scorpion^ and the datives plural in zn, as Arcasln. Rule L. R Final. 1. R at the end of words is short : 2. But Greek nouns in ER that increase in the genitive f are long ; 3. Add to these cur, tur, lar, far, ver, hir, nar, 4. yilso par, and its compounds, as dispar. Exam- Of quantity. 359 Examples. 1. R is short at the end of words, asCcssar, calcar, imber, differ, imter^ v^r, gladiator, robtir. 2. Greek nouns in ER are long, when they in- crease in the genitive ; whether this increase be short, as aeVf (Ethei\ eris ; or whether it be long, as Crater, gazer, poder, Reamer^ ' spirit er, eris. As also Iter, though its compound Celtiber is short, conforming thus to the Latin analogy. Ducit ad auriferas qudd me Salo Celtiber oras. Mart. Despauter mentions this noun as doubtful, but with- out authority. Its increase indeed is long, as may be seen above, rule 20. p. 313. The other Greek nouns that have no increase in the genitive, are short, a.s pater, mater. 3. The following words are also long, ciir, fur, lar,far, hir, ndr, and 'oer, which last may be ranked among the Greek nouns, since it comes from ja^, ^f, as we have already observed. 4. Par and its compounds are also long, compar, dispar, impar, suppdr, &c. Ludere par impar, equitare in arundine longd. Hor. ANNOTATION. Vir is oftener short. Yet we find it long in this verse of Ovid, De grege nunc tibi vIr 4" de grege nutus habendus. Ovid. Cor is also doubtful, according to Aldus. Mtdle cor ad timidas sic habet ille preces. Ovid. MoUe meum levibus cor est violahite telis. Id. Unless the passage be corrupted ; for every where else it is short. Greek nouns in OR are always short, though in their own lan- guage they have an u, as Hector, Nestor, &c. But it is not the same in regard to the termination ON, which continues always long when it comes from «, as we have shewn in the precedent rule. For which this reason may be given, according to Camerius, that the termination ON is entirely Greek, and therefore retains the analogy and quantity of the Greek, otherwise, to latinize it, we should be obliged to change it into O, as Plato, Cicero, &c. whereas the termination OR being also Latin, nouns borrowed from the Greek conform to it intirely without any alteration, and therefore are of the same nature and quantity as the Latin. '/. 2 Rule 540 NEW METHOD. Book X. Rule LI. AS Final. 1. AS at tilt end of words is long. 2. But AS, ADIS, is short. 3. Join thereto the Greek accusative ; 4. WitJi the nominative anas. Examples. 1. AS at the end of words is long, as (Bias, Thomas^ JEneas^j'ds.ntfas; Pallas, antis ; Adamas, ajitis. 2. Greek nouns in AS, which make the genitive in ADIS, are short, as Areas, Arcadis ; lampus, lampadis ; Pallas, Palladis ; I lias, Iliados. 3. Tlie Greek accusatives of nouns, which in Latin follow the third declension, are likewise short, as Naiadas, Troas, Delphbias, Arcadcis. Palantes Troas agcbat. Virg. 4. The noun anas is short, as in Petronius. Et pictis anas cnovata pennis. And even the very analogy of the language shews it, having a short increase in the genitive anatis. . Rule LII. ES Final. 1. ES at the end of words is long. 2. Except 'Esfrom Sum, with its compounds. 3. And penes. 4- Greek nouns in ES are also short. 5. As likewise Latin nouns with a short increase. 6. JEicept pes, Ceres, aries, abies, and paries. Examples. \. ES at the end of words is long, as nubes, artes, Cybeles, Joannes, locuples, Anchises, decies, venies, &c. 2. The verb sum makes es short, with its com- pounds pates, ades, &c. But es from edo is long, be- cause it is a crasis for edis, of which they made eis, es. 3. The Of quantity. 341 3. The preposition /;f«e^ is also short. 4. Likewise Greek nouns of the neuter gender, as hippomanes, caco'et/ws, &c. The plural of Greek nouns that follow the third declension of the Latins, makes ES also short in the nominative and vocative, as Amazones, Arcades, aspi- des, Delphines, Erinnldes, gryph^s, heroes, Lyncts, Mi- mallones, Naiades, JVere'ides, Or cades, Phryges, Th races, Tigrides, Troades, Troes, &c. But the accusative in ES of these very nouns is long, because it is entirely a Latin case, the Greek accusative ending in AS. Thus has Arcades is long, and /los Arcadds is short, 5. The Latin nouns in ES, whose increase is short, have es also short in the nominative singular, as mil^s^. onilitis', seges, segetis; pedes, pedttis. But those whose increase is long, are long, as hceres, edis ; locuples, etis^ 6. The following have ES long, notwithstanding thatthey havea short increase, Ceres, Cereris; pes, pedis. Hicfarta premitur angiilo Ceres omni. Mart. Pes etiam et camuris hirtce sub cornibus aures. Virg. ANNOTATION. Hereto we might join these three, abies, abietis ; aries, artetis ; parie.s, parietis ; though it seems to be rather the caesura that makes them long ; for perhaps they will not be found of this quantity in any other situation. With regard to what is objected against the compounds of pes, idadii prcepts is short in Virgil, ' praepes ab Ida. And perpes in S. Prosper, In Christo quorum gloria perpes erit. It is evident that neither of these nouns is compounded of pes, perpes being the same as perpetuus, and prcepes coming from 'n^omtl-hsf prcBVolans, which was first of all in use among the augurs. We must own that Ausonius shortens bipts and tripes, and Probus teacheth that alipes and sonipes are likewise short. But the contrary appears in Virgil, Lucan, and Horace. Therefore it is better always to make them long, like their simple. Poets who flourished towards the decline of the Latin tongue, have taken the liberty to shorten the last in James, lues, proles, plebes, which is not to be imitated. Cicero likewise has made the final short in alitts, and in pedes the plural of pes, and Ovid in ty- grcs, as conformable to the Greek analogy. Rule 342 NEW METHOD. Book X. Rule LIII. IS Final. 1. IS fl^ the end of words is short. 2. But the plural cases are always long, 3. As also the nominative singular of nouns that have a lona: increase. 4. Likewise such verbs as answer in number and tense to audis. 5. With Fis, sis, vis, and velis. Examples. 1. IS at the end of words is short, as amaih, infjuis, qiiiSf 1,s, pronoun ; m, preposition ; virgiriiSy vuUiSf Sec. Y has a great relation to I, for which reason jt is also short, as Chelys, Capys, Libys, &c. 2. Tiie plural cases are alwa^'s long, as virls, armlSy musis, siccJs, glebJs, nobis ; omms for omnds, or omnes ; urbls for urbeis, or urbes ; (juels for qui bus ; 'vobis, &c. Gratis andjorls are also long, in this respect par- taking of the plural cases. Dat gratis idtro dat mihi Galla, nego. Mart. Wherein P. Melissus, in a letter to Henry Stephen, acknowledges himself to have been heretofore mis- taken. 3. Nouns in IS are long, when their increase hap- pens to be long, as Simols, entis ; Pyrols, eniis ; lis, li- tis ; dls, dltis ; SammSy Itis ; QjuirJs, itis ; Salamls, mis ; glls, glJris ; semis, stmlssis. But those of a short increase are also short, as san- gms, sanguinis. 3. Verbs make IS long in the second person singular ; whenever tlie second person plural in itis is long. As in the present of the fourth conjugation, audJs, nescls, se)itis, vems. 5. As J Is from //o, *7* from sum, and its com- pounds, possls, prosls, udsls. As 'cls from voloy and its compounds, ma'cls ; as also quarnvlSy cuixTis. Likewise 'cells, ?nalJs, noils. And Of QUANTITY. 345 And in fine according to some, asfadJs, ausJs, which follow the same analogy. ANNOTATION. Some will have his^ nescis, possis, velis, and pulvis to be com- mon ; which is not without authority. But pulvis is long in Vir- gil by csesura ; and as for the others, it is always better to follow the general rules. Christian poets sometimes make IS short in the fourth^ as — ■ non tu Pervenis ad Christum, sed Christus pervenit ad te, Sedul. which is not to be imitated. Of the termination RIS in the subjunctive. In regard to the termination RIS of the subjunctive, it is so often long and short in verse, that some have been led thereby to believe it was long in the future, and short in the preterite. But this distinction is by no means satisfying ; for as we have shewn in the remarks on Syntax, book 6. p. 107. the preterite in rim is ofteu made to express the future, as well as the past; and therefore we tnay say in general, that whether in the preterite, or the future, tve may always make them short, as su£BcientIy appeareth from the following examples. Quas gentes Ital&m, aut gtias non oraveris urbes. Virg. GrcBcidus esuriens in ccelum jusseris, ibit, Juven. Dixeris, egregie, &c. Hor. ■ Dixeris astuo, sudat. Juven. — ^-^— Namjru&tra vitiiim vitaveris illud. Hor. Is mihi, dives eris, si cansas egeris, ingrtit. Mart. And if we should be asked, nevertheless, whether it be true, that they are also sometimes long in the future, it is certain there are exam- ples thereof. Miscuerls elixa, simul conchylia turdis. Hor. But this may be referred to the caesura. At least 1 never tnet with them long, except on such an occasion. Which shews that we may abide by what Probus says, that this syllable RIS is always short, whether in the preterite, or in the future subjunctive. Some have also remarked that this last syllable RIS is long only when the antepenultimais short, as we see in attHleiis, audiens, bibt* rw, dedens, cred'idhis, fucrts^ and others ; so that the penultima being likewise short in all those words, there is a necessity for lengthening the last, in order to admit them into verse. Therefore they will have this to be only a licence, which has nevertheless become a rule ; whereas if the antepenultima is long, this last syl- lable will be ever short according to its nature, as appears in dixeris, egensyjeceris, junxeris, quceslveris, videris, and others. This re- mark has some foundation, since it is generally true : but in words where they pretend it is long hf poeti« licence, there is always a caesura. Rule 344 NEW METHOD. Book X. Rule LIV. OS Final. - 1. OS at the end of words is long. 2. Except compos, impos. 3. Also Greek nouns written with omicron, 4. A?id OS, ossis. Examples. 1. OS at the end of words is long, as honoSy ros, OS, oj^is, the mouth ; liros, &c. 2. Compds and impos, which Aldus supposeth to be long, are short. Insefjuere, &; voti postmocio compds eris. Ovid. 3. Greek nouns are short, when written in Greek with an omicron, as Arctbs, inelds, Chaos, Argds, I/ids; and tlie genitives in OS, as Arcados, Palladds, Tethy^s^ jBut nouns written in Greek with a.no?nega are long, as At/ids, Herds, Aiidrogeds, &c. Viveret Androgens utinam. Ovid. 4. These nouns are also short, 6s, ossis, a bone; exbSj one that has no bones. Exos <§' e.ranguis tumidos perjluctuat artus. Lucret. Rule LV. US Final. 1. US at the end of words is short. 2. But nouns that retai?i\J in thegenitiveare long. 3. US is also long in four cases of the fourth declension. 4. As likewise in Tripus. Examples. 1. US is short at the end of words, as tuiisy illiiis, intus, sensibus, vuhws, impetiis. 2. Nouns that retain U in the genitive are always long, whether they make it in untis, uris, utis, UDI.S, or uis, as Opus, Opuntis, the name of a town; tellus,telluris; rus, ruris ; jus, juris; salus, salutis; mr- ins, virtutis ;.palm, palUdis ; grus, gruh ; sus, su'is. ' ' " ANNO* Of QUANTITY. 345 ANNOTATION. Paliis occurs but once in Horace, Regis opus, sterilisque diu paliis, aptaque remis. Which is more to be remarked than imitated, though Palerius followed the example in his poem on the immortality of the soul. Interciis, ulis, is also short, because the nominative was into cutis, hujus ititercutis, of which they have made interciis by syncope. Tellus is likewise siiort in Martianus Capella, Interminata marmore telliis erat. But this author often takes such liberties, in which his example is by no means to be copied. 3. Nouns of the fourth declension are also short in the nominative and vocative singular, as hie JructuSy hcec manus. Hie Dolopumm^LUus, Inescevus tendebat Aehilles.Y'wg, But these very nouns are long in the other cases in US, which are four ; namely, the genitive singular, the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural; because, as we have observed when treating of the declensions, vol. 1. p. 123. this termination w.y comes from a con- traction in all those cases, viz. uh in the genitive, manu'is, manis ; and u'en, us^ for the other three, ma-' mies, mantis, &c. 4. Tripiis, tripodis, is also long in the last of the no-^ minative. To which we may add MelampUs. ANNOTATION. ^^ Greek nouns ending in ov/; make us long in Latin, because it comes from the diphthong, as Amaihus, Jesus. As likewise cer- tain genitives that come from the Greek termination oos, oli, as ^anto, Mantus; Sappho, Sapphus ; and the like. There are only the compounds of wov? (except tripus and Melampus) that are short; as Polipiis, CEdipus, &c. because they drop the v of the diphthong according to the iEolians, and only change os into us, as we find by the genitive which makes odis, and not oudis and untis. Nouns in eus are also long by reason of the diphthong, as AtreuSf Orpheus, Briareus. The ancients used to cut off S at the end of the words in verse, just as we do M ; hence they said aliu*, dignu*, montiki* ; which lasted till Cicero's and Virgil's time. Rule LVI. T Final. T at the end of zvords is short. Exam- 346 NEW METHOD. Book X. Examples. T at the end of words is short, as audiity legit, ca- put^Juglt, amaty &c. ANNOTATION. T final was heretofore common, as Capella witnesseth, and as we still see in Ennius : but at present it is looked upon as short. And if we find it sometimes long, this is owing to the caesura, as in Martial, Jura trium pctilt a Cccsare discipulorum. And in Ovid, Nox abilt, oriturqne Aurora, Palilin poscor. We are not even allowed, as some pretend, to make it long m the last syllable of the preterites formed by syncope; and if we sometimes find it thus, it is always in consequence of the caesura, as in Horace, ut iniques mentis Asellus, Cmn vravius dorso subilt onus. However, if beside the syncope of the U, there is also a synere- sis of two ii, then in virtue of this contraction of two syllables into one, the T, like any other letter, may become long, pur- suant to what we observed in the first rule. Thus in Virgil, ^n. lib. 9. "Dum trepidant, it hasta Togo per tempus utrumque. For it is there in the preterite instead of iit. Likewise in Ovid, 1. Trist. eleg. 9. Dnrdani&mque petit antoris nomen hahentem. for petiit, and the like ; though, generally speaking, they 4re with a caesura, as in the last example. Rule LVII. Of the Last Syllable of the verse. The last syllable of the verse is always common. Examples. The last syllable of every verse is common, that is, we may look upon it as short or long, just as we will, without being confined to any rule; as in this verse from Virgil : Ge?2s inimica mihi Tyrrhenum navigat agquor. The last of the word {Equor is short by nature, though it passeth as long. And in this other verse out of Martial, ^obis non licet esse tarn disertis, the Of quantity. U7 the last of disertls is long by nature, though it is here supposed to be short. Observations on divers Syllables whose quantity is disputed. PHIS is all we had to mention in regard to the rules X of quantity. The syllables not included in these rules, ought to be learnt by the use and authority of the poets, such as most of those in the middle of words, and all those which are called Nature, of which we have given some hints in different parts of the annotations. But as there are many words whose quantity is often disputed, and others where it is perverted by following the authority of cor- rupt passages, or of authors no way deserving of imitation ; 1 shall therefore give here a list of such as 1 thought the most necessary to be observed. List of words whose quantity is disputed. A»s T B M I u s, the second long, though Rutitius would faia have it short. Si forte in medio pesitorum abstetnius herbit. Hor. Affatim, the second short in a ▼erse of Accius's, which is in the 2d Tusc, Turn jecore opimo farta 6( satiata affatim. Some have insisted on its being long because of this verse of Arator, Suppeiit affatim exemplorum copia, nosgue. But besides that we might scan it per- haps without making an elision of the M, as was frequently practised by the ancients, and thus make a dactyl of «/- faiim, we must further observe that this poet (who flourished under Justinian at the same time with Priscian and Cassio- dorus) is not so exact in his poetry, as to be of any authority with us. Anathema, when it signifies a person excommunicated, as in St. Paul, 1. Cor. xvi. 21. is generally written in Greek with an s, and therefore hath the peoultima short. But when it denote^ a p4-esenl or an offering hanged up in temples and churches, it is commonly written with an n, as in St. Luke, xxi. 5, and elsewhere ; and therefore it hath the penultima long : though some- times the orthography of it is altered j being stiii but one and the sftme word. compounded of Tt&i/**, ponn, which takes either the n or the e m both sifini- fications ; and then the quauUty will b« also changed. Antea. See p. 329. Archytas bath the penultima longj as Vnssius observes, and as appeareth by this verse out of Propertius, Me CI eat Archytas subelei Babgloniat kerns. And by this other of Horace^ lib. I. Od. 2a. T* maris 6C terra, numere Hylax in li- mine latrat. Eel. True it is that not only ecclesiastic writers, but even Phfcdrus, have made it short. Canem objurgabat, qui senex contra latrans. lib. 5. Though this ) cometh y^afx/xa, so from scTibo, scriptum, cometh scvp- t'jlum, and by syncope sciipllum, even according to Cliarisius. Sempiternus, the second long, as Scaliger proveth against Prndentius and modern authors, because it comes from semper and aternus. Spado, the former always short, as we see in Juvenal. Cum lener uxorem ducat spado, Ncs- via Thuscum Figai aprum Sat. 1. Ut spado vincebal Capifolia nostra Polkles.SiX.X^. In Martial, Tlielim viderat in togd spadonem. A {"haleucian verse. Again, Nee spado, nee mceckus erit te consule quisquam; At plus, 6 mores, ^- Spado mceckus erat. So thattpc must not mind Arator, who, among several other mistakes, hath committed this of making it long. Auslralem celerare viam qud spado jiigatis Mlkiopum pergehal equis. Lib. 1. Astr. Which may so much the more impose upon persons not well versed in poetry, as the above verse of Arator is quoted in Smetius with the name of Virgil, through a mistake which has crept into all the editions that ever I saw : though Virgil never so much as once made use of the word spado. Spr.cra. It is also a mistake in Prudentius to make the former short in this word. Cujus ad arbUrium sphera molilis at- que rotunda. Tot it comes from er^ai^a. And this may be owing to the corruption which we observed in the treatise of letters, when ceasing to pronounce the diph- thongs, they began to put a simple E for M and CE. Sycomohus is reckoned to have the penultima common ; for being derived from a-vKor (ficusj and fji.i^oi (morumj as juopov in Greek is wrote with an ©mi- cron, it may be short. But this same penultima may be long, because morut in Latin hath the former long, though Calepin makes it short. Arduu niorus erat niveis uberrima pomis. Ovid. Mutua quin cllam moris commercia Jicus. Pallad. Whereto we may add that this word is differently wrote, some editions having ff-uHOjuo^ia, and others trvy.o/x'jjpitia,. Temetum hath the penultima long. Pullns, ova, cadum temeti : nemfe modo iilo. Hor. Though JMuretus hatli maile it short, Thymiama, the penu'tima long by nature, because it comes from Su- ToncuiAR, the penultima short, as Despauter and the great Latin The- saurus observe; which is further con- firmed by Vossius and Ricciulius; be- cause it comes from tarqueo, in the same manner as specular or speculum from spfculur, though we find it long in Fortiinatus through necessity. Tnicj.NTA, and the like. See p. 330. TniTuno, the penultima long, be- cause it comes from ttiii/ra or Iriturus, of the same nature as pictura or piciu- Tus, whence also cometh picturo. Some nevertheless derive it from tritern, as much as to say tertero, and pretend therefore that we may make it short. ViETUs hath the second long. Necsupra caput rjusdem cecidisse vietam Vestem- -Lucret. Likewise in Prudentius, Et turbida ab ore vieto Nubila discussit. Nor must we suffer ourselves to be led into an error by this verse of Horace : 3ui sudor vietis ^ qudm malus undi' que membris. Because vietis is there a dissyllable by syneresis. ViRi;r.ENTUS, the second short, like all nouns of this same termination, as fraudulentus, luculentus, pulveru- lenlus. Ne dictat mihi luculentus Altis. Mart. a Phaleucian verse. And therefore Baptista Mantnanus is mistaken in saying, . 2uem virulcnta Megcera. Ultra. See p. 330. Univehsi, the second short. But la UNiouiuMB it is long. The reason is Of quantity. 353 is because in the latter, uni is declined, Utrius. Vossius in the 2d book coming from the nommativ e untisguis- de arte Gram. chap. 13. and in his ^ue, and therefore retains the quantity smaller Grammar, p. 285. says that Jt \TOuld have uncompounded: whereas it is never otherwise than long in the in the former it is not declined, as it second ; yet it is more than once short comes from universus, the nature of in Horace, which is communicated to the other Docte sermones utriusque linguce, lib. cases. And this analogy ought to take 3. Od. 8. place on all the like occasions, as hath Fasl'uliret olus qui me nolat, Uirius l)een observed, rule 7, p. 307. horum Vomica, the first long in Serenus, Verba probes Lib. 1. ep. 17. ad who lived about the middle of the third Scaev. century. And therefore it may be said that i in Vomica qitalis erit ? this noun is common, the same as in But it is short, in Juvenal, who flourish- unius, ullius, and others of the like ter- ed towards the close of the first, mination, of which we have taken no- Et phthisis iSf vomicae pulres £(" dimi' tice in the third rule. vadium crus. Section II. Of accents, And the proper Manner of Pronouncing Latin. Chapter I. I. Of the nature of Accents, and hoxv many sorts there are. A C C E N T S are nothing else but certain small marks that were invented in order to shew the tone and several inflec- tions of tlie voice in pronouncing. The antients did not mark tl)ose tones, because as they were in some measure natural to them in their own language, use alone was sufficient to acquire them ; but they were invented in after- times, either to fix the pronunciation, or to render it more easy to strangers* This is true not only in regard to Greek and Latin, but also to the Hebrew tongue, which had no points in St. Jerome's time. Now the inflexions of the voice can be only of three sorts ; either that which rises, and the musicians call ol^cnv, elevation ; or that which sinks, and they call ^hiv, positio7i or depression ; or that which, partaking of both, rises and sinks on one and the same syllable. And in this respect the nature of the voice is admirable, says Cicero in his book de Oratore, since of these three inflections it forms all the softness and harmony of speech. On this account therefore three sorts of accents 'have been in- vented, whereof two are simple, namely the acute and the grave ; and the other compound, namely the circumflex. : Vol. II. •'a a The 354 NEW METHOD. Book X. The acute raiseth the syllable somewhat, and is marked by a small line rising from left to right ( ' ). The grave depresseth the syllable, and is marked on the con- trary by a small line descending from left to right, thus { * )• The circumflex is composed of the other two, and therefore is marked thus ('). As accents were invented for no other purpose than to mark the tone of the voice, they are therefore no sign of the quantity of syllables, whether long or short; which is evidently proved, because a word may have several long syllables, and yet it shall have but one accent ; as on the contrary it may be composed entirely of short ones, and yet shall have its accent, as Asia, dominus, &c. II. Rides of Accents and of Latin IVords. The rules of accents may be comprised in three or four words ; especially if wc content ourselves with the most general remarks, and with what the grammarians have left us upon tliis subject. For MONOSYLLABLES. If they are long by nature, they take a circum- flex, asfos I OS, oris ; a, L 2. It they be short, or only long by position, they take an acute, as spes ; 6s, ossis ; fax, &c. Tor DISSYLLABLES and POLY- SYLLABLES. 1. In words of two or more syllables, if the last be short, and the penultima long by nature, this penul- tima is marked with a circumflex, as foris, Jldma, Romdnus, &c. 2. Except the above case, dissyllables have always an acute on the penultima, as homo, pejus, parens, &c. Polys341ables have the same, if the penultima bfe long, as parentes, ArLvis, Romano, &c. otherwise they throw their accent back on the antepenultima, as mhximus, nltimus, dominus, &c. III. Reasons for the above Rules. Here it is obvious that the rules of accents are founded on the length or shortness of syllables : which has obliged us to defer mentioning them till we had treated of Quantity. Now the reasons of these rules are very clear and easy to com- prehend. For accent being no more than an elevation which gives a grace to the pronunciation, and sustains the discourse, it could not be placed further than the antepenultima either in Greek Of ACCENTS. 355 Greek or Latin, because if three or four syllables were to come after the accent (as if we should say perficerc, perficeremmj they would be heaped, as it were, one upon another, and consequently would form no sort of cadence in the ear, which, according to Cicero, can hardly judge of the accent but by the three last syllables, as it can hardly judge of the harmony of a period but by the three last words. Therefore the farthest the accent can be placed is on the antepenultima, as in dOminits, homines, amdve- rant, &c. But since the Romans in regulating the accents have had a par- ticular regard to the penultiraa, as the Greeks to the ultima, if the word in Latin hath the penultima long, this long syllable being equivalent to two short ones, receives the accent, Roma, Romanus, producing nearly the same cadence in the ear by reason of their length, as maxlmus. And as this length may be twofold, one by nature, and the other only by position ; and this length by nature was formerly marked by doubling the vowel, as we have already observed in the treatise of Letters, book 9. p. 249. so this long penultima may receive two sorts of accents, either the circumflex, that is the accent composed of an acute and a grave, Romanus for Romaanns ; or only the acute, that is, which signifieth only the elevation of the syllable as, Araxis, parens. But if after a penultima long by nature, the last should also be long, as this circumflex accent and the length of the last syllable might render the speech too drawling, they are satisfied then with acuting the penultima, Romano, and not Romdno, Roma, and not Roma, to prevent too slow an utterance. After this it is easy to form a judgment of the rest. For in regard to the dissyllables, if the}' are not capable of a circumflex, they must needs have an acute on the penultima, be it what it will, since they cannot throw the accent farther back : and as to mono- syllables, the reason why those which are long by nature have a circumflex, is the same as that above mentioned, namely, that this long vowel is equivalent to two : Jios instead ofjioos. And the rea- son why those that are short, or only long by position, have but an iacute, is becanse they can have no other. IV. S'otiie E.vceptions to these Rules of Accents. Lipsius, and after him Vossius, are of opinion that the rules of accents, which grammarians have left us, are very defective, and that the antient manner of pronouncing was not confined to those laws of grammar. Yet these rules being so natural, and so well founded in analogy and in the surprising relation they bear to each other, pursuant to what hath been just now observed, it is not at all probable that the antients departed from them so widely as those critics imagine ; and if we meet with some in- stances to the contrary, they ought to be looked upon rather as exceptions than a total subversion of the general rule, since even these exceptions may be reduced to a small number, and it is easy to shew that they are not without foundation. The first exception is, that compound verbs used sometimes to A S' 2 retaift 356 NEW METHOD. Book X. retain the same accent as their simple, as calefacio, calefacis, cale- Jikit, where the accent is on the pcnultima in the two last words> tliough it be short, says Priscian, hb. 8. And according to him the same may be said of calcj'w, calefis, calff it, where the accent continues on the last syllable of the second and third persons, as it would be in the simple, which is a very natural analogy. The second exception is, that on the contrary compound nouns used sometimes to draw their accent back to the antepenultima, whether the penultima was lung or not ; as we find in the same Priscian that they used to say orbidterrce, viriUustriSy prcefectusfa- brum, juriscbnsultiis, inlerealoci. The third exception is, that indeclinable particles also used to draw back (heir accent sometimes in composition, as siquandoy which, according to Donatus, had the accent sometimes on the antepenultima ; and the same ought to be said of nequando, ali- quando ; as also of cxinde, which, according to Servius, has the accent on the antepenultima ; and this should serve as a rule for deinde, perinde, pruinde, suhinde : likewise exadversum in Gellius, and nffatim, to which may be added enlmvcro, duniaxaf, and per- haps some others, which may be seen in Priscian or in Lipsius and Vossius, who give a full list of them. Now these two ex- ceptions of drawing back the accent in composition, are only in imitation of the Greeks, who frequently do the same in regard to their compounds. But we must take particular care, sa3's Vossius, that though the accent may be on the antepenultima in dehide, perinde, and others, we are not to conchjde that it may therefore DC on the antepenultima in deinceps, and such like, where the last is long, for no word can be accented on the antepenultima, either in Greek or Latin, when the two last syllables are long; especially as each of these long syllables having tivo times, this would throw the accent back too far. The fourth exception is of the vocatives of nouns in lUS, which are accented on the penultima, though short, as Virgili, Mercuric JEmili, Valeri, &c. the reason of wliich is because heretofore, according to the general analogy they had their vocative in E. Virgllie, like domine. But as this final E was too weak, and scarce perceptible, by degrees it came to be dropped, and the original accent, which was on the antepenultima, continuing still in its place, came to be on the penultima. The fifth exception may be in regard to Enclitics, which always used to draw the accent to the next syllable, be it what it would, ps we shall see in the next chapter. To these we may add some extraordinary and particular words, as vitdieris, which, according to Priscian, hath the accent on the short penultima, and perhaps some others, though in too small a number to pretend that this should invalidate the general rules. Of ACCENTS. S67 Chapter II. Particular Observations on the Practiceof the Antients. I. In what place the Accents ought to be particularly marked in books. TH E rules of accents ought to be carefully observed, not only in speaking, but likewise in writing, when we under- take to mark them, as is generally practised in the liturgy of the Church of Rome. Only we may observe, that instead of a circum- flex, they have been satisfied with an acute, because the circumflex being only a compound of the acute and the grave, what predo- minates therein, says Quintilian, is particularly the acute, which, as he himself observes after Cicero, ought to be naturally on every word we pronounce. It is for this very reason that in those books they no longer put any accent on monosyllables, nor even on dissyllables, because having lost this distinction of acute and circumflex, it is sufficient for us in general to know that in dissyllables the former is always raised. II. In what manner we ought to mark the Accent on Words compounded of an Enclitic. The accent ought also to be marked on words compounded of an enclitic, that is, one of these final particles, que, nc, ve ; and should be always put on the penultima of these words, whatever it' be, as Despauter after Servius and Capella informs us ; thus ar- mdque, terraqtce, pluztne, atterve, &c. because it is the nature of these enclitics ever to draw the accent towards it. So that it sig- nifies nothing to say with Melissa and Ricciolius, that if this was the case, we could not distinguish the ablative from the nominative ofnounsin A. For considering things originally, it is very cer- tain, as above hath been mentioned, that the antients distinguished extremely well betwixt accent and quantity ; and therefore that they raised the last in the nominative without lengthening it, ter- raque, whereas in the ablative they gave it an elevation, and at the same time they made it appear long, as if it were, terraaque ; whence it follows that they must have also distinguished it by the acute in the nominative, terroque, and by the circumflex in the ablative terraqxie ; and Vossius thinks that some distinction ought to be observed in pronouncing them. III. That neither que nor ne are ahvays Enclitics. But here we are to observe two things, which seem to have es- caped the attention of Despauter. The first, that there are certain words ending in que, v/here the que is not an enclitic, because they are simple, and not compound words ; as idique, denique, umlique, &c. which are therefore accented on the antepenultiraa. The second, that 7ie is never an enclitic but when it expresseth doubt, and not when it barely serves to interrogate ; and therefore if the syllable before ne is short or common, we ought to put the accent on the antepenultima, in interrogations, as tibine? hce'ccine? siccine ? dstrane ? egone ? Pldtone ? &c. whereas in the other sense the particle ne draws the accent to the penultima. Cicerone, Platone. 3^8 NEW METHOD. BookX. IV. That the Accent ought to be ?narked, whenever there is a necessity for distinguishing one word from another. We ought also to mark the accent in writing, according to Terent. Scaurus, whenever it is necessarj' i'or preventing ambiguity. For example, we should murk legit in the present with an acute, and legit in the preterite with a circumflex. We should mark occidOf the accent on the antepenultima, taking it from cada ; and occido with an acute on the penultima, taking it from ccsdo. V. IVhether xce ought to accent the last Syllable, on account of this distinction. But if any body should ask whether this rule of distinction ought to be observed for the last syllable ; Donatus, Sergius, Priscian, Longus, and .most of the antients will have that it ought, and es- pecially in regard to indeclinable words, which they say should be marked with an acute on the last, as circiim littora, to distinguish it from the accusative of circus. Quintilian,'%more antient than any of these, observes that even in his time some grammarians were of this opinion, which was practised by several learned men, and that for liis part he durst not condemn it. Victorinus likewise observes the same thing, and says that pone an adverb, for example, is acuted on the last, to prevent its being confounded with the imperative of pono. So that one might say the same of a great many other words, which, through an er- roneous custom, are marked with a grave accent, as male, bene, though we are told at the same time that in pronouncing it ought to have the power of an acute. Which is doubtless owing to a mis- take of the Greeks, who frequently commit the same error in re- gard to those two accents, as if it were quite so consistent to mark the one, when you expressly mean the other. But the reason why we ought not to put the grave on those'final syllables, is evident. Because as the grave denotes only the fall of the voice, there can be no fall where there has not been a rise, as Lipsius and Vossius have judiciously observed. For if the last, for instance, falls in pn?ie., an adverb, the first must therefore be comparatively raised, and then this word will no longer be distin- guished from yjo/;r, the imperative o^ pnno, which nevertheless is contrary to their intention. Hence Sergius, who lived before Priscian, takes notice that in his time the grave accent was no longer used ; sciendum, says he, quod in usu nan est hodierno accentiis gravis. Whence it follows either that we ought not to accent the last syllable, or if it must have an accent, then we ought to choose another, and rather make use of an acute, according to the opinion of some grammarians. A second mistake some are apt to commit in regard to the last syllable, is when in order to shew that it is long, and to distinguish it from a short one, they put a circumflex, as musa in the ablative, to distinguish it from the nominative musa. For the accents were not intended to mark the quantity, but the inflection of the voice ; § and Of accents. 359 'and as for the quantity, when the custom of doubling the vowels, in order to mark the long syllables, as musaa, was altered ; they made use of small couchant lines which they called apices, thus musoy as we have shewn in the treatise of Letters, book 9. p. 24-9. But since we have lost the use of those little marks, we put up with these accents, which ought rather to be considered as signs of quantity, than of the tone of voice ; the circumflex, according to Quintilian, being never put at the end of a word in Latin ; though the Greeks do sometimes circumflex the last when it happens to be long. VI. In what manner we ought to place the Accent in Verse. If the word of itself be doubtful, we should place the accent on the penultima, when it is looked upon as long in verse, or on the antepenultima, when it is looked upon as short. Thus we should - Pecudes pictccque yolucres, Virg. the accent on the penultima, as Quintilian observeth, because the poet makes it long ; though in prose we always say, volucresy the accent on the antepenultima. Hence it may happen that the same word shall have two different accents in the same verse, as in Ovid. Et prima similis volucri, mox vera volucris. Chapter III. I. Of the Accents of IVords which the Latins have bor^ roxced of other Languages^ and particularly those of Greek f Fords. IN regard to Greek words, if they remain Greek, either altoge- ther or in part, so as to retain at least some syllable of that lan- guage, they are generally pronounced according to the Greek ac- cent. Thus we put an acute on the antepenultima in eleison, and litlwstrotos, notwithstanding that the penultima is long. On the contrary we put it on the penultima, though it be short in paralijwmhion, and the like. We put the circumflex on the genitive plural in Zt, periarchwy, and on the adverbs in us, ironicwj, and such like, where the omega is left standing. But words entirely latinised, ought generally to be pronounced according to the rules of Latin. And this is the opinion of Quin- tilian, Capella, and other antient authors ; though it is not an error to pronounce them also according to the Greek accent. Therefore we say with the accent on the antepenultima, Aristo- teles, A'ntipaSy Barnabas, Boreas, Blasphemia, C6rido7J, D^meas, Ecclesia, Traseas, &c. because the penultima is short. And on the contrary we say with the accent on the penultima, Alexandria, Cytheron, eremus, meteora, orthodoxiiSy Faracletus, jpleuresis, and the like, because it is long. Greek 360 NEW METHOD- Book X. Greek words that have the penultima common not by figure or licence, but by the use of" the best poets, or by reason of some particuhir dialect, are abvays better pronounced in prose ac- cording to the common or Attic dialect, or according to the use of the best poets, than otherwise. Therefore it is preferable to put the accent on the penultima, in Chorea, Connpeum, phtta, OrioniSf and sucii like, because tlie best poets make it long. But if these words have the penultima sometimes long and sometimes short in those same poets, we may pronounce as we please in prose, as Busiris, Eriphyle. But in verse we must i«)llow the measure and cadence of the feet, pursuant to what has been already observed. These are, 1 think, the most general rides that can be given upon this subject. Nevertheless we are oftentimes obliged to comply with custom, and to accommodate ourselves to the manner of pronouncing in use among the learned, accordi ig to the coun- try one lives in. Thus we pronounce Anstobuliis, Basilius, i(/6Uum, with the accent on the antepenultima, notwithstanding that the penultima is long; only because it is the custom. And on the contrary we pronounce Andreas, idea, Maria, &c. the accent on the penultima though short, because it is the custom even among the most learned. The Italians also pronounce with the accent on the penultima, Antonomasia, harmonla, philosophia, tJieolcgia, and the like, pursuant to the Greek accent, because it is the practice of their country, as Ricciolius observeth. Besides Alvarez and Gretser are of opinion that we ought always to pronounce it thus, though the custom not only of Germany and Spain, but likewise of all France, is against it : and Nebrissensis approves of the latter pronunciation, where he says that it is better to accent those M'ords on the antepenultima. Which shews that M'hen once the antient rul(^s have been broke through, there is very little certainty, even in practice, which is different in different countries. 11. Of i lie Accents of Hebrew Words, Hebrew words that borrow a Latin termination and declension, follow the Latin rules in regard to accent : and therefore we put it on the penultima in Adamus, Josephus, Jacobus, &c. because it is long. But if these words continue to have the Hebrew termination, and are indeclinable, they may be pronounced either according to the rules of Latin words, or according to the Greek accent, if they liave passed through the Greek language before they were received by the Latins, or in short according to the Hebrew accent. But should these three circumstances concur, then one would think there is no reason for pronouncing otherwise than according to the received use and custom of the public, to which we are often obliged to conform. And therefore, pursuant to this rule, we should say .with the ac- cent on the penultima, Afrtrhis, Bethsura, Ctihurn, Debora, Elea- zar, Eliseus, Rebecca, Salome, Sephora, Susanna; because the pe- •V n*ultima Of accents. 361 laultima of these is not only long by nature, but it is likewise accented both in Greek and Hebrew. If these words are entirely Ht-brew, it is better to pronounce them according to the Hebrew accent ; and therefore we should raise the last in elot, ephda, sahaoth, and such like. In respect to which we are however to take notice, that as most of these words are received in the liturgy of the Church of Rome, there is a necessity for pronouncing them according to established custom, so much the more as they are in every body's mouth all over the world. Hence it is that, contrary to the last rule, we generally put the accent on the antepenultima in Elisabeth, Gol- gotha, Melctiuedech, Mby&es^ Samuel, Solomon, Samaria, Siloe, and some others. Hereby it appears to be a mistake, which great numbers have fallen into, to think with a certain person called Alexander the Dogmatist, that not only Hebrew words, but all that are barbarous and exotic, ought to be pronounced with the accent on the last. Which has been learnedly refuted by Nebrissensis, and after him by Despauter, though this has been the custom of several Churches, in regard to some tones of the Psalms, because of the Hebreu- accent therein predominant. Chapter IV. Further Observations on the Pronunciation of the Antients. I. That they distinguished beixveen Accent and Quantity, and made Several differences even in Quantity. WHAT we have been hitherto saying relates to the rules and practice of accents, to which we ought now to con- form. But the pronunciation of the antients was even in this respect greatly different from ours; for they not only observed the difference between quantity and accent, according to what hath been said in the treatise of Letters, book 9 ; but likewise in quan- tity they had several sorts of long and short syllables, which at present we do not distinguish. Even the common people were so exact, and so well accustomed to this pronunciation, that Cicero in his book de Oratore, observes, that a comedian could not lengthen or shorten a syllable a little more than he ought, but the people would be offended tvith this mis-pronouncing, voithout any other rule than the discernment (yf the ear, luhich "was accustomed to judge of long and short syllables, as well as of the rising and sinking of the voice. Now as the long syllables had two times, and the short ones only one ; on the contrary, the common or doubtful were properly those that had only a time and a half: which was the case of the weak position, where the vowel was followed by a syllable begin- ning with a mute and a liquid, as in patris. For the liquid being the last, glided away too nimbly, and was too weak in compa- rison 3()2 ' NEW METHOD. Book X. rison to the mnte with which it was joined ; and therefore it was owing to this incquaHty that the foregoing vowel was not so firmly sustained as if there had been two mutes, as m jacto ; or two liquids, as in ille ; or if the mute had been in the last syl- lable, as martyr : or, in short, as if the mute had been at the end of a syllable, and the liquid at the beginning of the next, as in ahludity ablalus. In all which cases the syllable would have been long by a firm position, and would have had txvo times : whereas in the other, having only one time and a half, for the reasons above mentioned, this half measure was sometimes altogether neglected, and then the syllable was reckoned sliort ; and at other times it was somewhat sustained and lengthened to an entire mea- sure ; and then tlie syllable was looked upon as long in verse. And hence it appears for what reason when the syllable was long by nature, as in matris, the mute and liquid did not render it common, because as it came from mater, whereof the former is long of itself, it had its timt times already. But even when a syllable is long by a firm and entire position, still we are to observe that there is a great difference betweea being thus long by position, and long by nature. The syllable long by nature was somewhat firmer and fuller, being a reduplication of the same vowel, pursuant to what hath been observed in the treatise of Letters, as maalus, an apple-tree, poopulus, a poplar tree, seedes, &c. Whereas the syllable long by position only, had no other length than its being sustained by the two following consonants ; just as in Greek there is a great dif- ference between an eta and an epsilon long by position. But as there was a difference in the pronunciation between a syllable long by nature and a syllable barely long by position, so there was a difference also betwixt a syllable short by nature and a syllable short by position only, that is froVn its being placed be- fore another vowel. For the latter always preserved somewhat of its natural quantity, and doubtless had more time in verse than the syllable short by nature. Thus it is that in Greek the long vowels, or even the diphthongs were reckoned short, whenever the following word began with another vowel or a diphthong, without there being any necessity for cutting tliem off by synalcepha. Thus it is likewise that in Latin prtv is short in composition before a vowel, as pratiret, pracesse, &c. And thus it is that the Latins have often used those syllables, as JLt lojigiim Jbrmose vale, vale inquit lola. Virg. Eel. 3. Insulac lonio in magno guns dira Celccno. Mn. 3. Victor apud rapidum Siyno'enla sub Uio alto. JEu. 5. Te Corydon o Alexi Eel. 2. And an evident proof that these syllables still preserved at that time something of their nature, is their being sometimes long on tliose occasions : • Ciim vacuus Domino praeiret Arion. Stat. 5 ego quantum egi ! quam vasta potentia nostra est ! Ovid. IL Difficult Of accents. 363 II. Difficult Passages of the Antients, tvhich may be solved by those Principles. This affords us some light towards clearing up several passages of the antients, which appear unintelligible, unless they be re- ferred to the above principles. As when Festus says, Inlex pro- ducta sequenti si/llaba significat, qui leginonparet : Correptd seqiienti inductorein ab illiciendo. For it is beyond all doubt that the last in irilex or illex is always long in quantity, since the e precedes the .r which is a double letter ; but one was pronounced with >j, as if it were J'^^^| ; and in the other with an e, as if it wei'e ('xx£|. One like the long e in the French words fete, bete, tete ; and the other like the short e in Prophete. nette, navette, Sec. Hence the one made illegis in the genitive, preserving its e long as coming from lex ; and the other illicis, changing its e into i short, which it resumes from the verb illicio uhence it is derived. Thus when Victorinus says that IN and CON are sometimes short in composition, as inconstans, impriidens ; and that they are long in words where they are followed by an S or an F, as instare, infidus ; this means that in the latter the i was long in quantity, and short in the former, though it was always long by position ; so that this I, thus long in quantity, partook of the nature of EI, infidus, nearly as if it were einfidus, &c. And this helps to illus- trate a difficult passage of Cicero de Oratore, whence the above author seems to have extracted this rule ; Inclitus, says he, dicimns prima brevi littera, insanus prodtictd : inhumanus brevi ; hifelix longd. Et ne multis : in quibus verbis ece primes sunt littercB quce in Sa- PIENTE & Felice, producte dicuntur, in cceteris breviter. Itemque composuit, crmcrepuit, consnevit, conjecit, &c. Where by sapiens and Jelix he marks the words beginning with an S or an F, as Gellius, lib. 2. cap. 17- explains him ; and where by the word long, he does not mean to speak of the accent, but of quantity, it being manifest that the accent of irifelix ought to be upon the second, and not upon the first ; which is still more clear in inhumdnus, where it is altogether impossible that the accent should be upon the first. Thus likewise are we to understand Aulus Gellius, when he says that ob and sjib have not the power of lengthening syllables, no more than con, except when it is followed by the same letters, as in con-Stituit and con-Fecit : or (as he continues) when the n is entirely dropped, as in coopertus : so that they pronounced cobpertus, cobnexus, and cobgo, as he repeats it himself, lib. 11. c. 17 : when he says in the same book that this rule of the following of S and F was not observed in respect to pro, which was short in prqficiscif prqfundere, &c. and long in proferre, projiigare^ &c. that is, they pronounced prooferre, proojligare : when he says, lib. 11. c. '5. that they pronounced one way pro rostris, another way pro tribunaliy another pro condone, another pro potestate intercedere : when he says that in objicis and objicibiis the o was short by nature, and that it could not be lengthened but by writing those words with two ji, the same as in ohjicio : when he says that in composuit, conjecit, con- crepuit, 364 N E W M E T H O D. Book X. crepuil, o was likewise short, that is, that it h d only the sound of an omicron : \»hen he savs that in w^o the fir t was short ; whereas in aclito and actitavi it was long : and when he says that in gtdescif the second vvas short, perpcliiu liugucc Latince consuetudine, though it comes from (juies where c is long. Thus it is that Donatus and Scrvius distinguish between the persons of sum and edo,' as e.s, est ; esset , essemus ; in this that the first e is short when it comes from sum, and long when it comes from 'cdo. In fine, thus it is that Julius Scaliger proves against Erasmus, who found fault with some feet and numbers in Cicero, that sunt is short, because it comes from sinnus. And the whole we have been saying is very necessary to observe, in order to comprehend what Cicero, Quintilian, and others, have wrote concerning the numbers and feet of a period : and to shew that when the nouns, and even the prepositions, had different significations they were frequently known by the pronunciation. III. IVItctlierfrom the diffxrence they made in the Fro- nunclation of Short and Long Vozcels, xvemai) conclude that U was sounded like the French Diphthong OU in Long Syllables only. From what we have been now observing in regard to the different pronunciation of the long and short vowels, Lipsius and Vossius were induced to believe that the pronunciation of the Latin U, which sounded full, like the French diphthong OU, regarded only the long U; and that the short was sounded in the same manner as the Greek upsilon, that is like a French U. But this opinion we have sufficiently refuted in the same treatise, c. 4. n. 2. and from what we have been mentioning it plainly appears, that when two different pronunciations are observed in a vowel, one longer or fuller, the other shorter or closer, as in ago and actifo, in iXXt)^ and ("xxtl, this does not mean that we are to take a sound of so different a nature as lustrum and loustrum, lumen and loumen. Therefore when Festus says that lustrum, with the former short, signified ditches full of mud ; and with the former long, implied the space of five years ; he meant it only in regard to quantity, and not to a pronunciation entirely different : and all that we are to understand by it is, that one was longer than the other by nature, as would be tlie case of lustrum and luustriim or lustrum^ though they are both long by position. And this helps to explain a passage of Varro, which Lipsius and Vossius have misunderstood. When he says that luit hath the former short in the present, and long in the preterite. But he means nothing more than that in the present tense U was short by nature, and in the preterite it was long, so that they pronounced Iniiit, according to the common rule of preterites of two syllables, which generally have the former long : this did not hinder however the first of liiit, even in the preterite, from being short by position; as Of latin POETKY. . 565 as the diphthong -e is scanned either by the measure of distinct feet, as hcxameti r.i and pentameters ; or by the measure of two feet, ac- cording to vvhat we mentioned in the preceding chapter. But in order to scan verse, there are four principal figures to observe, Ilclhiipsis, Si/tinlcrphn, Sz/iiLEresiSj and Dicercsis : to which we may add Systole and Diastole. I. Of Ecthlipsis. The word EcthJipsis comes from £xSa.^£/M/tum ille & terris jacfotus, S^ alto. Virg. O airas hommum, 6 quantum est in rebus inane. Pers. Formerly by this figure they used also to cut off the s final, efther the s only, in order to hinder the length of the position, when it was followed by another consonant ; or the s and the pre- ceding vowel, ivhen the next word began with a vowel, just as they used to do witii the ?h .• as Doctu' Metis, suavis homo facundu' suoque Content' atque bcatiis, scttnsjacunda Inquensin Xempoic, commod' cS verboium vir puucurum. Ennius. Delphinus jacct fmud nimio histratu' decore. Cic. in Arat. Loiige flit a primo, quisqui' iccundus eiit. Alcin. And this is still more usual in Terence and other comic writers, as eju for ejuSf ommlfu for omnibus^ iiignu' for aignus, &Ct Jn other pure Of LATIN POETRY. 375 pure writers this is rare, though some think that Virgil did not scruple to make use of it in divers places, as in the following. Limina teciorum, 4' vnedii' in nenetralibus hostem. As Pierius says it was wrote in antient MSS. as Farnaby still reads it, and as Erythreus thinks it ought to be read ; which he endea- vours to defend not only by the authority of Lucretius, but more- over by several other passages in Virgil. Though others read medium instead o^mediis. Now as the letter s was sometimes cut off before a consonant in order to prevent the position, the same was practised also on the m by antient writers, as LanigercB pecudis Sf equoru' duellica proles. Lucret. Sometimes it was left standing, as we now leave the 5, and then it was made short, as already we have observed, when treating of quantity. Corporura nfficiu* est quoniam premere omniadeorsum. Lucr. II. Of Synalcepha. The Synalcepha is in regard to vowels and diphthongs, the same as the Ecthlipsis in respect to m. For it is formed by cutting off a vowel or a diphthong at the end of a word, because of another vowel or diphthong with which the next word begins, as Conticuer^ omnes intentiqii' ora tenebant. Virg. The Latins for this reason give it the name of collisio. But the word Zvvx\oi(pit properly signifies counctio, coming from ccXei'(pup ungo. So that the metaphor seems to be taken from fat or unctuous things, the last layer of which makes the other disappear. III. Directions in regard to the use of those two fgures, Ecthlipsis ajid Synalcepha. These two figures are smoother, when the vowel subsequent to that which was cut off, happens to be long, than when it is short: as appears from this verse of Catullus, Troja, nefas, commune sepulchxwra. Europas, Asiceque. This is owing to the nature of the voice, which having thus lost a syllable at the end of a word, ought in return to be sustained at the beginning of the next, to prevent too great a bending and precipitancy in the cadence. And it is observable particularly in regard to the Ecthlipsis, that Virgil generally makes it fall on a syllable long by position ; as Postquam iatrogressi, 8f coram data copiajandi. Ilium expirantem transfixo pectorejiammas. And the like. The synalcepha on the other hand seems to have a particular smoothness, when the following word begins with the vowel that was cut off at the end of the precedent, because then it does not depart so much from the natural sound which we are accus- tomed to hear in those words ; the remaining vowel having nearly its own value, and that of the vowel suppressed in the foregoing word, as Ille 376 NEW METHOD. Book X. Ille ego qui quondam gracili modulatus avena. Virg. lirgo omuls longo solvit se Icuoia liictu. Id. Be that as it may, we must always take cai'e that the pronunciation arising from the.-e figures be not too harsh, or disagreeable to the ear, which is the judge of these matters. Nor should they be too often repeated, especially in elegiac verse, which requireth a par- ticular softness ; whereas iu heroics they may sometimes occasion a more extraordinary gravity, according to particular occasions ; as in this verse of Virgil: Pliillida aino ante alias. Which he has designedly strewed with soft figures, extremely well adapted to the subject. As on the contrary he intended to repre- isent something hideoue:, when he described Polyphemus, \. Monsti'um horrendum, itiforive, ingcns, &c. Again : Tela inter 'media, atque horrentes Marie Latinos. Except in such cases, these hgures should not be seen above twice in the same verse. Nor i-hould they readily be put in tiie begin- ning of fi verse, though Virgil has sometimes done it with elegance, ■^s, when he says : .,7,,|), , Si. ad vitulam species ; nihil est qii d p'Xula laitdes. These figures are also harsh at the beginning of the sixth foot, as in Juvenal. ,, ^ Loripedem rectus derideat, jEthio^em albus. though we meet with them in Virgil : Frifrida Dnphni boves adjhtniina : nulla neque Qxnnein» And even in the middle of a pentameter, as in Propertius, Hercnlis, Anta:i(\\XQ, Hesperidumque conies. We mav likewise observe that they are not the most graceful at the end of the fifth foot in heroic verse, as in this of Catullus. Difficile est tongum subifo deponere amorem. Though there are several instances of them in Virgil, who seems even to have aflected them on some occa>ions, as Juturnamque parnt fratris dimittere ab armis. Where he might have said, dimitterefratris ab armis. Again, ■ findit se sanguine ab vno Where he might have said, se sanguine findit ab uno. Thus in the 4th Georg. he expresseth Orphtus's concern in this beautiful verse : Ille cava solans cegrum testudine amorem. Now thes-e figures produce very near the saime effect in the last dactyl of the pentameter, if they are used with great discretion, as Quadrijugo cernes scepe resistere equo. The ecthlipsis and synaloepha are also sometimes at the end of a verse, whose last sylh'ble is cut off by the first word of the next •verse, which begins with another vowel ; as jiut dulcis musti Vulcano decoquiL humorevn^ Aut foliis undam> Virg. Omnia Mercurio similis, vnceniquCf cc^orewque, Et crinesjlavos •• - Virg. OfLATINPOETRY. 377 Jit ntagnos membrorum arfus, magna ossn, lacertosque Exuit Idem. Which led some into a mistake that an hexameter might some- times end with a dactyl. But this opinion we shall refute more amply, chap. 4'. n. 5. IV. Tlie Synala'pha omitted. The synaloepha is sometimes om'tted either regularly, or by licence. Regularly, as in o, lieu, ah, pro, vce, vah, hei, and the like interjection?, which sustain the voice, and retard the pro- nunciation, because of the passion they express, which vents itself outwardly, and thereby hinders those words from being cut oS. As O pater : 6 hominum, divumque teterna potestas. Virg. Heu uhi pacta JiUes, iibi quce jnrare solehaa. Ovid. Ah ego ne passim tarda vide/e mala ? Tibul. The same may be said of w, since we find in Ovid, Et bis io Arethusa, io Arethusa vocavit. The synalcepha is omitted by licence : first when it is con- sidered as a consonant, as the French do with their aspirated H, saying not Chonte, but la honte. Fosthabita coluisse Samo : hic il/ius arma. Virg. Whence, I think, we might infer that the H may sometimes produce a position in verse ; though it is difficult to prove it, the authorities that are brought on that account, being generally joined with a caesura, as when Virgil says : Ille latiis niveum moUi fultus hyacintho. Secondly the synalcepha is omitted without any other reason than the will and pleasure of the poet, who takes this liberty in imita- tion of the Greeks, as Et siiccus pecorl et lac subducitur agnis. Virg. W^e meet likewise with examples of this figure both before H and before another vowel in tiie same verse. Stunt &)juniper\ & castaneeS hirsutcv. Virg. Clamassent, ^ littics Hila, Hiia omne sonar et. Id. But be that as it may, this figure ought to be very rarely used, because it produceth what we call an hiatus in verse, which we should endeavour to avoid ; especially when the syllable is short, though there are instances of some in Virgil, as Htla in the fourth foot of the above-mentioned verse. Again, Et vera incessu pattiit Dea. Ille ubi ■matrem, &c. Where the poet thought he might stop at Dea, because the sense ends there ; and then begins another sentence. The long vowel, or the diphthong that is not cut off by syna- lcepha, becomes common in verse. Therefore it is short by posi- tion, that is because of the next vowel, in these here : NomenSf arma locum servant : t2 amice, nequivi. Virg. Credimusf an qui amant ipsi sibi somnia jingunt ? Id. Te Coridon 6 vC lexi! Trahit sua quemque'voluptas. Id. Jmplerunt mont&s f ^fierunt 'Rhodo^^ii^ arces. Id, On 378 NEW METHOD. Cook X. On the contrary it is long in these. Lamentis s^emitu(jue S) foeminco uhtlntu. Id. A)ite tibi Eoae Atlantidcs abscondtrntur. Id. There are even instances of its being long and short in the same verse, as Ter sunt conail imponere PeHo Ossam. Id. 1. Georg. And in the same book, Glauco t^ Panopea^" &; Inoo Mdicertcc. For o in Glauco, not being cut oft", rcmaineth long : and cr in Pn- iiopecB (the first and second of which are short) not being cut oft" is made short by position. But it is proper to observe that the most antient authors did not allow themselves this liberty, but generally put a. d io remove this hiatus, as in the following verse of Ennius quoted by TuUy, Nam videbar soiiuiiare med' ego esse murluum. Where to ma]§, Theocritus by xaAo;, and others in the like manner. Chapter IV. Of the chief Species of Verse. And first, Of Hexameters, and such as are relative thereto, LATIN verses may be divided into three principal spe- cies, VIZ. Hexameters, and such as are relative thereto, as the Pentameter, which is generally joined with it, or makes part thereof; as the Archilochian, and others of which we shall speak hereafter. Iambics, which are of three sorts of measure, namely Dimeter, that have four feet ; Trimeter that have six feet ; and Tetrameter, that have eight feet ; not to mention those which are either defec- tive or redundant. Lyrics, tlie name we may give in general to all such as cannot be referred to the two first species, because the most elegant are used in writing odes, as Asckpiads, Sapphics, and others. 1. Of Hexameter Verse. Hexameter verse is so denominated from the word t^, sex, and (^hgov, mensurOf because it consists of six feet, the first four of which Of latin poetry. 583 may be indiscriminately, either Spondees or Dactyls ; the fifth must be a dactyl, and the sixth necessarily a Spondee. I I 2 I 3 I 4 \ 5 \ 6 Ab Jure prlncifi-um ]\Iu-sd', J6vh omiua plena. The intermixing of Spondees and Dactyls contributes greatly to the beauty of" this verse. 1 I J2 1 3 I 4 I _5 I 6 Itle tti~am extin-cto 77iise-ratus Ccestire Romam, 1 I 2 1 3 i 4 I 5 I 6 Cum caput dbscu-rii niti-dum fer-rugine ted'itj 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 6 I 6 Impia-que (^ter-mm fimii-erunt sceciild noctem. Id. 1 Gcorg. Otherwise those which have most Dactyls, are generally more agreeable than those which have most Spondees : as Dlscite justM-am mom-ii, et non temnere dJvos. iEn. Virg. 6. But the great art is in making use of Spondees (which are slow) and of Dactyls (which are rapid) according as they are best adapted to the things we want to express. Thus Virgil has re- presented the great labour of blacksmiths in lifting up their heavy hammers, in the following verse, which abounds with Spondees, lUi Inttr sese magna vl brachia toUunt. Georg. 4. and the gravity of an old man in the following, which is preparatory to a speech of king Latinus, T)Ul scdato respondU corde Latinus. JEn. 12. and the slowness of Fabius, whereby he saved the commonwealth, in this other : Unus qui nobis cunctando restitiiit rem. ^^n. 6. On the contrary he expresseth the rapid motion of a horse by the following verse abounding with Dactyls : Quad) upidante pCitrem sonitu guatit ungula campum. JEn. 8» and the swift flight of a pigeon by the following, ■ Mox a'ere tapsa qiiieto Itad'it iter liquidiim, celeres neque commovet alas. 2En. 5. and the fury of the v.'ind and tempest by these, where he has put two dactyls in the beginning : Qua data porta ruunt, 8f terras turbine perjlant^ Incubiiere mari^ totumque a sedibus imis, and by this other; inioniiere poliy S^ crebris micat ignibus ecther. lEn. 1. The fifth foot of this verse is sometimes a Spondee, and then it is called a Spondaic verse ; which, to make up for the slowness of two Spondees at the close, has generally the fourth foot a Dactyl : Cara deurn soboles, magnum Jovis incrementum. Eel. 4. Constitit, atque oculis Phrygia agmina circumspexit, ^n. 2. An(?. this verse seems more agreeable, when it concludes thus with 334 NE^y METHOD. Book X. with a word of four syllables ; though they reckon about ten or twelve in Virgil, that end with a tnssylluble, such as these : I^ro moUi viola, pro purpmeo narcisao. Eel. .5. Slant Sfjun/peri, Sf castanece hirsiitcc. Eel. 7. There are even two in this poet, that have not the fourth foot a Dactyl : Aut leves ocreas lento ducunt argento. /En. 7. Saxa per Sf scopulos, Sf depressas convalles. Georg. 3. II. JVhether an Hexameter Verse may sometimes end with a Dactyl. Here a question may arise whether an Hexameter verse may not sometimes have the sixth foot a Dactyl, as the fifth may be a Spondee : but it is certain it cannot, thougii some authors have believed the contrary. And the reason may be this, at least if we can give credit to Erythreus, that those verses having been heretofore made entirely of Spondees, as indeed there are some of that sort in Ennius, Olli respond/ 1 Rex Albai-Longai. they have ever preserved their Spondee at the latter end ; just as the Iambic having consisted at first entirely of Iambuses, the last foot has always remained an Iambus. And when we find some of those verses that seem to finish otherwise, it is either by reason of a Syncdoepha, the end of the verse being considered as joined to the beginning of the next, according to what we have observed in the precedent chapter, or by reason of a Synaeresis or contraction of two syllables into one, of which we have also taken notice in the same chapter, n. 5. as in Virgil : Inseritur verb exjhetti nucis arbutus horri da Et steriles platani 'Georg. 2. Bis patria cecidere manvs, quin protinus omnia, ^n. 6. So that we must conclude the first verse at horri, and keep da for the next, pronouncing it thus, SrbufUs hoir'i-d' Et steriles platnnif &c. And as to the third verse, we must make' omnia a dissyllable. III. Division of He.vameters into Heroic and Satyric, and Cautions to be observed in order to render them elegant. Hexameters may be divided into Heroic, which ought to be grave and majestic; and Satyric, which may be n)ore neglected. In regard to the former, we may make a lew remarks here for rendering them elegant, over and above what has been said of tlie intermixture of their feet. 1. These verses, except the Spondaic, ought not to conclude with a word tl)at has more than three syllables, except it be a proper name ; as Amphion Dircceus in Actcen Aracyntho. Eel. 2. Hirtacid nis* "^'^'^N r^"r*''^ '''\ "• i. 1 ( 2 \ 3 Prode-as ndvd mptd. And Boetius now and then puts an anapaest, as ' 1 T 2 I 3 Swiili surgit db ortu. The third hath only the two last feet of an hexameter, and i» called y4r/o?2?c, from' Adon, son of a king of Cyprus. Boetius has» put several of them successively in his first book de Consol. Gaudia pelle, Petle timorem ; Spemquejugato, Nee dolor adsit. Nubila mens est, VmctagueJ'renzs, Ha;c ubi regnant. Chapter V. Of Iambic Verses. And first. Of the different Species of Iambics, according to the dif' Jerent Feet of which they are composed. IAMBIC verse is so called, because of the foot iambus that pre- dominates therem. It may be conaidered either according to the difference of the feet it receives, or according to the number of its feet, namely, four, six, or eight. At first it consisted entirely of iambuses; some Of latin poetry. 391 some of that sort are still remaining, and known by the name of pure iambics: as in Catullus the praise of a ship : 1 12 I 3 |4 I 5 I 6 Phdse-lus ll-le quern vide-tis lid-spites^ 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6" Altfws si m-*vium celer-rimus, &c. Carm. 4. and in Horace, the iambics which he has joined to the hexameters in his epodes, od. 16. 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 16 SuiS et tp-sd Ro-md vl-rXbus imlt. Afterwards, as well to remove this constraint, as to reridet the Terse more grave, they put spondees in the odd places ; as 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6. Pars sa-mta-tts xiel-le sd-narifult. Senec. Hipp. Therefore joining the spondee and iambus together, the antients measured them by third epitrits, as St. Austin observeth. Hence those of six feet were called trimeters, as being composed of three epitrits only; and those of four, dimeters, as consisting only of two. Which seems to prove that the odd feet were also obliged to be spondees, and the even ones iambuses. But in process of time they took more liberty. For 1. In the odd places they put indifferently either an iambus or a spondee, except in tragic verses in the fifth foot, where Seneca made it a rule never to put an iambus, because two iambuses successively at the end of the verse render it less majestic. 1 1 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 \ 6 Amor time-re ne-minem verus piitest. Sen. Med, 2. The tribrac having the same time as an iambus, because its two short syllables are equivalent to one long; it has been put instead thereof, except in the sixth foot, where they have indis- pensably preserved an iambus. 1 12 I 3 14 15 16 PrbhUe-ri rati dnul-ldperUuriim potest. Sen. Hipp. S. The dactyl and anapasst having also the same time as the spondee, they have been put instead thereof, wherever they can be put, that is, in all odd places. 1 I 2 1 3 I 4 15 I 6 QuJ stdtuit dli-quTd, par-te inau-dita al-tera, 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 JEquiim licet stdtiie-r^t, haud^guusjuJt. Sen. Med. 1 I 2 I 3 1 4 1 5 I 6 Ddniina-r^l tunn-dus^ spl-rttus altos gere : '1 I 2 I 3 I 4 15 I 6 S^quitur super-bos Ul-tiir a terg^Dtm Id, Her. Fur. 4. The .392 NEW METHOD. Book X. 4. The comic poets have gone further, and, satisfied with end- ing the verse with an iambus, they have inserted every where else those feet which are allowed to be put in odd places ; namely the Iambus, the Tribrac, the Spondee, the Dactyl, and the Anapaest. \ \ ii \ 3 \ 4> \ 5 \ 6 Vlrtu-te amhl-re opor-tet ndnfavitd-fihus. •1 |2|3 l4 \5 \6 Sat habet fdvito-rum sem-pcr qui recte fcicit. 1 I 2 1 3 I 4 |5 I 6 Hbmo sum, Imna-nl nViil a me dli-enilm pi'ito. Ter. Almost all Pha?drus's fables are written in this sort of verie. 1|!2 |3 |4 \ 5 K. Amit-tit meri'topropfi-um quiali-'enu7nap-l)6lit. I. l.f.4. 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 Fudi pdren-tes bbni-tas, 7idn mces-sitds. 1. 1. f. 13. 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 Inops poten-tem dum *vult wii tdrl perlt. 1. 1. f. 23. 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 \ 6 Succes-siis wi-prbho-rum plu-res dl-licit. 1. 2. f. 3, II. Of a Scazon or Claudicajit Iambic. Another difference in the feet of an iambic hath produced a kind of verse called Scazon, from the word cryiot^m, lawe ; because having begun with spondees in the odd places, and with iambuses in the even, they change the cadence of the verse, which parti- cularly depends on the two last feet, taking for the fifth indis- pensably an iambus, and for the sixth a spondee. 1| 2 |3|4|5 \ 6 Nlmt-rum idem dm-ries jdl-Umui\ neque est qulsqudm* 1 I 2 [ 3 I 4 I 5 16 Qiiem non in ali-qua re vide-re Suf-fenum 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 \ 6 Pdssls. Sms cuJque dt-tribu-tus est error. 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 Sed non nide-miis mdn-ticce quod m tergo est. Catul. III. Of Iambics according to the Number of their Feet ^ Of these there are three sorts ; of four feet, called Dimeters, because the Greeks used to measure them two feet to two feet, for the reason above given ; of six feet, called Trimeters ; and of eight feet, called Tetrameters. 1. Of Of LATIN POETRY. 393 '[. Of Dimeters, or Four Feet. Most of the hymns of the Latin Church are in this sort of verse. But when the quantity is not observed, as in that of the Ascension, 80 beautiful in regard to the sentiments : 1 1 2 1 3 I 4 Jesu nostra redem-tw, Amor K^ desiderium, &c. it is a certain proof that they are falsely attributed to St. Ambrose, who had a very good knack at writing these verses, and generally ended them with a trissyllable, which is their best cadence, as 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 Jesil cdrd-?m vlr-ginUm, Quern mater ilia concipit, Quce sola virgo parturit ! Hcec vota clemens accipe. The antients seldom or ever used this sort of verse by itself, but they generally joined it to trimeters, or hexameters. 2. Of Trimeter Sy or Iambics of Six Feet. These are the most agreeable Iambics, being the verse in which tragedies are written. They are most graceful, when they termi- nate with a word of two syllables, 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 Qulcum-que re-gnofJ-dit, et magna pMens Dominatur aula, nee leves metuit DeoSy A?ii??iumque rebus credulum Icetis dedit. Sen, or with a trissyllable, beginning with a vowel, that makes an elision of the last syllable of the precedent word. Juvenile vitium estregere non posse impetum. Sen. Generally speaking, there ought to be a caesura after the two first feet; yet there is sometimes a peculiar beauty in sentences that have not the caesura till after the third foot. Qui nihil potest sperare, desperet nihil. Sen. Med, Qui non vetat peccare, cum possit,jubet. Sen. Troad. Minimum decet Ucere cui multum licet. Sen. Ibid. Quod non potest vult posse qui nimium potest. Sen. Hipp. Cures leves loguuntur, ingentes stupent. Sen. Hipp. But it is likewise to be observed that in all the above verses we are not to pause till after the caesura which follows the third foot. 3. Of Tetrameters, or Iambics of Eight Feet. We meet with this kind of verse no where but in comic poets; as in Terence. 1 1 S I 3 I 4 [ 5 \ 6 I 7 I Fecu-niam m loco neglige-re, ma-awmm m-terdum est 8 lucrum, Ter. Omnes 394 NEW METHOD. Book X. J I 2 I 3 |4 I 5 16 I 7 Omnes quihii res sunt mim' secun-da magi sunt nes-cid I 8- quo modo. 1 |2 |3 I 4 1 5 16 I 7 I 8 Susplci-osi, ad cdn-tinne-liam ovi-iiia ac-cijnu7it magis: !■ I 2 I 3 |4 I 5 I ^ [7 I 8. Propter siiam im-puteH'tiam se sem-per cre-drntneg- lig'i, Ter. IV. Of lamhics either Defective or Redundant, xvhereto ive must liefer those zvhich are commonly called Tro- CHAICS. Besides these three sorts of Iambics, which have exactly the syl- lables of their four, six, or eight feet; there are some that have more or less than one or two syllables. And grammarians not considering this redundancy or defect till the end of the verse, have called them, as already hath been observed, p. 375. Kara- T^yiKToif fi^xyyKo.ra.'kyiKToi, vm^ycxrccKmroi. But' here we may make two observations. The first is, that the syllable may be wanting as well in the first foot, as in the last. So that what they call Trochaic verses, that is which have Trochees or Chorees in odd places, are no- thing more than Iambics, that want a syllable in the first foot. Thus this verse of Horace, 1 I 2 I 3 [4 Non ebur^ 7ieque au-reum, is a dimeter that wants a syllable in the beginning. And the long verses of fifteen half fctt, which we more parti- cularly distinguish by the name of Trochaics, are nothing more than tetrameter iambics or of eight feet, the first of which wants a syllable ; as there are others where it is wanting at the end. 1 M I 3 I 4 I 5\ 6 \ 7 \ Pro pecca-to ma-gnOf pau-lUm sup-plicu satis est 8 Pdtrl. Ter. '"-^Paliidifauces Averni, ^vosqueTanareispecus. Sen. And this is what grammarians do partly acknowledge, when they say that these verses are only, Trimeters, to which a Cretic or Amphimacer (-v) was added in the beginning. For this Cretic making an iambus (v) of those two last syllables, no more is wanting than one with the first to make the two first feet of the Tetrameter. Hence it follows that if you take away, this Amphimacer or Cretic from one of those verses which they call Trochaic, you make an larabic of six feet ; as in the second above quoted, be- ginning Of latin poetry. 395 ginning to scan it from the word fauces ; and, on the contrary, adding this foot to an Iambic Trimeter, you make a Trochaic of it. As if in this, 8ids Sf ipsa Roma viribiis rtiit. Hor. you were to put prccpotens in the beginning. The second observation is, that Iambics, which are a syllable short at the latter end, have always an Iambus before the syllable that remains alone, though this be an odd foot : and therefore they may pass for defective Scazons, as well as for Iambics. 1 I 2 I 31 HahH om-nis hoc mlup-tas. Boet. 1 I 2 M t^ I 5 I Niivce-que per-gunt m-ten-fd luncB. Hor. 1 I 2 1 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 1^71 l^am si rdmt-tmt qulp-piam PhVu-mtnam do Id-res, Ter. 1. Of Imp^rfeqt Dimeters Imperfect Dimeters are either defective or redundant. Defec- tives either want a whole foot at the latter end ; 1 I 2 I 3^ I Mus(B JbviS nata or a syllable, which may be wanting either in the beginning, and these in Horace consist entirely of Iambuses; 1 1 2 I 3 I 4 Tru-ditur dies die, or at the end, so that before the last syllable there Is always an Iambus ; and then the verse is called Anacreonteus, as .1 IS I 3 I Jides Pater supre-mey Quern nemo vidit unquam. Prud. Habet omnis hoc, voluptas, Stimulis agit furentes. Boet. Dimeters in which a syllable i^ redundant at the latter end, are like those which form the third verse of an Alcaic ode, which Horace most frequently useth, as Motum ex Metello, &c. lib, 2. Od. 1. ^1 I 2 I 3 1 4 1, Et cun-cta ter-7'drUm suba-cta. 2. Of Imperfect Trimeters. There is but one sort, namely such as want a syllable at the latter end, which have always an Iambus before the last syllable. Horace has made use of them, lib. 2. Od. 18. where he joins them. to the first sort of defective Dimeters : Non 59(5 NEW METHOD. Book X. N^on ehiir neque aureum 1 - I 2 I 3 I 4 1 5 1 6 Meu rtnl-det In dumd lucu-nar But we shall take notice of the defective Archilochian hereafter. 3. Of Imperfect Tetrameters. Of these there are two sorts of defectives. One such as want a syllable in the beginning, and which we have observed to be erroneously called Trochaics. The hymn on our Saviour's pas- sion, Pangc lingua, is of this kind, each verse of which is divided, as it were, into two ; so that the stanzas which appear to be of six verses, are in reality no more than three. 112 13 I 41 5 _! 6 I 7 I ^8 — Pan-ge iJn-gua glo-rib-si prct-tmn certa-rninls : — Et super Crucis tropha^.um die triumphum nohilem: — Qualiter Redcmptor orbis immolatus vicerit. The other sort of defectives are those that want a syllable at the latter end, where the foot preceding the last syllable, though in the odd place, is ever an Iambus. There are some in Catullus that are pure Iambics, 1 |2i3|4l5|. 6I7|^ Remlt-te pcil-Uum milu meUm qu6d m-vdla-sti — Chapter VI. Of Lyric Verses, and those any way relative to Lyrics. UNDER the word Lyrics I comprehend all verses that can- not be referred to the two species above mentioned ; be- cause the chief of them are made use of in odes and in tragic choruses, though we meet with some that are not used in thos« Eieces, as the Phaleucian ; and others that are used there, though elonging to the two first species. We may therefore divide them into three sorts: 1. Choriambics: 2. Verses of eleven syllables : 3. Anapaestics, and a few others less usual. I. Of four sorts of Choriambics. The antients gave the name of Choriambics to verses which they measured by a Choriambus, that is, by a foot composed of a Choree and an Iambus ( ) though they may be measured likewise by simple feet. There are four sorts. The first and smallest is called a Glyconic, which consists of a Spondee, a Choriambus, and an Iambus. Or more simply of a Spondee and two Dactyls. There are two entire Choruses of this verse in Seneca. lilt Of latin poetry. 597 1_ I 2 I 3 llll mors gravis Incuhat, Qui notus nimis omnibuSy Ignotus moritiir sibi. But Horace never uses them without the Asclepiad verse. The second is the Asclepiad, consisting of a Spondee, t\ro Choriambuses, and an Iambus ; or of a Spondee, a Dactyl, ^ Caesura, and two Dactyls. M(Ece-nas utd-'vts edite regibus. Hor. The third is longer than an Asclepiad by a Choriambus, or by a Dactyl and a long syllable, as lib. 1. Od. 11, 1 I 2 I I 3 I I 4 I 5 Seu plu-res hye-mes seu tribu-it Jupiter ultunam. The fourth is like the first, except that it finishes with a Spoa- dee. Heu quam prcEcipi-fi mersa pro-Jundo. Boet. ^1 I 2 1 I 3 |4 O quam glortfi-ca luce cb-ruscas. Therefore we must not read at the latter end of this hymn to the '^Virgin, Qui tecum nitido vivit in eethere. as some would fain alter it : but Qui tecum nitida vivit in cethra. as it is in the antient editions, and as George Cassander reads it in his collection of hymns : the word cBthra, which is necessary for the measure of the verse, being not only in Virgil more thaa once, as we have elsewhere observed, but likewise in Cicero, Aerem complexa summa pars cceli, quce athra dicitur. 2. de Nat. II. Of Verses of eleven syllables, Sapphic, Phaleucian, and Alcaic. I join these three sorts of verses together, because (except the fourth sort of Choriambics, which are very little used) none but these are always and indispensably composed of eleven syllables. Yet the name of Hendecasyllabic is particularjy appropriated to the Phaleucian. I. Of Phaleucian Verse. The Phaleucian verse is so called from a poet of the name of ^otXetiKos. They consist of five feet ; a Spondee, a Dactyl, and three Chorees or Trochees. Catullus makes likewise the first foot an Iambus or a Trochee. They may be extremely elegant without a caesura. There is hardly a Latin verse that sounds more agreeably in Epigram than this, if it be well wrote. Ca- tullus excels in it, but it is pity that he has mixed such a number of things ofl"ensive to chaste ears. We shall give here an ex- ample 398 NEW METHOD. Book X. ample of this verse from the 1 ith epigram of the first book to Licinius Calvus. 1 I 2 \3 !4 I 5 NJ te plus iicu-l7s 7)ie-Js a-?}iarem, Jucundi^sivie Cake! munere into, Odissem te odio Vatiniano. Nam, quid J eel ego, guidve sum locutus^ Cwr w/e tol male perderes Poeiis ? Dii magai, hoii'ibilem S^' saerum libelium, Qiicm tu scilicet ad tuum Catullum Misti, co)itinud ut die periret, Saiumalibus, optimo dierum. Non, non hoc tibi, saise, sic abibit. Na?n si ItLverit, ad librariorum Curram scrinia, Ccesios, AquijioSj -Suffhmm, Omnia colligarn venena, Ac te //is suppliciis remuneraboi\ Vos hinc intertd valtte, a bite Itluc, unde maluiii pedem tulisiis, ScecU incommoda, pessimi Po'etcs. 2. Of Sapphic Verse. Sapphic verse was invented by Sappho, from vvhom it derives its name. It' has the same feet as the Phaleucian, but differently disposed, viz. a Choree, a Spondee, a Dactyl, and two Chorees. , 1 J 2 1 3 I 4 I _ 5 Crescit ihdul gens sib1, dlrus hydrops. Hor. After three Sapphics they generally put an Adonic. Yet there are choruses where you find a longer series of Sapphics. They are harsh to the ear, unless they have a caesura after the two first feet ; though there are several in Horace that have it not. Qiiam jocus circiimvulat Sf Ctipido. lib. 1. Od. 2. l^licebe si har unique potejis Diana. In Carm. Seoul. Lents Ilithija tiiere matres : Sive tu Lucina probas vocari, Seu Genitalis. Sapphics and Phaleucians may be easily changed into one an- other ; thus this Sapphic verse in Horace, Non e^et Mauri Jnculis nee arcu, may be changed into a Phaleucian only by transposing the words : Non Mauri jacidis eget, nee arcu. And this Phaleucian in Martial Nijnipharum pater, amniumque Rhene, becomes a Sapphic, by transposing it thus : I{ke7ie nymvharum pater, amnmnaue* ^ 3.0/ f Of latin poetry. 399 3. Of Alcaic Verse, Alcaic verse derives its name from the poet Alcaeus. It hath two feet and a half of an Iambic (which they call Penthemimerim lambicam) and two Dactyls. Hence in the first foot it may have an Iambus. . 1 I 2 I I 3 i 4 Vides lit al-ta stet mve candidum. Hor. Though generally it has a Spondee. • 1 I 2 I 13 I 4 Aiidt-rS ma-gnosjam "vidt-or duces, 1 I 2 I I 3 I 4 Ndnm-decd-7'o puhere sordidos. Lib. 2. Od. I. This verse is never put by itself, but after two of them it is customary to subjoin, as a third, an Iambic of four feet, with a long syllable redundant. Et cuncin terrarum suhacta. Hot. 4. Of the lesser Alcaic. The lesser Alcaic consists of two Dactyls and two Trochees. I have placed it here, though it consists but of ten syllables, be- cause it has a relation to the great Alcaic. 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 PrcEter d-trdcem cuii-mum Ca-toms. Hor. IIL Of Anapcestic Verse. All verses of the third species have the number of their sylla- bles determined, except these. The Anapaestic is so called, be- cause it was originally composed of four Anapaests. But as they afterwards took the liberty to put, instead of the Anapaest, a Spondee or Dactyl which have the same quantity, namely four times ; thence it comes that this verse, though called Anapaestic, has not sometimes, so muc'", as one Anapaest. The chorus of tra- gedies is frequently composed of this sort of verse ; which requires no caesura. 1 I 2 1 3 I 4 Qiiantl casus huma-na rot ant , Minus in parvis fortunafurit, Le'oiiisque ferit leviora Deus. Sen. in Hipp. Of this sort of verse there are some that have only two feet, and which now and then are joined to the others, though Seneca on the death of Claudius has put them by themselves. Deflete virum^ Quo non alius Potuii citiiis /\ Discere causas, ' Una tantum Parte auditdy Scepe 8( neutra. IV. Of 400 NEW METHOD. Book X. IV. Of Ardidodiian Verse, and others less frequently used. We have already made mention of" the Archilochian verse, called Dactylica Penthemimeris, p. 391. where we observed that there were several sorts of this name. We shall here take notice of two more. The first are called Heptameter Archilochian^ which have the four first feet of an Hexameter, whereof the last is always a dactyl ; and three Chorees or Trochees, as 1 I 213 |4 \ 5 \ 6 \7 Solvitur acr1.s hy-ems grd-ta vice verbis et Fd-voni. The second are Iambic- Archilochian, as they are called by Dio- medes, comprehending the Iambic Penthemimeris, as well as the above-mentioned Alcaic, and then three Chorees, as 1 I 2 I I 3 I 4 I 5 Trdhfmt-que sJc-cas ma-chi-ncE ca-rlnds. Horace has joined these two verses together, and formed thereof the fourth ode of his first book. But the latter may be measured another way, by leaving a syllable at the end. 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 6 I Ti^dhunt-que slc-cas ma-chince cafi-nas — . So that these verses are nothing more than Iambics that want a syllable, but always require fheir third foot to be a Spondee^; whereas the others, of which we have made mention above, p. 397, suffer it to be an Iambus. Thus they may be changed into perfect Trimeters, only by aoding a syllable ; for instance, if we were to put in the precedent verse carinulns for carinas. I shall take no notice of other sorts of verse that are very sel- dom used, but proceed to say a word or two concerning compo- sitions in verse, and the mixture that is made of different sorts of metre. Chapter VII. Of Compositions in Verse, and the Mixture of different Sorts of Metre, AFTER having explained the nature of verse and its va- rious species, it now remains that we treat of compositions in verse, which the Latins comprehended under the word Carmen, whether it be an epigram, an ode, an epistle, a poem, or Of latin poetry. 401 ©r other work. Hence it is that CatuUus's epigrams are called Carmen 1, Carmen 2, &c. that the odes of Horace are intitled, Carminum tibri ; and that Lucretius stiles his first book Carmen. Quod in prima guoque carmine claret. Hence a single verse cannot be called Carmen^ unless it be per- haps an intire epigram or inscription, comprized in one verse; as Virgil calls the following verse Carmen. jEneas hccc de Dana'is victoribus arma. I. Compositions of one sort of Metre only. Compositions in verse may be considered, either according to the matter, or to the versification. According to the matter they are divided into Epic Poem, Satyre, Tragedy, Comedy, Ode, Epigram, &c. According to the versification, which is the only point we con- sider here, they are divided into verse of one sort only, or into verse of different sorts. The former is called carmen ^ovok«Xo», and the other carmen moXvy-uXov. The verses most frequently used in composing entire pieces are Hexameter, Iambic-Trimeter, Scazon, what they call Tro- chaic, Asclepiad, Phaleucian, and Anapaestic. Those less frequently used in single pieces are Iambic-Dimeter, Glyconic, Sapphic, and Archilochian in Prudentius. Those used very rarely are Pentameter, in Ausonius; and Adonic in Boetius. II. Compositions of different Metre, and their division into Stanzas, called Stkophes. Compositions of different metre are, generally speaking, but two or three sorts. But these are again divided according to the number of verses contained in the stanza, (by the Greeks called ffoip^j which being finished, they return to the first sort of verse •with which they began. With this difference from the French, that the latter generally conclude the sense in one stanza ; whereas the antients seldom observed this rule except in elegiac verse, where the distich ought to end with a full point, or at least a colon : for Horace does not scruple to complete a sense, begun in one stanza, with the two first words of the next, especially in stanzas of two verses : as Eradenda cupidinis Pravi sunt eletnenta : Sf tenerce nirfiis Mentes asperioribus FormandcB studiis. Nescit equo rudis Hcerere ingenuus puer, &c. lib. 3. od. 24. And even in stanzas of four verses, where it does not sound s« well, Districtus ensis cui super impid Cervice pendet : non Siculce dopes Dulcem elaborabunt soporem ; Non avium dtharceque cantiis Somnum reducmt. lib. 3. od. 1. Vol. II. D d III. Com^ 402 NEW METHOD. Book X. III. Compositio)is of two sorts of Metre. And first of those in xvhich the Stanza has but txvo Verses^ and which ay^e called ^ixuXoi/ 3if^o(pov. The Latin stiinzas consist only of two, three, or four sorts of verse ; Catullus alone havine odes, chap. 6. n. 3. p. 401. Damnosa quid non imminuit dies ? jEtas parciitum pejur avis, tidit Nos nequiores, mox daturas Progetiiem vitiosiorem. Hor. h 3. od. 6. The above are the principal species of metre, and composi- tions in verse. But as it will be of use to be able to consider them at one view, 1 have thought proper to exhibit tliem in the two following tables ; which suppose a person to be acquainted with the six necessary feet, of which I shall at the same time give a. small table, to the end they may be known in the large one by the initial letter of their name. Where it must be observed that I <;all the foot containing a long and a short ("") a Choree rather than Trochee, to give it the C, and to let the Tribrac have T. The long caesuras 1 have distinguished by the same mark as the quantity ( ~ ). ^ ^ ' ^ * TwE [ 405 ] F E H T. 1. Spondee S. <2. limbiis <"- I. 3, Choree -" C. 4. Tribrac "•"> T. 0. Dictyl -"" D. n. AnapiEst «'"" A. The first TABLE: OF DIFFERENT SPECIES OF VERSE reduced to Three. tii O in w O H Q Q n Pi W > Entire. Parts. 11. Iam- bics, accord- ins to The qua- lity of their feet. The number of their feet. r Hexame- 1 tors. I Pentame- L ters. Begin- l nin?:. .End. 'Pure Iam- bics. Mixed with I. or T. with S.. or D. and -A. rOf 4 feet! called Di- meters. Of 6 feet Trimeters. < Ordinary. 4. S. or I). | the 5. D. | the 6. S, . . .1 I Spundaics. Ending with two S 2 \. . . . 2 S. or D. I the 3. S. I the 5. and 6, A. . 3 1. Archilochian. 2. D. and a syilab'e 4 2. Alcmanian. 3. D. and a syllable 5 3 3. S. or D. I the 4. D 6 The four last feet 7 S. I D ■ 1. Dact. Tetram. 2. Pherecratian. 3. Adonic, ] That is, all Iambuses. |S. D. . 8 , 9 10 'Ordinary, ending with an I. More exact, having in the even feet. viz. 2. and 4. I or T. In the uneven also S or D. or A. .Scazon. Defective } 11 I Neglected, having in even feet, what the exact ones have only in V '2 .the uneven. Ending with an S. after an I. . . 13 -Perfect 14 Of a foot 15 C In the beginning. 1 6 syllable, ■< At the end. Aaacre- Konlics. 17 Redundant Perfect. . Defective r Of a ■J Of a I ) Of a syllable at the end 18 Of a syllable. {Perfect Defective of ( In the beginning called Trochaics. a syllable ^ At the end * 19 20 21 22 V ters. III. Lyrics. 'Choriambic i Of eleven syl- * lables. S Glyconic. Asclepiad. Alcaics. Alcmanian Phaleucian Sapphic. . Alcaic. Small Alcaic. 1. S. I 2. D. D. D. _ D. D. - D. D. - D. D C. C. S. D. C. r I. I. - |D. C. C. s. c. c. D . . . 23 . . . 24 D. I D. 25 . . . 26 . . . 27 . . . 28 D. . 29 . . . 30 {Anapaestic Hepiameter Archilochian. Trimeter defect. Archiloc. 4. A. 67- D. or S 31 4. feet, one Hexameter and 3 C. 32 I. or S. I I. I - I 3. C. . . . 33 EXAMPLES t 405 ] EXAMPLES OF THK DIFFERENT SPECIES OF VERSE Contained in the foregoing Table, according to the correspondent Figures. 1. Ab Jove principium, Musae ! Jovis omnia plena. Virg. 2. Cara Deum sol>oles, magnum Jovis iacrementum. Id. S. Non solet ingeniis summa nocere dies. Ovid. 4. Pnlvi'? & nmbra snmus. Hor. 5. Munera lifititiamque Dei. Virg. 6. Luminibusque prior rediit vigor. Bdeih. 7. O fortes ppjoraqne passi. Hor. S. Qtiamvis P'jntica piiius. Id. 9. Gaudia pelle. Buelli. 10. Phaselus ille quem videtis hospiles. Catul. I i. Pars sanitatis velle sanari fuit. Sen. 12. Homo sum, hutnani nihil ^ me alienum puto. Ter. 13. Sed non yidemus manticac quod in tergo ebt. Calul. 14. Fortiina;nou mutat genus. Hor. 15. Musas Jovis natse. 16. Trudilur dies (lie. Hor. ^ 17. Ades Pater supreme. Prud. 18. Et cuncta terrarum subacta. Hor. *. Pars sanitatis velle sanari fuit. Sen. 19. Kovaqiie pergunt interire LnnJE. Hor. 20. Pecuniam in loco negligere, maximum Interdum est lucrum. Ter. 21. Vos precor vulgus silcntum, vosque ferales Deos. Sen. 22. Nam si remittent quippiam Philumenam dolores. Ter. 23. Ignotiis raoritur sibi. Sen. 24. Mfficcnas atavis edite regibus. Hor. 2.5. Sou plures hyemes, seu tribuit Jupiter ultimam. Id. 26. O quim gloriGca luce coruscas ! 27. Ni te plus oculis meis amarem. Catul. 93. Crescit indiiigens sibi dirus hydrops. Hor. 29. Audire magnos jam videor duces. Id. 50. Praeter atrocem animuui Catonis. Id. 31 . Quanti casus hunniia rotant. Sen, 3%. Pallida mors aequo pulsat pede pauperum taberaas, 9?c hcgumque turres; 6 beate Sexti. IJor. THE [ 407 ] The second TABLE: OF THE MIXTURE OF LATIN VERSE ^ IN COMPOSITIO.V. With the Figures referring to the precedent Table, to point out the Examples. C Of CIS "-1 fc • %- nOAYKi2AON.^ . Of two sorts, VMwKm, \ Of three sorts, In two verses, J'lVpo<))OV. In four verses, In three verses, seldom used. In four verses, 2. 2. \ Examples of this mixture 7th of verses may he Chapter, art. 34, 3 Pentameter. 4 Archiloohian. \ 7. Dactyl. Tetram, C 10. Tii meter pure. 11. Trimeter. 14. Dimeter. 16. Dim. def. 19. Tritn. defect. 23. Glyconic. 24. Asclepiad. 23. Heptam. 33. 1 rim. Archil. 24. Three Asclepiads. And one Glyconic. Three Sapphics. And one Adonic. Trimeter. Archilochian. Dimeter perfect. Giyco. ic. Asclepiad. Great Choriambic. Asclepiad. 24. Asclepiad. 8. Pherecratian. 23. Glyconic. 29. ■) 29. ( 18. 30. seen more particularly in the 5f and 6. 23. 28. 9. 11. 24. .25. ■24. <> Alcaic ode. Vol. II. END Off THE GRAMMAR. Ee INDEX INDEX INDEX OF WORDS TREATED UPON IN THIS WORK. A, the letter, i. 8. 22. A, preposition, ii. 38. 40. 50. 66, 67. 72. 181 Aala, ii. 249 Ab, ii. 38.40.49.66,67, 68. 72. 181 Abacus, i. 146 Abadir, i. 33 Abalienare, i. 179 Abax, i. 52. 146. ii. 325 Abdere, i. 232. ii. 200 Abdicare, i. 180. 220. 229. ii. 200 Abducere, i. 221. ii. 200 Aberrare, ii. 200 Abesse, ii. 200. 306 Abhinc, ii. 54. 148 Abhorrere, ii. 99. 200 Abiens, i. 88. 310 Abies, i. 78. ii. 341 Abigere, i. 246 Abjicere, i. 207. ii. 200 Abire, i. 283. ii. 43. 200 Abjudicare, ii. 200 Abjungere, i. 241 Abludere, i. 235 Abluere, i. 213. Abnuere, i. 217. ii. 200 Abolere, i. 195. ii. 99 Abolescere, i. 195 Abominor, ii. 102 Aborior, i. 302, bis Aborsus, i. 303. Abrado, i. 236 Abraham, as, i. 164 Abripio, i. 211 Abrogare, ii. 200 Abrumpo, i. 264 Abs, ii. 38. 40. 49, 50 Abscedo, i. 238 Abscido, i. 253. ii. 309 Abscindo, i. 234. 240 Abscondo, i. 232 Absconse, sio, sor, i. 233 Absens, ii. 116 Absente nobis, ii. 152 Ahsida, i. 138 Absinthites, i. 37 Absisto, i. 279 Absolvere, i. 280. ii. 61 Absorbeo, i. 198 Absporto, ii. 268 Absque, ii. 39, 40 Abstemius, ii. 347 Abstentus, i. 190 Absterge, i. 249 Abstinere, i. 189. ii. 99. 200 Abstraho, i. 251 Abstrudere, i. 236 Absiimo, i. 257 Absynthium, us, i. 144 Abundare, ii. 62 Abusio, sus, i. 140 Abuti, i. 299. ii. 71. 104. 200. 307 Abydon, dos, i. 17 Abyssus, i. 44. 48 Ac, ii. 158, 159. 175. 336 Academia, ii. 300 Accedere, i. 238. 240. ii. 201 Accedit quod, i. 238 Accelerare, ii. 99 Acceiido, i. 227 Accerso, i. 273. ii. 285 Accidens, i. 7 Accidere, i. 237, 238. ii. 201 Acciugo, i. 240 Accino, i. 318 Accio, i. 200 Ee2 Accipere, i. 210. ii. 67. 201 Accipiter, i. 5C. 76. ii. 255 Accolo, i. 252 Accresco, i. 195. 223 Accubatio, i. 187 Accubitio, i. 187. Accubo, i. 183 Accumbo, i. 184. 219. 318 Accurro, i. 269, 270 Accu&are, ii. 61 Aceo, i. 310 Acer, i. 19. 75. 103. 142. ii. 86 Accra, ii. 284 Acetabula, lum, i. 136 Acetum, i. 135 Achoetnenis, i. 64 Ackates, i. 8. 62. 121 Acheron, i. 13 Achilles, i. 120, 143 Achilleus, i. 120. 143 Acies, ii. 150 Acinaces, i. 36 Acina, num, nus, i. 139. 144 Acquiescere, i. 223. ii. 201 Acquire, i. 266 Acre, i. 103 Acris, ii. 302 Acrocerannia, i. 163 Acrus, i. 142 Acteon, ii. 333 Actio, i. 106. ii. 177 Actito, i. 312 Actum, us, i. 144 Acua, ii. 272 Acui, i. 310 Acuo, Index of Words. Acuo, i. 213. 310 Acus. i. 44, 45. 48. 83. 124. 143 All, ii. 35, 50. 53, 54. 181. :336, 337 Ad iru lias redactus, ii. 178 Ada;qimrc, ii. '201 Adagio, giiira, i. 140 Ad im, as, i. 164 A'iamas, i. 55. 78. ii. 340 Adamo, i. 178 Adamussim, ii. 150 Adaperio, i. '290 Adaugeo, i. 204 AdaxUit, ii. 121 Addeictos, ii. 284 Addicere, i, 220. ii. 201 Addisco, i. 175. 224 Addo, i. 232 Addor, ii. 120 Addiico, i. 221 Adecito, ii. 284 Adeo, ii. 334 Adeodatus, i. 61 .Adeor, ii. 118 Adeps, i. 50. 70.87. 143. 150 Adeptus, ii, 138 Adesse, ii. 27. 118. 201. Adfeclus, ii. 284 Adfei-o, i. 267 Adhoerere, i. 203. ii. 201 Adhibere, i. 177. 188. ii. 201 Adhuc, ii. 149 Adicilo, ii. 284 Adiens, i. 88 Adigerc, i. 173. 177. 246. ii. 201. Adjicio, i, 203 Adimo, i, 257, 324. ii. 506 Adimpleo, i. 199 Adipiecor, i. 300. ii. 102 Adire, i. 178, 283. ii. 43, 201 Aditus, ii. 305 Adjungo, i, 241, ii, 201. Adjuvo, i. 182, ii, 181 Admiror, ii. 102 Admiscere, i. 190. ii, 201 Admitto, i. 275. Admodum, ii. 149 Admodumquam, ii. 158 Admoii(;o, i. 187. ii. 44 Admonitio, i. 140. 144 Admonitus, turn, i, 140, 144 Admorceo, i. 201 Adnitor, i, 298 Adoleo, i. 195 Adolescens, i. 1.110.115. 195. ii. 81. 88. 177. 286 Adoifscentulus, ii. 89 Adolescere, i. 195. 201 Adoni, idi, i. 120 Adoptare, ii, 201 Ador, i. 34. 142. 150, 152, ii. 321 Adoi-ea, i. 152 Adorior, i. 302. ii. 102 Adoitus, ii. 138 Adpromitto, i. 276 Adque, ii. 275 Adria, i. 25 Adscisco, i. 223 Adsci-ibere, i. 218. ii. 201, 304 Adspiclo, ii. 181 Adstringo, i. 244 Adstriio, i. 215 Adveho, i. 251 Advena, i. 3. ii. 80. 270. 304 Advenio, i. 286, 312. ii, 304 Adventus, ii, 144 Adversari, ii. 201 Adversnm, sus, ii. 35. 38 Advertere, i. 273. ii. 201 Adulter, i. 67 Advoco, i. 180 Advoh'o, i. 281 Advorsum, ii. 255 Adulescens, ii. 2S4. 286 Adulo, ii. 105.201 Adulor, ii. 102, 105, 201 Adultiis, ii. 141 Adnro, i. 270 Adus, i, 34. 142 .ff.depol, see Edepol /Edes, i, 157, ii. 51. 176. 351 .flLddicius, ii. 287 ^.dilis, i. 103 .(Editimus, ii. 351 JEdon, i. 56 yEdos, ii, 280 jEetes, i, 147 .Slgresco, i. 311, Us .ffiguptus, ii. 284 iEgyptus, i. 14. ii. 284 jEmuIari, ii. 201 yEnea, i. 62. 122 iEneas, i. 62. 64, 122. 338. 340 iEneis, i. 119 .iEni^ma, i. 25, bis, 71. !06. ii. 297. 322 jEpy, i. 15 jEqiie ac, ii. 159 jEqui, ii. 65. JEqiiiparare, ii. 252 ^qniperare, ii. 252 /Etiuipollfrc, i. 191 iEquom, i. 65 yEquor, i. 34. ii. 321 Act, i. 32. 74. 119, 150, 151. ii. 320. 339 /Era, i. 1 1 3. 149, ii. 245 Mraz, ii. 245 Aerarius, um, i, 144 JEerium, i. 1 14 Aerius, ii. 285 .ffirum, i. 114 iEs, i. 56. 80, 114, 149, 150. ii. 176. 259. 323 JEstas, i. 35. /Estimare, ii. 66, 201 jEstiva, i. 160 .Slstumare, ii. 234 iEtas, i.35. 77, ii. 259. 322. 340 jEtatium, i, 110 jEther, i. 74, 76. 137. 150. ii. 320. 339 .ffitherius, ii. 285. .a^thica, ii, 236 ^thiops, pus, i. 14S ^thna, i. 14 .(Ethra, i. 137 jEvum, i. 154 Af. ii. 284 Affatim, i. 226, ii, 18. .147 Aflfectio, tus, i, 140 Aftecto, ii. 101 Adector, ii. 101 Aff.;ro, i. 2G7 Afficio, i. 207 Affieior, i, 307, ii. 70 Afligo, i. 242 Affingo, i. 244 Affinis, i. 103. ii, 81 Affinitati, i. 98 Affinitatium, i. 1 10 Affirmo, ii. 113 Aflligo, i. 241 Affliiere, i. 215. ii. 62 AlTrico, i. 186 Affiilgeo, i. 205 Africus, i. 13 Againemno, nou, i. 140 Age, ii. 144 Ager, i. 32. 65 Agere, i, 173, 176. 246. ii, 202 Aggens, Index of \7oiids. Aggens, ii. 275 Aggero, i. 268 Aggredi, i. 301. ii. 102. 'i02 Aggressus, ii. 138. 276 Aggretus, ii. 276 Agguliis, ii. 275 Agilissime, ii. 87 Agilissimus, llitaus, ii. 87 Agito, i. 312, ii. 202 Agna, ii. 82 Agnati, ii. 228 Agnitum, ii. 305. 312 Agnomen, ii. 228 Agnosco, i. 224, 225. 317 Agnoturus, tiis. i. 225 Agnus, 1. 68. ii. 82 Agon, i. 30 Agonale, i. 1 1 8. lia, ii. 177 Agragas, i. 16. 78 Agricoia, ii. BO. 308 Agro, Agroi, i. 125 Aiiala, ii. 249 Ajax, i. 121 Ain, ii. 338 Aio, i. 291. ii. 120.265 Aixi, i. 15 Ala, ii. 249 Alabaster, trum, i. 141 Aliicer, i. 75. ii. 86 Albedo, i. 28 Albena, ii. 270 Albico, i. 311 Albin, i. 92 Albinum, nus, i. 10 Albor, i. 28 Album, ii. 270 Alcedo, i. 56 Alcyoiij i. 55. 57 Alecto, ii. 335 Ales, i. 36. 57. 116. ii. 340 Aletrinati, i. 94 Alex, i. 89 Alexandrea, eia, ii. 261 Alexandria, ii. 261. 359 Alexandrias, i. 134 Alexant.er, ii. 284 Alexin, ii, 338 Algeo, i. 205, 206. 231 Algor, gus, i. 142 Aliae, i. 68 Alienigena, ii. 80 Alieno, i. 179 Alienus, ii. 63 Aliger, ii. 308 Alimodi, i. 165 Alimonia, nium, i. 136 Alioqui, ii. 308 Alipes, i. 107. ii. 341 Aliquanto, ii. 17b Aliquid, ii. 179 Aliquis, ii. 91 Aliquot, i. 164 Aliud, i. 67. ii. 67 Alius, i. 67. ii. 90, 91. 296,297 Allatrare, ii. 202 Allego, i. 180. 248. ii. 202 Allia, i. 13. 25. 154 Allicio. i. 208, 209. 320 Allido, i. 235. ii. 304 Allino, i. 262 Allium, i. 154 Aliobrox, i. 89. ii. 325 Alloquor, i. 297 AlUuio, i. 235 Alluo, i. 213 Alluvies, i. 140 Alluvio, i. 27. 140 Alluvium, i. 140 Allux, ii. 252 Almus, ii. 87, 88 Alo, i. 172. 252. 318. ii. 140 Alpeis, i.'104. es, is, 157 Alpha, i. 164 Alsiosus, i. 206 Altar, re, rium, i. 139 Alter, i. 6S. ii. 91. 297 Alterco, or, ii. 105 Alternis, ii. 145 Alteruter, i. 60. 62. ii. 293 Altum, i. 7. 154. ii. 178 Alvena, ii, 270 Alvear, re. i. 3 39 Alvus, i. 43, 44, 45. 151 Am, i. 250 Amabo, ii. 121. 145 Amandus, ii. 88 Amans, i. 5. 93. 102. 105, 106. ii. 21. 134 Amaracus, cum, i. 144 Amare, i. 171. 173. 177, 178. ii. 130. 310 Amaryllida, i. 121 Amaso, sso, ii. 284 Amathus, i. 17. 86. ii. 345 Amazo, i. 140. ii, 341 Ambage, i. 157. 165 Ambages, ii. 296. 305 Ambe, bes, ii. 255. 305 Ambedo, i. 228. 229 Ambiens, i. 88. 310 Ambigo, i. 247. 250 Ambio, i. 284. ii. 118 Ambior, ii. 118 Ambitus, ii. 305 Ambo, i, 64. 69. ii, 49. 84. 90. 176 Ambulacrum, ii. 302, 303 Aaibulare, i. 178. ii. 26'^ Ames, i. 37 Amet, ii. 181 Amicio, i. 287. 313 Amicus, ii. 177 .^milcar, i. 96 Amitto, ii. 305 Amnis, i. 39, 40. 98.106, ii. 177 Amor, i. 34 Amovere, ii, 43 Amphibrachys, ii. 367 Amphimacer, ii. 367 Amphioi), ii. 300 Amplecto, ii. 105 Amplector, i. 277. 295. ii. 102. 105 Amplexo, ii. 105 Amplexor, i. 312. ii. IQS Amplexus, i. 277 Amplius, ii. 18. 59 Amussis, i. 91 Amygdala, lum, i. 136 An, ii"! 154. 165. 338 Anachorlta, ii. 235 Anapajstus, ii. 366 Anas, i. 56. ii. 322. 340 Anathema, ii. 347 Anceps, i. 70. 88. ii. 325 Anchises, i. 62, 63. ii. 83. 331. 338.340 Anciliorum, i. 118 Ancipes, i. 70 Ancon, i. 16 Ancti, i. 250 Andes, ii. 96 Androgeos, i. 66, ii. 335. 344 Anethum, i. 150 Anfractus, turn, i. 144 Ango, or, i. 250. dis. ii. 22 Angiportus, turn, i. 164. 148 Anguis, i. 57. 99 AngustijE, i. 157 Aniielare, ii. 202. 306 Anien, i. 140 Animabus, i. 64 Animadverto, i. 279. ii. 202 Animal, i. 29. 70. 73. 95, 96. 105. 116. ii. 318 Animare, ii. 303 Animi, ii. 177 Animis, i. 64 Animosus, ii. 303 Animus, ii, 3"3 Anio, i. 72. 140 Annalis, Index' of Wouds. Annalis, ;. 40. 103. Ijj. ii. 178 Anneoto, i. 274 Aniiibal, i. 96. ii. 319 Annularis, i. 6 Annuo, i. 217. ii. 202 Anquiro, i. 2G6. ii. 202 Antac, i. 157 Ante, ii. 35. 54. 61. 182 Antea, ii. 329 Antecedens, i. 7 Antecedere, ii. 202 Antecello, i. 253, bis.3\5. ii. 27, 202 Antecessus, ii. 141 Anteferre, ii, 27 Antegressus, ii. 138 Anteliac, ii. 149 Anteire, ii. 202 Anterior, ii. 88 Antes, i, 155 Antestare, ii. 202 Antestor, ii. 102 Antevenire, ii. 202 Antevertere, ii. 202 Autisc, i. 157 Antibacchius, ii. 567 Antica, ii. 179 Antidotum, tus, i. 47. 144 Antiochia, ii. 300 Antipater, i. 147 Anlipho, on, i. 140 Antistes, tistita, ii. 81 Antoniaster, ii. 90 Antonius, i. 68 Anuis, i. 123 Anxietas, i. 250 Anxius, i. 250 Anxur, i. 16 Aperio, i. 171. 212. 290, 318. ii. 306 Apes, i. 110. 115. 142. ii. 90 Apex, i. 52 Apiaster, tnim, ii. 90 Apinae, i. 160 Apiscor, i. 300 Aplustre, trum, i. 105 Apogaji, i. 13 Apoliinaris, i. 104 Apollo, i. 71. 72. 140 Apotlipca, i. 10 Appareo, i. 193 Appelio. i. 180. 254,255. 309. ii. 202 Appendeo, i. 202 Appendix, i. 52 Appendo, i. 230 Appelo, i, 276 Appia, ii. 180 Appingo, i. 243 Appius, ii. 227 Appiaudo, i. 25G Applico, i. 185 Appono, i. 259 Apprelienilo, i. 227 Apprime, ii. 61 Appropinquare, ii. 202 Appulcius, ii. 288 Appiilit, ii. 178 Apricus, ii. 88 Aprilis, i. G A|)sens, ii. 268 Aptus, ii. 34 Apud, ii. 35 Apus, i. 49 Apyi, i. 97 Aqualis, i. 39, 92 Aquiia, i. 5. 56 Aquileia, ii. 298 Aquilex, i. 89. ii. 325 Aqnilo, i. 12 Aquonsu^, ii. 249 Ara, i. 25. ii. 285 Arabs, i. 86. 146 Arabus, i. 146 Aranea, um, us, i. 139 Arar, i. 91. 97. 142 Aratrum, ii. 303 Arbilla, ii. 270 Arbitratus, ii. 138 Arbitror, ii. 102 Arbor, i. 18.34. 142. ii. 321 Arbos, i. 43. 142 Arbustum, i. 21 Arbutiini, tus, i. 21 Arcades, ii. 341 Arcados, if. 344 Arcanum, ii. 177 Areas, ii. 322. 340 Arcasin, ii. 338 Arceo, i. 118 196 Arcesso, i. 272, 273. ii. 61.285 Archelaus, ii. 300 Archilecto, tor, tus, i. 140 Archytas, ii. 347 Arcio, i. 273 Arctopliilax, i. 53. ii. 326 Arctos, i. 43. ii. 344 Arctus, ii. 286 Arcus, i. 123. 148 Ardea, i. 15 Ardeo, i. 203. 321. ii. 203 Ardesco, i. 226. 311 Arduius, ii. 89 Arefacio, i. 206 Arena, i. 152 Areopagus, ii. 347 Aresteis, i. 104 Arfinis, ii. 284 Argeiitum, i. 135 Argi, i. 1.30 Argo, i. 14 Argos, i. 17. 130. ii. 344 Argos-hippium, i. 130 Arguo, i. 171, 172. 213. 324. ii. 312 Arguor, i. 297 Argus, i. 130 Argutia, i. 157 Argutioia, i. 157 Argutum, ii. 312 Argyrippa, i. 130 Arida, i. 7 Aries, i. 5. 37. 76. ii. 341 Arjetat, ii. 264 Ariobarzani, i. 120 Aristoteles, i. 120 Aristophanes, i. 121 Arithmetica, ii. 299 Arlabi, ii. 284 Arma, i. 23. 155. ii. 203 Armiger, i. 67. ii. 88 Aromatites, i. 37 Arpinas, i. 94. 109, 110 Arrado, i. 236 Arrhabo, i. 28 Arrideo, i. 202. ii. 203 Arrideri, ii. 203 Arrigo, i. 241 Arripio, i. 177 Ars, i. 49. 111. ii. 177 Arteria, um, i. 136 Artcs, i. 70 Artifex, i. 108, 109. ii. 308 Artocrcas, i. 55 Artns, i. 123, 140. 156. ii. 286 Arva, vum, i. 136. ii. 177 Arvilia, ii. 270 Arvina, ii. 270 Arundo, i. 27 Arx, i. 51 As, i. 11. 35. 78. Ill Asa, ii. 284 Ascendo, i. 228. 323, 324 Ascisco, i. 223 Asdrubal, ii. 319 Asinabus, i. 64 Asper, i. 67 Aspergo, i. 249, ii. 203 Aspernari, i. 312. ii. 102 Aspicio, i. 208. 320 i^pides, ii. 341 Aspirare, Index of Words. Aspirare, ii. 203 Asporto, i. 231 Assecia, i. 3. ii. 80 Assector, ii. 102 Assensus, ii. 138 Assentio, i, 288. ii. 105. 203 Assentior, i. 312. ii. 105 Assequor, i. 298. ii. 103 Assero, i. 271. 317, 318. ii. 203 Asservare, ii. 203 Assideo, i. 200. 232 Assiduus, ii. 89 Assilio, i. 289 Assim, ii. 121 Assis, ii. 65 Assisto, i. 279 Assoiio, i. 183 Assuefacio, i. 206. ii. 203 Assuesco, i, 224. ii. 99. 203 Assum, ii. 284 Assumo, i. 256 Assuo, i, 214 Assurgo, i. 243. ii. 203 Asterias, i. 35 Asto, i. 181. ii. 203 Astruo, i. 315 Astus, i. 164, 165 Astyanax, i. 90 Asversa, ii. 284 At, ii. 275 Atavos, i. 63 Atax, ii. 327 Athenas, i. 15. 24, bis. 134. 160 Athos, i. 66. ii. 335. 344 Atinate, i. 94 Atomus, i. 44. 47, 48 Atque, ii. 158. 175 Atramentarium, ii. 180 Atrax, ii. 327 Atri, ii. 302 Atriplex, xum, i. 54 Atrox, i. 1 16 Attagen, i. 56. 137 Attendo, i. 229. ii. 203 Attentus, i. 190 Attero, i. 265, 266 Attexo, i. 282 Atticisso, i. 311 Attineo, i. 190. ii. 203 Attineri, ii. 203 Attinet, ii. 43 Attingo, i. 175.245 Attollo, i. 255, bis Attraho, i. 25 1 Attribuo, i. 214 Atys, i. 97 Avaritia, i. 138. 152 Auceps, i. 87. ii. 324 Auctio, i. 294 Auctionarius, i. 294 Auctionor, i. 293 Auctor, i. 294. ii. 81.286 Auctoramentum, i. ISO Auctoratus, i. ISO, 294 Auctoritas, i. 294 Auctoro, i. 180 Auctrix, ii. 81 Auciipo, or, i. 294. ii. 105 Audacia, ii. 285 Audeo, i. 304. ii. 107. 143. 284 Audio, i. 171. 173. 282. ii. 67. 118. 304. 310. 312 Audit bonus, ii. 181 Auditio, tus, i. 140 Auditum, ii. 312 Avellana, ii. 179 Avello, i. 255 Avenae, i. 150 Aveo, i. 198. ii. 269 Averna, nus, i. 127 Averto, or, i. 278. ii. 101 Aufero, i. 267. ii. 269 Aus:eo, i. 204. 294. ii. Too Augmen, turn, i. 141 Augur, ii. 81 Anguro, or, ii. 103. 105 Augusta Veromanduo- rum, i. 24 Augustodunum, i. 24 Avia, i. 161 Avis, i. 92. 99. 106 Avius, i. 161 Aulai, i. 63. 327. ii. 298 Aulus, ii. 227 Avos, i. 43. 65 Aureiia, ii. ISO Aureus, ii. 88. Aurioularis, i. 6 Auriga, ii, 80 Aurufex, ii. 258 Aurum, i. 29. 135. ii. 297 Auscultate, ii. 203 Ausim, ii. 108. 121 Ausom, ii. 284 Auspice, or, ii. 105 Auster, i. 12, 13 Ausus, ii. 139 Autor, ii. 81 Autumnal, i. 96. 139 Autumnus, i. 144. 151 Auxi, i. 320 Auxiliari, ii. 27 Auxiliaris, rius, i. 143 Auxiliatus, ii. 139 Axim, ii. 121 Axis, i. 39. 116 Axitiosi, ii. 121 Axo, ii. 108. 121 ; Azymus, ii. 347 B. B, the letter, i. 22 Bacchanalia, i. 113. 163. ii. 177 Bacchar, ris, i. 31, 32. 96. 142. ii. 320 Bacchius, ii. 367 Bacchus, i. 69 Baciilum, i. 144 Bactra, i. 15. 23. 163 Baculus, uva, i. 144. ii> 305 Balanus, i. 47 Balare, ii. 252 Balbus, ii. 87, 83 BaJineuni, i. 132 BalnejB, i. 131. 157 Balneator, ii. 81 Balneum, i. 131. 132 Balsamum, i. 20 Bdlteus, i. 144 Baptisma, i. 139 Barathrum, i. 154 Barba, i. 152. 157 Barbaria, es, i. 138 Baro, i. 130 Bavbytus, i. 47. 144 Base, ii. 269 Basilica, ii. 177 Basilius, ii. 300 B-»tualia, i. 161, 162 Batuo, i. 217 Beatitas, tudo, i. 140 Bejugje, ii. 296 Bella're, ii. 203 Belli, ii. 144 Bellicum canere, ii. 179 Belligero, i. 312 Bellor, ii. 101 Bellus, ii. 88 Bene, ii. 331 Bencdicere, ii. 219 Benefacio, i. 206. 312 Benemane, ii. 150 Benevolus, ii. 286 Benivolns, ii. 286 Beo, i. 178 Berylius, i. 47 Bes, i. 12. 80. 114. ii. 323 Beta, i. 164 Bibitum, *? Index of Words. Ribitum, ii. 305 Bibhis, i. 47 Bibo, i. '217. 323. ii. 309 Bibracte, i. 06 l!il)rax, i. 90 Biceps, i. 88. ii. 308. 325 Bicolor, ii. 508 Bicorpor, i. )()6 Biclens, i. 7. 50, ii. 179 Biduiim, ii. 308 Bgse, ii. 1.57 Biis, ii. '296 Biis, i. 152 Bilix, i. 168 Bimestre, i. 104 Bimus, ii. 351 Bini, i. 64 Bipennis, i. 7. 40. 103 Bipes, i. 60. 80. 113. ii. 341 Bis, ii. 348 ^Biturix, i. 89 Bivium, ii. 308 Blandior, i. '/tiS. 296. ii. 10 > Blanditia, ef, i. 133. 157 Bianditiis, ii. 139 Blitiis, uin, i. 144 loetis I. 92. 98 Bc.^i.d, I. 72 Bnmbix, i. 52. 57 Bona, i. 161 Bona?, ii, 177 Buui, ii. 65 Bonitas, i. 77 Bonus, i. 6. 69 Borea-, i. 12. 13 Bos i. 5. 82, 83. 133. ii. 81. 296.323. 328 .Brevia, i. 161. ii. 179 Brevis, ii. 179 Briareus, i». 345 Bruges, ii. 270 Bryaxis, J. 90. 92. 119 Bubo, i. 57 Bubula. ii. 177 Bubns, ii. 323 Baccina, uni, i. 136 Biuiiia, ii. 286 Bi.rolica, ii. 179 Bdciila, ii. 328 Bura. ris, i. 91. 138 Burgimdinnes, ii. 319 Butyrum, i. 135. 153 Buxuin.i. 20,21. 141.144 Buxus, i. 141. 144. ii. 268 C. Cachinno, or, ii. 99. 105 Cacoethps, ii. 341 Cadaver, i. 32 Cadeiilum, iuin, i. 115 Cado, i. 174. 237. 240. ii. 203. 304. 310 Caducus, I. 237 CjECutio, i. 285 Capdo, i. 172. 174. 237. 2 lO. ii. 286. 301. 309, 310 Casdu-n, iiim, i. 1 16 Calare, ii. 203 Cailebs, i. 86. ii. 324 Cerpiones, ii. 280 Caeie, i. 96 Caesa, ii. 177 Ciesar, ii. 320. 339 Ca's.'ironiaL;ns. i 24 Ca,>stus, i, 151. ii 286 Caetera, ii. 46. 182. 286 Cains, ii. 2:1. 206. 284, 298 Calamister, trum, i. 141 Calamistum, tus, i. 144 Calamitatium, i. 1 10 Calcaneus, imp, i. 1 41' Calcar, i. 31. 74. 95. 113. 139. ii. 320. 339 Calcfo, i. 178 Cairhas, i. 122. 147 Calefacio, i. 206. 312 Caleo, i. 193. 311. ii. 204 Calpxco, i. 226. 311 Cajigo, i. 72 Calix, i. 52. ii. 326 Calliopen, ii. 338 Cailis, i. 39, 40 Callum, i. 144. 154. ii, 204 Callus, i, 144 Calor, i, 34 Caipar, i. J59 Calveo, vesco, i. 311 Calvo, i. 281. 317. 324 Calx, i. 53, 54 Cambio, i. 990 Cameliis, i. 56, 57. ii. 80 Campester, i. 76 Campso, i. 290 Campuin, ii. 177 Canalicula, i. 40 Caiialis, i. 40. 97 Canceili, i. 23. 156. ii. 267 Cancer, i. 32, 33. 67. 147. ii. 267 Candace, ii. 34S Caiuklahfr, brum, brus, i. 141 144, ii. 302 Caiideiiti, i. 102 Candico, i. 311 Candn, i. 227 Cani, i. 99. 15G Canimeii, ii. 267 Caiiis, i. 5. 9;'. 109. ii.81 Canister, trum, i. 141 Canitia, es, i. 138 Cannabis, i 92. 150 Cano, i. 37. 174. 259. 260. 32 1. ii. 181. 204, 267. 3i() Canon, i. 30 Canorus, ii. 87, 88 Canus, 88 Capenas. ii. 87 Capenate, i. 94 Capero, ii. 100 C:ipesso, i 273, bis. Capillus, lum, i. 144 Capio, i. 209, 210. 273. 324. li. 286 Capistrum, i. 131 Capital, i. 139 Capo, pus, i. 140 Ca|!pud(.cus, dox, i. 145. ii. 326, 327 Cappar, i. 96 Ciptivei, i. 65 Capto, i. 312 Captiis, ii. 62 Capulum, ii. 258 Caput, i. 29. 88. 105. ii. 69. 270. 325 Capvs, i. 97. ii. 342 Cacbasus, i. 44, 45. 128. 144 Career, i. 74. 1 18. 151. 15il. ii. 177. 320 Cardo, i. 27. 72 Carduos, i. 150 Careo, i. 188. 190. 192. ii. 204 Carpx, i. 53 Caritas, i, 152 Carmen, i. 141. if. 267. 319,400 Cainientvmi, i. 141 Cainifex, i. 108, 109 Cunufex, ii. 308 Carn, i. 'J7. 70. 72. 114. 115. 140. ii. 177 Carpn, i. 172, 173. 263. 319. 320. ii. 270 Carrum, rns, i. 144 Cartaginem, ii. 230 CartacinicDses, ii. 273 Caseum, us, i. 144 Casinate, i. 94 Casnii n, ii. 284 Casmrerioe, ii. 276 Cassaiitra, ii. 384 Index of Words. Cassiopea, ii. 300 Cassis, i. 38. 40. 156. 188 Cassis, idis, i. 81. 138 Cassus, i. 188, ii. 62 Castanea, i. 21. ii. 179 Castellum, i. 161 Castor, ii. 321 Castra, i. 23, 137. 161. ii. 177 Castriiin, i. 157. 161 Catalvigon, i. 66 Catapulta, ii, 307 Gate, i. 1 98 Calzech II menus, ii. 297 Catilioa, i. 10 Calillam, lus, i. 144 Catinura, nus, i. 144 Catulus, ii. 82 Catus, i. 198 Caudex, i. 52. 54 Cave, ii. 176. 181 Cave cadas, ii. 176 Cave sentiant, ii. 54 Caveo, i. 197 Caveo tibi, ii. 178 Cavere, i. 171, 197. 317. ii. 67. 504 Cavere inalo, ii. 67. 173 Cavillor, ii. 103 Cavilio, i. 198 Caulae, i. 157 Caulis, i, 39 Caurus, i. '54 Causd, ii. 173. 177 Cadsarius, i. 294 Causidicus, ii. 304. 308 Caiisor, i. 294 Caus.sa, ii. 277 Cecidi, ii. 286. 310 Cecini, i. 324. ii. 310 Cedo, i. 237. 238. 240. 321, 322. ii. 121. 204. 334, 335 Celeber, i. 75. 103 Celebre, i. 103. ii. 268 Celer, i. 107. 118. 142. ii. 86. 277 Ceierare, ii. 99 Celere, ii. 268 Celeres, i. 1 18 Celerissiiniis, ii. 86 Celes, i. 79 Celeste, i. 104 Cello, i. 253, lis Celo, ii. 45 Celtiber, i.67.ii. 318. 339 Cenas, ii. 284 Cenchiis, i. 57 Ceasco, i. 190, ii* Censeor, ii. 101 Censio, i. 190 CiMisit.r, i. 190 Ceiisudi, us, i. 144 Centaiirea, ii. 300 Centaurus, i. 14 C<'ntt-iia, ii. 177 Centies, ii. 236 Centimaiius, i. 148 Centum, ii. 273 Centum, unus, ii. 85 Ct-ntussis, i. 11.91 Cepa, pe, i. 136 Cepet, ii. 252 Cepi, i. 324. ii. 286 Ceiffi, i. 150 Cerasus, i. 18, 144 Cercops, ii. 325 Cerealia, i. 163 Cerealis, i. 104 Ceremooiae, i. 157 Ceres, i. 79, ii. 322. 341 Cerliere erat, ii. 177 Cerno, i. 261, 262. 310 Certo, ii. 178. 204 Cervicium, i, 1 15 Cervix, i. 52. 152 Cespes, i. 36 Cessatur, ii, 141 Cessatus, ii. 141 Cessores, ii. 267 Cestus, i. 151. ii. 286 Cete, tus, i. 23, 24. 161, 164. ii. 331 Cette, ii. 121 Ceveo, i. 198 Ceu vero, ii. 154 Chalybs, i. 50 Cliam, i. 164 Chaos, i. 22, 23. ii. 344 Character, i. 76 Charilaus, ii. 500 Charites, i. 81. ii. 323 Charta, i. 26 Chelys, i. 18. 59. ii. 342 Cherubim, i. 22, 23 Chiragra, ii. 300 Chirographus, i. 144 Chlamys, i. 18. 39. 81, 121. 139 Chcenix, i. 52 Chorea, ii, .300 Choridon, ii. 338 Chorona, ii. 280 Chorus, i. 68 Chremes, i. 63. 79. 120. 122 Chrysolithus, i. 47 Chrysoprasius, i. 47 Chytrapus, i. 49 Cibica, ii. 269 Cibus, i. 148 Cicatrix, i. 52 Cicer, i. 32 Cieero, i. 71. ii. 319 Cichorea, um, i. 137 Cicurare, ii. 348 Cicur, ii. 88 Cicuris, ii. 548 Cieo, i. 199 Cilix, ii. 327 Cimex. i. 53 Cimmericon, i. 66 Cimmeron, ii. 338 Ciner, i. 70. ii. 277 Cingo, i. 240. 320 Cingulum, us, i. 144 Cinis, i. 39, 40. 81, 100. ii. 277 Cinnamomum, i, 21 Cintus, ii. 272 Cio, i. 200 Circa, ii. 35. 182 Circa, ce, i. 136 , Circenses, ii. 178 Circiter, ii. 37, bis. 54 Circuitus, ii. 141 Circum, ii. 35. 152. 35S Circumcido, i. 238 Circumcurro, i. 269 Circumeo, ii. 118 Circumequitare, ii. 43 Circumflecto, i. 274 Circumpango, i. 245 Circumplicatus, i. 186 Circumsecus, ii. 152 Circumscribo, i. 218 Circumsepio, i. 289 Circmnspicio, i. 208 Circumvenio, i. 286 Circundare, i. 181, ii. 204 Circunduco, i. 221 Circus, ii. 152.358 Cis, ii. 36. 342. 348 Cistella, ii. 90 Cistellula, ii. 90 Cistula, ii. 90 Citimus, ii. 348 Cite, ii. 3S4 Citra, ii. 36 Citraque, ii. 348 CitresB, ii. 179 Citro, ii. 348 Citum, ii. 31 1, bis Civica, ii. 177 Civis, i.4. 93. ii. «1 Civitas, i. 18. 24. 119, 111 OJUK, ii. 289 Clades, *■ Index of Words. Clades, i. 78. 109 Clam, ii.39. 42 Clamare, ii. 99 Clainilo, i, 312 Clanculum, ii. 39 Clango, i. 250, bis Clareo, i. 191 Clase, ii. 264 Classiciim, ii. 1'79 Classis, i. 81. 99 Claiido, i. 234. 321 Claudus, ii. 87, 88 Ciavicula, lus, i.l39 Clavis, i. 92. 96 Claustrum, i. 131 Cleopatra, ii. 348 Olepo, i. 263 Oliberta, ii. 289 Cliens, ii. 80 Clienta, ii. 80 Climax, ii. 325 Clio, ii. 300 Clitella3, i. 158. ii. 177 Clivum, vus, i. 144 Cludo, i. 235 Clunis, i. 39, 40. ils Cluo, i. 217 Clypeus, j. 144. 217 Cneiis, ii. 227 Coago, ii, 296 Coaiitus, i. 193 Coccyx, i. 57 Cochlea, i, 26 Cochlear, i. 139. 141 Codes, ii. 80 Coda, ii. 284 Codex, i. 52. 54 Caido, ii. ."304 Ccelicola, i. 64. ii. 80 CoRlites, i, 116, 117 Coelitus, i. 156 Ccehim, lus, i. 117. 129. 144. 154. 156. ii. 177. 286 Coementa, turn, i. 156 Coenatiir, ii. 143 Ccenatiirio, i. 291.312 Coenatns, ii. 143 Coenum, i. 154. 231 Coeo, i. 284. ii. 99. 204 CoFjpio, i. 210. ii. 119. 181. 286 Coeptus, ii. 119. 141 Coeravit, ii. 261. 284 Coerceo, i. IBS. 196. ii. 306 Copiiare, ii. 204 Cognitnm, ii, 305. 312 Cognomen, i. 104. ii. 228 Cognosce, i. 224, 225 Copo, i. 173. 247. ii. 296 Cohaerco, i. 203 Cohibeo, i. J 88 Cohors, i. 114, 115 Cohortor, ii. 103 Coiravit, ii. 261 Colax, ii. 327 Colchis, OS, us, i. 16 Coiis, i. 39 Collido, i. 235. ii. 304 Colligo, i, 248 Coilis, i, 39. 109 Colloqiior, i. 297. ii, 204 Colliiceo, i. -205 Collum, us, i. 144 Colluvies, vio, i. 140 Colo, i. 252. 309, 318. ii. 310 Color, los, i. 43 Colossus, i. 47 Colostra, irum, i. 137 Colpam, ii, 255 Columba, hus, ii. 82 Colus, i. 43, 44, 45, 143 Coiustra, truni, i, 137 Combibo, i, 218 Comburo, i. 270 Comedo, i. 228. ii. 81. 306 Cometa, tos, i, 25, 26. 57, 138. ii, 178 Cominus, ii. 149 Comitatus, ii. 139 Comitia, i, 161 Comito, or, ii. 102, 105 Commeatus, i, 179 Commentarium, us, i. 144 Commentatus, ii. 139. 141 Commeo, i. 179 Commcntum, ii, 119 Comminjscor, i, 300, bis. ii, 119 Commisceo, i, 190 Commisi resco, ii. 105 Committo, i. 275, ii. 204 Conimodare, ii. 204 Commodum, ii. 180 ' Commoncfacio, i, 206,. ii. 46 Commoneo, i, 188. ii. 44. 46 Commorior, i. 302 Cominunicor, ii. 102 Como, i. 256. 319, 320 Compages, go, i, 140 Compar, i. 93. ii, 339 Comparco, i. 222 Compareo, i. 193 Compcdio, i. 313 Compediom, i. 115 Conipello, i. 254 Comperio, or, i. 290, 313., JI8. ii. 102 Compertus, i. 291 Compes, i. 60. 80. 158 Compesco, i, 224, 225. 318 Competo, i. 276 Compingo, i. 245, 247. 324 Compita, i, 161 Compitalia, i. 1 18 Compitum, us, 144. 161 CotHplaceo, i, 192 Complaudo, i. 236 Complector, i, 277. 296. ii. 103 Compleo, i. 199. ii. 65, 204 Complexus, }. 277. ii. 139 Complico, i, 185 Complutus, i, 216 Conipono, i. 259. ii, 205 Compos, i. 43, 82. 107, ii, 62. 323, 34'4 Compoto, i. 182 Comprehendo, i, 227 Comprimo, i. 258 Compromissum, i. 276 Compromitto, i, 276 Compungo, i. 248 Conago, ii. 296 Conatus, ii, 139 Coucanui, i. 260 Concedo, i. 258. ii, 205 Concido, i. 237, 238, 240 Conciliarc, ii. 205 Concinnitudo, tus, i, 140 Concino, i. 174. 259,260. 318 Concio, i, 27 Coiicionari, ii, 99 Concipio, i. 210 Conclave, vis, vium, i. 139 Concludere, ii. 205 Coiicoquo, i. 265 Concors, i, 70. 88. 143 Concrepo, i. 1 84 Concresco, i. 223. 225 Concretns, i. 225. ii, 141 Concurro, i, 269, ii, 205 Concutio, i, 212 Condamnare, ii. 252 Condeuinare, ri, ii. 62. 205. 252 Condepso, i. 273 Condico, i. 220. ii. 205 Coadia Index of Words. Condio, i. 283 Condo, i. 232 Condoceo, i. 189 Cundoleo, i. 193 Conduco, i. 221. ii. 205 Confectus, ii. 62 Confercio, i. 288 Confero, i. 267. ii. 205. C'onfessior, ii. 89 Confessus, ii. \39 Conficio, i. 207 Confid.), i. 305. li. 205 Configo, i. 242 Confmgo, i. 244 Confiteor, i. 177.297. ii. 205 ConHacuit, ii. 284 Conflictare, ri, ii. 205 Confligo, i. 241 Confluens, i. 6. ii. 177 Confluo, i. 215 Confodio, i. 209 ' Confringo, i. 246 Confundo, i. 234 Congener, i. 107 Congero, i. 268, ii. 205 Consfredior, i. 301. ii. 205 Congrego, i. 89 C(jngruo, i. 216. ii. 205 Conia, i. 327 Conjicio, i. 203 Conjuiigo, i. 241. ii. 197. 205 Coniux, i. 3. 70. 89. ii. 81. 180.525 Conlega, ii. 234 Connecto, i. 275 Connitor, i. 299 Conniveo, i. 198.317 Connubium, i. 219. ii. 305 Connubo, i. Q19 Conopeuna, ii. 348 Conqueror, i. 298. ii. 205 Couquiescere, ii. 205 Conquiuisci), i. 225, bis Conquiro, i. 266 Conscendo, i. 228. ii. 18. 178 Conscindo, i. 234. 240 Conscio, i. 283 Conscisco, i. 224 Conscribo, i. 218 Consectus, ii. 103 Consecutus, ii. 139 Consentio, i. 288. ii. 203. 205 Consepio, i. 289 ConsequenSj i. 7 Consequor, i. 298. ii. 103. 205 Consero, i. 271, bis. 272. 317. ii. 205 Consideo, i. 200. ii. 206 Consido, i. 233.240.313 Consilior, ii. 102 Consilium, ii. 177 Consisto, i. 260. 279. 310 Consol, ii. 255 Consolatos, ii. 139 Consolor, ii. 103 Consonans, i. 7 Consono, i. 183 Censors i. 107. 109 Consortio, um, i. 109. 140 Conspergo, i. 249 Consnexi, i. 320 Conspicor, i. 209. ii. 103 Conspiratiis, ii. 142 Constare, i. 181. 310. ii. 99. 206 Consterno, i. 261, 262 Consternor, i. 299 Constituo, i, 214 Constrepo, i. 264' Constringo, i. 244 Construo, i. 215 Consiiescere, ii. 206 Consul, i. 37. ii. 319 Consulii, i. 253. ii. 206 Cousulo tibi, ii. 180 Consultus, ii. 88 Consumo, i. 257 Consuo, i. 214 Consurgo, i. 243 Contages, io, ium, i. 27. 140, 141. 152 Conteinno, i. 260 Contendo, i. 229. ii, 206 Contentus, ii. 63 Contero, i. 266 Contestatum, i. 294 Contestor, i. 294 Contexo, i. 282 Conticeo, i. 196 Conticesco, i. 312 Continens, i. 7. 102. ii. 180 Contineo, i. 189 Contingo, i. 177. 245. ii. 206 Continoeis, ii. 284 Contono, i. 184 Contorqueo, i. 204 Contra, ii. 36. 329 Contraho, i. 25 1 Contribuo, i. 214 Controversus, ii. 348 Cootundo, i. 230 Contuor, i. 297. 309 Conturbare, ii. 179 Couvaleo, i. 192 Conveho, i. 251 Convena, ae, ii. 80 Convenio, i. 286. ii. 20G Converritorem, i, 270 Converto, i. 278. ii. 101 Convicium, ii. 286 Conviva, ii. 81 Convivo, i. 280 Convoivo, i. 281 Coo[jeru'sse, ii. 296 Copia, i. 158. ii. 177 Copiosus, ii. 63 Cop a lor, ii. 102 Coto, i. 181. ii. 67 Distorqueo, i. 204 Distraho, i. 251, ii. 67. 113 Distriluio, i. 214 Districtus, ii. 286 Distriiigo, i. 244 Diu, ii. 144. 252 Dives, ii. 86 Divissiones, ii. 277 Diviti.-E, i. 158 Divitior, ii. 88 Do, i. 176. 180.232. ii. 29. 67. 120. 206. 309. 313. 334 Doceo, i. 189. ii. 45. 66. 208 Docilissime, ii. 87 Docilissimus. li. 87 Doctius, ii. 144 Dodrans, i. 12 Dogma, J. 25. 119, 147. ii. 322 Doleo, i. 193. 312. ii. 208 Dulops, ii. 324 Dolor, los,i. 34. 43 Dolus, i. 43 Doinatio, i. 187 Domi, ii. 144 Doiiiinabus, i. 64 Doniinor, i. 294. ii. 103. 203 Dominus, i. 65, 66, 68, 69 Domo, i. 171. 184. 187. 313 Domus, i. 44. 123. 133. ii. 47. 144. 177. 209 Donare, ii. 71.208 Donaria, urn, i. I6l Doneo, ii. 154. 356 Dor, i. 181. ii. 120 Dormieiidus, ii. 141 Dorniisco, i. 311 Dormito, i..312 Dormiturio, i. 291 Dorsum, sus, i. 144 Dos, i. 42. 82. 112. ii. 323 Draco, ii. 335 Dryasin, dlbus, i. 122 Du"bitare, ii. 99. 208 Ducenti, i. 64, ii. 308 Diicere uxorem, ii. 177 Ducis, i. 70. 89. 91. ii. 304. 357 Duco, i. 89. 221. 308. 520. ii. 29. 66. 209. .'304. 336 Dudum, ii. 150 Duellum, i. 69 Duernio, i. 27 Duim, ii. 108 Dulcedo, i, 27 Dulcis, i. 81. 103. XP5, 106. ii. 298 Dum, ii. 154 Dummodo, ii. 334 Diimus, i. 19 Duo, i. 64. 69. ii. 49. 84. 90. 334 Duodetriginta, ii. 85 Duodeviginti, ii. 85 Duplex, i. 90. ii. 88 Duplices, ii. 179 Duplico, i. 185 Dupondium, ii. 308 Durantia, i. 13 Durare, ii. 99 Duria, i. 13 Duritia, es, i. 138 Dusmosae, ii. 276 Duum, i. 69 Dux, i. 89. 91. ii. 81, 304. 327 Dyndimus, i. 127 E. E, i. 8. ii. 39. 50. 69. 182 Ea, ii. 92. 180 Ebenum, i. 20, 21 Ebibo, i. 218 Ebianditus, ii. 139 Eborete, ii. 179 Ebur, i. 31. 77. ii, 321 Eburones, ii. 519 Ecastor, ii. 286 Ecbataiia, i. 15 Ecca, ii. 95 Ecce, ii. 73. 95. 157. 181 Eccillum, ii. 95 Eccistum, ii. 95 Eccos, ii. 95 Eccum, ii. 95 Echo, i. 2». ii. 335 Eciam, ii. 276 Ecqui, ii. 92 Edepol, ii. 150. 181. 285 Edico, i. 221 Edim, ii. 1 17 Edisco, i. 224 Edo, Index of Words. E«!o, i. 228. 232. ii. 116, 117. 364 Edomo, i. 1S4 Ediico, i. 221 Effatus, ii. 139 EfFectum, tiis, i. 143, 144 Ettero, i. 267. ii. 209 Efficio, i. 207 Effi-ia. es.i. 133 Effingo, i. 244 Effleo, i. 199 EfBigi, ii. 252 Effl-o, i. 215 Effodio, i. 209 Effor, ii. 120 EflFringo, i. 176. 246 Effugio, i. 209 Effulgeo, i. 205 Effundo, 1. 234 Egenus, ii. 62, 87, 88 Egeo, ii. 63. 209 Egero, i. 269 Egi, i. 324 Eginan', ii. 338 Ego, ii. 92. 334 Egon', ii. 338 Egredior, i. 301. ii. 209 Egregius, ii. 89 Eheu, ii. 298 Eia, ii. 328 Eidem, ii. 284 Eii, ii. 266. 298 Eiius, ii. 265. 284 Ejicio, i. 208. ii. 210 Ejulo, lor, ii. 99. 105 Ejusmodi, i. 165 Elabor, i, 299, ii. 209 Elaborare, ii. 209 Electrum, i. 149. ii. 348 Elegantia, i. 152 Eiegeia, ii. 298 Elegia, ii. 300 Elephantus, i. 142 Elephas, i. 35. 56. 78. 142. ii. 82, 83 Eleusis, i. 82 Elicio, i. 208, 318 Eligo, i. 248. ii. S04 Ellos, lum, ii. 95 EIoco, ii. 150 Eloqsientia, i. 152 Eloquor, i. 298 Elpis Vectius, i. H) Eluceo, i. 205 Elucubro, or, ii. 105 Ekido, i. 235 Elugeo, i. 204 Eluo,i. 213 EJysii, siuni, i. 129, 130 Einentior^ i. 296 Emereo, or, i. 1 92 Emergo, ii. 99. 209 Emeritus, ii. 142 Emersus, ii. 142 Etnicatio, i. 187 Emico, i. 184. 137 Emineo, i. 191. 193. ii. 209 Euiitto, i. 275 Emo, i. 257. 324. ii. 66 Enjolo, i. 252 Emorior, i. 302 Emoveo, i. 197 Emturio, i. 291 Emulgeo, i. 203 Emungo, i. 241. ii. 209 En, ii. 73. 95. 157. 131. 338 Endo, ii. 284 Eneco, i. 186 Enitor, i. 298. ii. 103 Ens, ii. 116 Eosiculus, i. 8 Ensis, i. 8.39. 109 Enubo, i. 219 Enucleo, i. 179 Enuntiare, iL 209 Eo, i. 88. 283. 306, ii. US. 181, 182. 214 Eo, ii. 18. 94. 145. 178, 180. 334 Eor, ii. 133 Eos, i. 43. ii. 299 Eous, ii. 299 Ephebeum, ii. 236 Ephesus, i. 17 Epidaurnm, rus, i. 16 Epigrammaton, i. 122 Epirota, tes, i. 1 38 Epistola, ii. 284. 286 Epistula, ii. 284. 286 Epitoma, me, mes, i. 25. 63. 136. ii. 83 Epodus, i. 43 Epol, ii. 150. 181 Epos, i. 42 Epoto, i. 182 Epula, Ice, lum, i, 131. 158 Equa, i. 5. 64 Eques, i. 80. ii. 80 Equidcm, ii. 307 Equuleus, ii. 90 Equulus, ii. 90 Equus, i. 5. ii. 90 Eradico, ii. 349 Erado, i. 236 Eremus, i. 7. 44, 48. ii, 300. 359 Erga, iL 36 , Ergo, ii. 18. 334 Ergo igitur, ii. 157 Erigo, i. 242 Eritiiiis, i. 92. 122. ii. 341 Eripere, ii. 209 Eris, i. 97 Ero, ii. 277 Errabundus, ii. 88 Erratur, ii. 141 Erratus, ii. 141 Erubesco, i. 226. ii. 209 Eructare, ii. 99 Erudio, ii. 45 Erumpo, i. 264, ii. 99. 102.209. 305 Erumpor, ii. 102 Erunt, ii. 549 Eruo, i. 216 Erynnis, i. 92. 122. ii, 341 Erysipelas, i. 35 Eryx, i. 13. ii. 326 Es, ii. 115. 181. 340.364 Esc it, ii. 115 Ejcunt, ii. 115 Esquiliae, i. 158 Esse, ii. 13. 23. 27. 29. 35. 115. 137. 181. 364 Essenius, ii. 364 Esset, ii. 364 Est, ii. 13. 23. 181. 277. 364 Esto, ii. 175. 181 Estod, ii. 284 Estur, ii. 117 Esum, ii. 115 Esurio, i. 291. 312 Etesiaj, i. 12, 13 Ethesin, i. 123 Ethica, ii. 286 Etiam, ii. 1 50 Etiamsi, ii. 153 Etsi, ii. 153 Etsiquamvjs, ii. 157 Evado, i. 236. ii. 209 Evander, drus, i. 142 Evandrius, ii. 38 Evasti, i. 178 Evasus, ii. 142 Eveho, i. 251 Evello, i. 255 Evenio, i. 286 Eventum, tus, i. 143, 144 Evergere, ii. 100 Eugenius, ii. 300 Evigilatus, ii. 142 Eumenides, i. 158 Eunuchus sua, i. 7 Evolvo, i. 281 Euphrates, i. 12, 147 Euripides, I^JDEX OF Words. Euripiiios, i. 147 Kurus, i. 1'-'. ii. 297 Eustocbium, i. .3. 10 Ex, ii. 3»,39. 50. 69. 182 Exacuo, i. 213 Examussim, ii. 150 Exaiiguis, i. GO. 70 Exante, ii. 152 Exarileo, i, 203. ii. 209 Exardest-Hve, ii. 209 Exauctoratus, i. 180 Exaudio, i. 173. 282 Ex(al|)o, i. 264 Exce.lo, i. 239. ii 43 Excelleiiti, i. 101 Excelk-o, lo, i. 253. 509. SI 8. ii. 27 Excelsus, i. 253 Excerpo, i. 263 Excido, i. 237,233 Excipio, i. 210 Excliido, i. 235 Exclusissimus, ii. 89 Excolo, i. 252 Excoquo, i. 265 Excors, i. 88 lyicresco, i. 223. 225 Excietus, i. 225. ii. 1 42 Excubiae, i. 9. 153. 183 Excudo, i. 227, 228 I-lxcuipo, i. 264 Excurro, i. 175. 269 Excusaie, ii. 209, 210 Excusum, ssum, i. 228 Excutio, i. 212 Execratus, ii. 139 Execror, i. 312 E\ecutiis, ii. 139 Exedo, i. 228 Exemet, ii. 252 Exemplar, re, riiim, i. 118. 139. ii. 320 Exeo, i, 234. ii. 99 Exeqiiae, i. 158 Exequor, i. 298 Exerceo, i. 188. 196 Exercituis, i. 123 Exero, i. 272 Exfociont, iL 284 Exhalare, ii. 99 Exhaurio, i. 289. ii. 63 Exhibeo, i. 1 38 Exiens, i. 88 Exigo, i. '247. ii. 210 Exiguius, ii. 89 Exilia, ii. 69 Exilio, i. 239 Eximo, i. 257, ii.67. 210 Existo, i. 279.310 Exitus, ii. 305 Ex!cx, i. 52. 89. ii. 325 Exodus, i. 44 Exoleo, i. J 95, bis Exoletus, il. 142 Exoraro, ii. 210 Exordior, i. 502 Exorior, i. 302 Exorsiis, ii. 139 Exo^, i. 43. 57. ii. 344 Exosiis, ii. 119 Expando, i. 228 Expars, ii. 252 Expicfo, ii. 67. 210 Exiipdid, i. 312. ii. 100, 210 Exppllo, i, 254. ii. 43. 210 Expendo, i, 230 Expevgisco, or, i. 300, 501. ii. 105 Experior.i. 301.310.312. ii. 103 Expers, i. 87. ii, 63. 252 Expertoe, ii. 252 Expertus, ii. 139 Expes, i. 1 64 Expetere, ii. 210 Expingo, i. 243 Explaudo, i. 236 Expleo, i. 199. ii. 210 Explico, i. 185. ii. 210 Expono, i. 259 Exporrectus, ii. <155 Exposco, i. 224. ii. 210 Expostulare, ii. 210 Exprimo, i. 258. ii, 210 Exprobrare, ii. 210 Expromitto, i. 276 Expromo, i, 256 Expungo, i. 248 Expao, i. 217 E„quilitB, i. 158 Exquiro, i. 266 Excendo, i. 228 Exscribo, i. 218 Exsercere, ii. 284 Exsigunt, ii. 2S4 Exsorbeo, i, 198 Exsto, i, 310 Fjcsurgo, i, 243 Exta, i. 161. ii. 177 Extemplo, ii. 150 Extempln simul, ii. 157 Extendo, i. 230 Exter, rus, i. 67. 142 Exterininare, ii. 210 Extero, i. 266 Exterreo, i. 188 Extinguo, i. 242 Extinxem, i, 17S Exli'ixi, i. 178 Exto, i. 281 Extollo, i. 255. 325 Extra, ii. 36 Extrudo, i 236. ii, 210 Extuli, i, 325 Extiirbarf, ii. 210 Exudo, ii. 1 00 Exul, ii. 80. 319 Exulo, i. 306. ii, 210 Exuiido, i. 179 Exiinguo, i. 324 Exiu., i. 158. 213. 313. ii. 43. 210 Exurgo, i, 243 Exuro, i. 270 Exuvi%, i. 153 F. Faba;, i. 150 Faber, i. 67 Fabrxa, ii. 177. 180 Fabricatos, ii. 139 Fabrico, or, ii. 102. 105 Fac, ii, 175, 181.336 Fac sciaiii, ii, 34 Fac ut, ii, 181 Faces, i 143 Facesso, i. 273, bis Facetia3, i, 158 Faciem. ii. 252 284 Facies, i, 125. ii. 284 Facio, i. 176. 206. 273. 303. 310, 323. ii. 66, 67. 181. 210. 252 Facior, i 307 Faciundo, ii. 284 Facul.i. I4i.ii. 258 Facuiias, i. Ill, ii. 177 Fsedum, ii. 282 Fax, i, 51. 89. 113 Fat;us,i. 148 Fate, i, 158 Falanx, ii. 268 Faleia;, i. 158. ii. 263 Fa'ernum, ii. 180 Fallacia.,esi. 138 Falli.ii. 22 Fallit, ii. 31 Fallo, i. 176. 255, 324 Falso, ii 1 78. 334 FalsDS, ii. 83 Falx, i, 51 Faina, i. 25. 152 Fames, i. 59. 148. 152. ii, 341 Familia, ii. 228 Famdiaris, i. 103, ii. 177 Famul, lug, i, 141 Famulabus, Index of Words. Famulabiis, I. 64 Fans, li. 120 Far, i, 74. 95, 96. ii. 339 Farclmen, i. 2'2S Farcio, i. 228 Farcitus i. 228 Fari, ii. 103. 120. 304 Farina, ii. 304 Fariolum, ii. 232 Farra, i. 164 Farsi, i. 321 Fas, i. 22. 154. 164. ii. 340 Fascinum, i. 154. ii. 270 Fascis, i. 39. 156. 153 Faselus, i. 45 Fasis, ii. 284 Fastidire, ii. 22. 210 Fastus, i. 14S Fateor, i, 177. 296. ii. 103. 210 Fatidicus, ii. 3QS Fatigo, i. 226 Fatim, i. 226 Fatisco, or, i. 220 Fatuus, ii. 304 Faventum, i. 115 Faveo, i. 197. 317. ii. 27 Fau?i, i. 112. 158 Fax, 1.51. 113. 143. ii. 325 Faxim, ii. 103. 121 Faxis, ii. 176 ■Faxo, ii. lOS. 121 Faxsit, ii. 284 Febris, i. 92 Fecundo, i. 179 Fecflndus, ii. 286 • Fedetrins, ii. 234 Feelix, ii. 252 Fefelli, i. 324 Fel,i.73. 113. 155. ii. 337 Feles, lis, i. 142. ii. 82 Feles ptillaria, i. 142 Feles virginaria, i. 142 Felix, i. 5. 89. 93. 105. 1 1 6. ii. 286. 326 Felle, J. 70 Femen, i. 166 Femina, ii. 82. 180. 286 Femur, i. 77. ii. 321 Fendo, i. 227. 313 Feniis, ii. 234. 286 Ferax.ii. 325 Fere, ii. 330 Feria, i. 152 Ferife, i. 158 Ferina, ii. 177 I'erio, i. 291 Ferita, i. 292 Ferme, ii. 331 Vol. U. Fero, i. 67. 267. 308. 325. ii. 88. 117. 309 Ferox, ii. 326 Ferveo, vo, i. 198. 299 Ferundo, ii. 284 Fessus, i. 188.226. 301 Festa, ii. 177 Festinare, ii. 99 Festinatus, ii. 142 Festuca, ii. 180 Fetus, ii. 286 Fex, ii. 326 Fi, ii. 117 Ficticius, ii, 287 Fictilia, ii. 180 Ficus, i. 44, 45, 124. 148 Fidenatinm, i. 110 Fidejiibeo, i. 203 Fidei, ii. 298, l>is Fides, i. 36. 124. 152. ii. 304 Fides, i. 152. 158 Fidicen, i. 73 Fido, i. 304. ii. 143. 210. 270. 304. 309 Fidius, ii. 284 Fidus, ii. 88 Fieri, ii. 13, 14. 293 Fiet, ii. 72 Fi^o, i. 242. 243. ii. 270 Fi'i.ii. 117 Fill, i. CS Filia, i. 6k ii. 173 Filiolus, ii. 89 Filius, i. 68 Filix, i. 89. ii. 32G Filosofia, ii. 263 Filium, us, i. 131. 145 Finuiin, us, i. 46. 145. 151 Findo, i. 234 Fines, i. 156 Finjro, i. 244 Finio, i. 283 Finis, i. 2. 40. 99. ii. 177. 351 Finitimns, ii. .?51 Fio, i. 304, 305,306, r07. ii. 116. 117. 143. 298 Firc-iim, ii. 282 Firi, ii. 117 Fi'e, ii. 117 Flabra, nm, i. 161 Fliijrito, ii. 44. 67 Flagrare, ii. 203 Flam^n, i. 30. Ins, 73 Flaveo, i. 198 Flavos, i. 43 Flecto,i. 172.274. 52,1 F f Fleo, i. 171. 199. n. 99. 309 , Fiictns, i. 241 Fligo, i. 241 Flocci, ii. 65 Floralia, i. 118 Floreo, i. 191.318 Fios, i. 42. 82. 113 Flocculus, ii. 89 Fluctuor, ii. 102 Flumen, i. 30. 73 Flno, i. 215, 21G. 322 Fluvius, i. 68. ii. 177 Foci, i. I5G Fodico, i. 311 Fodio, i. 209. 309. 323 Facundus, ii. 62. 285 Foedus, i. 83 Foena, i. 150 Fceneris, i. 84 Foenero, or, i. 84. ii. 210 Foenum, i. 150. 297 Foenus, i. 83 Fostus, ii. 28G Follis, i. 59 Fomes, i. 36. 80 Fons, i. 50. 99. Ill Fonteius, ii. 289 For, ii. 120 Forceps, i. 49, 50. 53. 86 Fore, ii. 111. 116. 122. 181 Fore at, ii. 1 13 Forem. ii. 116. 122 Fores, i. 158 Forfex, i. 53 Fores, ris, i. US Fori, i. l56 Foris, ii. 342 Formidare, ii. 211 Forinido, i. 27 Formonsus, ii. 249 Fomacuin, ium, i. 1 15 Fornax, i. 53. 115. ii. 325 Fornix, ii. 326 Fors, i. 1 66 Forsan, ii, 338 Forsitan, ii. 333 Forte, i. 166. ii. 145 . Foite », trs. i. 104 Forlior, i. 93. 107, 108 Foitis, i. 103 Fortius,! 93. 107, 103 Fortuito. ii. 145 Fortuitus, ii. 349 'Fori una, nfe, i 158 Foiiup, riiN, i. 145 Fosuni, ii. 282 loveo, i. 197. 317 Fovit, Index of Words. Fovit, ii. 256 Fousiosos, ii. 284 Framum, i. 131. 156 Fraga, uni, i. 150. 161 Franc igeiium, i. 64 Frango, i. 176. 246 Frater, i. 10. 76. ii. 302. Fraudo.ii. 71. 211 Fraus, i. 49.85. 113 Fremo, i. 256 i. 270 Frendo, i. 233 Freni, num, i. 156 Fretum, tus, i. 145 Fietus, i. '299 Fretus, ii. 134 Fricatio, i. 187 Frico, i. 186, 1S7. ii. 269 Frictio, i. 187 Frigco, i. 205. 310. 320 Frigida, i. 7 Frigo, i. 242,245.310 Frigus, i. 84 Frit, i. 22. 164 Frixi, i. 310 Frons, i. 49. 87 Fructus, i. 17. 44. 123. 148. ii. 345 Fruges, i. 158. ii. 177 Frugi, i. 59. 166. ii. 177 Frugifer, ii. 88 Fruiscor, i. 311 Frumenta, i. 150. ii. 177 Frumentor, i. 311 Fruor, i. 299. bis, ii. 70 Frusinati, i. 94 Frustra, ii. 349 Frustro, or, ii. 103. 105 Frutex, i. 53. ii. 326 Frutico, or, ii. 105 Frux, i. 59. 89. 113. 166. ii. 325 Fuga, i. 152 Fwgio, i. 172. 209. ii. 31, 211 Fugitivus, ii. 88 Fugito, i. 312 Fuisse, ii. 181 Fulcio, i. 288. 310 Fu%eo, i. 65. 205. 309, 310. ii. 332 Fulginate, i. 94 Fiilgurat, ii. 169 Ftilica, ii. 163. 349 Fuligo, i. 27 Fulmen, i. 141 Fulmenta, urn, i. 137 Fulsi, i. 310. 321 Fumus, i. 151 Fundo, i. 171. 233. 309 Fundum, ii. 270 Fuiiebres, ii. 178 Fuiiera, ii. 177 Fungor, i. 296. ii. 71.21 1 Funiculus, i. 8. 41 Funis, i. 8. 59. 41 Funus, i. S3 Fuo, ii. 112 116 Fur, i. 74 113, bis. ii. 80. 321. 339 Furentum, i. 1 15 Fiirere furoicni, ii. 184 Furfur, i. 31.74.99. 118. 156 Furiose, ii. 330 Furius, ii. 277 Furo, i 270 Fiisins, ii 277 Fastis, i. 39. 99 Futurum fuis.se, ii. 113 Futurus, ii. 350 Gabriel, i. 3 Gadir, i. 16 Gaesa, um, i. 1 16 Gajtulus, ii. 349 Galatea, ii. 300 Galeatus, ii. 134 Galerum, rus, i. 145 Galla, i. 152 Gain, ii. 177 Gallia, i. 14, 15 Ganea, um, i. 137 Ganges, i. 12. 147 Gararnas, i. 156 Gargarop, on, i. 146 Garrire, ii. 99 Garumna, i. 13 Gaudenti, i. 102 Gaudeo, i. 304. ii. 71. 143. 211 Gauderegaudium, ii. 30. 184 Gaudium, i. 155 Gausapa, pe, pum, i. 95. 105. 156 Gaza, i. 152 Gazer, ii. 339 Gelu, i. 155 Gemini, i. 156 Gemo, i. 256. ii. 99 Genae, i. 158 Genesis,!. 92. 119. 122 Genimen, ii. 267 Genitrix, ii. 302 Genius, i. 68. 151 Geno, i. 261. 319. ii. 310 Gens, i. Ill, 301. ii. 228 Gentiles, li. 228 Gentilitia, ii. 228 Genu, i. 124 Genva, ii. 264 Geiiuflecto, ii. .308 Gejuii, i. 319. ii. 310 Genus, i. 83 Geometra, tres, i. 138 Geor;;ip3, ii. 179 Germani, ii. 177 Gerinen, ii. 267 Ger.., i. 67. 268. 321, .322. ii. 88 Gerroe, i. 158 Geryon, ties, i. 63. ii. 300. Gesa, um, i. 161 Gessi, i. 321, 322 Gestioulator, ii. 349 Gt-sticulatiis, ii. 349 Gestio, i. 285. ii. 71. 34S» Gesto, ii. 100 Geta, te.s, i. 138 Gibber, bus, i. 67. 147. Gigas, i. 35. 78 Gigno, i. 260. 319. ii. 211. 310 Gingivae, i. 158 Git. i. 22. 164 Glaciare, ii. 2 1 1 Gladiator, ii. 339 Gladiuni, us, 145 Glaris, i. 87. 143 Glaucoma, i, 147 GlJs, i. 57. 70. 81. 111. ii. 323. 342 Glisco, i. 177 Globus, ii. 270 Glomus, i. 83. 147. ii. 270 Gloria, i. 152. 273 Gloriari, ii. 72. 103. 211 Glos, i. 113. 164. 166 Glubo, i. 213. 220. 324 Gluten, i. .30. 73. 155 Glycerium, i. 10 Gnavus, i. 327 Gobio, bius, i. 140 Gorge, i. 72 Gorion, ii. 300 Gortys, i. 18 Oraciilimus, ii. 87 Gradior. i. 301 Graoce, ii. 81 Grrecor, i, 311 Grammatica, ce, i. 13€ Grando, i. 27. 72 '" Graphis, i. 181 Grates, i, 135. 158 Gratia, ii. 285 Gratis, ii. 342 Gratitudo, Index of Wokd Griinnitus, i. 229 GriKS, j. 57. 85. 113. 143. ii. 344 Gryphus, i. III. 146 Gryps, i. 57. W7. HI. 146. ii. 325. 341 Gubernator, ii. 273 Gummi, is, i. 22, 23. 92.* 140. 164 Giirges, i. 36 Guttur, i. 31, 32 Gymuasion, i. 29 H. Habena, i, 158 Habso, i. 177. 188. ii. 23. 29. 67. 101. 139. 211.285 Haberi, ii. 13 liis Habilior, ii. §8 Hac, ii. 180 Hactenus, ii. 149. 177 H3D, ii. 92 Hjec, i. 1. ii. 92 Hascce, ii. 92 HEeccine, ii. 92 Haemorrbois, ii. 297 Hasreo, i. 205, 321 bis.W. 211 Hajres, i. 80. ii. 81. 322. 341 Hocreseon, i. 122 Hieresis, ii. 297 HEsito, i. 312 Hala, ii. 249 Haiec, i. 29 bis. 72. 153 Halex, i. 29. 57. 72, 89, 90. 153. ii. 326 Haliartus, i. 17 Hallus, lux, i. 53 Hara, i. 153, ii. 285 Harpago, i. 27. 71. ii, 349 Harpax, i. 89 Haud scio an, ii. 165 Haurio, i. 289 bis Haiit, ii. 275 Hebdoma, mas, i. 122 Hebenum, nus, i. 145 Hebes, i. 79. 86 Hebesco, J. 226 Hebris, ii. 282 Hecoba, ii. 255 Hector, i. 119. 121. ii. 301.321.33? Hei, ii. 74 Heic, ii. 261.336 Ilelena, no, i. 136 Helice, i, 15 Helicon, ii. 319 Helleboium, rus, i. 145 Heminas, ii. 282 Hemo, ii. 255 Hepar, pas, i. 70. 74. 95, 96 Heraclides, i. 147 Heibesco, i. '226 Herc-.ile, i. 122 Hereditatium, i. 1 1 1 Heres, i. 80, ii. 81. 322. 341 Herodes, i. 147 Heros, i. 82. ii. 323. 341. 344 Herpix, i. 52 Hems, i. 68 Hesternus, ii. 88 Hen, li. 74 Hexameter, ii. 307 Hiacintiius, i. 44. 47 Hie, i. 1. ii. 75. 91. 261, 336 Hicce, ii. 92 Hidrops, i. 50 Hiemaie, ii. 99 Hiiaris, rus, i. 143 Hilax, i. 90 Hilum, i. 155 Hinc, ii. 149 Hippo, i, 15 Hippomanes, i. 37 Hipponax, i. 90 Hir, i. 33. 164. ii. 339 Hirpix, i. 52 Hisco, i. 226. 311, 312 Hispai, i. 15 Hissopum, us, i. 47. 145. 150 Hoc, i. 1. ii. 145. 149. 178.255. 536 Hodia, ii. 308. 331 Homicida, ii. 80 Hominium, i. 115, 116 Homo, i. 2. 71. ii. 79. 177. ?04. 319 Homunciiliis, ii. 89 Honor, nos, i. 43. 74. 142. ii. 277. 344 Hordca, i. 150 HorisoD, i. 74 Ff2 Homo, ii. .349 Hornotinus, ii, 349 Honca, uni, i. 137 florresco, i. 226. ii. 211 Horli, i. 156 Hortur, ii. 103 Hortus, i. 150 Hospes, pita, i. 101. ii. 80 Hospilium, i. 102 Hoslis, ii, 81 Hue, i. 18. ii. 145 Hujns, ii. 65 Hujusce modi, ii. 307 Hujus modi, ii. 165 Humanus, ii. 304 Humor, ii. 304 Humus, i. 43. 148. ii. 179. 304 Hvberna, i. 160. ii. 177, 178 Hydropicus, ii. 325 Hydrops, ii. 325 Hydrus, i. 17.48 Hyesnare, ii. 99 Hyems, i. 49. 86, 87. ii. 324 Hymen, i. 51- Hymettos, i. 48 Hyssopus, i. 47. 145. 150 r. lader, i. 14 Iambus, ii. 366 lanthis, i. 120 lapix, i. 13. 89 lapygia, us, i. 13 Iber, rus, i. 67. ii. 318, 320. 339 Ibi, ii. 333 Ibidem, ii. 308. 333 Ibus, ii. 92 loo, i. 172. 222. 292. S23 Icon, i. 30, 31 Id, i-. 179 Ida, i. 14 Idem, ii. 96. 177. 303 Ideo, ii. 145. 334 Ido'.otbytum, ii. 349 Idomeaca, ii. 299 IdoUmi, i, C5. ii. 300 Idoneus, ii. 89 Iduare, ii. 241 Idus, i. 44. 158. ii. 241 lens, i, 88. 310 Ictgerunt, ii. 275 Ignis, i. 39. 98, 99 Ignominia, ii. 69 Ignoscilurus, i. 225 Ignosco, Index of Words. Ignosco, i. 225 Iguotiirus, i. '225 lie, i. 161 Ilia, i. 23. 117. lol liias, ii. 340 Ilicet, ii. 152. 308 llico, ii. 150 liion, OS, urn, i. 16. 141. 143. ii. 533. 344 Uionea, ii. «99 Illabor. i. 29'.). ii. 211 lilac, ii. 180 lilacrymo, ii. 216 Illaqiieo, i. 179 lile, i. 0. 67, ii. 75. 91, 9-2 Illecebra, i. 158 lilex, ii. 363 Illexi, i.320 Iliic, ii. 91 Illicio, i. 208, 209. 320 lllico, ii. 150. 334 lilido, i. 236 Iliinio, i. 282 lllino, i. 262 Illiricum, i. 29 Iliiturgi, i. 15 Illius, ii. 293 Illo, ii. 94. 130 Illoc, ii. 255 Uluc, ii. 187.255 Illiiceo, i. 20.5 Illucesceie, ii. 99 lliudo, i. 235. fl. 211 Im, ii. 92 Imago, i. 27 Imbarbis, ii. 252 Imbeciilinuis, ii. S8 Imhecillus, ii. 305. 349 Imber, i. 32. 75. 98, 99. 106. ii. 339 Imbibe, i. 218 Imbrex, i. 53 Imbuo, i. 213 Imito, or, ii. 103. 105 Jmmanis, i. 117. 156. ii. 150 Immcir.or, i. 107 Immergo, i. 249 Immerit", ii. 178 Imniineo, i. 191. ii, 211 Immitto, i. 275 Immolior, ii. 103 Inimorior, i. 302 Imiiiunis, ii. 63 its Ihio, ii. 334 Iiiipar, i. 94. ii. 339 Iinpedio, i. 312 Impei;i, i. 324 iuipellu, i. 254 Impendeo, do, i. 174. 202. 2:30. it. 2] 2 Impen, ii. 27 Impertio, or, ii. 105. 212 Impescui, i. 3l8 Iinjietc, i. 166 Impeto, i. 277 Imprtns, ii. 344 Impiugo, i. 245. 247 Iruplecto, i. 275 Impleo, i. 199. ii. 212 Implico, or, i. 135. ii. 212 Imploro, ii. 181 Impono, i. 260. ii. 177. 212 Impos, i. 43. 82. 107. ii. 323. 344 Impotente, i. 101 Imprimis, ii. 153 Imprimi), i. 258. ii. 212 Imprpbis, bus, i. 143. ii. 304 Impnber, bes, i. 142 Impubes, bis, i. 80. 142 Impuritia, i. 153 In, ii. 41 bis: 50.53.70. 72. 181, 182. 338 Inanis, ii. 62 Inante, ii. 152 Inardeo, i. 203 Inars, ii. 252. 283 Inaudio, i. 232 luansus, ii. 139 Incaleo, i. 193 Incalesco, i. 311 Inctdo, i. 'iZ9 Incemlo, i. 227 Iiicesso, i. 273, ii. 212 Iiicestum, tiis, i. 145 Inchoo, ii. 286 lucido, i. 237, 238. ii. 212 Incino, i. 259 Incipio, i. 210, 211. ii. 99 lucircum, ii. 152 Incita, as, i. 166. ii. 173 ■ ■• Ad incitas } . jvdactus, J Iiiciti, ii. 178 luciius, i. 166 Iiiclamare, ii. 99 Incliiiare, ii. 212 Incliidere, i. 235. ii. 212 Inclytns, ii. 88 Incoho, ii. 236 Ini:o'o, i. 252 Increbesco, ii. 286 Increpo, i. 184 ii. 178 Inciibatio, 5. 187 Incubitio, i. 187 Incubo, i. 183. ii. 21? Iiioudo, i. 227 Iiiculpo, i. 264 Inciimbo, i. 219. 312. ii. 212 Incurro, i. 269 Incursare, ii. 212 Incus, i. 48. 85. ii. 324 Incusimi, ssum, i. 228 Incutio, i. 212 Indago, ii. 296 Inde, ii. 149 Indecor, i. 142 Index, i. 6, 90. ii. 80 Indico, i. 90. 221. 309. ii, 212 Indictio, ii. 243 Indigene, ii, 80 Indigere, ii. 63 Indiges, i. 79. 156 Indign^, ii. 331 Indignus, ii. 63 Indipiscor, i. 300 bis Tndo, i. 232 Indoleo, i. 193 Indoles, i. 110 Indotestato, ii. 284 Indu, ii. 296. 336 Induce, i, 158. 221. ii, 212 Indukeo, i, 204. 321. ii. 213" Induo, i, 213. 313. ii. 45. 213 Industrius, ii, 89 Indutum, ii. 312 Ineo, i. 284. ii. 213 Ineor, ii. 118 IneptisB, i. 159 Ineptio, i. 285 Inertia, i. 153 Infamia, i. 153 Iufans,i. 110. 115. ii. 81, 179 Infarcio, i. 288 Infera, ii. 178 Infer, rus, i. 142 Inferi, ii. 177 Inferiae, i. 159 Inferne, ii. 33 1 Infernos, i. 127 Infero, i, 268. ii. 213 Iiificias, i. 166 Inficio, i. 207 Infigo. i. 242 Infinitior, ii. 88 Infit, ii. 121 luflecto, i, 274 lufligs, Index of Words. Infligo, i. 241 Infra, ii. 36 Infremo, i. 256 Infrico, i. 186 Infringo, i. 246 Infundo, i. 234. ii. 213 Ingemo, i. 256 Ingemino, ii. 101 Ingenia, i. 155 Ingcnium, i. 155. ii. 177 Ingens, ii. 88 Ingero, i. 269. ii. 213 Ingratiis, i. 166 Ingratitudo, i. 28 Ingravesco, i. 226 Ingredior, i. 301. ii. 213 Ingruo, i. 217 Inguen, i. 30 Ingurgitare, ii. 213 Iiihsereo, i. 203 Inhiare, ii. 213 Inhibeo, i. 188 Iniens, i. 284 Injexo, ii. 121 Injicio, i. 20S Inimicitia, i. 153. 159 Initus, ii. 305 Injuugo, i.241 Injurius, ii. 89 Inlex, ii. 363 lulustris, ii. 284 Innecto, i. 275 lunitor, i. 299 lauoxius, ii. 89 Innubo, i. 217. 219. ii. 305 Inoffensus, ii. 306 Inoleo, i. 195. ii. 99 loops, i. 93. 107. 167. ii. 63. 324 Inquam, ii. 120 Inquies, i, 79. 149. ii. 323 Inquietus, ii. 323 Inquinare, i. 225 Inquire, i. 266 Insania, i. 153. ii. 99 Insanire, ii. 213 Insanus, i. 60 Inscendere, ii. 213 Incribo, i. 218 Insector, i. 294 Insequor, i. 298 Insero, i. 271. 317 Inserpo, i. 264 Inservire, ii. 213 Inservitus, ii. 142 Insessus, ii. 142 Insideo, i. 200 lusidiae, i. 159 Tnsidio, or, ii. 103. 105 Insido, i. 253 Insilio, i. 289. ii. 213 Insinuo, ii. 101 Insisto, i. 279. 310. ii. 213 Insomnia, um, i. 137 Insono, i. 183 Inspergo, i. 249 Inspicio, i. 209. 320 Inspuo, i. 217 Insputare, ii. 215 Instar, i. 164. 167. ii. IS Instaurare, i. 167 Jnsternere, ii. 213 Institio, ii. 213 Instituo, i. 214 Institutuui, ii. 177 Insto, i. 181. 310. ii. 99. 213 Instruo, i. 215 Insuber, i. 75 Insuescere, ii. 99 Insultare, ii. 213 Insumo, i. 257 Insuper, ii. 152 Insuperhabere, ii. 152 Insurgo, i. 243 Intelligo, i. 249. 320 Intendo, i. 230. ii. 213 Inter, ii. 36. 78 Intercede, i. 239 Intercludere, ii. 213 Intercus, i. 86. ii. 324. 345 Interdico, i. 221. ii. 45. 213 Interea, ii. 145.323 Interesse, ii. 214 Interest, ii. 25. 65 Interficio, i. 207 Interfor, i. 294 Interjacere, ii. 214 Interjiclo, i. 208 Interimo, i. 257 Interitus, ii. 142 Inteihio, i. 213 Interrnico, i. 184 Intermisceo, i. 190 Intermitto, i. 275 Interneco, i. ISG Internosco, i. 223 Internundinium, ii. 286 Intero, i. 266 luterpono, i. 260 Interpres, i. 79. ii. 80. 322 Interpretatus, ii. 139 Interpreter, ii. 103 loterseco, i. 186 Intersero, i. 271. 573. 317 Intestinnm, nas, i. 143 liitexo, i. 282 Iiitingo, i. 241 Iiitono, i. 184. 187 Intra, ii. 56 Introduce, ii. 308 Intrude, i. 236 Iiitubuin, bus, i. 46. 145 Intueor, tuor, i. 297. 309. ii. 214 Inlus, ii. 139. 344 Invado, i. 236. ii. 31. 214 Invaleo, i. 192 Invebo, i. 251. ii. 214 Invenio, i. 286. ii. 181 Invergere, ii. 100 Inverto, i. 278 Inveteratus, ii. 142 Invia, i. 161 Invict'js, ii. 88 Invidee, i. 200. ii. 2S. 214 Inviso, i. 273 Invisus, ii. 88 Invitare, ij. 214 In\'itus, ii. 88 Inultus, ii. 139 Inundo, i. 179 Inungo, i. 242 Invucare, ii. 214 Involucrum, ii, 349 Involve,!. 281. Inure, i. 270 Inuus, i. 161 .'lo, i. 146 Iphigenia, ii. 300 Ipbiti, ii. 243 Ipse, ii. 75. 92. 96 Ipsissimus, ii. 89. 96 Ipsius, ii. 298 Ipsus, ii. 92 Irx, i. 153 Irasoor, i. 296 Iratus, ii. 134 Ircos, ii. 280 Ire, i. 283. 306. ii. 34. 118. 180, ISl. 214 Iri, i. 306. ii. 133 Iris, i. 92. 97 Irraucio, i. 288 Irrepo, i. 264 Irrideo, i. 202 Irrumpo, i. 264 Irruo, i. 216 Is, ii. 75. 91, 92, 93 Isis, i. 120. 122 Ismarus, i. 127 Istac, ii. 130 Ikte, Index of Words. Istc, ii. 91 Ister, ru>, i, 142 Istliinus, i. 47 Istic, ii. 91.95 Istuc, ii. 93 Istud, ii. r^37 It, ii. '296 Ita, ii. 328. 330 Italia, i. 15 Itaque ergo, ii. 15" Iter, i, 32. 70. 76. ii. - 182 Itin, ii. 338 -< Itiner, i, 70 Ituin, ii. 310 Itur, ii. 118 J. Jaceo, i. 193 liis Jacet humi, ii. 180 Jacio, i. 176. 207. 324 Jactare, ii. 211 Jacto, ito, i. 3 1 2 Jamdiu, ii. 150 Jamdudum, ii. 150. 154 Jam oiim, ii. 154 Jampridem, ii. 150. 154 Jana, ii. 298 Januarius, ii. 173 Janus, ii. 29S Jason, i. 74 Jaxo, ii. 121 Jeci, i. 324 Jecinor, i. 34 Jecor, i. 54. 70 Jecur, i. 34. 77. 134. ii. 321 Jesus, ii. 345 Joannes, ii. 340 Jocuiaris, rius, i. 143 Jocum, cus, i. 127. 145 Jovis, i. 3. 31. 70. 76, 134. 167 Jous, ii. 284 Jousir, ii. 284 Jousus, ii. 284 Jubar, i. 31 bis. 95, 96, 151. 155. ii. 320 Jubeo, i, 203. 321, 322. ii. 9. 27 Jndae, i. 15 Judffius, i. 15 Judaicns, ii. 350 Judex, i. 90. ii. 81. 178 Judicio, ii. 178 Judicium, i. 1 15 Judioo, i. 90 Juger, rum, i. 132. 141. 161 Juglans, i. 87. ii. 179 Juguluin, lus, i. l-tS Juj^uin, ii. 278 Juc;us, i. 161 Juliomagus, i. 24 Junexit, ii. 284 Jun-o, i. 172. 220. 241. 319. ii. 214 Junior, ii. 296 Juno, i. 3 Jupiter, i. 3. 31. 70.76. 134. 167 Jurabere, ii. 142 Jurandus, ii. 141, 142 Juratur, ii. 141, 142 Juratus, ii. 142 Juratus sum, ii. 102 Jure, ii. 178 Jureconsultus, i. 61 Jurgo, or, ii. 105 Jurisconsultus, i. 61 Juro, i. 304. ii. 99. 214. 305 Jus, i. 85. 113. ii. 324. 344 Jusjuranduin, i. GO, 62 Jusit, ii. 284 Jussi, i. 321, 322 Jussum, sus, i. 143. 145 Justa, i. 161 Justa persolvere, ii. 177 Justitia, i. 153. ii. 298 Justitium, i. 155 Juvat, ii. 31. 122 Juvatio, i. 187 Juvenaie, i. 104 Juvenilis, i. 104 Juveuior, ii. 88. 296 Juvenis, i, 109. ii. 80.88. 177 Juventa, tus, i. 159 Juventus, i. 48. 86. 155. 139 Juverint, ii. 309 Juvo, i. 171. 1S2. 317. ii. 27 Juxta, ii. 36 Kjpso, ii. 227 Kalendae, i. 159 Krus, ii. 272 Labasco, i. 226. 311 Labefacio, i. 206 Labes, i. 99. 153 Labia, um, i. 137 Labo, i. 177. 311 Labor, i. 91. 299'. ii. 277 Laboratus, ii. 142 Laboro, ii. 9. 215 Labos, ii. 277 Labrusca, um, i. 137 Lac, i. 29, 30. 70. 72. 153. 159 Lacer, i. 67 Lacertum, us, i. 145 Lace«;so, i. 272, 273 Laches, i. 63 Lacio, i. 208. 273. 313 Lacryma, ii. 280. 286 Lacrymo, or, ii. 105 Lactes, i. 159 Lacunar, i. 31. 139 I.acus, i. 124 Laado, i. T72. 235. 320, 321. ii. 304 Laertius, i. 68 La;ti>, ii. 105 Laetor, i. 293. ii, 22. 71. 99. 105 Laevus, ii. 287 Lagopus, i. 49. 57 Lailaps, i. 13 Lais, i. 119. 121. ii. 299 Lambio, bo, i. 219. 324 Lamenta, turn, i. l6l Lamentatus, ii. 139 Larapas, i. 35, 77. 138. ii, 322. 340 Lanea, i. 137 Langueo, i. 197. 317. 323 Lania, nicia, Hicium, i. 137 Laniana, ii. 180 Lanio, nius, i. 140 Lanista, ii. SO Lanx, i. 51 Lapidesco, i. 226 Lapis, i. 39. 41. 99. 226. 178 Laquear, i. 31, 96. 106. 139. ii. 320 Lar, i. 74. 112, 113. 156. ii. 320, 339 Largio, or, i. 293. ii. 105 Larissa, i. 15 Larix, ii. 326 Lars, i. 74 Laser, i. 32 Lassus, i. 188. 226. 301 Latebra;, i. 159 Lateo, i. 193. ii. 2l5 Later, i. 76 Lateranense, i. 103 Latet, ii. 31. 197 Latex, Index of Words. Latex, i. 5i Latin^, ii. 181 Latito, i. 193 Latro, ii. SO. 350 Latum, ii. 118 Latus, i. 48. 83 Layaci lira. ii. 302. 349 Laver, i 3'>, 33 Lavit, ii. 309 Lavo, i. 182. 309. ii. 101. 309 Laupheius apolheca, i. 10 LaureatiB, ii. 179 Laurus, i. 148 Laus, i. 49. 85. 113. ii. 178 Lautia, i. 161 Lautitiae, i. 182 Leajiia, i. 5 Leander, drus, i. 65 Leber, ii. 252. 261. 284 Lebes, i. 36. 79. ii. 523 Lecca, i. 10 Lece, ii. 284 Lecio, ii. 284 Leciones, ii. 273 Lectio, i. 27 Lector, trix, ii. 81 Lectuai, u', i. 145. 143 Lege, ii. 144 Legio, i. 27 Legitimus, ii. 88. 351 Lego, i. 180. ii.215 Lego, i. 89. 171. 248. 325. ii. 304 Leiber, ii. 261 Leibertaded, ii. 284 Leitem, ii. 284 Lelex, ii. 325 Lemur, i. 118. 156 Lendes, i. 156 Lenio, ii. lOl Lens, i. 49. 87. 92. 156 Leo, i. 5. 312. ii. 334 Leopardus, i. 62 Lepor, pos, pus, i. 57. 84. ii. 321.324 Lesbos, i. 17 Letale, i. 104 Lethe, ii. 331 Lethum, i. 155 Letum, i. 263 Levare, ii. 215 Levir, i. 33 Levis, ii. 287 Lex, i. 89 bis. ii. 325 Lexivia, um, i. 137 Libanus, i. 20 Libbys, ii. 342 LibenS; ii. 145 Liber, i. 66, 67. ii. 178 Liber, ii. 62 Libeiare, ii. 67. 215 Liber.itus, ii. 61 Liberi, i. 156. ii. 82 Libertabus, i. 64 Liberum, i. 69 Libet, i. 307. ii. 26. 122 Libitum, ii. 141 Libra, i. 12 Librae, ii. 178 Libripens, i. 87 Libum, us, i. 145 Licebit, ii. 155. 272 Licentior, ii. 88 Liceo, or, i. 193. 305. ii. 121 Licet, i. 307. ii. 26. 122. 155 Licet, ii. 153 Licia, um, i. 161 Licitum, ii. 141 Liciturum, ii. 141 Liciiit, ii. 155 Lien, i. 30. 73 bis, ii. 338 Lignor, i. 31 1 Lignum, i. 69 Ugo, i. 27. 72 Ligon, i. 70 Ligur, gus, i. 85. 142, 143. ii. 321. 324 Ligurio, i. 312 Ligustrum, i. 20. 29 Limax, i. 56, 57 Limen, i. 141 Limentum, i. 141 Limes, i. 36 Limus, i. 151 Lineas, ii. 178 Linio, no, i. 262, 263. 282.309. 315. 324. ii. 72. 310 Linquo, i. 265 Linter, i. 32, 33. 76. 114. ii. 339 Liqebit, ii. 272 Liquebit, ii. 272 Liquefacio, i. 207 Liqueo, i. 191.313.323 Liquet, i. 308 Liqui, i. 323, 324 Liquidus, ii. 303 Liquor, i. 303. ii. 303 Lis, i. 81. 111. 117. ii. 323. 342 Liters, i. 159 Literas, ii. 17S Littus, i. 84 Litum, ii. 310 Liveo, I. 198 Liviscor, i. 31Q Lixa, ii. 80 Lixivia, um, i. 137 Loca, ii. 145. 178 Loci, i. 128. 156 Loculi. i 156 Locum, i. 145. ii. 145 Locuples, i. 79. 93. IIG. ii. 62. 322. 340. 341 Locui, i. 126, 127, 128. 145. 156. ii. 145. 178 Lodix, i. 52 Lon.'ie, ii. 18. 61 Loquentium, turn, i. 115 bis Loquor, i. 297. ii. 281. 215 Lotium, i. 182. ii. 350 Loumen, ii. 255. 364 Lubet, i. 307. ii. 258 Lucar, i. 32. 96 Luceo, i. 89. 205. 310. 320. ii. 99 Lucer, i. 118 Lucerna, ii. 304 Lucescit, ii. 169 Luci, i. lOD Lucifer, i. 3. 67 Luciiius, ii. 288 Lucipor, ii. 229 Lucius, ii. 227 Lucrum, us, i. 145 Luctus, i. 204 Lucu, ii. 252 Lucuientias, i. 153 Ludere ludum, ii. 30 Ludi, i. 156. ii. 178 Ludifico, or, ii. 105 Ludo, i. 235. 321. ii. 215 Lues, i. 153. ii. 341 Lugdunum, i. 16. 29 Lugeo, i. 204. 310. 320 Lumbi, i. 156 Lumen, i. 30. 73. 162. ii. 364 Luna, i. 151 Luo, i. 213.216,217.11. 215 Lupa, i. 5 Lupanarium, i. 139 Lupinus, i. 145. 150 Lupum, pus, i. 5. 145 Lusi, i. 321 Lustra, um, i. 162 Lustrate, i. 1 62 Lustrum, ii. 243. 364 Lutetia, i. 14. 134 Lutum, i. 155 Lux, Index of Words. Lux.i. 51.55. S9. 99. 113. 153. ii. 227. 504. 327 Luxi, i. 310. 520 his Luxuria, es, i. 138 Luxurio, or, ii. 105 Lvcaon, ii. 500 Lyrnphor, i. 138 Lynces, ii. 341 Lynx, 1. 57. 112, bis M. Macedo, i. 71. ii. 319 Macella, lum, i. 137. 155 Macer, ii. 304 Mactrja, es, i. iSS Macero, ii. 304 Macliaon, ii. 300 Machinatus, ii. 139 Machinor, ii. 103 Macistratos, ii. 273 Madefacio, ii. 307 Mapander, cirus, i. 142 Maenahis, i. 127 Magalia, i. 1 G2 Mage, ii. 145 Magester, ii. 252 Magis, ii. 34.50,57.145, 175 Magnanimiis, ii. 83 Magnates, ii. 177. 180 Magnes, i. 36. 79. ii. 323 Magui, ii. 65. 144 Magnopere, ii. 1 50 Maialis, i. 6 Maian, ii. 338 Mailaiir, ii. 265. 284 Major, i. 84. 107, 103 Majoragius, i. 10 Majures, i. 156. ii. 180 Majus, i. 84. ii. 278. 324 Male, ii. 331 Male audit, ii. 181 Maledicentior, ii. 304 Maltdicere, ii. 215 Maledicns, ii. 304 Malifjcus, ii. 286 Malivolus, ii. 286 Malo, i. 253. ii. 118. 296 Milvas, i. l.'iO Malum, ii. 178 Mains, i. 19 MamercHS, ii. 228 Mam ilia, ii. 304 Manimona, i. 3, 4 Maiiaie, ii. 215 Manwps, i. 87. 167 Manripium, i. 9. 29. 167 Mandare oblivioni, ii.206 Mandatuin, tus, i. 143 Mandlbula, lum, i. 137 Mando. i. 227. 309, 310 Mane,i. 167. ii. 150. 252 Maneo, i. 203. 300. 310. 319, 320. ii. 13. 99.215 Manes, i. 117. 156. ii. 150. 177. 227. 258 Manis, i. 117. 156. ii, 150. 177. 227. 258 Manna, i. 22. 25 Mansi, i, 319, 320 Mansues, i. 79. ii. 323 Mansyetus, i. 79. ii. 323 Mansum, i. 310 Mantile, i. 7 1 Manlus, ii. 345 Manubiaj, i. 159 Mannmitto, i. 275 Maniv>, i. 17. 44. 123. ii. 345 Mapalia, i. 162 Marcipor, ii. 229 Marcins, ii. 287 Marcus, ii. 227 Mare, i. 25. 95, 96. 105. 114. 116. 155. ii. 178 Margarita, turn, i. 26. 137 Margo, i. 28. 72 Maria, i. 3. 10. 155 Marid, ii. 284 Mariscus, ii. 90 Marita, i. 20 Maritus, i. 20. ii. 180 Marmor, i. 34. ii. 321 Mars, i. 3. 31 Marspiter, i. 61. 77. 148. 167 Martiu.s, i. 6. ii. 287 Martvr, i. 74. ii. 81. 321 Mas, i. 55. 78. 111. 114. ii. 320. 322 Masculus, ii. 82 Massn, ii. 278 Massicum, ii. 180 Mater, i. 3. 76. ii. 302. 359 Materfamilias, i. 63 Materia, es, i. 138 bis. 149 Matricida, ii. 308. 350 Matrimus, ii. 351 Matrona, i. 12, 13 Matniesco, i. 31 1 Mavelis, ii, 118 Mavelleui, ii, 1 18 Maxillaris, i. 6 Maxim*', ii. 61 Maxinii, ii. fi5 Maxsunio, ii, 284 Maxnmne, ii, 258. 284 Me, ii. 83. 249. 252. 532 Mca rcfert, ii. 24 Mecastor. ii. 181. 286 Mocum, ii. 190. 249 Medea, ii. 300 Medeor, i. 503. ii. 27. 2)5 Medicina, i. 137. ii, 177. 180 Medico, or, ii. 105. 215 Medimnuni, nus, i. 145 Mediocris, ii. 88 Meditor, i. 294. ii. 103. 215 Medius fidiiis, ii, 181 Megalesii, ii, 178 Mehe, ii. 249 Meliecum, ii. 249 Mehercule, ii. 181 Mel, ii. 97 Meio, i. 252 Mel, i. 29. 70. 73. 99. 113. 150. 164. ii. 327 Mclatnpus, ii, 345 Melanium, i. 10 Meie, i. 164 Melior, i, 84 Melius, i. 84. ii. 144. 524 Mella,i. 150 bis 164 Melle, i. 70 Melo, ](is, lus, i. 22, 23. 143. ii 344.350 Memet, ii. 308 Memineiis, ii. 119 Memini, i. 300. ii. 33. 119. 215 Memnon, i. 73. ii. 319 Memor, i. 104. 107. 142, ii. 86. 88.321. Memordi, i, 175 Memnror, ii. 215 Menda, dum, i, 137 Ment laon, i. 66 Menelaus, ii. 500 Meneo, i. 300 Menerva, ii. 252, 284 Meninx, i, 52 Meniscor, i. 300. 119 Mcno, ii. 119 his Mens, i. 116. 143. 300 Mensis, i. 39. ii. 178 Mensus, i. 303. ii. 139 Mentio, i. .100. ii. Il9 Mentis, i. 49 Mentitiis, ii. 139 Mentus, i. 300 Mentuni, ii. 119 Meo, i. 179 Mequm, ii. 272 Mercatura^ Index of Words. Mercatura, tus, i. 139 Mercatus, ii. 139 Merc,es, i. 36. 80. 116. ii. 322 Merco, or, ii 67. 103 Mercuri, rie, i. 69 Mereo, or, i. 192. ii. 105. 215 Mereto, ii. 252 Meretricium, i. 115 Merges, i. 37 Mergo, i. 249. ii. 2)5 Meridies, i. 36. ii. 151. 308 Meritissimum, ii. 89 Merito, ii. 1 78. 334 Meritus, ii. 88, 139 Merops, i. 57 Mertare, ii. 276 Merum, ii. 180 Merx, 1. 1 U Messi, i. 99 Messim, i. 92 Messui, i. 319 Metatns, ii. 139 Meteora, ii. 359 ATethodus, i. 44 Metier, i. 302, 303. ii. 103 Meto, or, ii. 105 Meto, i. 275. 319 • Metreta, i. 26 Metuo, i. 216. ii. 215 Metus.i. 123. 125. 151 Mens, i. 68. ii. 94, 95. 127 Mi, i. 68. ii. 95. 296 Michael, i. 3. ii. 337 Michel, ii. 337 Mico, i. 184. 187. 319 Micturio, i. 291 Mihi, ii. 296 Miles, i. SO. ii. 81. 322. 341 Miletus, i. 17 Militiae, ii. 144 Mille, i. 22. ii. 85. 178. ■ 236 Mille & unus, ii. 85 Millia frumenti, ii. 178 Milliare, i. 118 Mimallones, ii. 341 Mina, ae, i. 159. 194 Mineo, i. 191. 193 Mingo, i. 252. 320 Minime, ii. 331 Minimi, ii. 65 Miniscor, i. 300 Ministrare, ii. 215 Minoris, ii. 65 Minos, i. 82. ii. 323 Minose, ii. 284 Miniio, i. 213 Minus, ii. 59 Miniitia;, i. 159 Minxi, i. 320 Mirari, ii. 216 Minis, ii. 88 Mis, ii. 92 Misceo, i. 190. ii. 216 Miser, i. 67 Miser, sum, ii. 177 Miserere fratris, ii. 22 Miserere nobis, ii. 28 Misereo, or, i. 297. ii. 105. 216 Misero, or, ii. 22. 105 Miserescit, i. 311 Miseresco, ii. 32. 105. 216 Miseret, i. 307. ii. 32 Miserete, ii. 1 24 Misertum, ii. 141 Miserus, i. 67 Missa, sio, i. 136 Mitesco, i. 226 Mithra, ii. 350 Mithradates, i. 147 Mithrldates, i. 147 Mitto, i. 275. 321. iL 178 Mitylene, i. 15 Mius, ii. 94 Mna, i. 159 Mnesteus, ii. 296 Modero, or, i. 295. ii. 103. 105 216 Modia, ii. 178 Modium, us, i. 145 Modo, ii. 178. 334 bis Modulor, ii. 103 Moenera, ii. 261 Mcenia, i. 117. 162 Moenus, ii. 261 Moeotis, i. 119. 122. ii. 297 Moereo, i, 192. 304. ii. 215 Mosrus, ii. 261 Moestitia, i. 153 Moestus, i. 153 Moisi, ii. 361 Molaris, i. 6. ii. 178 Mole, ii. 331 Moles, ii. 304 Molestus, ii. 304 Molio, or, ii. 103. 105 Mollicia, es, i. 133 Molo, i. 252 Molossus, ii, 366 MoJy.i. 15.28 Momen, i. 141 Momentum, i. 141 Momordi, i. 174. 324 Mcnentum, i. 115 Moneo, i, 171, 172. 187. 319. ii. 44. 46. 119. 181. 216 Moneor, i. 297 Monetas, i. 63 Moiiimenfum, ii. 258 Mouitiiin, ii. 312 Monoceros, i. 56. 82 Mons, i. 50. 87. 99. Ill Monteis, i. 116 Moratus. ii. 139 Mo.deo, i. 172. 174, 175. 201. 324 Morem, ii. 177 M rem gerere, ii. 26 Morior, i. 302. 309 Moror, i. 295. ii. 100. 216 Mors, i. 100. 301. ii. 69. 178 Mortalis, i 6. ii. 177 Mos i. 42, 82. 1 13 MoselU. i 13 Motiim, ii 310 M veo, i. 197. 317. ii. 101 916 M X demde, ii. 157 Moyses, i. 120. ii. 350. 361 Mucro, i 27. 71 Mugil, i. 57. 99. 141 Miila. i. 64 Mulciber, i 147 Mulctra, trum, i. 137. 205 Mulctrale, i. 205 Mulcpo, i. 20 >. 310 Mul-eo, i. 203, 204,205. 310. 320. 321 Mulier, i. 3. ii. 320 Mulsa, i 150 Mulsi, i. 310. 321 Multi, ii. 65 Multiplex, ii. 88 Muliiplio, i 185 Multo, ii, 61. 178 334 Miilta mane, ii. 150 Multor, ii. 102 Miilruin, ii. 145, 146 Mulx^, i.320 Muiidltia. es, i. 1 18 Munduin, dus, i. 145 Mundus, i. 151 Munero, or, ii. 102. 105 MuDgO, i. 241 Municeps, Index of Words. Municeps, i. 87. 108. ii. 81 Muiiio, i 28.3 IMumis, i. 48. 83. ii. 324 Miirali.s, ii. 177 Jill rex, i 52 Murmur, i. 31, 32. 155. ii. 321 Murmuror, ii. 102 Murtia Dea, ii. 27G Mus, i. 57. 85. 112, 113 Musa, i. 63, 64. 125. ii, 83 Muscus, i. 151 Musica, ii. 177 Musice, i. 25 Mussit.tie, ii. 100 Musta,t'im, i. 150. ii, 180 Muta, ii 101. 2J6 Mutsa, i 150 Mutiior, i. 295. ii. 67. 216 Mycenae, i. 15. It^O Myrteta, turn, i. 137 Mybtax, i. 52 N. NaenijT, i. 159 Naiades, ii. 540 Nais, ii. ■.:!99 Nam cur, ii. 157 Naiici>cor, i. 300. ii 103 Nar, i. 14. 159. ii. 339 Narbo, i. 15 136, 137 Naibona, i. 137 Nardiim, dus i. 47, 145 Naros, i. 159 Narrare ii 216 :^ascor, i. 2'.'6. 302 Nasiim, sus, i. 145 Na'a, i. 64 Natalis, i. 41. 103. 156. ii. 177 NatanUim, i. 115 Nato, i. 312 Natrix, ii. 327 Natiua, ii. 303 Naturalis, ii. 303 Nauci, i. 167. ii. 65 Navel.iis, i. 92. 96. 99. ii. 178 Naiiseo, i. 179 Ne, ii. 154, 15.5. IGO. 176. 287.-3.32.357 Neapolis, i. 14 Nee, ii 155.336 Necatus, i. 186. 187 Necessajius, ii. 89 Necesse, i, 167, ii 64 Necessitas, tiido, i. 1-iO Necessum. i. 167 Nee lego. ii. 277 Neco, i. 1S6. 313.319 Nee otiura, ii. 273 Nectar, i. 95, 96. ii. 320 Neclo, i. 172. 274. 321, 322 Npctus, i. 167 Nefas, i. 22. 154. 164. ii. 307. 340 Nefrcns, i. 6. 57. 87 Negli-o, i. 249. 320. ii. 277 Nep:otium, i. 7. ii. 3. 145. 170. 178. 236. 273 Nemo, i. 7 2. 151,ii. 80 Nemon', ii. 33S Nempf, ii. 176 Nt mu.-, i. 84 Neim, ii. 336 N'O. i 199 Ni penihes, i. 37 Nfpel, i. 18 Nepite, i. 96 Nepos i. 46, 82. ii. 323 Ntptl, i. 99 Nccpiam, i 164. ii. 307 Nequc, ii 155. 307 Nequeor, ii. 117 Nequiens, i. 88 Nequitia, es, i. 138 Nc-ieides, ii. 300. 341 Nericn, i. 140 Ntrio, i. 72. 140 Neronior, ii. 87 Nescio, i. 283. ii. 334, 335 Nescis, ii. 34. 342 Ne=cius, ii. 34. 335 Nestor, ii. 321. 339 Nevis, ii. 118 Neuter, i. 67 Neutri, i. 67 Neutrius, i. 67, ii. 298 Nevult, ii. 118 Nex, i, 51. 113. 167. u. 326 Nexi, i. 274. 321, 322 Nexo, i. 281. 299. 311. 319 Nexui, i. 319 Nicolaus, ii. 300 Niger, i. 6. 67 Niijredo, i. 28 Nigritics, i. 28 Nigritude, i. 28 N'gror, i. 28 Niliil, i. 167. ii. 296 Nihiii, ii. 65 Nihilominus, ii- 350 Nihiliim, i. 155. ii. 306. 350 Nil, ii. 296. 337 Nimio, ii. 178 Nimiruni, ii. 150, 3.0S Nimis, ii. 145 Niniium, ii. 145 Ningit, ii. 169 Ningo, i. 250 Ninus, i. 17 Nissii. 156. 332, 333 Nitor, .'298.ii. 71. 216 Nitrum, i. 155 Nivis i. 70. 90 Nix. i. 9. 112. ii. 326 Noceo, i. 193, 194. ii. 26. 100.216 Nuche, i. 1 16 Noe, i. 164 Nolo, i. 253. ii. 118.334, 335 Noinades, i. 156 Nomen, i. 73. ii. 228. 338 Nominari. ii. 13 Nun, ii. 176 Non modo, ii. 155. 176 Non solum, ii. 176 Non tantum, ii. 176 Non est meum, ii. 179 Non vereor ne, ii. 164 Non vereorneuon, ii. 164 Non vereor ut, ii. 1 64 Non vereor ut ne, ii. 164 Nonse, i. 159 Nonus, ii. 296 Norunt, i. 178 Noscito, i. 225 Nosco, i. 178. 223, 225. 317, ii. 119. 304 Noster, ii. 97. 127 Nostin', ii. 338 Nostras,!. 109, 110. ii, 87 Nostrate, ii. 87 Nostri, ii. 97 Notitia, es, i. 138 Nolrix, ii. ^55 Notum, ii. 304.310 Novale, lis, ii. 177 November, i. 75 Novemdeeiin, ii. 85 Novenus, ii. 296 Novi, i. 225, 317. ii. 119 Novicius, ii. 287. 350 Novissimus, ii. 88 Nountios, ii. 255 No''US, ii. 88 Nox, i, 90. 112.116 Nubet, Index of Words. Nubes, i. 78 Niibo, i. 219. 30R. 319, 320. ii. 30. 21(5. 28S Nuceris, i. 143 Nucis, i. 143 Nudare, ii. 63 Nimoe, L 135. 159 Nuili, i. 68 Niiilus, i. 68. ii. 80 Niim, ii. 134 Xumerius, ii. 227 Nuinerus, ii. 179 Numus, i. 11. 69. ii. 179. 236. 287 Nuncnpo, ii. 181 Nuiidinae, i. 159 Nuntia, i. 179 Nuntium, us, i. 145. ii. 179 Nuo, i. 217 Kuper, ii. 88 Niiperrinnis, ii. 88 Nupsi, i. 319, 320. ii. 288 Niiptiae, i. 159 Nuplunus, ii. 252 Niipturio, i. 291 Nuptus, ii. 142. 216 Nurum, i. 123 Nusquam, ii. 18 Nutiicor, ii. 102 Nutritia, i. 162 Nux, L 21. 113. 143. ii. 179. 327 Nycticorax, i. 58 O. O, ii. 74. 334 Ob, ii. 36. 182. 336 Obambulo, i. 178. ii. 217 Obduco, i. 221 Obedio, i. 235. ii. 26. 304. 350 Obeo, i. 284 Obequitare, ii. 217 Obex, i. 53, 54. 167. ii. 363 Obiens, i. 88 Objicio, i. 208, ii. 217 Obiit, ii. 178 Obitus, ii. 142. 305 Oblecio, or, ii. 71 Oblino, i. 262. 312 Oblitus, ii.33. 139 Oblivia, i. 162 Oblivio, um, us, i. 140. 153. 162. 312 Obliviscor, i. 300. 312. ii. 103. 217 Obmordeo, i. 201 Obnilor, i. 299 Obiiixe, i. 299 Obiuibo, i. 219 Oboleo, i. 194 Oborior, i. 302 Obrcpo, i. 264. ii. 217 Obruo, i. 216. ii. 217. 302 ObsciBnus, i. 231 Obscurus, i. 231 Obsecro, ii. 181 Obsequor, i. 298 Obsero, i. 271. .T 09. 317 Obses i. 80. ii. SO Obsideo, i. 200 Obsidioiiaiis, ii. 177 OI)sido, i. 233 Obsisto, i. 279 Obsoleo, i. 195 Obsoletus, ii. 141, 142 Obstendit, ii. 268. 284 Obstentui, ii. 268 Obsto, i. 181. ii. 26 Obstrepo, i. 264. ii. 217 Obstringo, i. 244 Obstruo, i. 215 Obtero, i. 266 Obtestor, i. 295 Obticeo, i, 196 Obtimus, ii. 268. 284 Obtineo, i. 189 Obtingit, tigit, i. 245 Obtrectare, ii. 217 Obtuiido, i. 231 Obtuor, ear, i. 297, 309 Obversari, ii. 217 Obveito, i 278. ii. 217 Obviam mitteie, ii. 179 Obumbrare, ii. 217, 306 Obvolvo, i. 281 Occario, i. 260 Occasus, ii. 141, 142 Occidens, i, 6 Occido, i, 174. 237, 233. 240. ii. 304 Occino, i. 259 Occipio, i. 210,211 Occipitium, i. 141 Occiput, i. 88. 99. iL 325 Occubo, i. 183 Occulo, i. 252 Occulto, i. 252 Occultus, i. 252 Oecnmbo, i. 2 1 9. ii. 217 Occupare, ii. 217 Occiirro, i. 269. ii. 27 Ocimum, mus, i. 145 Ocior, ii. 88. 287 Ocissimiis, ii. 83 October,!. 75. 103 Octodeciti), ii. 85 Oculus, i. 44 Odi.i. 305, ii. 119 Odio, or, ii 119 Odor, i, 83. ii. 278 CEdipus, ii. 345 CEstruiT), us, i. 145 CEsum, ii 261 (Eta, i. 14 Ofella, ii .304 Offtndo, i. 227. ii, 100. 217 Oftero, i. 267 Officio, i. 207, ii, 2$ Offieium, ii. 179 Ott'uudo, i. 234 Ohe, ii. 298. 331 Oisum, ii. 261 Oilier, ii 284 Oitile, ii. 284 Oleaster, i, 19. 21 Oleo, i. 193, 194. 217 Olerisalri, i. 62 Oleum, i 135. 153 Oii;n, ii 150 Olim jam, ii. 154 Oliin (|u;iiid"Hm, ii. 157 Olimpia, i. 162 Olivetnm, i. 20 Olivitas, i. 153 Olli, i. 323. ii. 92 Oloi, ii. 284 Olus, i. 83 Olnsatrum, i. 62 Olyiupa, ii. 243 Omitto, i. 276. ii. 308. 350 Omne, i. 6 Omneis, 1. 116. 140. ii. 261 Oranipofens, i. 61. ii. 308 Omnis, i. 6. 116. ii. 90, 91. 261 Onerare, ii. 62 Onix, i. 53. 90. ii. 327 Onus, i. 83 Opaiiis, i. 47 Opera, ii. 179 Opera;, i. 159 Operio, ii. 290. 313 Operior, i. 295 Opes, i, 160 Opifex, i. 108. ii. 80 Opitnus, ii, 87, 88 Opinatn.s. ii, 139 Opino, or, ii. 105 Opis, i. 160 0|)itnlo, or, ii. 27. 105 Oportebant, ii. 124 Oportent, Index of Words. Oporteiit, ii. 124 OporUt, ii. 1-24. 139 Oportfto, ii. 124 Oportuerit, ii. 1'24 Oppando, i. '22S Oppedo, i. 230 Opperior, i. 290, 302 bis. ii. 2S1 Oppeto, i. 277 Oppidoperquam, ii. 153 Oppido<]uam, ii. 158 O(>pignero, i. 84 Oppleo, i. 199 , Oppono, i. 260. ii. 217 Opprimo, i. 253 Oppucnare, ii. 217 Ops, i. 117. 167 Optimati's, i. liO. 118. ii. 177. 180 Optio, i. 9. 27 Optumus, ii. 258. 284 Opulens, ienlps, i. 143 Opus, i. 17. 84. 8G. ii. 64. 179. 344 Or, i, 70 Oratio, i. 27. ii. 179 Orbis i. 39, 100 Orcades, ii. 341 Orcinos, ii. 280 Ordior, i. 302. ii. 67. 103 Ordo, i. 27. 72. ii. 319 Oigia, i. 102 Orichalcha, i. 150 Oriens, i. 6 Orion, i. 73. ii. 300 Orior, i. 302. 309, 310 Ornatus, i. 148 Ornavit, ii. 252 Ornithise, i. 13 Oro ut, ii. 181 Oiontesi. 120. 147 Orpheus, i. 65. 120. ii. 296. 299. 345 Ortiis, i. 150 Orvx, i. 58 Os, i. 43.70. 83. 112. ii. 323. 344 Osa, ii. 284 Oscen, i. 141 Oscillum, ii. 89 Osciilo, or, ii. 103. 105 Ossa, i. 13, 14 O-tendo, i. 175. 230, 251 Ostenlare, i. 231 Osfentum, tiis, i. 231 04ium, ii. 179 Ostrea, um, i. 137 Osus, ii. 119 Otliryx, i. 13, 14 Otones, ii. 280 Ovis, i. 5. 92. 100. ii. 179 P. Paciscor, i. 246. 300. ii. 104 Paco, i. 246 Pactus, ii. 139 Paean, i. 30. ii. 319 Pageila, ii. 89 Pago, i. 246 Pagum, giis, i. 145 Palam, ii. 39. 350 Palaria, i. 162 Palatum, tus, i. 145 Palea, i. 160 Paiemo, nioii, i. 140 Pales, i. 4 Paliados, ii. 344 Pallas, i. 3. 77. 119. ii. 322. 340 bii Palleo, i. 191. ii. 217 Pallor, i. 151 Palmari?, rius, i. 143 Palmes, i. 3G. 80 Palpebra, brum, i. 137 Palpo, or, ii. 105. 217 Palumbes, i. 58 Palus, i. 48. 85. 114. 145. 1&2. ii. 344 Pampinus, i. 46 Panax, ii. 327 PandectjB, i. 24. ii. 178 Pandion, ii. 300 Pando, i. 228, 229. 309, 310 Pango, i. 324 Panis, i. 38. 109, 110 Panis acerosus, i. 83 Pannum, nus, i. 145. 148 Panther, a, i. 58. 62. 76. 138 Papae, ii. 268 Papyrus, i. 44. 47. 136. 145 Par, i. 93. 112. ii. 28. 320. 339 Paracletus, ii. 300 Paradisus, i. 44 Paralipomenon, ii. 359 Parapherna, i. 162 Parasilaster, ii. 90 Parcimonia, ii. 287 Parco, i. 222. 322. ii. 217 Pardus, i. 58. 62 Parens, i. 4. 111. 115. ii. 81 Parentalia, i. 162 Parentalis, i. 162 Pareo, i. 193 Paries, i. 36. 79. ii. 341 Par'ietibus, ii. 264 Pario, i. 17G 212. 290. 323, 324. ii. 26 Parif, i. 112. 121 Purisii, i. 15. 23,24. 134 Parissimns, ii. 89 Paro, ii. 181 Parricida, ii. 80. 303 Pars, j. 92. 100. 160. ii. 179 Parsi, i. 222. 322 Parsitas, i. 222 Parsurus, i. 222 Particeps, i. 87 Participare, ii. 215 Partim, ii. 150 Partio, or, ii. 105 Partis, i. 92. 100. 160 Partitus, ii. 139 Parturio, i. 291. 512 Partus, i. 124 Parvi, ii. 65 Parum, ii. 150 Parum multi, ii. 150 Parum sape, ii. 150 Parvum, ii. 150 Pascha, i. 25. 155 Pasco, i. 224. 310,311. ii. 100, 101.218.268 Pascor, ii, 101. 918 Pascua, i. 162 Passum, i. 310 Passus, i. 123. ii. 179 Pateo, i. 191. 194 Pater, i. 76. 93. 104. 106. 116. 118. ii. 339 Pater familias, i. 61. 63 Patibulum, lus, i. 145 Patio, ii. 105 Patior, i. 301. 310. ii. 105 Petria, i. 6. ii. 180 Patricius, ii. 287 Patrimus, ii. 351 Patrisso, i. 31 1. ii. 278 Patrius, ii. 83 Patruelis, i. 103. ii. 81 Pauca, ii. 180 Paveo, i. 197. 310. 317 bis Paves, ne, ii. 161 Paves uf , ii. 161 Pavi, i. BIO. 317 Paulo, ii. 178 Paulum, ii. 150 Pavo, vus, i. 140, ii. 82 Pauper, i. 101. ii. 86 Paupera, ii. 86 Pauperia, es, tas, i. 135 Paupertates, i. 153 Pax, Index of Words. Pax, i. 51. 113. 153. ii. 325 Pean, i. 30. ii. 319 Peccare peccata, ii. 30 Peccatum, tus, i. 145 Pecten, i. 30. 73. ii. 338 i Pectita teli\is, i. 277 Pectitae lana?, i. 277 Pecto, i. 274. 277. 322 Pectus, i. 84 Pecus, i. 2. 83. 85 bis. 167. ii. 80. 324 Peda, i. 155 Pedes, ii. 80. 341 Pedetentim, ii, 150 Peditus, i. 231 Pedio, i. 312 Pedo, i. 230, 231. ii. 268. 310 Pegi, i. 324 Pegniuni, i. 10 Pegunia, ii. 284 Pejero, ii, 305 Peiius, ii. 265 Pejor.jus, i. 84 Pelagus, i. 45. 155 Pelea, ii. 284 Peliego, i. 320. ii. 287 Pellicio, i. 208, 209. 320 Pellis, i. 38 Pello, i. 172. 254. 324. ii. 218 Pelvis, i, 91 Pandas, ii. C6 Pendeo, do, i. 172. 174, 230, 235. 324. ii. 22. 218 Penes, ii. 36. 341 Penetral, i, 139 Penetrare, ii. 100. 218 Pensare, ii. 213 Pensuui, ii. 151 Pentecontarchus, i. 287 Penum, us, i. 2. 44. 46. 84. 145. 148 />fj. 155 Pepedi, ii. 310 Pependi, i. 324 Peperi, i, 176. 323, 324 ' Pepis;i, i. 246 Pepuli, i. 324 Per, ii. 36. 49. 58. 158. 182 Peragit, ii. 30G PeraiO, i. 247 Peragror, ii. 102 Pf rcello, i. 253. 234 PtTcoiitari, ii. 44. 104 Percunctari, ii. 218 Percuiro, i. 175. 269 Percutio, i. 212 Perdepso, i. 273 Perdix, i. 58 Perdo, i. 232 Perilomo, i. l84 Perduco, i. 221 Perduellio, i. 23 Perduiai, ii. 108. 117 Perduo, i. 233 Peregre, ii. 150 Perendie, ii. 150 Pereo, i. 284 Perfero, i. 268 Perficio, i. 176, 207. 303 Perficior, i. 307 Perfidia, i. 153 Perfluo, i. 215 Perfodio, i, 209 Perfrictio, i, 206 Perfrigeo, i. 205, 206 Perfringo, i. 246 Perfruor, i. 299 Perfugio, i. 209 Perfiindo, i. 234 Perfiingor, i. 296 Pergama, i. 128, 129 Pergamenum, i. 129 Pergamon, mus, i. 128, 129. 145 Pergo, i. 243. 320, ii. 100.218 Perhibpo, i. 183 Periclei, i. 120 Periclitor, i. 295, ii, 104 Peiiens, i. 88 Perimo, i. 257 Perinde, ii, 150. 154 Perinde ac si, ii. 154 Perindus, i. 44 Perlego, ii. 287.304 Perlinor, ii. 102 Peilucidior, ii. 53 Pertnaneo, i. 203 Permisceo, i. 190 Peimitto, i. 276. ii. 218 Pt-rniulcea, i. 202 Permuletus, i. 205 Pernicies, i. 124. 148. 153 Pernicii, i. 124. 148. 153 Pprnitor, i. 299 Pernix, i. 299 Peroleo, i. 1 94 Pero«iis, ii. 1 19 Pei-pello, i. 254 Perpendo, i. 230 Perpenna, i. U) p. rpes, i. 79. ii. 341 Pe.priiior, i. 301 Perpeluo, ii, 178 Perpetuus, ii, 89 Perplicatus, i. 186 Perpoto, i. 182 Perquam, ii. 60. 158 Perquiro, i. 266 Perquisitius, ii. 58 Perrexi, i. 320 Perruinpor, ii. 102 Perscribo, i. 218 Persequor, i. 298. ii. 218 Perses, sens, i. 65. 143. 147 Perseverare, ii. 100 Persica, ii. 179 Pers'sto, i. 279 Persolvo, i. 280 Persoiio, i. 183. 187 Perstrepo, i. 265 Perstringo, i. 244 Persiiadeo, i. 203 Persuasus, ii, 88 Pertasdere, ii. 218 Pertajdet, i, 307 Pertaeduissent, ii. 124 Pertssiim, ii. 141 Perteudo, i. 230 Perterrpo, i, 1 38 Pertineo, i, 189, 190 Pertinet, ii. 43 Pertingo, i, 245 Pervadn, i. 236. ii. 21$ Pervagatior, ii. 58 Pervagor, i. 295 Perveho, i. 251 Pervenio, i. 286 Perverto, or, i. 278, 279 Pervicax, i. 222 Pervigil, ii. 337 Pervigilium, i. 137 Perungo, i. 242 Pes, i. 36. 60. 80. 107. 113. ii. 80, 522.341 Pessimus, i, 17. 48 Pe«sum, i. 286, 287. ii. 151 Pessundare, i. 181.236 Pestes, i. 153 Pestifer, rus, i. 142 Pestilentias, i. 153 Petitnm, ii. ol2 Peto, i. 171. 177. 276. ii. 44. 67. 218 Petrus, i. 3. 154 Pexi, i. 322 Phaeton, i. 74 PhalaiLX, i. 52. 89 Phaleias, i. 158 Piiion, ii. 300 Pharetra, ii. 302 Piiarias. i. 35 Pharnax^ ii. 327 Pharus, Index of Words. Pharus, i. 48 Phasclus, i. 45 Philippi. i. 15 Philosopha^tor, ii. 90 ]'lilius, i. 17 Phorcyii, ii. 319. 358 Phryges, i. 89. ii. 341 Pl.ryx, i. 89. 112. ii. 325 Phyllida, i. 1-21 Pices, i. 1 50 Pictiiro, ii. 352 Pio, i, 68 Pietas, i. 35. 7*7. ii, 322 Pigendum, ii. 141 Pig's, ii. 124 Piget, i. 307. ii. 32 Pigneris, i. 84 Pigncro, or, i. 84. ii. 102. 218 Pignus, i. 84 Pigritia, i. 138. 153 Pigror, i. 1 38 Pilealus, ii. 134 Pileoium, i. 145 Pileutn, us, i. 145 Pili, ii. 65 Pinaster, i. 19 Pincerna, ii. SO Pinca, ii. 179 Pin,!io, i. 243 Pinguitia, cs, i. 13S Pins-), i. 137. 273. 319 Finns, i. 19. 21. 14S Piper, i. 32. 150 Piraster, i. 19 Pirois, ii. 342 Pirus, i. 19 Piscicnli, ii. 90 Pi>o. i. 273 Pistiilnm, lus, i. 145 Pistrina, nnm, i. 137. ii. 177 Pistris, i. 327 Pilhia, i. 162 Pitiiiate, i. 94 Pituita, i. 153 Pins, i. 68. ii. 89 Pix, i. 51. 113.ji. 326 Pixis, i. 81 Pla^eo, i. 192 Placet, i. 307. ii. 26 • Placide, ii. 331 Placitiis, ii. 142 Piaga;, i. 160 Planeta, tes, i. 25, 26. ii. 173 Plango, i. 241 Planiiia, es, i. 138 Platanus, i. 19,20. 148 Platea, ii. 300 Plato, ton, i. 3. 70. 140. ii. 319. 335 Piaudo, i. 236. 322. ii. 100. 213 Plaustrutn, i. 54 Plebed, ii 284 Plebes, i. 70. 124. 143. 148. ii. 341 Plebiscitum, ii. 311 Pitbs, i. 86. 113. 143. 148. 153. ii. 2r)8. .325 Plectrt, or, i. 275. 277. 322 Pleo, i. 199 313 Pleps, ii. 268 Plerique, i. 156 Plerus, i. l56 Pleuresis, ii. 359 Pleuron, i. 16 Plexi, i. 322 Plico, i. 90. 185. 319 Plostrnm, i. 54. ii. 284 Pluit, ii. 169 PIuo, i. 215, 216 riurimi, ii. 65 Plurimiim, ii. 145 rinris, ii. 65 Plus, i. 85. 93. 106 bis. 168. ii. 58. 145 Pluveo, i. 216 Pobiiciim, ii. 255 Puder, ii. 320. 339 - Poema, i 1 19 Poena, ii. 69. 287 Poenior, ii. 87 Pocnitendus, ii. 141 Pccnltens, ii. 141 Pffinitere, ii. 124 Poenitet, ii. 32, 33. 124. 141.287 Posniturum, ii. 141 Poesis, i. 120. ii. 300 Pocta>iter, ii. 90 Pol, ii. 537 Pollen, i. 41. 70. 82 Polleo, i. 177. 191. ii. 218 Pollet, ii. 71 Pollex, i. 53 Polliceo, ii. 105 Poliiceor, i, 293. 295. ii. 104, 105 Pollicitus, ii. 139 Pollis, i. 39. 41.82 Polluceo, i. 205.320 Polluc.e.s i. 143 Polluctum, r. 206 Polluo, i. 21.3. ii. 270 Pollux, i. 143. ii. 327 Polluxi, i. 320 Polymitus, ii. 351 Polypus, i. 49. ii. 34.5 Poma;ria, ii. 178 Pomrrrinm, ii. 261. 287 Pompa, ii. 150 Pompeius, i. 68. ii. 265. 293 Poninm, i. 21. 29 Pomus, i. 19. 21 Pondo, i. 12. 22, 23.168. ii. 178 Pondus, i. 83 Pone, ii. 36. 181. 358 Pono, i. 2.59, 260. 319. ii. 101. 218.310. 35S Pons, i. 50 PonUis, i. 17 Poplei, ii. 284 Poples, i. 3(( Popli, ii. 284 Poplicus, ii. 268 Poplos, ii. 284 Poposci, ii. 44 Popularis, i. l03 Populo, or, ii. 104, 105 Populus, i. 20. 68 Porcius, ii. 287 Porrecta, ii. 177 Porricere, i. 203. ii. 273 Porrigo, i. 242 Porrum, ii. 277 Portendo, i. 230 Portions, i. 44 Portio, i, 27 Portum, tus, i. 124. 145 Posco, i. 175. 224, 225. ii. 44. 219 Posivi, i. 260 Possideo, i. 173 Possis, ii. 343 Possum, ii. 116. SlO Post, ii. 36. 54 Post ante, ii. 152 Post fero, i. 268 Post lioc dein. ii. 157 Post pono, i. 260 Postea, ii. 145. 329 Postica, cum, i. 137, ii.« 179 Postidca, ii. 284 Postilla, ii. 330 Postis, i. 39.100. 155 Postretno, ii. 145 Postridie, ii. 19. 57 508. 331 Postulatir), latum, i. 140 Postulo, ii. 67 Posui, i. 319.ii. 310 Pole, ii. 86. 116. 145 Potens, ii. 116 PotesseiD, Index of Words. Potessem, ii. 116 Potesfas, ii. 177 Potcstur, ii. 116 Potior, i. 309, 310. ii. 71. 88. 104 Potiri, i 309, 310. ii. 71. 104. 219 Potis. ii. 34. 86.88. 116. 145 Potissimus, ii. 83 Potius, ii. 175 Poto, i. 18'2. ii. 142 Potui, ii. 310 Potus, ii. 142 Prse, ii. 39. 56. 153. 182. 297 Prabeo, i. 193. ii. 219 Praebia, i. 162 Prabitor, i. 193 Prffibitunis, i. 193 Praebitiis, i. 193. ii. 142 Pia;cavere, ii. 219 Pracedo, i. 239. ii. 219 Praecello, i. 255 bis. ii. 219 Praecelsus, i. 253 Prsecep?, i. 70 Pi-aschone^, ii. 230 Prjficido, i. 238 Praecingo, i. 241 Praecino, i. 259 Prsecipem, pps, i. 70 Frcecipio, i. 210, ii. 27 Prascipis, i. 70 FrjECipito, ii. 1 01 Praecipue, ii. 531 Praeclndo, i. 235 Praecordia, dium, i. 162 Praecox, ii. 327 Prsecurro, i. 175. 269. ii. 219 Praedico, i. 221. 309 Praeditus, ii. 62. 134 Prsedium, ii. 179. 237 Praedor, ii. 104 Praeeo, i. 284. ii. 219 Prreesse, ii, 27 Praefero, i. 263 Prsefinio, i. 283 Prjegnans, i. ". ii. 134 Prcelego, i. 248 Praelio, or, ii. 105 Praelium, ii. 287 Pragmetun, i. 216 Prfemiiieo, i. 191 Praemitto, i. 276 Prsemotnordi, i. 176 Prffimunio, i. 2 'S Prsneste, turn, tus, i. 2, 15. 96 Prjenomen, ii. 226 Praenosco, i. 2?3 Piacpedio, i. 312 ■Prajpe?, i. 79- ii. Z^\ Praepi>ilere, i. 191 Prsepono, i. 260 Praiqiiam, ii. 158 Praes i, 80. li. 323 Praescribo, i. 218. ii. 27 Praescns, i. 7. ii. 116 Pr£Esentebus, ii. 152. 284 Praesente testibus, ii. 152 Prssentio, i. 283 Praesepe, pis, i. 92. 96 Praeses, i. 80. ii. 322 Prffiseted, ii. 284 Prae=id€0, i. 200. ii. 27 Pra2stat, ii. 27 Prastigiae, i. ICO PrcEStingno, i. 242 Prae?tj,"i. ISl. 137. ii.- 121. 219 Pi-aistolor, ii. 219. 351 Piasstu, ii. 255 Praesloius, tiilns, ii. 351 Prasul, ii. 80 Prcesiimo, i. 257 Piaetendo, i. 250 Praeter, ii. 36 Piffitereo, i. 284 Praeteriam, ii. 118 Prasteriit, ii. 31 Prstextum, tus, i. 145 PrKtexo, i. 282 Praevaleo, i. 192 Praevenio, i. 286 Praeverto, tor, i. 278. 303. ii. 102.219 Praevideo, i. 200 Praeut, ii. 158 Praiideo, i, 200. 324 PrandiuDi, ii. 191 Pransus, ii. 142 Precaatum, i. 115 Preces, i. 160 Precis, i. 168 Precor, ii. 104 Precor ut, ii. 181 Preher.do, i. 227 Premi, i. 260 Premo, i. 258. 321, 322 Prendo, i. 227 Presbyter, i. 67 Presepe, pis, pium, j. 139, 140 Pressi, i. 321, 322. Prex, i. 113. l60. ii, 326 Pridie, ii. 19. 57. 308 Primates, ii. 180 Pr-mitise, {.160 Primo, ii. 145. 178. 334 Piimor, i. 107. 108 Primores, i. 156 Priinn=, ii. 58: 88. 35l Princeps i. 87, 108, 109. ii. 80 Prior, ii. 58. S8 Privernas, ii. 87 Pro, ii. 39. 56. 182. 334 Pro avos, i. G5 Pro virili, ii. 179 Probus, ii. 304 Procedo, i. 239. ii. 219 Procella, i. 254. ii. 306 Procello, i. 254 Procer, i. 118. 168 Proceres, i. 118, 157. 1C8 Procubo, i. 183 Procul, ii. 37. 3.97 Procumbo, i. 219. ii. 219. 307 Prociirro, i. 175. 270. ii. 307 f*rocus, ii. 306 Prodegi, i. 324 Prodeo, i. 284 Prodere, ii. 219 Pj-odigo, i. 247 Prodigos, ii. 284 Piodigas, ii. 62 Prodo, i. 232 Produco, i. 222. ii. 306 Profana, ii. 306 Profari, ii. 306 Profecto, ii. 306. 334 Profero, i. 268, ii. 306 Professio, i. 297 Proffcssus, ii 139 Proficio, i. 207 Pr'.ficiscor, i. 300. ii. 305 Prcfiteor, i. 297. ii. 306 Profluer.s, i. 6. ii. 177 Profugio, ii. 506 Profunda, ii. 506 Profundo, i. 234 ii. 307 • ProfundiHn, i. 7. ii. 178 Profuturus, ii. 351 Progenies, i. 125 Progigno, i. 260 Progne, ii, 302 Progredior, i. 301 Prch, ii. 74 Prohibeo, i. 188. ii. 67. 219 Prohibia, i. 162 Projicio, i. 208 Proilium, ii. 28T ProJn, ii. 338 Prolej, IiyfDEX OF Words. Proles, i, no. 195. ii. 341 Prolis, i. 153 Proloquor, i. 298 Prolui;eo, i. 204 Prolnvies, vio, vium, i. 140. 143 Promereo, or, i. 192 Promico, i. 184 Promineo, i. 191 Promitto, i. 276 Promo, i. 256. 320 Promoveo, ii. 101 Promsi, i. 320 Promtus, i. 256 Pronepos, ii. 306 Pronis, nus, i. 143 Pronuba, ii. 305 Pronuntio, i. 119 Propages, go, i. 140. ii. 30T Propando, i. 228 Prope, ii. 37 Propello, i. '254. ii. 507 Properare, ii. 100. 220 Properatus, ii. 142 Propheta, les, i. 138. ii. 307 Propior, pius, ii. 37 Propono, i. 260 Propontis, ii. 307 ProposituiTi, ii. 177 PiopUr, ii. 36. 182 Propterea quod, ii. 186 Propugnare, ii. 220 Propulso, ii. 307 Proquam, ii. 158 Pro rata, ii. 179 Proripio, i. 211 , Prorsus, ii. 179 Proruo, i. 216 Prosa, ii. 179 Prosapia, es, i. 133. 153 Proscribo, i. 218 Proseqiior, i. 298 Pro-;icia, es, lun, i. 137 Prosper, rus. i. 67. 142 Prospicio, ii. 26. 188. 220 • Prosterno, i. 261 Prostibula, luni, i. 9 bis. 137 Prostituo, i. 214 Prostrasse, i. 178 Prosiim, ii 1)6 Pr..teii'lo, i. 230 Protero, i. '266 Proterviis, ii, 306 Proiiiius, ii. 151 PrctrRbo, i '251 Provebo, i. 251.ii. 206 Provenio, i. 286 Provideo, i. 200. ii. 26. 220 Proviiicia, es, i. 138 Provolvo, i. 281 Prout, ii. 153 Proxime, ii. 37 Proximiis, ii. 37 Proxsumus, ii. 284 Psallo, i. 255. 323, 324 Psalterium, ii. 299. 351 Puber, i. 70. SO. 107 Pubertas, i. SO Pubes, i. 80. 101 Publius, ii. 227 Pucnando, ii. 273 Piidebunt, ii. 124 Pudendum, ii. 141 Pudens, ii. 141 Pudent, ii. 31. 33. 124 Pudeo, ii, 124 Pudet, i. 307. ii. 32, 33. I'23. 141 Puditunini, ii. 141 Puella, ii. 179 Puellulus, ii. 90 Puer, i. 66. 69. ii. 82. 90. 179 Pueritia, i. 135 Puerpera, rium, i. 61 Puertia, i. 327 Puerulus, ii. 90 Puerus, i. 67 Pugil, i. 107. ii. 80. 319. 351 Pugillar, i. 139. 157 Pugiilares, i. 157, ii. 178 Pugilhis, ii.351 Pugio, i. 28 • Pugnarc, ii. 220 Pugnaturo e.^t, ii. 141 Pulchrior, us, i. 105 Pulex, i. 53. ii. 351 Pullus, ii. 89 Puis, i. 49. 87 Pulso, i. 311 Pultare, ii. 276 Pulvinsir, ii. 3'20 Pulvis, i. 39. 41.91. 151. ii. 323. 343 Pumcx, i. 53 Puiictum, tus, i. 145 Puntro, i. 175. 248. 324 Ptini, ii. 261 Punio, i. 285 Punior, ii 102 Puppis, 1. 92. 104. 142 Pupuiii i. 175. 324 Pure, ii. 531 Purgare, ii, 220 Purum, il. 177 Pus, i. 85. 113. 155. 168 Pusio, ii. 90 Puta, ii. 323. 330 Puteal, i. 139 Puteus, um, i. 145. ii. 26S Putisco, i. 311 Puto, ii.29. 66. 113.220. 328. 330 Pyrites, i. 37 Pyrois, i. 82 Pyrrii'hius, ii. 366 Pyrum, i. 21 Python, i. 31 Pyxis, L 119 Q. Qae, Qi, Qid, Qis, ii. 272 Qua. ii. 47. 49. 93, 94. 180 Qua de re, iL 190 Quacunque, ii. 307 Quadrans, i. 12. ii. 179 Quadrantal, i. 139 Quadrare, ii. 220 Quadrigae, i. 157. 160. ii. 296 Quadrijugae, ii. 296 Quadrupes,i. 107. ii. 30$ Quadruplico, i. 185 Quae, ii. 4. 92 Quaerito, i. 312 Quscro, i. 266. 31 5. ii. 220 Quaesitutn, ii. 312 QuKSO, i. 315. ii. 122 Qualicunque, ii. 308 Quails, ii. 7. 90 Quam, ii. 56. 58. 145. 157 Quamdiu, ii. 53 Quamdudum, ii. 53 Quamobrem, ii. 152. 190 Quanipotius, ii. 190 Quamprius, ii. 190 Quainvis, ii. 153. 157. 175.342 Quamvis licet, ii. 157 Quando, ii. 53, 54. 153. 354 Quandocumque, ii. 151. 303 Quandoque, ii. 151 Quandoquidem, ii. 153. 308 QuanquaiD, ii. 153. 157 Qnanti, ii. 65. l-i4 Quanticunque, ii. 05 Quantivis, ii. 308 Quail to, h NBEX OF M' ORDS. Quantd, li. 173 Quantum, ii. 145, 146. 157 Quautumvi?, ii. 157 Quaiitns, ii. 7. 90 Quapropter, ii. 94. 152, 307 Quare, ii. 49. 149. 307 Quartans, i. 7 Quarto ii. 146 Quartum, ii. 146 Quasp, ii. 252 Quasi, ii. 154. 333 Quasillum, lus, i. 145 Quassi, i. 321,322 Quasso, i. 212. ii. 101 Quas'uiii, i. 189 Quateniis, ii. 177. 307 Qiiaterni, i. 64 Quaternio, i. 27, 28 Quatio, i. 189.212. 321, 322 Quatuor. iL 287 Que, ii. 332. 357 Queatur, ii. 117 Queo, ii. 117 Quercetum, i. 21 Quercus, i. 19. 124. 143 Queror, i. 293. ii. 100. 220 Ques, ii. 94- Queuutnr, ii. 117 Qui, i. 67. ii. 4. 91, 92 Qui, ii. 93. 151. 178. 181 Quia, ii. 328 Quia enim, ii. 157 Quia nam, ii. 157 Quibo, ii, 117 Quibu>cum, ii. 94 Qiiicounque, ii. 284 Quicquid. ii. 287 Quid, ii. 93. 179 Quifiam, ii. 91. 308 Quidem <'erte, ii. 157 Quidqui'l, ii. 337 Quieus, i. 88 Quies, i. 79, 80. 124, 1 49. ii. 522 Quiesco, i. 223. 317. ii. 220 Quiete.s, i. 154 Quilibet, ii. 303 Quia, ii. 151. '^38 Quin:im, ii. 179 Quincunx, i. 11, 12.114. ii. 179 Quindecim, ii. 85 Quinqualria, i. 167 Quiuquatru-i, i. 157 Quinquennio, i. 27, 28 Vol. II. Quintilis, i. 6. 103 Quiutus, ii. 2i1 Quippequia, ii. 157 Quips, ii. 284 Quiiem, ii. 117 Quiris, i. 81. 114. 117. 157. ii.323. 342 Quiiite."--, i. 157 Quiritor, ii. 102 Qui.s, ii 91, 92, 93. 342 Quisquam, ii. 93 Quisqiie, ii. 58. 77. 91 Qulsquiliae, i. 160 Quit, ii. 275. 284 Quitum, ii. 310 Quitus, ii. 117 Quivi, ii. 310 Quivis, ii. 308 Quo, ii.47.49. 145 Quo. ii. 93, 94. 151. 179, 180, 181 Quo pergis, ii. 177 Qu5 tendis, ii. 177 Quoad, ii. 49. 151. 172 Quocirca, ii. 49. 94. 152 Quod, ii. 4. 146. 153. 182 Quoi, ii. 93 Quoius, ii. 93 Quoni, ii. 93 Quomodo, ii. 145. 334 Quoniam, ii. 150 Quoque, ii. 271. 308 Quor, ii. 149 Quot, i. 164. ii. 7 Quotcunque, i. 164 Quo'idias. ii. 303 Quoiiens, ii. 249. 284 Quotquot, i. 104, Quriusque. ii. 49. 94 Qurtius, ii. 272 Quuiu, ii. 93. 149. 271 E. Rabies, i. 154 Rabula. ii. 80 Eadicium, i. 115 Radix, ii. 326 Rado, i. 236. 522 Rainetita, turn, i. 157 Ramex, i. 53 Ramus ursula, i. 10 Rripa, i)um, i. 157 Rapacia, i. 162 Raphael, ii. '537 Rai>icia, i. 162 Rapio. i. 171. 177. 211. 319 Rasi, i. 522 Gg Raster, trum, i. 131. 145. ii. 179 Ratim, i. 92 Ratio, ii. 179 Ratione, ii. 173 Ratus, ii. 310 Rauceo, i. 191. 28S. 322 Raucesco, i 233 R.iucio, i. 288. 32Z Ravis, i. 91 Rausi, i. 322 Reate, i. 15. 96 Rebeliio, i. 27 Recah aster, ii. 90 Recedo, i. 239 Recello, i. 253 Recens, ii. 145 Recenseo, i. 190 Recensire, i. 190 Recensitus, i. 190 Recido, i. 174. 176. 237, 238 Recitner, ii 320. 339 Recino, i. 259. 318 Recipio, i. 210. ii. 220 Reciproco, or, ii. 105 Recludo, i. 235 Recognosco, i. 224 Recoio, i. 252 Recordari, ii. 220 Recreo, i. 179 Recrepo, i. 184 Recta, ii. 180 Recubo, i. i 83 Recudo, i. 227 Recumbo, i. 219 Recurro, i. 270 RfCusautuin, i. 1 15 Redamo, i. 173, 178 Redarguo, i. 213 Reddere, i. 312. ii. 221 Redder, ii. 1 20 Redeo, i. 284. ii. 13 Redhibeo. i. 13S Rediens, i. 88 Redigo, i 247 Redimo, i. 257. ii. 66, 67 Reditio domum, ii. 18 Redoieo, esco, i. 194, 195 Redundatu<, ii. 142 RediHido, i. 179 Redux, ii. 327 Refelli, i. 255. 524 Refercu), i. 288 Refero, i. 268. ii. 221. 304. 306 Refert, ii. 23. 26. 66. 306 Refertus, ii. 63 Reficio, Index of Words. Keficio, 1. y07 Kefigo, i. 242 Reflecto, i. 274 Refrico, i. 186, 13T Kefrictus, i. 20ti Refiigeo, i. '205 ' Refrigesco, i. 226 Refulgeo. i. 205 llegero, i. 269 Regia, ii. 177 Regis, i. 70. 143. ii. 304 Regnandus, ii. 141 Regnante, i. 101 Regnatur, ii. 141 Regnatus, ii. J 42 Rego, i. 39. 241. ii. 304. Regredior, i. 301 Regnla, ii. 304 Rei, i. 124. ii. 293 Reioe, ii. 284 Rejicio, or, i. 176 Reipublicae, ii. 308 Relangueo, i. 197 R«lavo, i. 182 Relego, i, 248 Releo, i. 2r)3 Relicuus, ii. 272 Religio, i, 27 Relino, i. 262, 263 Relinquo, i. 265. ii. 29 Reliquiae, i. 160 Rem familiarem, ii. 179 Remeo, i. 179 Renietior, i. 302 Reinex, i. 00. ii. 325 Remigo, i. 90 Reminisco, ii. 105 Reminiscor, i. 303, 304, ij. 105. 119 Remissa, ssio, i. 136 Remilto, i. 276. ii. 100 Remordeo, i. 174. 201 Reiimneror, ii. J02 Ren, i.30. 73. 113. ii. 519 Renitor, i. 299 Rennntiaie, ii. 221 Reniio, i. 217 Reor, i. 297 Repango, i. 245 Repello, i. 254 Rcpendo, i. 230 Rcpente, ii. 145 Repeicutio, i. 212 Rcpeiaie, ii. 252 Reperio, i. 290. 318 Repeto, i. 277 Repetunda, i. 168 Repleo, i. 199 Replico, i. 185 Repo, i. 264 Repoao, i. 260. ii. 221 Reposco, i. 224. ii. 221 Repotia, i. 162 Reprimo, i. 258 Re|)roniitto, i. 276 Repuerasco, i. 311 Repugnare, ii. 25. 221 Repungo, i. 175. 248 Requies, i. 79. 124. 149 Requiescere, ii. 100. 221 Requifitus, ii. 142 Requii'o, i. 267 Res, i. 80. 125. ii. 46. 63. 170. 236 Res cibi, ii. 19 Resarcio, i. 283 Rescindo, i. 234 Rcscio, i. 283 Rescribo, i. 213. ii. 221 Rtseco, i. 1 80 Reses, i. 80 Resideo, i. 200. ii. 221 Reside, i. 233 Resilio, i. 289 Resina, ii. 351 Resipio, i. 21 1 RfSisto, i. 279 Resolvo, i. 280 Resono, i. 1 83 Resoi beo, i. 1 98 Respicere, ii. 221 Respondeo, i. 174. 202. ii. 221 Respublica, i. 60, 61 Respuo, i. 217 Restinguo, i. 242 Restipulor, i. 295 Restis, i. 92. 97 Reslituo, i. 214. ii. 221 ReMo, i. 181 Resultare, ii. 100 Resunu), i. 257 Resuo, i. 214 Resurgo, i. 243 Rete, i. 41. 96. 140. 160 Retexa, i. 282 Reticeo, i. 196. 313 Reticulum, lus, i. 41. 145 Retineo, i. 190 Retis, i. 41. 96 Retoiqiieo, i. 204 Retraho, i. 251 Rutundo, i. 175. 231 Revello, i. 255 Reveriio, i. 286 Reverto, tor, i. 278, 279. ii. 105 Revincio, i.287 Reviso, i. 273 Revive, i, 280 Revocasti, i. 178 Revolvo, i. 281 Rex, i, 3. 22.8'9. 145 Rhaetia, ii. 287 Rhamnus, i. 13 Rliae, ii. 35 1 Rhetor, i. 119. ii. 321 Rhetorica, ii. 177. 179 Rhodanus, i. 8. 134 Rhodus, i. 17 RlioiiipliKa, ii. 297 Rhythmus, ii. 287 Rictiim, tus, i. 145. 244 Rideo, i. 202. 322. ii. 100. 221 Ringo, gor, i. 244. 303 Rinoceros, ii. 323 Riphaei, ii. 287 Risi, i. 322 Rivalis, i. 103 Rixo, or, ii. 105 Robur, i. 19. 77. ii. 321. 359 Rodo, i. 236. 322 Rogo, ii. 44 Roma, i. 15 Ro:tianus, ii. 88 Romphaa, ii. 270 Rorare, ii. 22 1 Ros, i. 42. 61. 82. 113. 151. ii. 344 Rosaria, ii. 178 Rosi, i. 32i Rosmarinum, nus, i. 61 Rostra, i. 162 Rnbus, i. 19, 20 Rudem accipere, ii. 180 Rude donatus, ii. 180 Rudens, i. 110. 115 Rudimentum, ii. 351 Radio, i. 229 Rudis, i. 10.3. ii. 180 Ruditus, i. 229 Rudo, i. 228 Rudus, i. 83 Rngo, ii. 101 Rumex, i. 53 Rumino, nor, ii. 102. 105 Rumpo, i. 172. 264.323, 324. 284 Ruo, i. 171. 215. ii. 100. 222 Rupes, i. 36 Rupi, i. 323, 324 Rupsit, ii. 284 Ruri, i. 100. ii. 52 Ruricola, ii. 80 Rus, i. 85. 98. 113. ii. 47,48.52.344 Rusticor, i. 311 Ruta, In"dex of Wokds. Rut.i, i. 150 Rutilare, ii. 100 Hutuin, ii. 310 Sacer, i. 142. u. 88. 219 Sacerdos, i. 82 • Sacoma, i. 147 . Sacrificor, ii. 102 Sacrosanctus, ii. 308 Seeculurn, ii. 178 SEpes, ii. 'JS3 Saepimei)tiim, ii. 288 Saepios, ii. 238 Saequlum, ii. 272 SoEvitia, es, i. 138 Sagax, ii. 304 Sagio, ii. 304 Sagum, gns, i. 146 Saguntos, turn, tus, i. 16. 145 Sal, i. 29 bis. 73. 95. 139. - 151. 155. ii. 337 Sdlamis, i. 82. ii, 5! 9. . 338. 342 Salar, i. 53 Salebrae, i. 160 Sales, i. 157 Salictum, i. 21 Salina, ii. 180 Salinae, i. 160 Salinum, i. 160. ii. 180 Salio. i. •^155. 289, 290. 309. 319 Sali.'c, ii. 326 Salli, i. 324 Sallo, i. 255. 309. 324 Sallustias, ii. 288 Salmon&i, ii. 299 Saltare, ii. 222 Saluber, i. 75. ii. 86. 277. • 351 Salubre, ii. 302 Salubris, ii. 277 Salubritates, i. 154 Saltii, i. 319 Salum, Ills, i. 146 Sahi-s i. 48. 86. ii. 324. 344 Salutari, ii. 13 Salutes, i. 154 Salvus sum, ii. 177 Sam, ii. 95 Samnis, i. 81. 114. 1 17. ii: 323. 342 Sancio, i. 172.287.320 Sancte, ii. 331 Sanctio, i. 287 Sanctioreis, i. 116 Sanctitas, i. 154 Sandix, i. 53. 55 Sane, ii. 331 Saiiequam, ii. 158 Sanguen, i. 41. 70. 82. 141. ii. 267 Sanguineus, ii. 303 Sanguis, i. 39. 41. 60. 70. 82. 151. ii. 267. 323. 342 Sanies, i. 154 Sanus, i. 60 Sanxi, i. 172.287. 320 Sapiens, ii. 134. 270 Sapieiitia, i. 154 Sapo, i. 211.319. ii. 100. 222 Sappliiru?, i. 8. 47 Sappho, phus, ii. 335. 345 Sapui, i. 319 Sarcina;, i. 160 Sarcio, i. 288. 322 Sardeis, dis, i. 104 Sardonix, ii. 327 Sarsi, i. 322 Sas, ii. 95 Sat, ii. 54 Sata, ii. 177 Satago, i. 247. 324 Sate, ii. 145 Satiari, ii. 62 Satias, i. 168 Satin', ii. 338 Satis, ii. 34. 61. 144, 145 Satis capio, i. 210 Satis do, i. 181 Satis exigo, i. 247 Satisfacio, i. 207. ii. 222 Satraps, i. 143 Saturn, ii. 310 Satur, i. 65. ii. 88 Satura, i. 65 Saturare, ii. 222 Saturnale, i. 1 IS Saturnalia, i. 118. ii. 177 Saturor, ii. 102 Saturus, i. 65 Saxo, ii. 319 Scabo, i. 219. 324 Scabiitia, es, i. 138 Scalfe, i. 160 Scalpo, i, 264 Scamnum, ii. 268 Scampnum, ii. 268 Scando, i. 223 ' Scatere, ii. 222 Scaturio, i, 312 Scelus, i. 83 Scena, ii. 288 Gg2 Sceptrum, ii. 283 Schema, i. 119. 147 Scientia, ii. 177 Scilicet, li. 152. 308 Scindo, i. 176. 234. 240. 316. ii. 309 Scio, i. 283. 317. ii. 33-f, 335 Sciolus, ii. 335 Scipio, i. 27 Scire tuum, i. 22 Sciscidi, i. 176 Sciscitari, ii. 44 Scisco, i. 223 Scit fidibus, ii, 183 Scitus, ii. 31 1 Scivi, i. 317 Scius, ii. 335 Scobis, i. 38. 41. 49. 143 Scolius, ii. 367 Scopje, i. 160 Scopera, i. 160 Scopula, i. 160 Scorpio, i. 56. 140 Scorpion, ii. 333 Scorpios, i.-43 Scorpius, i. 140 Scortum, i, 9 bis Scribo, i. 172. 218. ii, 288. 304 Scriplum, ii, 352 Scripsi, i. 172. 320. ii. 2SS Sciiptlum, ii. 352 Scriptulum, ii. 352 Scrobs, bi.s, i. 40, 41. 50, 51. J 43 Scrupulum, i. 155. ii. 352 Sculpo, i. 264 Scutum, tus, i. 145 Se, ii. 75. 33'> Sebe, ii. 252 Secatio, i. 187 Secedo, i. 239 Secerno, i. 262 Secius, ii. 33. 304 Seco, i. 186, 187 Secors, i. 76. 88 Sectio, i. 187 Sector, ii. 104 Secubo, i. 183 Secum, ii. 308 Secundo, ii. 145 Secundum, ii. 37. 152 Securis, i. 91 Secus, i. 46. ii. 37, 38. 144.304 Sed, ii. 156. 337 Sedeciin, ii. 85. 507 Index of Words. Sedeo, i. 80. ns. 200. 3'J3. 324. ii. 22'2. SO-l Sea. s, i. 80. ii. 304. Scdile, i.'71 Sedo, ii. 101 Sr-duco, i 222 Seedes., ii. 252 Seses, i. 79, 80. 100. ii. 322. 341 Segnitia, es, i. 138, 154 Sejcrr;.;are, ii. (37 St-jungo, i. 241 Seligo, i. 248. ii. .304 SHtnel, ii. 337 Semeritem, tiiii, li>, i. 92 Semipatfir, i. 148 Semis, i. 41. ii. 342 Seinisopitus, ii. 305 Seoiissis, i. 11, 12. 41. ii. 342 Scmpiterniis, ii. 352 Senator, ii. 81 Senatoies, i. 3 SeiiatMS-consuItum, i. ill Seiiecio, ii. 90 .Senccta, i. 227 Seneclus, i. 48. 86. 143. 227. ii. 142 Seneo, i. 311 •Senesco, i. 227. 311 Senex, i. 90. 100, 101. 143. 311. ii. 80, 88 Senio, i. 8. 28 Senium, i. 135. 155 Sensi, i. 172. 287. 320. 322 .Stiisuiii, siis, i. 146 Seiitio, i. 172. 287. 320. 322 Sentes, i. 157 Sentis, i. 59. 41. 92 Separo, ii. 305 . Sepelio. i. 285, 286 Sepes, ii. 2^8 Sepio, i. 289, 290 Seplasia, siiim, i. 157 Seplasiarius, i. lS7 Sepono, i. 260 Scps, i. 50. 86. 143 Septeiiiber, i. 6. 75. 103 Se[)teinflecim, ii. 85 Septemplicis, i. 168 Septiinx, i. 12 Sepulcra, ii. 280 Sequana, i. 8. 12 Sequenti, i. 102 Sequeiituni, i. 1 15 Sequester, i. 147 Seqiior, i. 298. ii, -22'1 Ssr, ii. 520 Seraphim, i. 22 S?rapis, i. 120, 122 Serenum, ii. 177 Series, i. 272 Sermo, i. 27. 71. 91. ii. 179. 319 Sero, i. 271, 272. 317. ii. 150. 3.34 Serpens, i. 58. ii. 134 Serpo, i. 264. ii. 222 Sena, i. 162. 272. ii. 177 Sertos, i. 162 Sertum, i. 162. ii. 177 Servabus, i. 64 Servilius, ii. 288 Servio, i. 283. ii. 2G. 222 SerX'ire servitutero, ii. 30. 184 Servitium, ii. 186 Seivitus, i. 48. 86 Servitutium, i. 115 Servius, ii. 228 Servom, ii. 255 Servos, ii. 284 Servus, ii. 173, 179 Sesaiiia, um, i. 137 Sesciinx, i, 12. ii. 288 Seuqiiidie?, i. 36 Se.-teitium, us, i. 69. 146. ii. \19 bit. 235, 236 Sestos, i. 17 Set, ii. 275. 284 S&vi, i. 317 Sexciiux, ii. 288 Sextans, i. 11, 12. 114 Sextilis, i, I(j3 Sextus, ii. 228 Sexiim, xiis, i, 46. 146 Si, ii. 175 Sibe, ii. 269 Sibikun, lus, i. 146. M8 Sic, ii. 336 Sicis, ii. 272 Sicubi, ii. 333 Sie-uti, ii. 333 Sido, i. 232. 240. 313 Sidus, i. 83. ii. 288 Sieni, ii. 116 Sifilare, ii. 270 Sifiius, ii. 284 Sigillum, ii. 89. 304 Signuni, ii. 179 Silentuin, i. 1 15 Sileo, i. 192 Slier, i. 19. 155 Silex, i. 151 Siligo, i. 150 Silva, ii. 28cJ Silvaniis, ii. 238 S.lvesler, i. 76. ii. 5» Silvia, Li. 288 Silvius, ii. 288 Similax, i. 51 Similis, ii. 28 Simo, on, i. 140 Sinnois, i. 82. ii. 243 Simplex, i. 90. ii. 8S ' Simul, ii. 175 Simnlacbrum, ii. 302 Sin, ii. 338 Sinapi, pis, i. 22, 23. 140. 155. 164 Sinciput, i. 88. ii. 325 Sindon, i. .30 Sine, ii. 39. 330 Singularis, rius, i. i43 Singoli, i. 157. ii. 179 Singultio, i. 285, 286 Sinister, ii. 88 Siuistinius, ii. 88 Sino.i. 262, 2G3. 317 Sinum, nus, i. 146. 143 Siquidem, ii. 145. SOS Siquis, ii. 272. 30S Siremps, i. 168 Siren, a, enis, i. 137. ii. 319. 338 Sirmio, i. 15 Sis, ii. 95 Siser, i. 32, 33. 185 Sisto, i. 278, 279. ii. 100 Sitire, ii. 222 Sitis, i. 91. 96. 154 Situm, ii. 510 Situs, i. 151 S;vi, i. 317 SHiaragdus, i. 47. ii. 202 Sniianimis, ii, 296 Smilioino, ii. 296 Smilax, i. 51. ii. 325 Soboles, i. 1 10. 154. ii. 195. 28,5 Socer, i. 46, 67 Sociabus, i. 64 Socordia, i. 83. 154 Socrates, i, 63. 122. 131 St)crus, i. 46 Sodalis, i. 103 Sol, i. 29. 73. 113. 151. ii. 319.337 Soledas, ii. 252 Solemme, ii. 288 Solens, ii. 134 Soleo, i. 304. ii. 143 Soles, i. 151 Solia, i. 155 Solius, ii. 288. 293 SoUers, ii. 288 Soliistinaum, Index of Words. Sollistitnum, ii. 288 Sollistimus, ii. 35! Sol Ins, ii. '288 Soloccismu'!. ii. 297 Solvit, ii. 178 Solvo, i. 171. 280. 517. 324 bis. ii. 222 Solum, i. 155. ii. 179 Solus, i. 68. 169 Solutum, ii. 512 Somnus, i. 148. ii. 270 Sonipes, i. 80. ii- 341 Sono, i. 183. IS". 309. ii. 100 Sonus, i. 148 Sopera, ii. 284 Sophroiiiiim, i. 10 Sopio, ii. 304, 305 Sopor, i. 151. ii. 304 Soracte, i. 96 Sorbeo, i. 198 Sorbitio, i. 199 Sorbo, i. 198 Sordis, i. 100. 169 Sorex, i. 53. 56 Sorites, i. 37 Sors, i. 100. 154 Sortior, i, 296 Sos, ii. 95 Sosipater, i. 147 Sospes, i. 101. ii. 86 Sotularis, i. 42 Souo, om, ii. 256. 284 Spadix, i. 52 Spado, ii. 352 Spargo, i. 249. 322 Spartiata, ii. 88 Sparum, rus, i. 146 Species, i. 1 25. ii. 298 Specie, i. 208. 313 Spectaculum, la, i. 162 Spectare, ii. 222 Spectat, i. 43 Spectatio, rei, ii. 18 Specter, ii. 102 Specus, i. 44. 46. 124. 148 bis SpelsEum, ii. 288 Spepondi, i. 175 Spemo, i. 26 1 . 317 Spero, ii. 67. 113 Spes,i. 125. 154. ii. 298 Sphaera, ii. 297. 352 Sphinx, i. 89. 112 Spica, cum, cus, i. 146 Spinter, i. 32. ii. 320. 339 Spinus, i. 1 9, 20 , Spirare, ii. 100 Spiritus, i. 137 Spissigradissimus. ii. 89 Splen, i. GO. ii. 319 Spiendeo, i. 192 Spolium, lia, i. 162 SpondjEiun, ii. 366 Spondeo, i. 174,175.202. 325 Pponsa, ii. 134 Sponsalioriim, Hum, i. 118 Sponte, i. 1C9. ii. 145 Spupondi, i 325 Spijo, i. 2 1 7 .•^puriiis, ii. 227 Squaliiudo, s.jualor, i. 140 Stadium, us, i. 146 Stanna, i. 150 Stare, ii. 222 Stater, i. 76. 138 Slatim, ii. 311 Stativa, i. 160. ii. 177, 178 Stater Jupiter, i. 280. ii. 311 Statuere, ii. 223 Statum,ii. 210, 311 Status, i. 214 Stemma, i. 93 Stercus, i. 84. 100 Sterilitates, i. 154 Sterne, i. 261. 317. ii. 71 Sterto, i. 278,279. 319 Steti, ii. 309 Stigo, i. 312 Stinguo, i. 242 Stipendium, ii. 296 Stipes, i. 36 Slips, i. 86. 143 Stipulatus, ii. 139 Stipulo, ii. 105 Stipulor, i. 295. ii. 104, 105 Stirps, i. 2. 49, 50, 51. 86. 1 1 1 Stiti, i. 325 Stlis, ii. 284 Ste, i. 176. 181. 325. ii. 222. 309, 310 Stemachor, i. 295 Sterax, i. 52. ii. 325 Strabo, i. 140 Strabus, i. 140. ii. 282 Stravi, i. 317 Strenuus, ii, 89 Strepo.i. 264. 319 Stria, i. 141 Strideo, do, i. 201. 229. 309. 325 Strigil, lis, i. 02. 97. 109. 141 Strigo, i. 141 Strit'Osu-;, i. 141 Stringo, i. 244 Strix, i. 89 Struo, i. 214. 322. ii. 923 Studeo, i. 192. ii, 271 223 Stultitia, i. 154 Stupefaiio, i. 207 Stupendium, ii. 255 Stupere, ii. 523 Styrax, i. 52. ii. 325 Styx, i. 51. 89 Suadeo, i. 203. 322. ii. 223 Suavium, i. 10 Sub, ii. 40. 70. 72. 182. 336 Subduco, i. 222 Subductarius funis, i. 222 Subeo, i. 284. ii. 223 Subeor, ii. 118 Suber, i. 1 9, 20. 32 Subeunt, ii. 306 Subice, ii. 284 Subigo, i. 247 Subjicio, j. 208. ii. 223 Subsolanus, i. 13 Subito, ii. 334 Subitus, ii. 305 Sublabor, i. 299 Sublimen, turn, i. 141 Sublinio, i. 282 Subluceo, i. 205 Submergo, i. 249 Submitto, i. 276. ii. 270 Subnitor, i. 299 ' Suboleo, i. 195 his Snboles, ii. 283 Suborior, i. 302 Subrepo, i. 264 Subscribe, i, 219 Subscus, i. 48, 85 Sabseciva, ii. 288 Subsellia, i. 162 Subsequor, i. 298 Subsiciva, ii. 288 Subsideo, do, i. 201. 233 Subsiste, i. 279. ii. 100 Substerno, i. 261 Subste, i. 181 Subser, ii. 41, 42 Subtil, lis, i. 141 Subtraho, 1. 251 Subvenire, ii. 27 Subverto, i. 278 Suburbanum, L 7. ii., 179 Succedo, i. 239. ii. 223 Succend*, Index of Wouds. Succendo, i. 227. 310 Snccenseo, i. 190. 310. ij. '225 Siiccensunii, i. 310 Successus, ii. 142 Succido, i. 238 ouccurro, i. 270. ii, 27 Succus, i. 1 IS Suctus, i. 230 Sudare, ii. 223 Sudastur, ii. 90 Suesco, i. 22-i. 317 Suflfei-o. i. 267 Sufiicio, i. 207. 308. ii. 100. 223 Suffuici ., i. 283 Suggeio, i. 269 Suggestum, tu», i. l-i3. 146 Sugo, i. 250 Sui, ii. 75.91. 97 Suilla, ii. 177 Sulfur, ii. 288 Sulla, ii. 234 Sulmo, i. 15 Sum, ii. 13, 23. 26. 29. 35. 115. 138. 181 Summatium, turn,). 118 Summe, ii. 33! Sunimito, ii 270 Sumo, i. 256. 520. ii. 67 Suo, i. 172. 21-i Super, i. 65. ii. 40, 41, 42 Supera, ii. 178 Superare, ii. 100 Supercubo, i. 183 Siiperesse, ii. 223. 306 Superi, ii. 177 Superiie, ii. 331 Supcrsedeo, i. 201. ii. 100 Superus, i. 65 Siipiiiior, ii. S3 Supiuus, ii. 88 Suppar. ii. 339 Siipparum, rus, i. 146 Suppeditare, ii, 100 Suppeditor, ii. 102 Suppellex, i. 51. 70. 90. 98. 100, 12S, 143 Suppetise, i. IGO, 169 Suppetit, i. 277 Suppeto, i. 277 Snppingo, i. 245. 247 Suppleo, i. 199 Supplex, i. 90. 107. 109 Supplicatio, i. 140 Supplicium, i. 140. ii. 69 Snpplico, i. 90. 185 Supra, ii. 37 Sura, ii. 256 Surdaiter, ii. 90 Surpo, i. 243 bit. 320 Suria, ii. 256 Siiriie, i. 160 Surius, ii. 284 Surnxe, i. 173 Surrexi, i. 320 Sus, i. 85. 113, 160, ii. 81. 344 Siisa, i. 1 63 Sustfip'o, i. 210 Suvpeiulo, i. 230. ii. 223 Suspicio, i. 209 Suspicor, i 209. ii. 113 Siialineo, i. 190 Sustollo. i 255. 325 Su-urni.s, i. 148 Siithui, i. 15 Siitriiia, i. 137. ii. 180 Suus, ii. 75 95. 97. 137 Syconiorus, ii. 052 Sylla. i. 10 Syllattirio, i. 312 Svinbola, lum. Ins, i. 146 Syiii:iaplia, um, us, i. 139 Sypliix, ii. 3'27 Svrinx, i. 39 Syrisciis, ii. 9u Syr^eis, i. 104 Syrtis, i. 92 Tabellae, ii. 179 Tabeliarius, i. 68 Taberna, ii. 180 Tabe.s, bo '.bum, i. 141. 154. 169 Tubulis, li. 180 Tacco, i. 196. 313. ii. 223 Tacitius, ii. 89 Taciturn, ii. 305. 312 Ta;.lct, i. 307. ii. 32 Taenaios, i. 48 Taenarus, i. 127 Tajter, ii. 239 Talio, i, 27, 23 Taliones, i. 154 Talis, ii. 7 Talpa, i. 58, ii, 83 Tarn, ii. 60, 61. 145 Tamdiu, ii, 150 Tamen, ii. 159 Tametsi, ii. 153 Tandem denique, ii. 167 Tandem itaque, ii. 157 Tango, i. 175, 176, 177. 245. ii. 310 Tanquam, ii. 154. 157 Tanqiiamsi, ii, 154 Tanti, ii. 65. 144 Tantidem, ii. 65 Tanto, ii. 178 THntum, ii, 145, 146. 157 Tautumdem, i. 169 Tantus, ii. 7 Tapes, i, 36.79.139. Wl, 143. ii. 323 Taras, i. 17 Taidare, ii. 100 Ta.iar.i, ni.-i, i, 127. 14i) Taurus, i. 5 Taygetus, i, 127 T. , ii. 84. 332 Ttomes-sa, ii. 302 Tecum, ii "09 Teges, i 79, 80 Tego, ii 304 Teg u la, ii. 304 Te'hire.-^, i. 154 Tfllus i. 18. 49. 85. ii. 324. .344 Temetuin. ii, 352 Temno, i. 260. 321 TeiTipe, i. 23, 24. 164. 169. ii. 331 Temperare, ii. 224 Templum, i. 2P. ii. ISO Tempora, i. 162 Tempus, i. 48. 100. 162. ii. 149. 180 Temsl, i. .391 Temtor, i. 261 Tenoo, i. 175, 2'29. 231. 310. li 224 T<'nel)rK, i. 24. 160 Teneo, i. 189. 3l0. 313 Tener, rus, i. 67 Teneri, ii. 62 Teneritas, tiido, i. 140 Tentum, i. 310 Tenuis, ii. 89. 264 Tenus, ii. 39 Tepefacio, i. 207 Teres, i. 79. ii, 86 Tergeo, go, i. 203. 249. 309. 322. ii. 332 Tergum, gus, i. 83. 146 Termes, i. 36, 80 Terminalia, i, 118 Ternio, i, 8, 27, 88 Tero, i. 187. ^65, 266. 317 Terra, Index of Words. Terra, i. 6.' 18. 63. 154. ii. 50. 158. 180. 298 Tet^rai, ii. 298 Terrefacio, i. 207 Terreo, i. 183 Terricula, lum, i. 137 Tersi, i. 322 Tertiana, i. 7 Tertio, ii. 146 Tertiiim, ii. 1-16 Tertius decimus, ii. S5 Tenincii, ii. 65 Testa, turn, i. 137 Testatus, ii. 139 Testis, ii. 81 Testor, ii. 104 Tetigi, ii. 310 Tetiiyos, ii. 344 Teucris, ii. 170 Texo, i. 281. 319 Textrina, i. 137. ii. 180 Textum, tus, i. 143 Thebas, ben, i. 160 Thema, i. 71. 119 Theologaster, ii. 90 Theophani.i. 120 Thermodontis, ii. 299 Thesaurus, i, 146 Tlieseu, i. 66 Thetis, i. 120. ii. 338 Thiaras, i. 35 Thomas, ii. 340 Thomix, i. 54 Thorax, i. 5'2 Tlios, i. 82 Thraces, ii. 341 Thrax, i. 112 Thucydides, i. 147 Thus, i. 20. 85. 113. ii. 289 Thymiama, ii. 352 Tiara, as, i. 35. 138 Tiberis, i. 91 Tiberius, ii. 227 Tibicen, i. 73. ii. 296. 338 Tibur, i. 16 Tiburs, i. 143 Tigillum, ii. 304 Tigimm, niis, i. 146. ii. 304 Tigranes, i. 147 TigrideSj ii. 341 Tigris, i. 12. 91 Timachides, i. 147 Timeo, i. 192. ii. 181. 224 Timor, i. 151. ii. 321 Timotheus, ii. 303 Tinea, ii. 28» Tingo, i. 241 Tinnire, ii. lOO Tis, ii. 92 Titan, i. 73. 141. ii. 319. 33 S Titio, i. 27 Titubatus, ii. 142 Titus, ii. 227 Tofus, ii. 289 Tolo, i. 255. ii. 118 Tollo, i. 176. 255 l/is. ii. 118 Tomus, i. 44 Tonat, ii. 169 Tondeo, i. 174. 201.325. ii. 101 Tonitru, i. 141 Tonix, 1. 52 Tono, i. 184. 319 Tonstrina, i. 137. ii. 180 Topascus, i. 47 Tophus, ii. 289 Tdial, i. 139 T'Tcular, ii. 352 Toiqueo, i. 204. 321, 322 Torques, quis, i. 40. 42. 142 Torrens, -i. C. 110. ii. 177 Torreo, i, 190. 321, 322 Torris, i. j9 Torsi, i. 321, 322 Tot, i. 164. ii. 7 Totae, i. 68 Totidem, i. 164. ii. 308 Totiens, ii. 249 Totius, ii. 298 Totondi, i. 325 ,. Totus, i. 67. ii. 90 Trabes, i. 70 143 Trabs, i. 143 Tracto, i. 312 Traditio alter!, ii. 18 Trado, i. 232. ii. 224 Traduco, i. 222 Tradux, i. 53 Traheae, i. 327 Traho, i. 251. 322 Trajicio, i. 208 Tralleis, i. 104 Trames, i. 36 Tranquilium, ii. 173 Trans, ii. 57 Transcribe, i. 219 Transdnco, i. 222 Transeo, i. 285 Transfigere, ii. 224 Transgredior, i. 301 Transciam, ii. 118 Transigo, i. 247 TransmitterP, ii. 100 Tran^pono, i. 260 Transvelio, i. 251 'iVansvona, ii. 80 Trapezus, i. 17. 86 Traxi, i. 322 Tredecim, ii. 307 Tremefacio, ii. 307 Tremi.-co, i. 311 Tremo, i. 256 Trepidare, ii. 100 Trts, i. in Tribractys, ii. 366 Tribula, lum, i. 137 Tribunal, ii. 337 Tribunus-plebis, i. 61 Tiibuo, i. 2i4. ii. 29 T.ibus, i. 44. 124 Tributum, tus, i. 143. 146 Tricae, i. 160 Triceni, ii. 308 Triceps, i. 88. ii. 508 Tricolor, ii. 308 Tricorpor, rus, i. 106. 108 Tricuspide, i. 104 Tiidens, i. 50. 99. ii. 179 Triduum, ii. 308 Triens, i. 12 Trifur, ii. 321 TrigsD, i. 157. ii. 296 Triginta, ii.-328. 330 Tiijugffi. ii. 296 Trilix, i. 168 Trimus, ii. 351 Tiipes, ii. 341 Triplices, i. 168 Tiiplico, i. 185 Tripus, i, 49. 85. ii. 324. 345 Triremis, i. 103 Triste li.pns, i. 7 Tristor, ii. 7 1 Tritero, ii. 352 Trilicum, i. 135 Tritino,ii. 352 Trivi, i. 317 Trivluin, ii. 308 Triumphatus, ii. 142 Triumpos, li. 280 Troades, ii. 299. 341 Troas, ii. 340 Trochajus, ii. 366 Troes, ii. 299. 341 Trojugena, ii. 308 Tropaei, i. 13 Tropasum, ii. 289 Trophaeum, ii. 270. 289 Tros, Index of Words. Tros, i. 8-2. Iiy. ii. 323 Tiiides. i. 37 Trii I.,, i. '236. 322 Trux, ii. 327 Tiiul, ji. 284 Tuber, i. 32 Tuberculiim, i. 33 TudtT, i. 16 Tiules, i. 37. 231 Tuilito. i. 231 Tudo, i. 231 Tiicor, i. 297. 309. ii. 10+ Till, ii. 97. 127 Ti.li, i. 325. ii. .309 Tiillianiim, ii. 177 Tuniuiti, i. 123 Tunc, ii. 18 TiiDdo, i. 174. 177. 230 bs. 313 Tuor, i. 207 309. ii. 104 Tiirba, ii. 185 Tiuben, bo, i. 70. 72. 140. li. 101 Turgeo. i. 205. 322 Tnrris, i. 92. ii. 268. 277 Tiirsi, i. 322 TiiTUir, i. 56. 58. 142. ii, 521 Tus, ii. 289 Tusculanum, ii. 179 Tusses, i. 154 Tiissis, i. 91 Tutari, i. 297 Tims, ii. 97. 127, 34* Tygris, ii. 341 Tympano.s i. 14('> Typhoei, eos, i. 65 Tyrannis, i. 38. 81 TyrinUiius, i. 68 Tyrus, i. 17 U. Ubei, ii. 284 Uber, i. 6. 32. 74, 93. 107. ii. 86 Ubi, ii. 18. 46, 47, 48, 50. 333 Ubicunique, ii. 308 Ubiqiie, ii. 308. 353 Ubivis, ii. 308. 333 Ulcis, ii. 269 Ve, Table of Matters. cj, the names of countries terminating in, their ycndcr, ii. S7 as, final, its declension, i. 62, C3. 77 j its gender, i. '35 ; its quantity, ii. 340 ; the quantity of its increase, ii. 321 asking, verbs of, their government, ii. 44.67 asler, what this termination indicates, i. 19. ii. 90 attraction, to be distingnislied from go- veTiititent, ii. 192, 193 au, of the pronunciation of this di|.h- thong, ii. 'ij9 aubain, or nubenc, a forfie^ner, the root of these words, ii. 270 avi, by what to know tiiat it is the pre- terite of the first conjugation, i. 317 aus, quantity of the Greek words witli tiiis tcrniination, ii. 300 «.T, the gender of words terminating in, i. 52 B. B, its affinity with P, ii, 268. 284; with V, ii. 269 ; with M, ii. 270; substituted for the digamma, ii. 283; added to sonic words, ii. 284 b, final, its quantity, ii. 336 bb, what these letters indicate, ii, 290 hacchic, of this foot, ii. 367 ber, final, its declension, i, 75 heris, increase of verbs, its quantity, ii. 313 bi, preterite, manner of finding its pre- sent, i. 323 bissextile year, observations on, ii. 242 blante, nouns implying, in what case to be put, ii. 19 bo, final, of the third conjuijation ; its preterite and supine, i. 217 ho, ancient termination of the third and fourth conjugation, ii. 106 boxirg, a French word ; from whence de- rived, ii. 263 brachijcalalei tic verse, observations upon, ii. 373 breathings of Greek words, marks for the, ii. 282 bs, nouns in ; how their genitive formed, i. 86 iundtis, termination of noims derived from verbs; their government, ii. 12 C. C, was sometimes but an aspiration in the vulvar tongues, ii. 282 C, its affinity with G, ii. 273 ; with Q, ii. 270; added, ii. 284 C, wh.it Roman name it stands for, ii. 227 ; what it signifies when in- vertedji. 289 c, nouns ending in, their declension and gender, i. 29 ; their genitive, i. 72 ; its (piantity, ii. .'336 calends, of the Romans ; observations on, ii, 241 calendar, the, both ancient and modern, ii. 242 Cases, what constitutes their difference, i. 100 cases, wanting in certain nouns, i. 165 cases, Greek, of the third declension, i. 119 catalectic verse, particulars of, ii. 373 cause, nouns expressing the cause or motive of a thing; in what case they are put, ii. 69. 181, 182 Ci?r, final, its genitive, i. 75 ceasing, verbs of, their government, ii. 22 cicsura, of its different species, ii. 37 1 ; its power to lengthen short sylla- bles, ii. 372 ck, of its pronunciation, ii, 281 charge. See State. i Cbansius,.at what time he wrote, i. 153 ci, preterite ; method for finding its present, i. .'j23 children, of the names of those ado[iteJ by the Romans, ii, 229 Cicero, not always correct in his criti- cism on language, ii. 136, 137 cities, their gender, i. 14,24; how go- verned in the questions of place, ii. 46 cJothhig, verbs of, their regiriaen, ii, 44 Cn, what Homau name these letters stand for, ii. 227 CO, final, its preterite and supine, i, 220 colon, the, observations on, ii. 293 rom, its quantity in composition, ii. 506 comhaiing, or fghting, verbs of, their government, ii. 203 comma, observations on the, ii. 292 commandmg, verbs of, their government, ii. 27; how the que which follows them is rendered, ii. 9 common, gender, i. 1, 3 compat alive, the, agrees with adjectives, ii. 87 ; not with all, ibid. ; signifies sometimes more than the superla- tive, ii. 59, 60 ; its government, ii. 55, 56, 57, 182, 194; declen- sion, i. 105 ; without the positive, ii. 88 Comjiarative . Table of Mattkrj. comparative in or, of what gender, i. 34. ii. 86 compound words, preserse tlie qnatility of their simple, ii. D04 ; did not heretofore change the vowel of tiit? simple in verbs, i. '260 ; in the names of places, they follow the rules of their primitives, ii. 52. See Verts. condemnins, verbs of, their government, ii. 6'i cortdition. See State. f.njui-alions, of, i. 171 ; rules for the (jrst, i. nSj second,!. 187 ; third, i. 206 ; f lurth, i. '282 ton junctions, whether thej' have always the same thing before as after them, ii. 153; of the same degree of comparison, i/»'f/.,- wliich require the indicative, and which the sub- junctive, ibid. sonjtinctions, of the same import, joined together, ii. 157 ccnjunclions, copulative, used to form comparison, ii. 158 conjunclio/is, negative, remarks concern- ing, ii. 155 eunsoiiants, observations concerning them, ii. 2C2 to '267 contesting, verbs of, their government, ii. '203 shoTiambus, compound feet of verses, ii. 369 COS and coss, what these letters signify, ii. 290 countries, adjectives of, are not com- pared, ii. 88 erases, of the figure so called, i. 327 Crelick, feet of verse ; particulars of, ii. 367 fycle, the solar; particulars of, ii. 244 D. n, its affinity with T, ii. 273 ; with L and R, ii. 284 ; added to some words, ibid. ; its quantity in com- position, ii. 305 i), what Roman name it signifies, ii. 227 d, final, its gender, i. 30 ; its declen- sion, i. 72 ; its ([uantity, ii. 337 dactyl, of the foot so called, ii. 366 e/alives, plural of the first declension, i. 64; of the second, i 67. 69; of the third, i. 118; of the fourth, i. 123 datives, remarks on the, ii. 83 ; the same as ablatives, ii. 83. 196, 197 ; what they denote, ii, 2. 25 ; in the place of genitives, ii. 28; of accusatives or ablatives, ii. 23. 196; governed by adjoi-tives un- derstood, ii. '26 ; by nouns, ii. 25 j by verbs, ii. 25; by passive verbs, ii. 28. 68 ; whether governed by tiio ijuestion vbi, ii. 52 duiis, of the ancients ; particulars of, ii. 239 dec'ensioiis, their distinction, i. 59 ; the first, i. 62 ; the second, i. 65 ; the third, i. 70; the fourth, i. 123; the fifth, i. 124 declensions, difierent, of the same noun, i. 147 delivering, verbs oT, their government ii. <22. 67 ;' denvr, Roman, its value, ii. 235 denominative verbs, i. 31 1 debouerlls, verbs. See Vtrhs. derivalii-is, whether they prt='serve the quantity of tiieir ptimitives, ii. 303. See Vabs. desideralives, or verbs of desire, i 312 ; how the que is rendered which fol- lows them, ii, 9 ; their govern- ment, ii. 22 di, its quantity in composition, ii. 305 di, preterite ; how to find its present, i. 323 Devil, the root of this word, ii. 278 diastole, particulars of this figure, ii. 380,381 dieresis, particulars of this figure, i. 3'28. ii. 380 difference, nouns signifying difference j their government, ii, 67 digamma, particulsrs of, and its proi nunciation, ii. 269, 282 dignity. See Ulate. dimeters, verses, particulars of, ii. 293 diminutives, their gender, i. 8 ; their termination, ii. 89. See Verbs, diphthongs, particulars of, ii, 259, 260, 261 ; their quantity, ii. 297 disiiositiciii. See Order, d stance, of the questions of distance; their government, ii 53. 181, 182. distance, verbs of, their government, ii. 67. 181 (7o, final, its declea^ion, i. 71 ; its con- jugation, i. 227 doubtful gender, i. 1 , 2 das, adjectives of this termination do not admit of comparison, ii. 88 das, participles in, the tense ivhich it in- dicates, ii. 137 ; its signiQcation ac- tively, or passively, ii. 140; when it agrees with the substantive, ibid. ; its government, ibid. ; put in the ablative absolute, itiid. E. •■ *• Table of Matters. E, observations on this letter, ii. 250 j used instead of I, ii, 25'Z e, Greek tla, its pronuncialioii, ii. 251 e, epsilon, for «, ii. '272 e, its quantity in composition, ii. 505. 307; in tiie inciease of verbs, ii. 313 ; of nouns, ii. 327 €, ending of tlie vocative of the second declension, i. (53 j of the dative of the fiftli, i. 1 25 ; of the genitive, ibid. e, wlietlier the genitive of this ending is used in the question uhi, ii. 51 e, final, its g( n'lf r, i. 25 ; its declen- sion, i. C2. 71 J its quantity, ii. 330 eclhlipsis, particulars of, ii. 3"4 ei, nearly the same as the long I, i. 104. 116. ii. 118. 253; ending of the plural of the second declcnsiou, i. 65 ei, pronunciation of this diphthong, ii. 260 e/j, instead of «, i. 104. 116 elegiac verses, particulars of, ii. 402 ellipsis, of the figure so called, i. 11, ii. 168 en, a French particle; its use, ii. 50 en, final, its genitive, i. 73 enallage, particulars concerning, ii. 195 endiiicks, draw the accent upon the precediiit; syll'ibh', ii. 357 eo, termination nf verbs uf the second conjusaiioii, i. 206 epenthesis, wliat it is, i. 327 ; that of the genitives plural of the third de- clension, i. 1 16 epicene nouns, particulars of them, i. 5. bb. ii 82 epilrite, 1st, 2.1. 3d, 4th, of the feet of verses sn called, ii. 569 epoclis, the most remarkable, ii. 245 er, nouns in ; iheir gi nder, i. 32 er, adjectives in ; their ablatives, i, 103 er, termination of the second declension, i. 65. 67 eram, increase of verbs ; its quantity, ii. 314 erim, increase of verbs; its quantity, ii. 314 «;«, increase of nouns ; its qnantitv, ii. 320 ero, increase of verbs ; its quantity, ii. 314 erunt, increase of verbs; its quantity, ii, 314 es, nouns in ; their gender, i. 36 ; de- clension, i, 62, 78. 120 ; quantity, ii. 340 ; quantity of its increase, ii. 322 eu, pronunciation of this diphthong, ii, 259 evtnl, verbs denoting some event ; how to render the que which follows them, ii. 9 eus, terminatiun of the second declen- sion, i. G5 ; of diminutives, ii. 90 ex, of the Greeks, imitated by the La- tins, ii. 193 ex, final, of what gender, i. 52 excelling, verbs of, their government, i. 27 F, mistaken fur E, ii. 95 ; its affinity with V, ii. 268; with P, ii. 270; with B, 284 ; what it signifies when alone, ii, 289 feel, of veises; particulars of, ii, 365 to 370 ff, whatthf-y signify, ii. 290 fearincr, verbs of; how to render the que which follows them, ii. 9 feminine gender, i. 1. 3 ; see Ge7ider. festivals, names of, their declension, i. 118 fcrgetling, verbs of; their regimen, ii. 33 freedmcn, observations on their names, ii. 229 fruits, names of, their gender, i. 21 future, expressed by the subjunctive, ii. 107; taken for the imperative, ii. 109; manner of expressing the future of the infinitive, ii, 112; ancient tertnination of the future of the third and fourth conjugations, ii. 107 G, its relation with C, ii. 273. 284; with ,1, ii. 274 garde, of two genders, i. 9 gender, how known; i. 1. 10; their disuilies with each other, ii. 9, 10, 11 gender, of the termination, changed into that of the signification, or vice versa, i. 7. 9 gender, different in the adjective and in the substantive, ii. 188, 189 genders, when several, with which the adjective must agree, ii. 10 genitive, what it is formed of, i. 59 ; of the Table of Matters. the first, i. 63 ; of the second, i. 66; of the third declension, i. TO, 71. 106 ger:ilke, what it denotts, and what go- verns it, ii. 1 ; governed by parti- cles, ii. 13; by prepositions, ii. 172 J by adjectives, ii. 16. 20,21. 173; by verbs, ii. 22, &c. 173; by those of remembering and for- getting, ii. 53 ; by substantives, ii. 52 ; why some are found in the question ubl, ii. 51 ; after the comparative, ii. 57. 194; its go- vernment, ii. 15, &c. ; has the same force as the possessive, ii. 52 genitive, of the thing, governed by the verb, ii. 32 genitive, plural, whose adjective is in another case; how to understand it, ii. 173 genitive, common with the Greeks, ii. 22 ; borrowed by the Latins, ii. 63; how it snay be resolved, ii. 193 gerunds, remarks upon, ii. 125; their government, ii. 18. 125, 126; what they add to the signification of the verb, ii, 126; supplied by nouns proceeding from verbs, ii. 12S ; whether taken actively or passively, ibid. ; their declension, ii. 1 29 gerunds, of the third and of ^the fourth conjugation, take u instead of e, i, 310 gi, preterite; how to find its present, i. 323 ginta, nouns in ; quantity of, ii. 350 gladiator, mark or token of his liberty, ii. 180 glyconic verse ; particulars of, ii. 396 gn, bow pronounced by the ancients, ii. 274 go, final, its declension, i. 72 ; its con- jugation, i. 240 goddesses, names of; their gender, i. 3,4 gods, names of; their gender, i. 3 government, distinction between it and attraction, ii. 192, 193 governments, resolved by the preposi- tions, ii. 42 gi/j, preterite ; howtolind its present, 1. 32j H. H, its value, use, &c., ii. 279 ; its ori- gin and relation with the digamma, ii. 289 h, what number it signified, ii. 2S2 Hellenism, or Greek phrase, ii. 192 helping, verbs of; their government, ii. 27 he ndecfisy liable verse j particulars of, ii. 397 herbs, their gender, ii. ISO heroic verse; particulars of, ii. 590 heteroclites, or irregular nouns; parti- culars of, i. 126 hours, how the ancients reckoned them, ii. 239 hours, canonical, ii. 240 hixameler verse ; particulars of, Ii. 3S2, &c. ; of neglected hexame- ters, ii. 387 ho, verbs in ; their conjugation, i. 251 Horace, praise nf hia satires, ii. 387 hs, what they signify, ii. 235. 290 hurting, verbs of; their government, il, 26 hyperbaton, of the figure so called, ii. 190 hypercataleciic verse ; particulars of, ii. 373 hypallage, concerning this figure, ii. 191 /, used for E, il. 252 ; why and how lengthened, ii. 253; whether it be sometimes a double letter, ii. 303 ; put fore/, i. 105. 1 16 ; suppressed, ii. 284 i, termination of different cases of the second declension, i. 65. 68 i, plural; its gender, i. 23; its quan- tity, ii. 332 ; in composition, ii. 508 ; in increase, ii. 315. 327 iambk verse and feet; particulars of, ii. 366. 368. 390 ides, concerning them, ii. 241 imitation, verbs of, i. 311 imperfect of the subjunctive; its va- rious significations, ii. 107 imperative, taken for the future, ii. 1 09 ; for the passive verb, ii. 109; ob- servations on the imperatives, i. 308 ; its quantity, ii. 328. 332 impersonal verbs. See Verbs. imus, ending of adjectives not com- pared, ii. 88 J their quantity, ii. 351 in, its quantity in composition, ii. 306 incheativc verbs. See Verbs. increase, of nouns; their quantity, ii, 319; of verbs, ii. 312 increase, in the singular; preserved in the plural, ii, 327 inde- Table of Matters. indtclinahle nouns; their {render, i. '22; obseivati ns on, i 16V ind'tcaiivc, used for llie siibjunctiTC, ii. I OS indictinn, what it is, ii. 243 injinilivc, of the, ii. 109 ; how called by the; ancients, ii. 113, 114; in Jubilee, years of; concerning, ii. 245 K. ft', its properties, ii. 271 K, the Roinan i\ame it stands for, ii. 227 lata, of the Greeks, imitated by tlie Latins., ii. 193 kingdoms, hov/ governed in the ques- tions of place, ii. 47 L, changed into T>, ii. 266. 284; into D, ii 284 ; suppressed in some words, iln:l. I, preceded by a consonant, makes the preceding vowel doubtful, ii. .';02 /, final ; its sender, i. 29; il.- declen- sion, i. 73; its quantity, ii .';"37 I, nouns \u ; the tMiaiitity of their in- crease, ii. 318 L, the Roman name it stands fur, ii. 227 U, what they signify, ii. 290 Leonian verses; particular.s of, ii. 386 letters, their number, order, and divi- sion, ii. 247; their gender, i. 8. 22; alterations made in them by the ancients-, ii. 249. 284 ; taken for the characters which formed their name, ii. 272 letters, ilominical, ii. 244 letters, double, ii. 277 ; lengthen the precedmg vowel, ii. 301 letters, capital ; their use, ii. 289 letters, reversed ; their signification, ii. 289 /.'//e;«, repeated ; their signification, ii. 290 letters, hissing, ii. 276; liquids, ii. 266. 301, 302 ; mute, ii. 267. :'01 letters, the directiqus or superscriptions of, among the Latins, ii. 12 /i, preterite ; the inolhod of finc'ing- it.s present, i. 323 liberty, huw the Romans gave it, ii. 180 limus. a superlative termination, ii. 87 liijiiids, letters, ii. 266. 301, 302 liquors, whether used in the plural, i. LiO. 153 lo, final; its preterite and supine, i. 2.52 long, syllables, by their nature, ii. 295 ; by position, ii. 295. 301; how marked by the ancients, ii 267. 295. Table of Matters. 255. 358 ; how to pronounce them, ii. 295. 357 i«s, la, lum, a diminutive termination, ii. 89 iMslre, what it is, ii. 243 M. M, its pronunciation, ii. 266 ; its rela- tions with B and P, ii. 270 ^ its elision in verses, ii. 374 m, final ; its "render, i. 29; its quan-< tity, ii. '^31 M, what Roman name it signifies, ii. 227 ; witii an accent, M' ibid, intt, final ; its declension, i. 119 MAM. what these letters signify, ii. 228 manner, of a thing; in what case to be put, ii. 70. 182 masculine, gender. See Gender matter, adjectives of; that are not compared, ii 83 matter, of whirh any thing is composed; in what case to be put, ii. 69 measure, questions concerning ; their government, ii. 53, 54. 182 meditative, verbs. See Verbs men, names <.f ; of what gender, i. 3 metaplaim, of the figure of speech so called, i. 327 metathesis, of the figure so called, i. 327 metals, names of; whether they have a plural, i. 149 M. F., for what used by the Romans, ii. 289 mi, preterite ; how to find its present, i. 323 minor, a termination of the imperative out of use, ii. 109 M. M., for what used by the Rmafios, ii. 290 M. N., for what used by the Romans, ii. 289 ; mo, final of the third con'iugation ; its preterite and supine, ii. 256 mode, potential ; how resolved, ii. 176 modes, of how many sorts, ii. 106 mohsse, feet of verse; particulars of, ii. 366 months, of the Romans ; particulars of, ii. 240 monosyllables, their quantity, ii. 332 motion, verbs of. See Verbs mountains, their gender, i. 12. 14 mute, consonants j particulars of, ii. 267, &c. Vw., II. N. N, its pronunciation, ii. 266, 267; changed into L, ibid. ; into R and S, ii. 267 ; in t, ii. 275 ; how pro- nounced with C and G, ibid. ; added, ii. 284 N, what name it indicates, ii. 227. 289 w, final ; its gender, i. 30 ; its declen- sion, i. 73 ; its quantity, ii. 338 ; quantity of the increase of nouns in, ii. 319 names, of the Romans ; particulars of, ii. 226, &c. 7iature, verbs expressing any eflfect of. See Verbs negative, the in Latin destroys that which follows it, ii. 164, 165 negatives, whether two of them have the value of an affirmative, ii. 155 neglecting, verbs of; their government, ii. 22 neuter, gender. See Gender^ significa- tion of the word, ii. 171 ; its rank among the other genders, ibid, ; bow adjectives of that gender are to be imderstood which are joined to other genders, ibid. ; the plural of neuter nouns, i. 105 neuter, verbs. See Verbs n?, preterite; how to find its present, i. 323 night, its watches among the ancients, ii. 240 720, termination of verbs of the third conjugation; its preterite and su- pine, i. 259 nominative, plural of the third declen- sion, i. 104 nominative, with the Attics ; the same as the vocative, ii. 83. 194 ; before an infinitive, ii. 194; understood, ii. 169. 174; in the first and se- cond person, ii. 8 nominatives, of various terminations* i. 136 nones, of the ancients ; particulars con- cerning, ii. 239 nmins, governing the genitive, ii. 51 ; the dative, ii. 25 ; the ablative, ii. 61. 69 nouns, understood in Latin, ii. 176, 177 nouns, common to two genders, i. 1. ii.79 nowwj, compound ; their declension, i. 60 nouns, correlative, understood, iL 173 nouns, doubtful, i. 1, 2. ii. 81 nouns, epicene, i. 55. ii. 82 nouns, of place ; in the genitive with a prepositioQ, ii. 173 Hh nouns. Table of Matters. nilhoiit plural, i. 13-i, government, ii. differ from the Sec Words, Sub- nouni, proper 135 nouns, verbal J their IS. 21. 132; participle, ii. 21. slanlives ns, ending of the third declension, i. ST ns, participle in; what tcuse it indi- cates, ii. 1 34 nlo, plural »jf the imperative, ii. 109 7mmljer,\.hc Golden; particulars of, ii. 243 number, ordinal, ii. S5 number, adjectives of; which are not compared, ii. 88 number, nouns of; remarks upon, ii. 84, 85 numbers, of the Romans ; particulars concerning, ii. 233 O. 0, observations on this letter, iii 254 ; its affinity with A, E, and U, ii. 255, 256. 234 j put for au, ii. 284; added, ibid. ; suppressed, ibid. 0, final; its gender, i. 26; its declen- sion, i. 71 ; its cfuantity, ii. 334; in increase, ii 316. 319. 324; in composition, ii. 308 o, omicron, for ou, ii. 272 o, pure and impure, i. 319 ob, its quantity in composition, ii. 306 obeying, verbs of; their government, ii, 26 ce, pronunciation of this diphthong, ii. 261 ; put for u, ii. 284 vi, pronunciation of this diphthong, ii. 261 ; put for v, ii. 284 olympiads, of the Greeks; particulars of, ii. 243 cm, in ancient writers used for um, i. 65 vmne, called the gender of adjectives, i. 6 ou, tiie French; how used, ii. 123; how rendered in Latin and Greek, ibid. on, termination of the second declen- sion, i. 65 ; its quantity, ii. 338, 339 r.nis, increase in ; its quantity, ii. 319 Onomutcpcia , what it is, ii. 365 or, nouns in ; their quantity, ii. 339 ; quantity of their increase, ii. 320; their gender, i. 34. ii. 86 orcZ^r, nouns denoting; why in the ab- lative, ii. 182 ortftography, to be observed ia Latin, ii. 285 05, final; lis gender, i. 42; its dtclca- sion, i. 65 ; its quantity, ii. 344 OS, ending of the genitive of the third declension, i. 120 OS, nouns in; quantity of their increase, i. 120. ii. 323 OS, in ancient writers used for us, i. 65 OS, pure ; what it means, i. 120 SlTi, a Greek preposition imitated iu Latin, li. 194 P, its affinity with B, ii. 268 ; with M, and F, or PH, ii. 270; added to some words, ii. 284 ; corruptly, i. 257. ii. 268 P, what Roman name it indicates, ii. 227 paragoge, a figure of speech, i. 327 paienlkesis, a figure of speech, ii. 191 pari, nouns expressing a, in the accusa- tive, ii. 182 ; of what case, ii. 69. 182 participle, in what it differs from the ver- bal noun, ii, 21 ; the time it indi- cates, ii. 134; whether it takes the tenses of the verb sum to wliich it is joined, ii. 137; in what it differs from the adjective, ii. 13i ijarticiple, what it becomes by composi- tion and by com|)arison, ii. 134 participle, signification of the, in verbs common and deponents, ii. 138; of impersonal verbs, ii. 141 participles, in us, whose verbs are rare or unusual, ii. 141. See dus, rus partaking, verbs of; their government, ii. 22 pa! tides, their quantity in composition, ii. 305 particles, understood, ii. 175 particles, that require a genitive, ii. 18 ; which govern different cases, ii. 73 Jiarliiive, noun; its government, ii. 55, 59 passions, between two opposite terms, ii. 160, 161 passive, verbs. See Veibs passvje, expression; affected in Latin, ii, 123 P. C, what they signify, ii 290 pentameter, verse; particulars of, ii- 388 peon, first, second, third, and fourth kind of feet, ii. 569 increases the comparison, ii. 58. 158 peffect per. Table of Matters. perfecl, in rim ; is taken for the future, ii. 107 ntp;, of the Greeks imitated by the Latins, ii. 193 period, or full point, particulars of, ii. 293 period, Julian, concerning the, ii. 245 periode, in French, of two genders, i. 2 person, tiie name of the, uoverned in the accusative by the verb, ii. 31 persons, of their difference in dignitj'', ii. 9. to 12 pit, ils |ironunciation, ii. 281 phiileucian, verse ; particulars of, ii. 397 pherecral\us, verse; particulars of, ii. 390 pi, preterite ; how to find its present, i. 3'23 pieces, of poetry ; their gender, i. 1 pio, termination of the third conjuga- tion ; its preterite and supine, i. 209 plenty, nouns denoting ; their govern- ment, ii. 62 pleonasm, of the figure of speech so called, ii. 184 pleXf ending of adjectives that are not compared, ii. 88 pluperfect, of the subjunctive, partakes of the future, ii, 108 plural, of nouns which want the, i. 149 plural, nouns, their gender, i. 23 plurals, of the third declension, i. 104 ; of neuters, i. 105 plurals, quantity of their increase, ii. 327 po, termination of the third conjuga- tion ; its preterites and supine, i. 263 point, of interrogation and admiration, ii. 294 positive, with the government of the comparative, ii. 55. 148, 149 possessive, adjectives ,• are not com- pared, ii. 88 possessive, pronouns; their construction, ii. 97 ; of the ambiguity of their genitive with a substantive, ii. 97. 126 ; do not receive adjectives, ibid. ; have the force of the geni- tive, ii. 52 : joined to a substan- tive, may govern the genitive, ii. 17 poverty, nouns expressing ; their go- vernment, ii. 62. IS'i P. P., what they signify, ii. 2'j>0 praise, nouns of; in what case they are put, ii. 19 prepusUions, French ; indicate those which are understood in Latin, ii. 19 prepositions, their quantity in composi- tion, ii. 305 ; joined in composi- tion, ii. 152; to two verbs, il/'d. ; derived frjm nouns, ibid. prepositions, which govern the infinitive, ii. 114; have always a case, ii. 152; resolve almost all govern- ments, ii. 42. 48 ; of the accusa- tive, ii. 31. 35. 40. 44. 173. 193; of the ablative, ii. 33,39,40; of the genitive, ii. 173 ; preserve their government when coinpounded with verbs, ii. 43; understood in discourse, ii. 19, 20. 174. 181, 182 ; the cause of singular govern- ments, ii. 193, 194 present, used for the past, ii. 136 present, of the subjunctive, partaketh of the future, ii. 107 preterite, its conjugation, i. 171 ; from what it is formed, ibid. ; when wanting, the supine is also wanted, i. -177; bow to find its present, i. 3 1 4 ; of verbs in the preterite with the characteristic of the pre- sent, i. 323 ; which retains the vowel of the present, i. 315. ii. 120; its analogy, i. 309. 314; often admits of a syncope, i. 315 j its irregularities, ilnd. preterites, which proceed from different verbs, i, 310 preterites, formed by the participle, ii. 143 preterites, which redouble the first sylla- ble, i. 173; their quantity, ii. 309 preterites, their quantity, ii. 309 ; those of two syllables, ibitl. preterites, of verbs passive ; how form- ed, i. 177 price, nouns of; their governmen-t, ii. 65. 182 privation, nouns of; their government, ii. 62. 182 pro, its quantity in composition, ii. 306 pruceleusmalic, feet of verse; particulars of, ii. SC8 pronouns, remarks upon, Ii. 90, 91 ; difference in their signification, ibid. ; their cases and declensions, ii. 92; their construction, ii. 96, 97 ; may govern the genitive, ii. 16, See Possessive and Relative pronouns, reciprocal ; to what they refer, ii. 75 ; in what case" the re- latives have the same eflect, ibl/. pronouns, improperly taken for pleo- nasms, ii. 1S5 H h 2 proram- Table of Matters. pronunciation, of the Latin, i, IIG. ii. 353. 361 proper, names; their gender, i. 3. 10 property, nouns implying; in what case to be put, ii. 19 prolhesis, what it is, i. 327 provinces, names of; their gender, i. 14 ; how governed in the questions of place, ii. 46. 181 ps, termination of the third declension ; its genitive, i. 86 punctuation, treatise of, ii. 291, &c. pi/rrfuc, feet of verse; particulars of, ii.366 Q. 3, its affinity with C, ii. 270. 284 ; its use, ii. 271 ; whether it should pass for a double letter, ii. 272 2, what Roman name it signifies, ii. 227 quantity, hovf it was marked by the ancients, ii. 249 ; how it is now marked, ii. 295 quarrelling, verbs of; their government, ii. 203 questions, of place, ii. 25 ; their go- vernment, ii. 182; government of those concerning time, measure, and distance, ii. 53 qui, preterite ; how to find the present, i. 323 quo, termination of the third conjuga- tion ; its preterite and supine, i. 263 remembering, verbs of; their gOTremv ment, ii. 33 repelling, verbs of ; their government, ii. 22 resisting, verbs of; their government, ii. 26. 203 rk, its pronunciation, ii. 281 Rhone, why of the masculine gender^ i. 8 ri, preterite ; how to find the present, i. 323 rim, perfect in ; taken for the future, ii. 107 rimus, termination of the future ; its quantity, ii. 316 rip, of the third conjugation ; its prete- rite and supine, ii. 211 ris, termination of the subjunctive ; its quantity, ii. 343 ritis, termination of the future ; its quantity, ii. 316 rivers, of what gender, i. 12, 13 TO, of the third conjugation ; its prete- rite and supine, i. '■ZQS Romans, particular observations on their names, &c., ii. 226, &c.; on their pronunciation of the Latin, i. 116. ii. 353. 361 ; of their arithmetical characters and mode of reckoning, ii. 233 rs, termination of the third declension ; its genitive, i. 87 rus, particij)les in ; the tense they ex- press, ii. 112. 137; their agree- ment with the substantive, ii. 112 R. R, changed into L, D, S, ii. 266 ; into S, ii. 176; into D, ii. 284; omit- ted in words, ii. 284 r, preceded by a consonant, renders the preceding vowel doubtful, ii. 301 r, final ; its declension, i. 74; its quan- tity, ii. 338 re, its quantity in composition, ii. 305 reason, the, of a thing; in what case it is put, ii. 70 receiving, verbs of; their government, ii. (i7 lelative, its natnre, ii. 92; how itagrces with the substantive, ii. 4; with the antecedent understood, ii. 172. 186; jdins the preposition to which it belongs, ii. 148; put for a reci- procal pronoun, ii. 75 relatives, of quantity or quality; their agreement with the substantive, ii. 7 S, its pronunciation, ii. 276; its affinity with T, ii. 270; with R, ii. 271. 284; with D, ihid. ; added, iZiirf. ; suppresseil in some words, ibid,; formerly an elision, ii. 345. 375 ; taken for/, ii. 95 J, final; its quantity, ii 338; its gen- der with another consonant, i. 49; quantity of its increase, ii. 324 Sapphic, verse ; particulars of, ii. 398 S. C, what they signified with the Ro- mans, ii. 290 scazon, verse; particulars of, ii. 393 SCO, of the third conjugation; its pre- terite and . university of Camornia WON-pNEWABLE DUE 2 WKS FROM DATE kcEIVED Fori ^K ^. i«i^^^^ i'fcl'-snB' •.,^MO(r^.. fVr-^- \im^S9 I u